Orange County Utilities Master Wastewater Pump Stations ...

ORANGE COUNTY UTILITIES MASTER WASTEWATER PUMP STATIONS

HUGGINS PUMP STATION #3006 – REHABILITATION

DOCUMENTS AND

SPECIFICATIONS

Bid Issue

Prepared By: BLACK & VEATCH CORPORATION

Orlando, FL 32801

B&V Project No. 147929 December 2011

This page was left blank intentionally

Orange County Utilities Master Wastewater Pump Stations

Huggins Pump Station #3006 – Rehabilitation

Table of Contents

Subject Pages

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue (Master Pump Station Improvements) TOC-1 October 2011 (Group 4A2)

SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01015 Project Requirements 1 : 9 01025 Measurement and Payment 1: 2 01060 Permits and Regulatory Requirements 1 : 2 01070 Abbreviations of Terms and Organizations 1 : 4 01300 Submittals 1 : 5 01310 Construction Scheduling 1 : 3 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 1 : 1 01380 Construction Photographs 1 : 1 01400 Quality Control 1 : 2 01500 Temporary Facilities 1 : 8 01516 Collection System Bypass 1 : 3 01610 General Equipment Stipulations 1 : 4 01612 Shipping 1 : 1 01614 Handling and Storage 1 : 2 01620 Equipment Schedule 1 : 1 01630 Pipeline Schedule 1 : 2 01650 Startup Requirements 1 : 3 01720 Project Record Documents & Samples 1 : 10 DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK 02050 Equipment, Piping & Materials Demolition 1 : 4 02200 Earthwork 1 : 12 02202 Trenching and Backfilling 1 : 13 02605 Sewer Manholes & Wetwells 1 : 6 02628 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe 1 : 2 02630 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 1 : 4 02630- S01 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe Schedule 1 : 1 02631 Cured-In-Place Lining of Gravity Mains 1 : 11



Table of Contents

Subject Pages


02675 Cleaning and Disinfection of Potable Water Lines 1 : 4 02702 Sewer Pipe Installation and Testing 1 : 4 02704 Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing 1 : 4 02810 Sodding 1 : 5 02825 Ornamental Swing Gates 1 : 3 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03301 Concrete 1 : 9 03430 Structural Precast Concrete 1: 8 03600 Grout 1 : 2 03700 Concrete Repair 1 : 7 03710 Concrete Crack Repair 1 : 4 DIVISION 4 – MASONRY - Not Used DIVISION 5 – METALS 05550 Anchorage In Concrete and Masonry 1 : 5 DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS – Not Used DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07600 Sheet Metal 1 : 3 07900 Caulking 1 : 3 DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08305 Access Hatches 1 : 2 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09940 Protective Coatings 1 : 15



Table of Contents

Subject Pages


DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10990 Miscellaneous Specialties 1 : 2 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11060 Equipment Installation 1 : 4 11150 Submersible Pumps 1 : 10 11910 Engine-Generators 1 : 15 11911 Removal of Existing Engine-Generator 1 : 1 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – Not Used DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13214 Aboveground Fuel Storage Tanks 1 : 10 13500 Instrumentation and Control System 1 : 12 13500A Instrument Device Schedule 1 : 1 13500B Appendix PLC Input/Output Listing 1 : 2 13990 Removal of Aboveground and Underground Fuel

Storage Tanks 1 : 4

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS – Not Used DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15010 Valve Installation 1 : 3 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation 1 : 11 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and

Methods 1 : 6

15060 Miscellaneous Piping and Pipe Accessories 1 : 2 15061 Ductile Iron Pipe 1 : 15 15061- S01 Ductile Iron Pipe Schedule 1 : 1 15064 Stainless Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories 1 : 4 15065 Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories 1 : 5



Table of Contents

Subject Pages


15066 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe (Air Service) 1 : 7 15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and

Accessories 1 : 3

15091 Miscellaneous Ball Valves 1 : 4 15093 Check Valves 1 : 4 15093- S01 Check Valves Schedule 1 : 1 15094 Backflow Preventers 1 : 3 15094- S01 Backflow Preventer Schedule 1 : 1 15102 Eccentric Plug Valves 1 : 5 15102- S01 Eccentric Plug Valves Schedule Manual Actuators 1 : 3 15104 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves 1 : 3 15108 Air Release Valves 1 : 2 15108- S01 Air Release Valves Schedule 1 : 2 15130 Pressure Gauges 1 : 2 15140 Pipe Supports 1 : 9 15180 Valve and Gate Actuators 1 : 10 15400 Plumbing 1 : 9 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16050 Electrical 1 : 26 16100 Electrical Equipment Installation 1 : 2 16220 General Purpose Induction Motors 1 : 7 16491 Automatic Transfer Switch 1 : 7 16670 Lightning Protection Systems 1 : 3

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue (Master Pump Station Improvements) TOC-5 August 2011 (Group 4A2)

1-01300 Submittal Identification & Contractor's Approval Statement

01300-5

2-01300 Submittal Identification & Contractor's Approval Statement

01300-5

1-02200 Protective System Design Certificate 02200-12 1-02202 Embedments for Conduits 02202-13 2-02202

Protective System Design Certificate

02202-13

1-09940 Coating System Data Sheet 09940-15 2-09940 Coating System Data Sheet 09940-15

1-13500 Instrument Calibration Report 13500-12

1-15140(A) Hangers and Supports 15140-9 1-15140(B) Hangers and Supports 15140-9 1-16050 600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power

Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW-2) 16050-26

2-16050 600 Volt, Single Pair Shielded Instrument Cable (SINGLE-PAIR-SH-INSTR)

16050-26

3-16050 600 Volt, Single Triad Shielded Instrument Cable (600-SINGLE-TRIAD-SH-INSTR)

16050-26

4-16050 600 Volt, Multiple Pair and/or Triad Shielded Instrument Cable (600-MULTI-PAIRS-TRIADS-SH-INSTR)

16050-26

5-16050 600 Volt, Multiconductor 14 AWG (2.5mm2) Control Cable (600-MULTI-THHN-THWN)

16050-26

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue (Master Pump Station Improvements) 01015-A October 2011 (Group 4A2)

Section 01015

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

Section 01015 - PROJECT REQUIREMENTS - LIST OF SUBJECTS

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK

2. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

3. WORK BY PUBLIC UTILITIES

4. OFFSITE STORAGE

5. APPROVED PRODUCTS, SUBSTITUES AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS

6. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

7. SALVAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

8. LAND FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

9. EASEMENTS

9.01. On Private Property

9.02. Work Within Highway

10. OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

11. NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES

12. LINES AND GRADES

13. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES

14. UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS

15. CUTTING AND PATCHING

16. ASBESTOS REMOVAL

16.01. Subcontractor's Qualifications

16.02. Abatement Methods

17. CLEANING UP

18. APPLICABLE CODES

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue (Master Pump Station Improvements) 01015-B October 2011 (Group 4A2)

19. REFERENCE STANDARDS

20. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

21. PROGRESS MEETINGS

22. SITE ADMINISTRATION

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue (Master Pump Station Improvements) 01015-1 October 2011 (Group 4A2)

Section 01015

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

1. GENERAL DE SCRIPTION OF WORK. T he W ork t o be pe rformed unde r t hese Contract Documents is generally described as follows:

PS 3006 – Huggins

Demolish e xisting d ry pit p ump in stallation a nd r eplace w ith n ew s ubmersible pump t ype i nstallation. E xisting one -story s uperstructure a nd i ntermediate s lab will b e d emolished a nd d ry p it w ill b e f illed with s oil to g round level. N ew precast wetwell will be built on existing site. Specific improvements will include:

1. New submersible constant speed pumps in single wetwell 2. New influent and force main piping 3. Discharge valves and flowmeter located above grade 4. New engine generator and fuel tank for emergency power 5. New electrical power equipment 6. New instrumentation systems 7. New chain link fence and gate

2. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT. Both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) uni ts of measurement are specified herein; the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern. 3. WORK BY PUBLIC UTILITIES. 4. OFFSITE STORAGE. Offsite storage arrangements shall be approved by Owner for all materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work but included in Applications for Payment. Such offsite s torage arrangements shall be presented in writing and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Offsite storage facilities shall be accessible to Owner and Engineer. 5. APPROVED PRODUCTS, SUBSTITUTES AND "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS. Approved product materials and eq uipment manufacturers h ave been identified in t he Specifications. If they are not l isted, approved products l isted i n t he O range C ounty Utilities S tandards a nd C onstruction S pecifications M anual s hall be us ed. W henever there i s a c onflict i n t he l ist of a pproved pr oducts l isted i n the S pecifications a nd t he current edition of O range C ounty U tilities S tandards a nd Construction S pecifications Manual, the more stringent of the two standards will apply. Whenever a m aterial o r ar ticle i s s pecified o r d escribed b y u sing t he n ame o f a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specified item


shall be understood as establishing the type, function, and quality desired. R equests for review o f equivalency will n ot b e accepted from an yone ex cept Contractor, and s uch requests w ill not be c onsidered unt il a fter t he C ontract ha s be en awarded. O ther manufacturers' products may be accepted, provided sufficient information is submitted to allow Engineer to de termine t hat t he pr oducts p roposed a re e quivalent t o t hose na med and the product complies with Orange County List of Approved Products. Such items shall be submitted for review by the procedure set forth in the Submittals section. 6. PREPARATION F OR S HIPMENT. A ll materials s hall b e s uitably p ackaged to facilitate ha ndling a nd protect a gainst da mage dur ing t ransit a nd s torage. P ainted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Owner. Each item, package, or bundle of material shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. 7. SALVAGE O F MATERIALS AND E QUIPMENT. E xisting m aterials an d equipment r emoved and no t r eused a s a pa rt of t he W ork shall b ecome Contractor's property, except the items to be salvaged which shall remain Owner's property. Contractor shall carefully remove, i n a m anner t o p revent d amage, all m aterials and equipment specified or indicated to be salvaged and reused or to remain the property of Owner. Contractor shall s tore an d p rotect s alvaged i tems specified o r i ndicated t o b e reused in the Work. Salvaged i tems not t o b e r eused i n t he W ork, but to r emain Owner's pr operty s hall be delivered by Contractor in g ood c ondition t o Owner at location i ndicated on t he drawings. Any items specified or indicated to be salvaged which are damaged in removal, storage, or handling through carelessness or improper procedures shall be replaced by Contractor in kind or with new items. Contractor may furnish and install new items instead of those specified or indicated to be salvaged and r eused, i n w hich cas e s uch r emoved i tems w ill b ecome Contractor's property. Existing materials and equipment removed by Contractor shall not be reused in the Work, except where so specified or indicated. 8. LAND FOR C ONSTRUCTION P URPOSES. Contractor will b e p ermitted to u se available land belonging to Owner or identified as Temporary Construction Easement, on or near the Site, for construction purposes and for storage of materials and equipment.


The locations and extent of the areas so used shall be as described in the legal description below. Contractor shall immediately move stored materials or equipment if any occasion arises, as determined b y Owner, r equiring access t o t he s torage area. M aterials o r equipment shall not be placed on the property of Owner until Owner has agreed to the location to be used for storage.

9. EASEMENTS. The easements, temporary construction easements as indicated on the drawings and rights-of-way for the pipelines will be provided by Owner. Contractor shall confine its c onstruction o perations w ithin th e limits indicated o n the D rawings. Contractor shall us e due c are i n pl acing c onstruction t ools, e quipment, e xcavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies in order to avoid damage to property and interference with traffic. 9.01. On P rivate P roperty. E asements a cross pr ivate pr operty a re i ndicated on t he Drawings. Contractor shall set stakes to mark the boundaries of construction easements across private property. Contractor shall furnish, without charge, competent persons and


such t ools, s takes, an d o ther m aterials as Engineer may r equire i n staking out t he boundaries of c onstruction e asements. Contractor will not be required to pr ovide a n instrument pe rson. The s takes s hall b e p rotected a nd m aintained unt il completion of construction and cleanup. Contractor shall not e nter a ny p rivate pr operty outside t he de signated c onstruction easement boundaries without written permission from the owner of the property. 9.02. Work Within Highway. Permits shall be obtained by Owner. All Work performed and a ll ope rations of Contractor, its employees, or S ubcontractors w ithin th e limits o f highway r ights-of-way s hall be i n c onformity with t he r equirements a nd be unde r t he control ( through Owner) of t he highway a uthority owning, o r ha ving j urisdiction ove r and control of, the right-of-way in each case. 10. OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES. The existing facilities must be kept in continuous ope ration t hroughout t he c onstruction pe riod. N o i nterruption will b e permitted which adversely affects the degree of service provided. Provided permission is obtained from Owner in advance, portions of the existing facilities may be taken out of service for short periods corresponding with periods of minimum service demands. Contractor shall p rovide te mporary facilities a nd ma ke te mporary m odifications a s necessary to keep the existing facilities in operation during the construction period. Bypass pum ping pr ocedures s hall be i n a ccordance with S ection 1516 of t he Specifications an d with O range C ounty Utilities S tandard a nd C onstruction Specifications Manual “Section 3312” for Collection System Bypass. In case of conflict, the more stringent of the two standards shall apply. 11. NOTICES TO OW NERS AND A UTHORITIES. Contractor shall, as provided in the General Conditions, notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access to property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, Contractor shall give not ices sufficiently in advance to enable t he a ffected pe rsons t o pr ovide f or t heir ne eds. N otices s hall c onform t o a ny applicable l ocal or dinance a nd, w hether de livered or ally or i n w riting, s hall i nclude appropriate i nformation c oncerning t he i nterruption a nd i nstructions o n how t o l imit inconvenience caused thereby. Utilities and other concerned agencies shall be notified at least 24 hou rs prior to cutting or c losing s treets or other t raffic a reas or excavating ne ar underground utilities or pole lines. 12. LINES AND GRADES. All Work shall be done to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Drawings.


Basic hor izontal a nd ve rtical c ontrol poi nts (benchmarks) ha ve be en d esignated on t he drawings to b e us ed a s da tums f or t he W ork. All a dditional s urvey, l ayout, a nd measurement work shall be performed by Contractor as a part of the Work. Contractor shall p rovide a n experienced i nstrument pe rson, c ompetent a ssistants, a nd such i nstruments, t ools, s takes, a nd ot her m aterials r equired to complete t he s urvey, layout, and measurement work. In addition, Contractor shall furnish competent persons and such tools, s takes, and other materials as required in establishing control points, in establishing c onstruction e asement bound aries, or i n checking s urvey, l ayout, and measurement work performed by Contractor. Contractor shall remove and reconstruct work which is improperly located. 13. CONNECTIONS TO E XISTING F ACILITIES. Unless ot herwise s pecified or indicated, Contractor shall make all necessary connections to existing facilities, including structures, drain lines, and utilities such as water, sewer, gas, telephone, and electric. In each case, Contractor shall receive permission from Owner or the owning utility prior to undertaking connections. Contractor shall protect facilities against deleterious substances and damage. Connections t o e xisting f acilities w hich a re i n service s hall be t horoughly pl anned i n advance, and all required equipment, materials, and labor shall be on hand at the time of undertaking t he c onnections. W ork s hall pr oceed c ontinuously ( around t he c lock) i f necessary to complete connections in the minimum t ime. O peration of valves or other appurtenances on e xisting ut ilities, w hen r equired, s hall be b y or unde r t he direct supervision of the owning utility. 14. UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS. During unfavorable weather, wet gr ound, or ot her u nsuitable c onstruction c onditions, Contractor shall c onfine its operations to work which will not be affected adversely by such conditions. No portion of t he W ork s hall be c onstructed unde r conditions w hich w ould a ffect a dversely t he quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by Contractor to perform the Work in a proper and satisfactory manner. 15. CUTTING AND PATCHING. As provided in General Conditions, Contractor shall perform a ll c utting a nd pa tching r equired f or t he W ork a nd a s m ay b e ne cessary i n connection with uncovering Work for inspection or for the correction of defective Work. Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for and in connection with the Work, including but not limited to the following:

Removal of improperly timed Work.

Removal of samples of installed materials for testing.

Alteration of existing facilities.


Installation of new Work in existing facilities.

Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, supports, and protective devices necessary to s afeguard all W ork and existing f acilities during c utting, patching and ex cavating operations. Contractor shall not undertake any cutting or demolition which may affect the structural stability of the Work or existing facilities. Materials shall be cut and removed to the extent indicated on the Drawings or as required to complete the Work. Materials shall be removed in a careful manner, with no damage to a djacent f acilities o r materials. Materials w hich ar e n ot s alvable s hall b e r emoved from the site by Contractor. All Work and existing facilities affected by cutting operations shall be restored with new materials, o r w ith s alvaged ma terials a cceptable to Engineer, t o obt ain a f inished installation with the strength, appearance, and functional capacity required. If necessary, entire surfaces shall be patched and refinished. 16. ASBESTOS A BATEMENT. If, du ring the pr ogress of t he W ork, s uspected asbestos-containing pr oducts a re i dentified, Contractor shall s top w ork i n t he a ffected area an d en gage an as bestos ab atement S ubcontractor t o v erify t he m aterials an d, i f necessary, encapsulate, enclose, or remove and dispose of all asbestos in accordance with current regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency and the U. S. Department of Labor - Occupational S afety and H ealth A dministration, t he s tate asbestos r egulating agency, and a ny l ocal government a gency. Payment f or s uch w ork w ill be m ade b y Change Order. 16.01. Subcontractor's Qualifications. The Subcontractor for asbestos abatement shall be regularly engaged in this type of activity and shall be familiar with the regulations which govern this work. The Subcontractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of Owner that it h as s uccessfully co mpleted at l east t hree as bestos ab atement p rojects, t hat i t h as t he necessary staff and equipment to perform the work, and that i t has an approved site for disposal of the asbestos. Liability insurance covering the asbestos abatement work shall be provided as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. 16.02. Abatement Methods. The asbestos abatement Subcontractor shall submit a work plan of i ts pr oposed a batement pr ocedure t o Owner before b eginning work a nd s hall certify that the methods are in full compliance with the governing regulations. The work plan shall cover a ll aspects of the abatement, including health and safety of employees and b uilding o ccupants, h ygiene f acilities, em ployee cer tification, cl earance criteria, transportation a nd di sposal, e nclosure t echniques, a nd ot her t echniques appropriate f or the proposed work. 17. CLEANING UP . Contractor shall k eep th e p remises f ree a t all time s f rom accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. Contractor shall provide adequate t rash receptacles about the Site and shall promptly empty the containers when filled.


Construction materials, such as concrete forms and scaffolding, shall be neatly stacked by Contractor when not i n us e. Contractor shall pr omptly r emove s plattered c oncrete, asphalt, oi l, p aint, c orrosive l iquids, a nd c leaning s olutions f rom s urfaces t o pr event marring or other damage. Volatile wastes shall be properly stored in covered metal containers and removed daily. Wastes shall not be buried or burned on the Site or disposed of into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways. A ll wastes shall be removed from the Site and disposed of in a manner complying with local ordinances and antipollution laws. Adequate c leanup w ill be a c ondition f or r ecommendation of pr ogress pa yment applications. 18. APPLICABLE CODES. References in the Contract Documents to local codes mean the following:

• Florida Building Code, latest version • All ordinances of Orange County, Florida • Florida Department of Environmental Protection • Southwest Florida Water Management District • Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OHSA) Standards

Manual Other standard codes which apply to the Work are designated in the Specifications. 19. REFERENCE S TANDARDS. R eference t o s tandards, s pecifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest s tandard specification, manual, code, or l aws or r egulations in ef fect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the effective date of the Contract or Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a S upplier, s hall be e ffective t o c hange t he dut ies or r esponsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of t heir subcontractors, consultants, a gents, o r employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or i nstruction be e ffective t o a ssign t o Owner, Engineer, or a ny o f Engineer's CONSULTANTS, agents, or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 20. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE. Prior to the commencement of Work at the Site, a preconstruction conference will be held at a mutually agreed time and place. The conference shall be attended by:


Contractor and its superintendent.

Principal Subcontractors.

Representatives of principal Suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate.

Engineer Representative.

Representatives of Owner.

Government representatives as appropriate.

Others as requested by Contractor, Owner, or Engineer. Unless pr eviously s ubmitted t o Owner Contractor shall b ring t o t he co nference a preliminary schedule for each of the following:

Progress Schedule.

Procurement Schedule.

Schedule of Values for progress payment purposes.

Schedule of Shop Drawings and other submittals. The pur pose of t he c onference i s t o d esignate responsible pe rsonnel a nd e stablish a working r elationship. Matters r equiring c oordination w ill be d iscussed a nd pr ocedures for handling such matters established. The agenda will include:

Contractor's preliminary schedules.

Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals.

Processing Applications for Payment.

Maintaining record documents.

Critical Work sequencing.

Field decisions and Change Orders.

Use of premises, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner's needs.

Major equipment deliveries and priorities.


Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid. Engineer will p reside at t he co nference an d w ill ar range f or k eeping t he m inutes an d distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. 21. PROGRESS M EETINGS. Contractor shall s chedule a nd hol d r egular pr ogress meetings at le ast mo nthly a nd at o ther time s a s r equested b y Owner, or r equired b y progress of t he W ork. Contractor, Engineer, and a ll S ubcontractors a ctive on t he S ite shall be represented at each meeting. Contractor may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its Suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcontractors. Contractor shall p reside a t th e me etings. M eeting min utes s hall be pr epared and distributed by Contractor. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the W ork, m aintain c oordination of e fforts, di scuss c hanges i n s cheduling, and r esolve other problems which may develop. 22. SITE ADMINISTRATION. Contractor shall be responsible for all areas of the Site used by i t and b y all Subcontractors in the performance of the Work. Contractor shall exert full control over the actions of all employees and other persons with respect to the use and preservation of property and existing facilities, except such controls as may be specifically reserved to Owner or others. Contractor shall have the right to exclude from the Site all persons who have no pur pose related to the Work or its inspection, and may require all pe rsons on t he S ite ( except Owner's em ployees) t o o bserve t he s ame regulations as Contractor requires of its employees.

End of Section


Section 01025

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1. GENERAL. The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation provided in the Proposal and the Contract as full payment for furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment, for performing all operations necessary to complete the work under the Contract, and also in full payment for all loss or damages arising from the nature of work, or from any discrepancy between the actual quantities of work and quantities herein estimated by the Engineer, or from the action of the elements or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the prosecution of the work until the final acceptance by the County.

The prices stated in the proposal include all costs and expenses for taxes, labor, equipment, materials, commissions, transportation charges and expenses, patent fees and royalties, labor for handling materials during inspection, together with any and all other costs and expenses for performing and completing the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The basis of payment for an item at the unit price shown in the proposal shall be in accordance with the description of that item in this Section.

The Contractor’s attention is again called to the fact that the quotations for the various items of work are intended to establish a total price for completing the work in its entirety. Should the Contractor feel that the cost for any item of work has not been established by the Bid Form or Payment Items, he shall include the cost for that work in some other applicable bid item, so that his proposal for the project does reflect his total price for completing the work in its entirety.

2. MEASUREMENT. The quantities for payment under this Contract shall be determined by actual measurement of the completed items, in place, ready for service and accepted by the County, in accordance with the applicable method of measurement therefore contained herein.

3. PAYMENT ITEMS. Items are as enumerated on the bid form.

3.01. Item 1 – Huggins Pump Station #3006 Rehabilitation.

a. Payment for all the other work associated with the construction of the Huggins

Pump Station #3006 Rehabilitation will be made at the Contract lump sum price, based upon the approved schedule of values.

b. This item shall include all materials, equipment, labor, testing, permits,

appurtenances, and work required for the Huggins Pump Station #3006 Rehabilitation including all work and costs not listed elsewhere.

c. This item shall include costs for General Requirements, Mobilization, and

Demobilization. Measurement for various items covered under General Requirements, Mobilization and Demobilization will not be made for payment, and all items shall be included in the lump sum price.


d. Payment for General Requirements shall include all Insurance requirement costs, the cost of bonds, and all Administrative costs. This item will be paid upon each payment request made by the Contractor. The Contractor shall attach with the pay request invoices to substantiate that appropriate insurance and bonds have been obtained by the Contractor.

e. Payment for Mobilization/Demobilization will be made at the Contract lump sum

price for the item, which price and payment shall be full compensation for the Work consisting of the preparatory Work and operations in mobilizing for beginning Work on the Contract, including, but not limited to, furnishing those supplies and incidentals to the project site, preparation of submittals, and for the establishment of temporary offices and buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, project signs, field surveys, sanitary and other facilities required by these specifications, and State and local laws and regulations. The costs of bonds and any required insurance and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the start of the work, excluding the cost of construction materials, shall also be included. This Work also consist of the general project management of the Work including, but not limited to, field supervision and office management, as well as other incidental cost for management of the Work during the duration of the Contract. This Work also includes maintenance of the field offices for the duration of the Contract. The Work specified in this item also consists of demobilization or the operations normally involved in ending Work on the project including, but not limited to, termination and removal of temporary utility service and field offices; demolition and removal of temporary structures and facilities; restoration of Contractor storage areas; disposal of trash and rubbish, and any other post-construction work necessary for the proper conclusion of the Work. This pay item may not exceed 5% of the Total Base Bid amount.

f. Payment for Indemnification: In consideration of the Contractor’s Indemnity Agreement as set out in the Contract Documents, County specifically agrees to give the Contractor $100.00 and other good and valuable consideration, receipt of which is acknowledged upon signing of the Agreement.

End of Section

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue

(Master Pump Station Improvements) 01060-1 October 2011

(Group 4A2)

Section 01060

PERMITS AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS: N/A

1.02 REGULATORY AGENCIES:

A. General: The Contractor shall;

a. Obtain and pay for all permits and licenses as provided for in the General

Conditions, except as otherwise specified herein.

b. Schedule all inspections and obtain all written approvals of the agencies required

by the permits and licenses.

c. Comply with all conditions specified in each of the permits and licenses.

d. A copy of the permits obtained by the County will be furnished to the Contractor

upon request.

1.03 PERMITS OBTAINED BY THE COUNTY:

A. The County will apply for and pay for the following permits:

a. The initial Orange County Building Permit.

b. FDEP Wastewater Collection System for the on-site lift station.

c. FDEP Permit for fuel storage tank and generator.

1.04 PERMITS OBTAINED BY CONTRACTOR:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the following permits:

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the Orange County Building

Permits, and shall pay for all permits subsequent to the initial Building Permit

as required for various building trades such as mechanical, electrical, plumbing,

roofing, etc.

b. The Contractor shall, within 14 days of the date of the Notice-to-Proceed,

prepare the application and pay fees associated with a Notice of Intent (NOI) to

Use Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small



(Group 4A2)

Construction Activities and the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP)

for compliance with the USEPA’s General Permit for construction activities.

c. The Contractor shall apply and pay for the SFWMD Dewatering Permit.

d. The Contractor shall apply and pay for the permits required for the temporary

construction trailers.

e. All other permits required for Contractor's operations or required elsewhere in

Contract Documents and not included herein. Furnish three copies of permits

to the Owner prior to performance of work authorized by permits.

f. Contractor will be responsible for obtaining extensions to permits obtained by

the Owner if construction authorized by permits has not been completed by

expiration date noted on these permits.

g. Permits may require that a representative of permitting agency be present at site

during construction or prior to covering up of activity authorized by permit.

Contractor will be responsible for notifying permitting agency in compliance

with requirements of such permits.

h. Contractor shall include time to obtain permits in his construction schedule.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS: N/A

PART 3 - EXECUTION: N/A

End of Section


Section 01070

ABBREVIATIONS OF TERMS AND ORGANIZATIONS 1. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. Abbreviations for standards and organizations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:

AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies AFBMA Antifriction Bearing Manufacturers Association AFPA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute AREMA American Railway Engineers and Maintenance-of-Way

Association ARI American Refrigeration Institute ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-

Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AVATI See RTI AWG American Wire Gage AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association


BIA Brick Institute of America (formerly SCPI) CDA Copper Development Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America CRA California Redwood Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) DHI Door and Hardware Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association EEI Edison Electric Institute EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCC Federal Communications Commission FCI Fluid Controls Institute Fed Spec Federal Specification FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FHWA Federal Highway Administration FIA Factory Insurance Association FM Factory Mutual FSA Fluid Sealing Association FTI Facing Tile Institute HEI Heat Exchange Institute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association HTI Hand Tools Institute I-B-R Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IBC International Building Code IES Illuminating Engineering Society IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society MHI Materials Handling Institute MIL Military Specification MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fitting Industry NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers


NACE NACE International NBHA National Builders Hardware Association NBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors NBS See NIST NCSPA National Corrugated Steel Pipe Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMI National Elevator Manufacturing Industry NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly NBS) NLA National Lime Association NPC National Plumbing Code NPT National Pipe Thread NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSC National Safety Council NSF NSF International (formerly National Sanitation Foundation) NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PS Product Standard RIS Redwood Inspection Service RTI Resilient Tile Institute (formerly AVATI) SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SCPRF Structural Clay Products Research Foundation SDI Steel Door Institute SFPA Southern Forest Products Association SI Systéme International des Unités (International System of

Units) SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association SPFA Steel Plate Fabricators Association SPI Society of the Plastics Industry SPTA Southern Pressure Treaters Association SSI Scaffolding and Shoring Institute SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings UL Underwriters' Laboratories


USBR U.S. Bureau of Reclamation WEF Water Environment Federation

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01300

SUBMITTALS

1. SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA.

1.01. General. Shop Drawings and engineering data (submittals) covering all equipment and all

fabricated components and building materials which will become a permanent part of the Work

under this Contract shall be submitted to Engineer for review, as required. Submittals shall

verify compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall include drawings and descriptive

information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and the operation of

component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required;

the performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with

other materials and equipment.

Each submittal shall cover items from only one section of the specification unless the item

consists of components from several sources. Contractor shall submit a complete initial

submittal including all components. When an item consists of components from several sources,

Contractor's initial submittal shall be complete including all components.

All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be approved by Contractor and clearly identified with

the name and number of this Contract, Contractor's name, and references to applicable

specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each copy of all submittals, regardless of

origin, shall be stamped or affixed with an approval statement of Contractor. Each submittal

shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted,

applicable items shall be clearly identified and inapplicable data crossed out. The current

revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data.

Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness of each submittal. Contractor's stamp

or affixed approval statement of a submittal, per Figure 01300-1, is a representation to Owner

and Engineer that Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all

quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data,

and that Contractor has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the

Work and the Contract Documents. Submittals without Contractor’s approval statement will be

returned without review.

All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified as deviations on each submittal

and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal using Figure 01300-2. Such submittals

shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by

Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and

all required piping and wiring diagrams. The Contractor shall Mark his corrections in green ink.

For hard copy submittals six copies of each drawing and the necessary data shall be submitted to

Engineer. Engineer will return three marked copies (or one marked reproducible copy) to

Contractor. Facsimile (fax) or electronic copies will not be acceptable. Engineer will not accept

submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct

sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades.



(Group 4A2)

1.02. Engineer's Review of Submittals. Engineer's review of submittals covers only general

conformity to the Drawings and Specifications, external connections, and dimensions that affect

the layout; it does not indicate thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the

material, equipment, device, or item covered. Engineer's review shall not relieve Contractor of

sole responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations in the drawings and data, nor of

Contractor's sole responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.

Engineer's submittal review period shall be 30 consecutive calendar days and shall commence on

the first calendar day following receipt of the submittal or resubmittal in Engineer's office. The

time required to mail the submittal or resubmittal back to Contractor shall not be considered a

part of the submittal review period.

When the drawings and data are returned with review status "NOT ACCEPTABLE" or

"RETURNED FOR CORRECTION", the corrections shall be made as instructed by Engineer.

Six corrected copies shall be resubmitted. Resubmittals by facsimile or e-mail will not be

accepted. When the drawings and data are returned with review status "EXCEPTIONS

NOTED", "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED", or "RECORD COPY", no additional copies need be

furnished unless specifically requested by Engineer.

1.03. Resubmittal of Drawings and Data. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the

completeness of each resubmittal. Contractor shall verify that all corrected data and additional

information previously requested by Engineer are provided on the resubmittal.

When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall direct specific attention to all revisions

in writing and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for by Engineer on

previous submittals. Requirements specified for initial submittals shall also apply to

resubmittals. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B,

etc.) or a unique identification that indicates the initial submittal and correct sequence of each

resubmittal.

If more than one resubmittal is required because of failure of Contractor to provide all previously

requested corrected data or additional information, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the

charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmittals. This does not include initial

submittal data such as shop tests and field tests that are submitted after initial submittal.

Resubmittals shall be made within 60 days of the date of the letter returning the material to be

modified or corrected, unless within 30 days Contractor submits an acceptable request for an

extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed

within that time.

The need for more than one resubmittal, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of

submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Times unless delay of the

Work is the direct result of a change in the Work authorized by a Change Order or failure of

Engineer to review and return any submittal to Contractor within the specified review period.

1.04. Color Selection. Contractor shall submit samples of colors and finishes for all accepted

products before Engineer will coordinate the selection of colors and finishes with Owner.

Engineer will prepare a schedule of finishes that include the colors and finishes selected for both

manufactured products and for surfaces to be field painted or finished and will furnish this



(Group 4A2)

schedule to Contractor within 60 days after the date of acceptance of the last color or finish

sample.

2. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and

maintenance information shall be supplied for all equipment requiring maintenance or other

attention. The equipment Supplier shall prepare a project specific operation and maintenance

manual for each type of equipment indicated in the individual equipment sections or the

equipment schedule.

Parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for other equipment not

listed in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule.

Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Table of Contents and Index.

b. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

c. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

d. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operation, regulation and

control, shutdown, and emergency conditions.

e. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

f. Guide to troubleshooting.

g. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

h. Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring

diagrams.

i. Test data and performance curves, where applicable.

The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists

packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by

Contractor.

Three preliminary hard copies of each manual shall be submitted to Engineer prior to the date of

shipment of the equipment. When the O&M manuals are returned with the review status

"RETURNED FOR CORRECTION", the corrections shall be made as instructed by the

Engineer, and two copies of the corrected portion(s) and one complete corrected copy of the

O&M manual returned to the Engineer. After review by Engineer is complete five hard copies

and one electronic copy of each final operation and maintenance manual shall be prepared and

delivered to Engineer not later than 30 days prior to placing the equipment in operation. One

electronic copy of the final O&M Manual shall be submitted on CD-ROM. When corrections

are required, a corrected version of the five hard copies and one electronic copy shall be

resubmitted.



(Group 4A2)

All material shall be marked with project identification, and inapplicable information shall be

marked out or deleted.

Shipment of equipment will not be considered complete until all required manuals and data have

been received.

2.01. Hard Copy Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Hard copies submitted for preliminary

review shall be temporarily bound in heavy paper covers bearing suitable identification. All

manuals and other data shall be printed on heavy, first quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch paper, with

standard three-hole punching. Drawings and diagrams shall be reduced to 8-1/2 x 11 inches or

11 x 17 inches. Where reduction is not practicable, larger drawings shall be folded separately

and placed in envelopes, which are bound into the manuals. Each envelope shall be suitably

identified on the outside. Each volume containing data for three or more items of equipment

shall include a table of contents and index tabs. The final hard copy of each manual shall be

prepared and delivered in substantial, permanent, three-ring or three-post binders with a table of

contents and suitable index tabs.

2.02. Electronic Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Electronic manuals shall be in Adobe

Acrobat’s Portable Document Format (PDF), and shall be prepared at a resolution of 300 dots

per inch (dpi) or greater, depending on document type. Optical Character Recognition (OCR)

capture shall be performed on these documents. OCR settings shall be performed with the

“original image with hidden text” option in Adobe Acrobat Exchange.

When multiple files are required the least number of files possible shall be created. File names

shall be in the format OMXXXXX-YYYZ-V.pdf, where XXXXX is the five digit number

corresponding to the specification section, YYY is a three digit O&M manual number, e.g. 001,

Z is the letter signifying a resubmittal, A, B, C, etc, and V is a number used only when more than

one file is required for an O&M manual.

Documents prepared in PDF format shall be processed as follows:

1. Pages shall be searchable (processed for optical character recognition) and indexed

when multiple files are required.

2. Pages shall be rotated for viewing in proper orientation.

3. A bookmark shall be provided in the navigation frame for each entry in the Table of

Contents.

4. Embedded thumbnails shall be generated for each completed PDF file.

5. The opening view for PDF files shall be as follows:

Initial View: Bookmarks and Page

Page Number: Title Page (usually Page 1)

Magnification: Set to Fit in Window

Page: Single Page

6. Where the bookmark structure is longer than one page the bookmarks shall be collapsed

to show the chapter headings only.

7. When multiple files are required the first file of the series (the parent file) shall list

every major topic in the Table of Contents. The parent file shall also include minor

headings bookmarked based on the Table of Contents. Major headings, whose content

is contained in subsequent files (children) shall be linked to be called from the parent to

the specific location in the child file. The child file shall contain bookmark entries for



(Group 4A2)

both major and minor headings contained in the child file. The first bookmark of any

child file shall link back to the parent file and shall read as follows "Return to the

Equipment Name Table of Contents", e.g. Return to the Polymer Feed System Table of

Contents.

8. Drawings shall be bookmarked individually.

9. Files shall be delivered without security settings to permit editing, insertion and

deletion of material to update the manual provided by the manufacturer.

2.03. Labeling. As a minimum, the following information shall be included on all final O&M

manual materials, including CD-ROM disks, jewel cases, and hard copy manuals:

Equipment name and/or O&M title spelled out in complete words.

Project Name.

City Project/Contract Number.

Specification Section Number. Example: “Section 15500”

Manufacturer’s name.

File Name and Date.

For example:

Backwash Pump Operation and Maintenance Manual

Somewhere Plant Expansion

Project/Contract No. ____

Specification Section 11110

Manufacturer

OM11110-001.pdf, 5/05/07

End of Section

FIGURE 1-01300

SUBMITTAL No. ________

SECTION ______________ Do not combine multiple sections together

unless required by specifications.

(Contractor's Letterhead)

SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION &

CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STATEMENT

DATE: ____________ COPIES ____________ DRAWING SHEET NO.__ _____

Description submittal contents: ___________________________________ _________

Location: _______________________________________________ _____________

Manufacturer_________________________________________ __________________

Subcontractor or Supplier (Optional) _________________________ _______________

REMARKS: ___________________________________________________ ________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________ _______________

CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL

( Construction Company ) has reviewed and coordinated the submitted documentation

and verifies that the equipment and material meet the requirements of the Work and the Contract

Documents. We accept sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities,

dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data contained in

the submittal as required by the Contract Documents.

Deviations: □ None □ Yes (See attached Figure 01300-2 for written description)

Approved By: ____________________ Date: ________________

This approval does not release subcontractor / vendor from the contractual responsibilities.

FIGURE 2-01300

SUBMITTAL No. ________

SECTION ______________ Do not combine multiple sections together

unless required by specifications.

(Contractor's Letterhead)

SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION &

CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STATEMENT

DATE: ____________ COPIES ____________ DRAWING SHEET NO.____ ___

Description submittal contents: ________________________ ____________________

Location: __________________________________________ __________________

Manufacturer__________________________________________________ _________

Subcontractor or Supplier (Optional) _________________________________ _______

DEVIATIONS ________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________



(Group 4A2)

Section 01310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

1. CRITICAL PATH PROGRESS SCHEDULE. A critical path Progress Schedule shall be

submitted by Contractor. The schedule shall consist of an arrow diagram and associated listings,

and shall cover all Work to be done on the Project. The critical path Progress Schedule shall be

submitted within 14 days after the Notice to Proceed. The firm or individual employed by

Contractor to prepare the critical path schedule shall be competent and experienced in critical

path scheduling.

1.01. Arrow Diagram. The arrow diagram shall be sufficiently detailed to indicate such

activities as shop drawing submittal and review, equipment manufacture and delivery,

installation of equipment, concrete pours, and Subcontractors' items of work. Construction

activities of less than 1 day's duration or more than 5 days' duration shall be kept to a minimum.

The arrow diagram shall be prepared so that the final diagram will fit on a drawing of

approximately 30 x 42 inches [750 x 1050 mm]. Each activity on the arrow diagram shall be

labeled with the following information: description, duration, scheduled start date, latest

completion date, and total float. The critical path of activities shall be indicated on the arrow

diagram by a heavy line.

1.02. Listings. Two chronological listings of the information in the arrow diagram shall be

prepared: one for scheduled start dates and one for latest completion dates. Each listing shall

show activity node numbers, description, scheduled start date, duration in workdays, latest

completion date, and total float for each item in the arrow diagram.

1.03. Submittal. The initial critical path schedule and subsequent revisions shall reflect the

actual progress of the Project to within 5 days prior to submittal. Contractor and its

representative who prepared the schedule shall meet with Engineer and Owner to review the

initial schedule and each subsequent revision. The meeting will be held in the office of Owner or

Engineer.

At least 6 copies of the arrow diagram and listings shall be submitted. A revised arrow diagram

and listing shall be prepared and submitted at a minimum frequency of 60 days.

If the initial schedule or any subsequent revision is not acceptable to Owner, the schedule shall

be revised and resubmitted as many times as necessary until the schedule is acceptable.

Acceptance of the schedule will not be unreasonably withheld.

1.04. Shop Drawings Schedule. At the time the initial critical path schedule is submitted, a

schedule shall be submitted of the items of materials and equipment for which Shop Drawings

are required by the Specifications. For each required Shop Drawing, the date shall be given for

intended submission of the drawing to Engineer for review and the date required for its return to

avoid delay in any activity beyond the scheduled start date. Sufficient time shall be allowed for

initial review, correction and resubmission, and final review of all Shop Drawings. In no case

will a schedule be acceptable which allows less than the number of calendar days specified in

Section 01300, Submittals, for Engineer's submittal review.



(Group 4A2)

1.05. Progress Reports. At the end of each month, the node numbers of the activities that have

been completed, with their actual start and completion dates, and a list of the activities on which

Work is currently in progress and the number of working days required to complete each, shall

be submitted to Engineer.

If, at any time during the Project, any activity is not completed by its latest scheduled completion

date, Engineer shall be notified within 5 days of Contractor's plans to reorganize the workforce

to return to the schedule and prevent delays on any other activity. Owner may require

Contractor, at Contractor's expense, to add to its plant, equipment, or construction forces, as well

as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule.

Any Work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be

substantiated with satisfactory evidence.

1.06. Sequence. The following information provides a suggested sequence for construction

operations that must be phased and items that shall be taken into consideration in preparing the

proposed schedule of construction operations. Other sequences proposed by Contractor will be

considered.

1. Demolish existing hydrogen peroxide feed system

2. Demolish existing fuel tank and provide portable fuel tank

3. Build new precast wetwell, discharge piping, and electrical/control panel; build new gravity

influent piping, construct new junction manhole

4. Connect new discharge piping to existing force main with hot tap connection

5. New pump station placed in service

6. Plug invert out pipe in existing junction manhole on Huggins St (west side of station) and

provide bypass pump to new wetwell

7. Plug invert out pipe in existing junction manhole (east side of station) and provide bypass

pump to new wetwell (bypass pump until new gravity piping to new wetwell installed)

8. Demolish existing wetwell top slab and gravity piping between existing junction manholes

and existing wetwell.

9. Install compacted fill in bottom of existing wetwell. Install new manholes in existing

wetwell. Connect existing junction manholes to new manhole.

10. Reline existing junction manholes (east side and west side)

11. Demolish superstructure/dry pit, generator, flow meter vault, discharge piping, and

electrical/control panels

12. Build odor control system, generator and fuel tank, and concrete drive

13. Demolish existing fence and build new block wall, as needed

14. Complete improvements

Contractor shall comply with the following during construction:

• Under no circumstances shall the transfer of wastewater flow in and out of this pump

station site be stopped.

• A generator, portable or permanent, shall be provided and connected at all times during

construction activities to provide back up electrical power. The Contractor shall make all

arrangements with the power company for relocating electrical service, pay all power

company charges and furnish all labor and material required for the electrical service.

• A temporary or permanent SCADA antenna shall be maintained in operation at all times.



(Group 4A2)

• The new pump station shall operate continuously for 72 hours without fail. Bypass

pumping capabilities shall remain on-site until successful completion of the 72 hour test

period.

• After successful operation of the new pump station for 72 hours, all bypass pumping

equipment can be removed from the site.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01320

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

1. GENERAL.

1.01. Units of Measurement. When both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of

measurement are specified herein, the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern.

2. SCHEDULE OF VALUES. After review of the preliminary schedule at the preconstruction

conference, and before submission of the first Application for Payment, Contractor shall prepare

and submit to Engineer a Schedule of Values covering each lump sum item. The Schedule of

Values, showing the value of each kind of work, shall be acceptable to Engineer before any

Application for Payment is prepared.

The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Price. Such items

as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, and plant may be listed separately in the

Schedule of Values, provided the amounts can be substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be

listed as separate items.

The Schedule of Values shall have sufficient detail such that partial completion of separable

items of work can easily be calculated. The Schedule of Values shall have separate lines for

manufacturer's field services, O&M manuals, and performance testing for each item of

equipment requiring such services.

An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor on items of Work

which would be performed first will not be accepted. The Schedule of Values shall be revised

and resubmitted until acceptable to Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only

consent to the Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress

payments, and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item.

3. SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS. Within 30 days after award of contract, Contractor shall

furnish to Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be revised

and resubmitted each time an Application for Payment varies more than 10 percent from the

estimated payment schedule.

4. SURVEY DATA. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in

performing surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for examination

throughout the construction period. All such data shall be submitted to Engineer with the other

documentation required for final acceptance of the Work.

5. LAYOUT DATA. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and

calculations made in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of such data shall be

furnished to the Resident Project Representative for use in checking Contractor's layout as

provided in the project requirements section. All such data considered of value to Owner will be

transmitted to Owner by Engineer with other records upon completion of the Work.

End of Section

(Orange County Utilities) 01380 Bid Issue

(Master Pump Station Improvements) -1- October 2011

(Group 4A2)

Section 01380

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

1. CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS BY CONTRACTOR. Contractor shall be responsible

for the production of construction photographs as provided herein. Engineer shall designate the

subject of each photograph.

Photographs of the entire site, and pertinent features thereof, shall be taken before the

commencement of Work and promptly submitted to Engineer. The same views shall be

rephotographed upon completion of all construction activities and submitted with Contractor's

application for final payment. Additional photographs shall be made each month throughout the

progress of the Work at such times as requested by Engineer, and submitted with Contractor's

application for progress payment.

All photographs shall be color digital, produced by a competent professional photographer.

Contractor shall submit the photographs electronically and two copies of 4 by 5 inch prints.

Digital images shall be compiled on CD and provided with a descriptive index of the images.

Prints shall be mounted on linen with flap for binding or enclosed in clear plastic binders, and

marked with the name and number of the Contract, name of Contractor, description and location

of view, and date photographed.

Engineer will transmit the digital files and one copy of the prints to Owner.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01400

QUALITY CONTROL

1. TESTING SERVICES. All tests to determine compliance with the Contract Documents shall

be performed by an independent commercial testing firm acceptable to Owner. The testing

firm's laboratory shall be staffed with experienced technicians, properly equipped and fully

qualified to perform the tests in accordance with the specified standards.

Testing services provided by Owner are for the sole benefit of Owner; however, test results shall

be available to Contractor. Testing necessary to satisfy Contractor's internal quality control

procedures shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor.

1.01. Testing Services Provided by Contractor. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall

provide all testing services in connection with the following:

Concrete materials and design mixtures.

Masonry units and masonry grout and mortar materials and design mixtures.

Asphaltic concrete materials and design mixtures.

Embedment, fill, and backfill materials.

All other tests and engineering data required for Owner's review of materials

and equipment proposed to be used in the Work.

Contractor shall obtain Owner's acceptance of the testing firm before having services performed,

and shall pay all costs for these testing services.

1.02. Testing Services provided by Owner. Unless otherwise specified, Owner shall provide for

tests made on the following materials and equipment:

Concrete.

Tests of masonry prisms.

Field control test of masonry.

Asphaltic concrete.

Moisture-density and relative density tests on embedment, fill, and backfill

materials.

In-place field density tests on embedments, fills, and backfill .

Other materials and equipment at the discretion of Owner.



(Group 4A2)

Testing, including sampling, will be performed by Owner or the testing firm's laboratory

personnel, in the general manner indicated in the Specifications. Engineer shall determine the

exact time, location, and number of tests, including samples.

Arrangements for delivery of samples and test specimens to the testing firm's laboratory will be

made by Owner. The testing firm's laboratory shall perform all laboratory tests within a

reasonable time consistent with the specified standards and shall furnish a written report of each

test.

Contractor shall furnish all sample materials and cooperate in the testing activities, including

sampling. Contractor shall interrupt the Work when necessary to allow testing, including

sampling, to be performed. Contractor shall have no Claim for an increase in Contract Price or

Contract Times due to such interruption. When testing activities, including sampling, are

performed in the field by Owner or laboratory personnel, Contractor shall furnish personnel and

facilities to assist in the activities.

1.03. Transmittal of Test Reports. Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by

Contractor for Engineer's review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the Work

shall be submitted as specified for Shop Drawings.

The laboratory retained by Owner will furnish copies of a written report of each test to the

Contractor and Engineer.

2. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. Manufacturer’s field services shall be as

specified herein except as specifically specified in the respective equipment sections.

2.01. Services Furnished Under This Contract. An experienced, competent, and authorized

representative of the manufacturer of each item of equipment for which field services are

indicated in the respective equipment section or in the equipment schedule section shall visit the

Site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation.

In each case, the manufacturer's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in

operation. The manufacturer's representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until

all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the

opinion of Engineer.

Each manufacturer's representative shall furnish to Owner, through Engineer, a written report

certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment;

is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been

operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.

All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price.

End of Section


(Master Pump Station Improvements) 01500-a October 2011

(Group 4A2)

Section 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

Section 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES - LIST OF SUBJECTS

1. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

2. OFFICE AT SITE OF WORK

3. WATER

4. POWER

5. TELEPHONE SERVICE

6. SANITARY FACILITIES

7.

7.01.

7.02.

MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

Temporary Bridges

Detours

8. BARRICADES AND LIGHTS

9. FENCES

10. PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY

11. DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY

12. TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

13. SECURITY

14. ACCESS ROADS

15. PARKING

16. NOISE CONTROL

17. DUST CONTROL

18. TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS

19. EROSION CONTROL

20. POLLUTION CONTROL



(Group 4A2)

Section 01500

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT. When both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric)

units of measurement are specified herein, the values expressed in inch-pound units shall

govern.

2. OFFICE AT SITE OF WORK. During the performance of this Contract, Contractor

shall maintain a suitable office at or near the Site which shall be the headquarters of its

representative authorized to receive drawings, instructions, or other communication or

articles. Any communication given to the said representative or delivered at Contractor's

office at the Site in the representative's absence shall be deemed to have been delivered to

Contractor.

Copies of the Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents shall be kept at

Contractor's office at the Site and available for use at all times.

2.01. Owner’s Field Office Trailer. In addition to the Contractor’s field office,

Contractor shall provide a suitable field office for the Owner separate from the

Contractor’s office at the site for the exclusive use of the Owner throughout the period of

construction until final completion.

Furnish, Equip, and maintain an office trailer for the sole use of the Owner, with secure

entrance doors and one key per occupant. Provide entrance/exit steps at all exterior

doors. Provide parking areas for County vehicles. No Contractor employees or

equipment parking will be permitted on Owner parking areas. Contractor shall have

Owner’s field office fully functional prior to any construction activities.

Provide the following:

1. Area: 600 square feet minimum, with minimum dimensions 12 feet x 50 feet.

a. Divide trailer into two offices, one on each end, reception area, restroom, and

conference hall.

b. Obtain prior approval of Engineer of floor plan. Each room shall have doors

with integral locks, keyed alike.

2. Windows:

a. Minimum: 3, with a minimum total area of 10 percent of floor area.

b. Operable sash and insect screens.

c. Locate to provide view of construction areas.

d. Provide operable Venetian blinds for all Windows.

3. Flooring:



(Group 4A2)

a. Provide VTC flooring throughout interior of trailer.

4. Furniture:

a. Two (2) conference tables 30 inches x 96 inches with conference chairs.

b. Two (2) standard size desks, 3-foot x 5-foot with four drawers.

c. Two (2) office chairs with armrest, high back, swivel and reclining.

d. Two (2) plan tables: 36 inches x 60 inches.

e. Two (2) plan table stools with cushion and high backs.

f. One (1) plan rack to hold a minimum of six sets of project drawings.

g. One (1) standard four-drawer legal size metal filing cabinet with lock and

keys (one key per occupant).

h. Two (2) wooden bookshelves with four shelves each.

i. Four (4) office chairs with armrest ( 2 per office).

j. Four (4) wastebaskets.

k. One (1) tack board, 30 inches x 48 inches.

l. One (1) dry erase board, 30 inches x 42 inches.

m. One (1) coat rack.

n. One (1) 5 cubic-foot refrigerator.

o. One (1) 1.5 cubic-foot microwave oven.

p. One (1) table for printer, copier, fax.

5. Office Equipment and Supplies:

a. Two (2) fire extinguishers (per code).

b. One (1) plain paper facsimile (fax) machine with independent phone line.

c. One (1) water cooler dispenser with hot and cold water valves, including

water service for the duration of the Project.

d. One (1) copier machine (sorter, double side copying, letter, legal and 11 x 17)

with software for O.C. computer to operate.

e. One (1) color printer Epson CX6600 or equal.

f. Provide paper for copies in all sizes for the duration of the Project.

g. Provide standard office supplies for the duration of the project.

h. One (1) first-aid kit.

6. Office Communications:

a. One (1) telephone system with minimum 3 rotary lines and 3 receivers, caller

ID.

b. One (1) telephone digital answering machine for 3 lines.

c. Three (3) high-speed internet connections, at a minimum DSL, Roadrunner,

etc., including e-mail service with connections in each office for the duration

of the Project.

d. Two (2) surge protector power strips.

e. The field office telephone numbers will not be published publicly.

7. Services (AOD):



(Group 4A2)

a. Lighting: 50-foot-candles at desktop height.

b. Exterior lighting at entrance door.

c. Automatic heating and mechanical cooling equipment sufficient to maintain

comfort conditions.

d. Minimum of four 110-volt duplex electrical convenience outlets, at least one

on each wall.

e. Electric distribution panel: two circuits minimum, 110-volt, 60-hertz service.

f. Equip washroom with flush toilet, washbasin with two faucets, medicine

cabinet with supplies, toilet tissue holder, 10-gallon capacity automatic

electric water heater, and paper towel holder.

g. Provide potable water service to all trailer fixtures.

h. Provide a single waste discharge to sanitary disposal system.

i. Cleaning service for the duration of the Project (min. once per week).

j. Furnish, replace, and replenish light bulbs, fluorescent tubes, toilet paper,

paper towels, soap, etc.

3. WATER. All water required for and in connection with the Work to be performed

will be furnished by Owner in the vicinity of the Site without charge to Contractor,

provided:

a. Contractor shall procure such water in the location and in the manner

designated by Owner.

b. Contractor at its own expense shall make authorized connections and provide

means for delivering the water to the Site.

c. Contractor shall provide adequately against waste and needless use of water.

4. POWER. Contractor shall provide all powers for heating, lighting, operation of

Contractor’s plant or equipment, or for any other use by Contractor. Temporary heat and

lighting shall be maintained until the Work is accepted.

5. VOICE AND DATA SERVICES. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements

and pay all installation charges for voice and data lines in its offices at the Site and for the

Owner’s field office.

6. SANITARY FACILITIES. Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at

the Site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others

performing work or furnishing services on the Project.

Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the

construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. If

toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least one toilet will be furnished for each

20 persons. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at

the Site.

7. MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC. Contractor shall conduct its work to interfere as

little as possible with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. If Contractor’s work

impacts any public travel, Contractor shall coordinate all maintenance of traffic needs

with Orange County Public Works and adhere to all local requirements for maintenance



(Group 4A2)

of traffic. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and

walks, whether public or private, Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe

bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and

private travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before

interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be required when Contractor

has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private property, or from the

authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, to obstruct traffic at the

designated point.

In making open-cut street crossings, Contractor shall not block more than one-half of the

street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the shoulder on the opposite

side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing shall be provided as necessary on

shoulders.

7.01. Temporary Bridges. Contractor shall construct substantial bridges at all points

where it is necessary to maintain traffic across pipeline construction. Bridges in public

streets, roads, and highways shall be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction

thereover. Bridges erected in private roads and driveways shall be adequate for the

service to which they will be subjected. Bridges shall be provided with substantial

guardrails and with suitably protected approaches. Foot bridges shall be at least 4 feet

wide, provided with handrails and uprights of dressed lumber. Bridges shall be

maintained in place as long as the conditions of the Work require their use for safety of

the public. When necessary for the proper prosecution of the Work in the immediate

vicinity of a bridge, the bridge may be relocated or temporarily removed for such period

as Engineer may permit.

7.02. Detours. Where required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover that traffic

be maintained over any construction work in a public street, road, or highway, and the

traffic cannot be maintained on the alignment of the original roadbed or pavement,

Contractor shall, at its own expense, construct and maintain a detour around the

construction work. Each detour shall include a bridge across the pipe trench and all

necessary barricades, guardrails, approaches, lights, signals, signs, and other devices and

precautions necessary for protection of the Work and safety of the public.

8. BARRICADES AND LIGHTS. All streets, roads, highways, and other public

thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on

which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest

intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.

All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, and lights

to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions, such as material piles and

equipment, shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights.

All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from sunset to

sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside public streets and

highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public.



(Group 4A2)

All barricades, signs, lights, and other protective devices shall be installed and

maintained in conformity with applicable statutory requirements and, where within

railroad and highway rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction

thereover.

9. FENCES. All existing fences affected by the Work shall be maintained by Contractor

until completion of the Work. Fences which interfere with construction operations shall

not be relocated or dismantled until written permission is obtained from the owner of the

fence, and the period the fence may be left relocated or dismantled has been agreed upon.

Where fences must be maintained across the construction easement, adequate gates shall

be installed. Gates shall be kept closed and locked at all times when not in use.

On completion of the Work across any tract of land, Contractor shall restore all fences to

their original or to a better condition and to their original locations.

10 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY. Contractor shall protect,

shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other

underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by its construction operations.

All pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires,

fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all

sod and shrubs in yards, parkways, and medians, shall be restored to their original

condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with

new materials.

No trees shall be removed outside the permanent easement, except where authorized by

Engineer.

Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, highways, shoulders,

ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, and other public or private property, regardless

of location or character, which may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or

workers to or from the Work or any part or site thereof, whether by Contractor of its

Subcontractors. Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the

owner of, or the agency or authority having jurisdiction over, the damaged property

concerning its repair or replacement or payment of costs incurred in connection with the

damage.

All fire hydrants and water control valves shall be kept free from obstruction and

available for use at all times.

11. DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY. Contractor will be held responsible for any

damage to existing structures, Work, materials, or equipment because of his operations

and shall repair or replace any damaged structures, Work, materials, or equipment to the

satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, Owner.

Contractor shall protect all existing structures and property from damage and shall

provide bracing, shoring, or other work necessary for such protection.



(Group 4A2)

12. TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION. All trees and other vegetation which must be

removed to perform the Work shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor; however,

no trees or cultured plants shall be unnecessarily removed unless their removal is

indicated on the Drawings. All trees and plants not removed shall be protected against

injury from construction operations.

Trees considered by Engineer to have any significant effect on construction operations

are indicated on the Drawings and those which are to be preserved are so indicated.

Contractor shall take extra measures to protect trees designated to be preserved, such as

erecting barricades, trimming to prevent damage from construction equipment, and

installing pipe and other Work by means of hand excavation or tunneling methods. Such

trees shall not be endangered by stockpiling excavated material or storing equipment

against their trunks.

When injuring or removal of trees designated to be preserved cannot be avoided, or when

removal and replacement is indicated on the Drawings, each tree injured beyond repair or

removed shall be replaced with a similar tree of the nearest size possible.

All trimming, repair, and replacement of trees and plants shall be performed by qualified

nurserymen or horticulturists.

13. SECURITY. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the Site, and all Work,

materials, equipment, and existing facilities thereon, against vandals and other

unauthorized persons.

No Claim shall be made against Owner by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser,

and Contractor shall make good all damage to Owner's property resulting from

Contractor's failure to provide security measures as specified.

Security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by Owner to protect

Owner's existing facilities during normal operation, but shall also include such additional

security fencing, barricades, lighting, watchman services, and other measures as required

to protect the Site.

14. ACCESS ROADS. Contractor shall establish and maintain temporary access roads

to various parts of the Site as required to complete the Project. Such roads shall be

available for the use of all others performing work or furnishing services in connection

with the Project.

15. PARKING. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use

of all workers and others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the

Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may

interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or construction activities.

16. NOISE CONTROL. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary

noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the

area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped



(Group 4A2)

with practical sound-muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise

consistent with efficient performance of the Work.

During construction activities on or adjacent to occupied buildings, and when

appropriate, Contractor shall erect screens or barriers effective in reducing noise in the

building and shall conduct its operations to avoid unnecessary noise which might

interfere with the activities of building occupants.

17. DUST CONTROL. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent

unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by

application of a chemical dust suppressant. When practicable, dusty materials in piles or

in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing dust.

Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be

adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels,

or similar equipment shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall

be included with dust screens.

18. TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS. Contractor shall provide for the

drainage of storm water and such water as may be applied or discharged on the Site in

performance of the Work. Drainage facilities shall be adequate to prevent damage to the

Work, the Site, and adjacent property.

Existing drainage channels and conduits shall be cleaned, enlarged, or supplemented as

necessary to carry all increased runoff attributable to Contractor's operations. Dikes shall

be constructed as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property

(except in natural channels), to protect Owner's facilities and the Work, and to direct

water to drainage channels or conduits. Ponding shall be provided as necessary to

prevent downstream flooding.

19. EROSION CONTROL. Contractor shall prevent erosion of soil on the Site and

adjacent property resulting from its construction activities. Effective measures shall be

initiated prior to the commencement of clearing, grading, excavation, or other operation

that will disturb the natural protection.

Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time,

and natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practicable. Temporary

storage and construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to

minimize erosion. Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover

shall be provided as necessary to control runoff.



(Group 4A2)

20. POLLUTION CONTROL. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and

watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from

construction activities. No sanitary wastes shall be permitted to enter any drain or

watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris, or other substance shall be

permitted to enter sanitary sewers, and reasonable measures shall be taken to prevent

such materials from entering any drain or watercourse.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01516

COLLECTION SYSTEM BYPASS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The WORK covered by this section consists of providing all temporary bypassing to

perform all operations in connection with the flow of wastewater around pipe

segment(s) or pump stations. The purpose of bypassing is to prevent wastewater

overflows and provide continuous service to all wastewater customers. The

CONTRACTOR shall maintain wastewater flow in the construction area in order to

prevent backup and/or overflow and provide reliable wastewater service to the users

of the wastewater system at all times. Bypass flow design parameters shall be the

same as performance requirements listed in Section 11150 paragraph 2-2.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain adequate equipment, piping, tankers,

and other necessary appurtenances in order to maintain continuous and reliable

wastewater service in all wastewater lines as required for construction. The

CONTRACTOR shall have tankers, backup pump(s), piping, and appurtenances

ready to deploy immediately.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The CONTRACTOR shall have all materials, equipment and labor necessary to

complete the repair, replacement, or rehabilitation on the job site prior to isolating the

gravity main segment, manhole, or pump station. The CONTRACTOR shall

demonstrate that the pumping system is in good working order and is sufficiently

sized to successfully handle flows by performing a test run for a period of 24 hours

prior to beginning the work.

3.02 TRAFFIC CONSIDERATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall locate bypass pumping suction and discharge lines so as to

not cause undue interference with the use of streets, private driveways, and alleys to

include the possible temporary trenching of piping at critical intersections. Ingress

and egress to adjacent properties shall be maintained at all times. Ramps, steel plates

or others methods shall be deployed by the CONTRACTOR to facilitate traffic over

surface piping. High traffic commercial properties may require alternate methods.



(Group 4A2)

3.03 BYPASS PLAN

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COUNTY a comprehensive written plan for

approval and acceptance that describes the intended bypass for the maintenance of

flows during construction. The CONTRACTOR shall also provide a sketch showing

the location of bypass pumping equipment for each pump station or line segment(s)

around which flows are being bypassed. The plan shall include any proposed

tanker(s), pump(s), bypass piping, backup plan and equipment, work schedule,

monitoring log for bypass pumping, monitoring plan of the bypass pumping

operation, and maintenance of traffic plan. The CONTRACTOR shall cease bypass

operations and return flows to the new and/or existing sewer when directed by the

COUNTY. All piping shall be designed to withstand at least twice the maximum

system pressure or a minimum of 50 psi whichever is greater. During bypassing, no

wastewater shall be leaked, dumped, or spilled in or onto, any area outside of the

existing wastewater system. When bypass operations are complete, all bypass piping

shall be drained into the wastewater system prior to disassembly.

3.04 BYPASS OPERATION

A. The COUNTY shall accept the bypass plan prior to implementation of the bypass.

The CONTRACTOR shall plug off and pump down the sewer manhole or line

segment in the immediate work area and shall maintain the wastewater system so that

surcharging does not occur.

B. Where work requires the line to be blocked beyond working hours and bypass

pumping is being utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for monitoring

the bypass operation 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. If accepted in the bypass plan

by the COUNTY, any electronic monitoring in lieu of on-site monitoring must be

detailed in the comprehensive written plan and approved by the COUNTY.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that no damage will be caused to private property

as a result of bypass pumping operations. The CONTRACTOR shall complete the

work as quickly as possible and satisfactorily pass all tests, inspections and repair all

deficiencies prior to discontinuing bypassing operations and returning flow to the

sewer manhole or line segment.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the COUNTY should a sanitary sewer

overflow occur and take the necessary action to clean up and disinfect the spillage to

the satisfaction of the COUNTY or other governmental agency. If sewage is spilled

onto public or private property, the CONTRACTOR shall wash down, clean up and

disinfect the spillage to the satisfaction of the COUNTY. When bypassing a pump

station, one back-up pump equal to the primary unit shall be required. Bypass pumps

shall have a maximum rating of 55 decibels for sound attenuation.

3.05 CONTRACTOR LIABILITY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all required pumping, equipment,

piping, and appurtenances to accomplish the bypass and for any and all damage that

results directly or indirectly from the bypass pumping equipment, piping and/or



(Group 4A2)

appurtenances. The CONTRACTOR shall also be liable for all COUNTY personnel

and equipment costs, penalties and fines resulting from sanitary sewer overflows. It

is the intent of these specifications to require the CONTRACTOR to establish

adequate bypass pumping as required regardless of the flow condition.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01610

GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS

1. SCOPE. When an equipment specification section in this Contract references this section, the

equipment shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this section, except as otherwise

specified in other sections.

2. COORDINATION. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related

parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment

components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in

the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from

that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or Specifications.

3. MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE. Unless specifically named in the Specifications, a

manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in

successful operation for not less than the past 5 years.

4. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty

or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and

leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.

All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and

acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes

and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of

duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior

to delivery, except as required by tests.

Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment

shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory

loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal

operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch [6.3 mm] thick. When dissimilar metal

components are used, consideration shall be given to prevention of galvanic corrosion.

5. LUBRICATION. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention

no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require

attention during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants.

Lubricants of the types recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided in sufficient

quantities to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and

operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner.

Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily

accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection

of waste oil in containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from

its normal installed position.



(Group 4A2)

6. ELEVATION. The elevation of the site shall be as indicated in the respective equipment

specification sections. All equipment furnished shall be designed to meet stipulated conditions and

to operate satisfactorily at the specified elevation.

7. ELECTRIC MOTORS. Unless otherwise specified, motors furnished with equipment shall meet

the requirements specified in Section 16220 or specified in specific equipment sections.

8. DRIVE UNITS. The nominal input horsepower [kW] rating of each gear or speed reducer shall

be at least equal to the nameplate horsepower [kW] of the drive motor. Drive units shall be designed

for 24 hour continuous service.

8.01. Gearmotors. The use of gearmotors sharing an integral housing or cutgears into the motor

output shaft, or that require removal of lubricant from the gear reducer to change out the motor will

not be acceptable.

8.02. Gear Reducers. Each gear reducer shall be a totally enclosed unit with oil or grease lubricated,

rolling element, antifriction bearings throughout.

Unless superseded by individual specification requirements each helical, spiral bevel, combination

bevel-helical, and worm gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least 1.50 based on the

nameplate horsepower [kilowatts] of the drive motor. Cycloidal gear reducers shall have a service

factor of at least 2.0 based on the nameplate horsepower [kW] of the drive motor. Shaft-mounted

and flange-mounted gear reducers shall be rated AGMA Class III. Helical gear reducers shall have a

gear strength rating to catalog rating of 1.5. Each gear reducer shall be designed and manufactured in

compliance with applicable most current AGMA standards, except the L10 bearing life shall be

200,000 hours.

The thermal horsepower [kW] rating of each unit shall equal or exceed the nameplate horsepower

[kW] of the drive motor. During continuous operation, the maximum sump oil temperature shall not

rise more than 100°F [38°C] above the ambient air temperature in the vicinity of the unit and shall

not exceed 200°F [93°C].

Each grease lubricated bearing shall be installed in a bearing housing designed to facilitate periodic

regreasing of the bearing by means of a manually operated grease gun. Each bearing housing shall

be designed to evenly distribute new grease, to properly dispose of old grease, and to prevent

overgreasing of the bearing. The use of permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings will not be

acceptable in large sized reducers. In small reducers, similar to basin equipment, permanently sealed

grease lubricated bearings rated L10 200,000 hour life may be provided at the manufacturer’s option.

An internal or external oil pump and appurtenances shall be provided if required to properly lubricate

oil lubricated bearings. A dipstick or a sight glass arranged to permit visual inspection of lubricant

level shall be provided on each unit.

Gear reducers which require the removal of parts or the periodic disassembly of the unit for cleaning

and manual regreasing of bearings will not be acceptable.



(Group 4A2)

Certification shall be furnished by the gear reducer manufacturer indicating that the intended

application of each unit has been reviewed in detail by the manufacturer and that the unit provided is

fully compatible with the conditions of installation and service.

8.03. Adjustable Speed Drives. Each mechanical adjustable speed drive shall have a service factor

of at least 1.75 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower [kilowatts] of the drive motor.

A spare belt shall be provided with each adjustable speed drive unit employing a belt for speed

change. Unless specifically permitted by the detailed equipment specifications, bracket type

mounting will not be acceptable for variable speed drives.

8.04. V-Belt Drives. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable tension

adjustment. V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.75 at maximum speed based on the

nameplate horsepower [kilowatts] of the drive motor.

9. SAFETY GUARDS. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating

parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS

gage [1.52 mm] thick or thicker galvanized, aluminum-clad sheet steel, or stainless sheet steel or

from 1/2 inch [12.7 mm] mesh galvanized expanded metal, or poltrusion molded UV resistant

materials. Each safety guard shall be reinforced or shaped to provide suitable strength to prevent

vibration and deflection and shall comply with OSHA. Each guard shall be designed for easy

installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard.

Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations

shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water.

10. ANCHOR BOLTS. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of

equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently

early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolts shall

comply with the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section and, unless otherwise specified, shall

be at least 3/4 inch [19 mm] in diameter.

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates

shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide

adequate anchorage into structural concrete.

11. EQUIPMENT BASES. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed

on concrete bases at least 6 inches [150 mm] high. Cast iron or welded steel baseplates shall be

provided for pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Each unit and its drive assembly shall be

supported on a single baseplate of neat design. Baseplates shall have pads for anchoring all

components, and adequate grout holes. Baseplates for pumps shall have a means for collecting

leakage and a threaded drain connection. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with

suitable anchor bolts and the space beneath filled with grout as specified in the Grout section.

12. SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment

shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper

maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete

with those devices.



(Group 4A2)

13. SHOP PAINTING. All iron and steel surfaces of the equipment shall be protected with suitable

protective coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces of the equipment that will be inaccessible after

assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the

environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly

cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors,

speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or

finished with an epoxy or polyurethane enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in

the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system.

Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint

manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of a universal

primer.

Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with

rust-preventive compound as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

14. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. Equipment shall be prepared for shipment as specified in

Section 01612 - Shipping.

15. STORAGE. Handling and storage of equipment shall be as specified in Section 01614 Handling

and Storage.

16. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. Installation and operation shall be as specified in respective

equipment sections and Section 01650 Startup Requirements.

17. OBSERVATION OF PERFORMANCE TESTS. Where the Specifications require the presence

of Engineer, initial tests shall be observed or witnessed by Engineer. Owner shall be reimbursed by

Contractor for all costs of subsequent visits by Engineer to witness or observe incomplete tests,

retesting, or subsequent tests.

18. PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE. Programming software shall be provided for any equipment

which includes a programmable logic controller (PLC) or other digital controller that is user-

programmable. The software shall be suitable for loading and running on a laptop personal computer

operating with a Windows-based operating system. A copy of the manufacturer's original operating

logic program shall be provided for use in maintaining and troubleshooting the equipment. Where

multiple pieces of equipment, from the same or different vendors, use the same programming

software, only one copy of the software need be provided.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01612

SHIPPING

1. SCOPE. This section covers packaging and shipping of materials and equipment.

2. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate

handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed,

crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage.

All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept dry at all times.

Painted and coated surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other

damage. Painted and coated surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall

be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer.

Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items.

3. SHIPPING. Before shipping each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified

in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material

shall be included with each shipment.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01614

HANDLING AND STORAGE

1. SCOPE. This section covers delivery, storage, and handling of materials and equipment.

2. DELIVERY. Contractor shall bear the responsibility for delivery of equipment, spare parts,

special tools, and materials to the site and shall comply with the requirements specified herein

and shall provide required information concerning the shipment and delivery of the materials

specified in this Contract. These requirements also apply to any subsuppliers making direct

shipments to the jobsite.

Contractor shall, either directly or through contractual arrangements with others, accept

responsibility for the safe handling and protection of the equipment and materials furnished

under this Contract before and after receipt at the port of entry. Acceptance of the equipment

shall be made after it is installed, tested, placed in operation and found to comply with all the

specified requirements.

All items shall be checked against packing lists immediately on delivery to the site for damage

and for shortages. Damage and shortages shall be remedied with the minimum of delay.

Delivery of portions of the equipment in several individual shipments shall be subject to review

of Engineer before shipment. When permitted, all such partial shipments shall be plainly marked

to identify, to permit easy accumulation, and to facilitate eventual installation.

3. STORAGE. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and

protected until installed in the Work.

Stacked items shall be suitably protected from damage by spacers or load distributing supports

that are safely arranged. No metalwork (miscellaneous steel shapes and reinforcing steel) shall

be stored directly on the ground. Masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to

hold breakage, chipping, cracking, and spalling to a minimum. Cement, lime, and similar

products shall be stored off the ground on pallets and shall be covered and kept completely dry at

all times. Pipe, fittings, and valves may be stored out of doors, but must be placed on wooden

blocking. PVC pipe, geomembranes, plastic liner, and other plastic materials shall be stored off

the ground on pallets and protected from direct sunlight.

Pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve bearings shall

be stored in weathertight structures maintained at a temperature above 60°F [16°C]. Electrical

equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture and water damage. All

space heaters furnished in equipment shall be connected and operated continuously.

Equipment having moving parts, such as gears, bearings, and seals, shall be stored fully

lubricated with oil, grease, etc., unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's

storage instructions shall be carefully followed by Contractor.

When required by the equipment manufacturer, moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of

twice a month to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal to metal "welding". Upon



(Group 4A2)

installation of the equipment, Contractor shall, at the discretion of Engineer, start the equipment

at one-half load for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate

from lack of use.

When required by the equipment manufacturer, lubricants shall be changed upon completion of

installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and

acceptance. New lubricants shall be put into the equipment by Contractor at the time of

acceptance.

Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects of

storage when installed in the Work.

In addition to the protection specified for prolonged storage, the packaging of spare units and

spare parts shall be for export packing and shall be suitable for long-term storage in a damp

location. Each spare item shall be packed separately and shall be completely identified on the

outside of the container.

4. HANDLING. Stored items shall be laid out to facilitate their retrieval for use in the Work.

Care shall be taken when removing the equipment for use to ensure the precise piece of

equipment is removed and that it is handled in a manner that does not damage the equipment.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01620

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

1. SCOPE. This section consists of an equipment schedule for items for which a basic level of

manufacturer's field services or operation and maintenance manuals are required, but not covered

in other sections. When other sections indicate that manufacturer’s field services and operation

and maintenance manuals are required, the requirements shall be as specified in the other

sections.

Specific requirements for manufacturer's field services are covered in the Quality Control

section and the equipment specifications.

Specific requirements for operation and maintenance manuals are covered in the Submittals

section and the equipment specifications.

2. SCHEDULE. Manufacturer's field services, including equipment installation checks and

training, and operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided for the items of equipment

indicated in the following schedule:

Spec

Section

Type of Equipment

Mfr's. Field

Services

O&M

Manual

11150 Submersible Pumps X X

11910 Engine Generator X X

13214 Aboveground Fuel Storage Tank X X

13500 Instrumentation and Control System X X

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01630

PIPELINE SCHEDULE

1. SCOPE. This section consists of a schedule of 4 inch [100 mm] and larger pipelines

indicating the type of pipe to be used. Pipe materials, installation, testing, and disinfection, when

specified, are covered in other sections.

Piping smaller than 4 inches [100 mm] is covered in the various miscellaneous piping sections.

Piping for plumbing, heating and air conditioning systems is covered in other sections. Piping to

be furnished with equipment is covered in the applicable equipment section.

2. ALTERNATIVE PIPE TYPES. Where more than one type of pipe is indicated in the

schedule, the type of pipe material to be installed may be selected by Contractor. The details on

the drawings cover only one type of pipe for each line. If a different material is selected by

Contractor, all details of connections, jointing, wall fittings, support, anchorage, and harnesses

shall be modified as necessary to produce an equivalent design acceptable to Engineer.

3. WALL FITTINGS. A wall pipe or sleeve will be required for all pipe passing through

concrete or masonry block walls. Wall fittings and sleeves shall be as indicated on the drawings

and as specified in the applicable piping section.

4. SCHEDULE INDEX. Pipe material abbreviations and their applicable specification section

number are as indicated:

Abbreviation Pipe Material Section No.

BR Brass 15060

CPVC CPVC 15067

CS Miscellaneous steel pipe 15065

CSG Galvanized steel pipe 15065

DIP Ductile iron pipe 15061

FRP FRP 15067

FRPA FRP air pipe 15066

HS Hose 15060

PE Polyethylene 15067

PP Polypropylene 15067



(Group 4A2)

PVC PVC 15067

PVCPP PVC pressure pipe 02630

PVCSP PVC sewer pipe 02628

PVDF PVDF 15067

RPT Reinforced plastic tubing 15067

SS Stainless steel pipe 15064

TG Tempered glass 15060

5. SCHEDULE. Pipe materials shall conform to Schedule 01630-S01. All pipelines indicated

on the drawings and all pipelines required for proper operation of the equipment furnished shall

be provided whether listed in the schedule or not.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01650

STARTUP REQUIREMENTS

1. SCOPE. This section covers startup requirements for all items of equipment and systems

including mechanical equipment. Additional requirements may be specified in specific

equipment specifications. The requirements of this section shall be satisfactorily completed prior

to any field tests specified in the specific equipment sections.

2. GENERAL. Equipment shall not be operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified

personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper results. All items of

equipment and systems shall be tested for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. All

required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and other startup activity shall be provided by

qualified personnel. Contractor shall be responsible for planning, supervising, and executing the

installation of Work.

2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall coordinate all tests related to startup of equipment and

systems and shall report the results to Engineer in accordance with the submittals section.

Contractor shall accept the equipment and the test results related to starting of equipment and

systems before Engineer will accept the equipment and the test results.

When equipment is ready for a witness test, Contractor shall give written notice to Engineer at

least 14 days before any offsite witness testing is performed or any field witnessed performance

testing, unless otherwise specified.

3. EQUIPMENT TESTS.

3.01. Factory Tests. When specified in the specific equipment sections, the equipment will be

test run at the point of manufacture and the test results will be delivered to Engineer. Such

equipment will not be shipped until Engineer has reviewed the test results and advised the

Contractor, in writing, that the equipment is acceptable for shipment. Such acceptance, however,

will not be considered as final acceptance, which will only be made on the basis of the test results

of the equipment after installation.

3.02. Preliminary Field Tests. All items of mechanical equipment shall be given a preliminary

field test by Contractor after installation for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. The

preliminary field test shall consist of the requirements listed herein, unless exceptions or

additions are indicated in the specific equipment sections.

Contractor's test operation of each piece of mechanical equipment shall continue for not less than

8 hours without interruption. All moving parts of equipment and machinery shall be carefully

tested for operation, and adjusted so all parts move freely and function to secure satisfactory

operation. All equipment shall be tested continuously under actual or simulated operating

conditions. All parts shall operate satisfactorily in all respects, under continuous full load and in

accordance with the specified requirements, for the full duration of the 8 hour test period. If any

part of a unit shows evidence of unsatisfactory or improper operation during the 8 hour test



(Group 4A2)

period, correction or repairs shall be made and the full 8 hour test operation, as specified, shall be

completed after all parts operate satisfactorily.

Tests of all process and pumping equipment, drive motors, including auxiliaries shall be made in

accordance with the appropriate and approved test codes such as the American Society of

Mechanical Engineers, Hydraulic Institute Standards, and IEEE.

Tests shall be conducted after the Work is substantially complete so each item of equipment is

ready for integrated operation with other equipment at the plant. Testing, measuring, and

calibrating procedures shall be submitted to Engineer for review and acceptance prior to startup

and testing of equipment.

The equipment shall be properly filled, by Contractor, with oil and grease, and Contractor shall

furnish all power, personnel, water, chemicals, fuels, oil, grease, and auxiliaries necessary for

conducting the testing of the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity.

The period of inspection, initial startup operation, and field adjustment shall be as needed to

achieve satisfactory installation and operation of the items furnished. Any period required for

instruction of Owner's personnel shall be as specified in the Contract Documents.

When the specific equipment sections indicate that an installation check is required by the

equipment manufacturer, the manufacturer's representative will make all necessary field

adjustments and correct defects in materials or workmanship during this test period.

All equipment installed under this Contract, including that furnished by others, shall be placed

into successful operation according to the written instructions of the equipment manufacturer and

the instructions of the manufacturer's field representative.

3.03. Field System Operation Test. After all equipment is installed and the entire system is

ready to operate, Contractor shall conduct a field system operation test. The test shall consist of

the requirements listed herein, unless exceptions or additions are indicated in the specific

equipment sections.

The test period shall be at least 7 days, and each system shall operate under actual or simulated

operating conditions before a certificate of Substantial Completion of the Work is issued. All

defects of material, workmanship, or equipment which appear during this test period shall be

corrected by Contractor. After such corrections are made, the 7 day test shall be repeated before a

certificate of Substantial Completion of Work is issued, unless waived by Engineer.

Contractor shall supply all power, water, oil, grease, auxiliaries, and operating personnel required

for this operation test.

When necessary for certain items of equipment, the final adjustments and inspections will be

made by factory trained service personnel (other than sales representatives), rather than by

Contractor. The service personnel will also supervise the test operation. This requirement will

be stated under the detailed specification for the particular piece or pieces of equipment. The



(Group 4A2)

manufacturer's service personnel will make adjustments and supervise testing by Contractor until

such tests have been accepted by Engineer.

4. ACCEPTANCE. When no other field tests for acceptance are specified in the equipment

sections, at the end of the field system operation testing, each system will be accepted if, in the

opinion of Engineer, it has operated satisfactorily without excessive power use, wear, or need for

lubrication, or requiring undue attention; and if all its rotating parts operate without excessive

vibration or noise at any operating condition.

When other field tests for acceptance are specified in the equipment sections, acceptance shall be

after all tests are satisfactorily conducted as specified in the appropriate equipment procurement

specification.

When a field performance test for baseline is specified in the equipment sections, acceptance

shall be after a completion of the baseline performance test that is conducted as specified in the

pumping unit field testing - baseline performance section.

Acceptance of Work in connection with the installation of equipment furnished by others will be

subject to approval of the manufacturer's field representative.

Acceptance by Owner or approval of the manufacturer's field representative will not relieve

Contractor of responsibility for defective Work.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 01720

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

PART 1-GENERAL

1.01 PURPOSE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The purpose of the Project Record Documents is to provide the County with factual

information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable

future location, identification and modification of the Work without lengthy and

expensive site measurement, investigation or examination.

B. Maintenance, certification and submittal of Record Documents and Samples.

1. Throughout progress of Work, maintain accurate records of progress and changes

of Contract Documents and in the Record Drawings.

2. Obtain the services of a Surveyor to certify the as-built asset attribute data for the

location of the Work and transfer the data to the Record Drawings.

3. Upon Surveyor certification of the location of completed work, transfer the

information from the as-built asset attribute data to electronic record documents.

4. Provide final record documents to the County.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

Except where specific definitions are used within a specific section, the following terms,

phrases, words and their derivation shall have the meaning given herein when consistent

with the context in which they are used. Words used in the present tense include the

future tense, words in the plural number include the singular number and words in the

singular number include the plural number. The word "shall" is mandatory, and the word

"may" is permissive.

A. As-Built Asset Attribute Data: Surveyor shall obtain field measurements of vertical

and horizontal dimensions of constructed improvements so that the constructed

facilities can be delineated in such a way that the location of the constructed

improvements may be compared with the construction drawings. A completed table

similar to the Table 01720-2 Asset Attribute Data Form Example in this Section shall

be provided and certified by the Surveyor.

B. As-Built Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor’s Surveyor shall depict the

actual location of installed utilities for the completed WORK in a full size hard copy

and an electronic AutoCAD file (dwg) format.

C. Boundary Survey: Boundary survey, map and report certified by a Surveyor shall

be provided that meets the requirements of Chapter 61G17-6 ‘Minimum Technical

Standards’, FAC.

D. Electronic As-Built Asset Attribute Data: Shall mean documents that are signed

and sealed electronically by a Surveyor by creating a “signature” file and are

transmitted electronically following the procedures and definitions of Chapter 61G17-

7.0025, FAC.



(Group 4A2)

E. Record Documents: Shall mean full size hard and electronic copies of Boundary

Surveys and As-Built Asset Attribute Data certified by a Surveyor, reports and other

documents presented in Article 2.01.

F. Surveyor: Contractor’s Surveyor that is licensed by the State of Florida as a

professional surveyor and mapper pursuant to Chapter 472, F.S.

E. Survey Map Report: As a minimum the Survey Map Report shall identify or

describe the locations where the pipe centerline was constructed within three feet of

the easement or right-of-way boundary, where the pipe was constructed outside the

easement or right-of-way boundary, any corners that had to be reset, measurements

and computations made, pump station boundary issues, and accuracies obtained.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. All General Conditions, Supplements to the General Conditions, and any Addenda issued by

the County are a part of this Section in the same manner as if fully written herein, and shall

govern the Work of this Section, except where more stringent articles or requirements are

stipulated, then they shall govern this Section.

B. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by anyone shall be as

binding as if required by all.

C. Other requirements affecting Project Record Documents may appear in pertinent other

Sections of these specifications.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of the Record Documents to one person on the

Contractor’s staff as approved by the County.

B. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and

proper entries on each page of specifications and each sheet of drawings and other

documents where such entry is required to show progress and changes properly.

C. Make entries within 24-hours after receipt of information has occurred.

D. Survey documents shall comply with the minimum technical standards of Chapter 61G17-6

of the Florida Administrative Code (FAC) and Table 017201 Minimum Survey Accuracies

specified in, whichever are more stringent. Asset attribute data shall be signed, sealed and

dated by the Surveyor. All coordinates shall be geographically registered in the Florida State

Plan Coordinate System using the contract drawings control points for horizontal and

vertical controls.



(Group 4A2)

Table 01720-1 Minimum Survey Accuracies

Asset/Location

Horizontal

Accuracy

(feet)

Elevation

Accuracy

(feet)

Location: horizontal center

and vertical top, unless

otherwise specified

Bench Marks N/A 0.01 Point

Horizontal Control 0.01 N/A Point

Easements and

Tracts * N/A Survey Monuments

Civil Site, Topo and

Foundation

Drawings

0.1 0.01 All

Hydrants 0.01 N/A Operating Nut

Blow off Valves 0.01 N/A Valve Enclosure

Air Release Valves 0.01 N/A Valve Enclosure

Master Meters 0.01 N/A Register

Meter Box 0.01 N/A Top of Meter Box

Clean-out 0.01 N/A Top of Clean-out

Pump Station 0.01 0.01 Top Center of Wet Well and

Pipe Inverts

Manholes 0.01 0.1 Top Center of Cover

Manhole N/A 0.01 Pipe Inverts

System Valves 0.01 0.1 Operating Nut and Valve

Body

Fittings 0.01 0.1 Top of Fitting and Ground

Piping at 100’ max

intervals

0.01 0.1 Top of Pipe and Ground

Restrained Pipe 0.01 N/A Limits

Connections 0.01 0.1 Pipe Invert

Bore & Jack Casing 0.01 0.1 Top of Casing at Limits of

Casing

Existing Utilities** 0.01 0.1 Conflicts

* Shall conform to the requirements of the “Chapter 61G17-6, ‘Minimum Technical Standards’, FAC”,

certified by a Surveyor.

** Existing utilities including but not limited to water, wastewater, reclaimed water, storm, fiber optic

cable, electric, gas and structures within the limits of construction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS



(Group 4A2)

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 “Submittals” and other submittal

requirements in the different Articles of this Section and the rest of these specifications.

B. As a prerequisite for progress payments, the CONTRACTOR shall exhibit the currently

updated Record Documents for review by the COUNTY. Payment will be withheld at the

COUNTY’S discretion based on the status of the Record Documents or if they are not

properly maintained.

C. The Work will not be placed into operation until the asset attribute data (see Table 01720

Asset Attribute Data Form Example) certified by the Surveyor for the Record Drawings is

approved by the County.

D. Prior to submitting request for final payment or the County issuing a Certificate of

Completion for the Work, Contractor shall submit the final Record Documents to the

County for approval. Retainage funds will be withheld at the County’s discretion based on

the quality and accuracy of the final Record Documents.

E. Required Submittal Documents:

1. Full size, hard copy set of the Final Record Documents including but not limited to:

a. As-built asset attribute data added to the Record Drawings by the Contractor,

boundary surveys of pump stations, Surveys and Survey Report for the location

of constructed pipes within any easements and pump station site.

b. Other Final Record Documents.

2. Digital Set of the Final Record Documents including but not limited to:

a. Scanned digital copies of the Record Drawings updated to match the as- asset

attribute data table.

b. Electronic Survey documents electronically sealed by the Surveyor.

c. Final Record Documents information.

d. Digital Record Drawing in the Engineer’s current version of AutoCAD file

(dwg) format for the Contract Drawings, updated to match the final Record

Drawing information.



(Group 4A2)



(Group 4A2)

Restrained Water Main RSWM-1

1605631 450533.2

Limits of restraint

Restrained Force Main

RSFM-1 1605400 450765.8 Limits of restraint

Restrained Reclaimed Water Main RSRWM-1

Limits of restraint

1605024 450123.7 Water Main Connection WMC-1

1605626 450245.4

Force Main Connection RMC-1

1605030 450126.2

RW Main Connection RWMC-1 1605805 450057.3

Water B&J Casing WMBJC-

1 1605900 450883.9

Force Main B&J Casing FMBJC-1 1605647 450939.9

RW B&J Casing RWBJC-1 1605978 450490.1

Other Utility Line Conflicts CONFL-1

1605290 450130.2

I.D.

Number Asset Number 1605829 450035.9

Top Center

Infl. Pipe Invert

Wet Well Bottom

PS top center of wetwell PS-1

1605643 450370.8 87.04 73.25 68.20

I.D. Asset Asset Coordinates Top Invert Elevations

Number Number Northerly Easterly Elevation N S

Manhole MH-1 1605320 450196.7 88.19 73.50 73.60

Manhole MH-2 1605160 450726.7 87.48 75.35 75.45

1.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT SITE

A. Maintain at the site and always available for County’s use one record copy of:

1. Construction Contract, Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplemental

Conditions, Bid Proposal, Instruction to Bidders, Addenda, and all other Contract

Documents.

2. Change Orders, Verbal Orders, and other modifications to Contract.

3. Written instructions by the County as well as correspondence related to Requests for

Information (RFIs).

4. Accepted Shop Drawings, Samples, product data, substitution and “or-equal” requests.

5. Field test records, inspection certificates, manufacturer certificates and construction

photographs.



(Group 4A2)

6. Partial Surveyor’s as-built assets attribute data, pipe deflection data, and gravity main

data.

B. Maintain the documents and samples in an organized, clean, dry, legible condition and

completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the

Work, transfer of all record data to the final Record Documents and for submittal to the

County.

PART 2-PRODUCTS

2.01 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. As-Built Drawings: After obtaining one complete set of all documents comprising the

Contract and other Documents described in paragraph 1.06 Record Documents at site, the

Contractor shall maintain and create the As-Built Drawings including:

1. Pump station site boundary survey and map report: Provide the pump station site

boundary survey showing the real property boundaries and site improvements. The

boundary survey field work and survey map shall be performed after the Work at the site

has been completed and before the start-up inspection. Provide a survey map report in

addition to the boundary survey.

2. Survey Map Report for the As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table: As a minimum the

Survey Map Report shall identify or describe the locations where the pipe centerline was

constructed within three feet of the easement or right-of-way boundary, where the pipe

was constructed outside the easement or right-of-way boundary, any corners that had to

be reset, measurements and computations made, pump station boundary issues, and

accuracies obtained. Survey map report shall be dated after the Work within the right-

of-ways or easements have been completed.

3. Surveyor shall obtain field measurements of vertical and horizontal dimensions of

constructed improvements and certify a completed table similar to the Table 01720-2

Asset Attribute Data Form Example.

4. Surveyor shall prepare a certified table to include as a minimum the pipe lengths,

manhole inverts, and slopes for gravity mains.

5. Surveyor shall calculate and prepare a certified table for horizontal and vertical pipe

deflections of pipe that will include as a minimum the pipe lengths, coordinates of pipe

deflections, horizontal or vertical deflections, the manufacturer’s recommendations for

pipe deflections, and meets or exceeds the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Final Record Documents: Contractor shall provide final version of the Record Documents

both as paper copies and electronic format described below.

1. Construction Contract, Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplemental

Conditions, Bid Proposal, Instruction to Bidders, Addenda, and all other Contract

Documents.

2. Change orders, verbal orders, and other modifications to Contract.

3. Written instructions by the County as well as correspondence related to Requests for



(Group 4A2)

Information (RFIs).

4. Accepted Shop Drawings, samples, product data, substitution and “or-equal” requests.

5. Field test records, inspection certificates, manufacturer certificates and construction

photographs.

6. As-Built Drawings described in paragraph A. above.

PART 3-EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTENANCE AND CREATION OF AS-BUIT SET

A. Promptly following the receipt of the County’s notice to proceed, secure from the County, at

no charge to the Contractor, one (1) complete electronic set of construction drawings.

Maintain the As-Built Drawings and create documents to add to it as described herein.

B. Construction Progress Meetings

1. Identify each paper document and sample with the title “RECORD DOCUMENTS”

using one inch high letters or higher.

2. Print a paper copy of the current draft electronic As-Built Drawings and As-Built Asset

Attribute Data Table (all partially constructed improvements).

3. Print a paper copy of the current table shall for pipe deflections (horizontal and vertical)

depicting if the deflections meet the manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Print a paper copy of the current table of manhole elevations, pipe lengths, and slopes.

The table shall be updated before progress meetings when the wastewater pipes that

enter the manholes are backfilled.

C. Survey Documents: Contractor shall obtain the services of a Surveyor to acquire the As-

Built Assets Attribute Data, pump station Boundary Survey(s), and re-establish easement

corners with pins if destroyed by the Work.

1. Pump station site boundary survey and map report.

2. Survey Map Report for the As-Built Asset Attribute Data Table.

3. Complete a table similar to the Table 01720-2 Asset Attribute Data Form Example and

the final table shall be certified by the Surveyor.

4. Gravity main slope table prepared certified by Surveyor.

D. Electronic As-Built Drawing Entries:

1. Maintain the electronic As-Built Drawings to accurately record progress of Work and

change orders throughout the duration of the Contract.

2. Date all entries. Enter RFI No., Change Order No., etc. when applicable.

3. Call attention to the entry by highlighting with a “cloud” drawn around the area affected.

4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for entries of the overlapping

changes.

5. Make entries in the pertinent other documents while coordinating with the Engineer and



(Group 4A2)

the County for validity.

6. Entries shall consist of graphical representations, plan view and profiles, written

comments, dimensions, State Plane Coordinates, details and any other information as

required to document field and other changes of the actual Work completed. As a

minimum, make entries to also record:

a. Specifications and Addenda: Record manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and

supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed as well as any

changes made by Field Order, Change Order or other.

b. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish floor datum and State

Plane Coordinates and elevations.

c. Plan view and profile drawings, station and offset dimensions, State Plane

coordinates for all fittings, valves and appurtenances of underground piping in the

Work once lying uncovered in the trench. Show locations for equipment, facilities

and other Work relocated or changed in the field.

d. When manholes, boxes, or underground conduits and plumbing are involved as part

of the Work, record true elevations and locations, dimensions between manholes,

slope of gravity mains, invert and top elevations.

e. Actually installed pipe or other Work materials, class, pressure rating, diameter, size,

specifications, etc. Similar information for other encountered underground utilities,

not installed by Contractor, their owner and actual location if different than shown in

the Contract Documents.

f. Location of utilities, appurtenances and other Work concealed in the construction,

referenced to visible and accessible permanent improvements.

g. Details, not on original contract Drawings, as needed to show the actual location of

the Work completed in a manner that allows the County to find it in the future.

h. The Contractor shall mark all arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts and

similar items shown schematically on the construction documents and show on the

As-Built Drawings the actual horizontal and vertical alignments and locations.

i. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, windows,

etc. Architectural schedule changes according to contractor’s records and shop

drawings.

E. Storage and Preservation:

1. Store Record Documents and samples at a protected location in the project field office

apart from documents used for construction.

a. Provide files and racks for storage of documents

b. Provide locked cabinet or secure space for storage of samples.

2. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format with section numbers

matching those in the Contract Documents.

3. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data to the

County’s approval.

a. Such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the County, removal and

replacement of concealing materials.

b. In such cases, provide replacements of the concealing materials to the standards

originally required by the Contract Documents.



(Group 4A2)

3.02 FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL

A. Refer to Article 1.05 Submittals for relevant information regarding final submittal.

B. Refer to Article 2.01 for relevant information for Final Record Documents.

C. Scanned Documents: Scan the Survey Documents and other Record Documents reflecting

changes from the Bid Documents.

1. The scanned record drawing sets shall be complete and include the title sheet,

plan/profile sheets, cross-sections, and details. Each individual sheet contained in the

printed set of the As-Built Drawings shall be included in the electronic drawings, with

each sheet being converted into an individual tif (tagged image file). The plan sheets

shall be scanned in tif format Group 4 at 400 dpi resolution to maintain legibility of each

drawing. Then, the tif images shall be embedded into a single pdf (Adobe Acrobat) file

representing the complete plan set. Review all Record Documents to ensure a complete

record of the project.

D. Contractor’s Surveyor shall review and check for accuracy the As-Built Drawings and

ascertain that all data furnished and other documents are accurate and truly represent the

Work as actually installed.

E. As-Built Drawings: Provide an encompassing digital AutoCAD file that includes all the

information of the Drawings and any other graphical information in the As-Built Drawings.

It shall include the overall Work, utility system layout and associated parcel boundaries and

easements. Feature point, line and polygon information for new or altered Work and all

accompanying geodetic control and survey data shall be included. The surveyor’s certified

as-built asset attribute data shall be added to the As-Built Drawings and Surveyor shall

electronically seal the data in a comma-delineated ASCII format (txt).

F. Submit the Final Record Documents within 20 days after Substantial Completion.

G. Participate in review meetings as required.

H. Make required changes and promptly deliver the Final Record Documents to the Engineer

and County

3.04 CHANGES SUBSEQUENT TO ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor has no responsibility for recording changes in the Work after final

completion, except for changes resulting from work performed under guarantee.

END OF SECTION

(Orange County Utilities ) Bid Issue


(Group 4A2)

Section 02050

EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND MATERIALS DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE

This section covers the demolition and removal of existing structures, equipment and

piping. Items to be demolished and removed or salvaged at the pump station sites shall

be as indicated on the drawings.

1-2. SUBMITTALS

Submit a removal and demolition plan to the Owner’s on-site representative at least 60

days prior to scheduled removal and demolition work. Submittal shall be in accordance

with Section 01300.

1-3. COORDINATION

Schedule a removal and demolition meeting with the Owner at least 30 days prior to

scheduled removal and demolition work to review the plan and coordinate activities.

Following the coordination meeting, the Contractor shall provide notice of any planned

demolition at least 14 days in advance of the planned commencement date. Notice shall

be through the use of a Construction Assistance Request (CAR) form with information

concerning the proposed commencement date and duration of the service outage. The

Owner will provide the Contractor with a standard form to be used for this purpose.

OWNER reserves the right to re-schedule any proposed demolition or service outage if it

can not be reasonably accommodated when requested. Work shall not begin until

approval is granted by OWNER.

1-4. PERMITS

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits required for the demolition

and disposal work.

PART 2 – MATERIALS - Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. GENERAL

All facilities and materials to be demolished and salvaged shall be removed from the site

unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Methods used in demolition and disposal of

materials shall be in accordance with all codes, ordinances, and requirements of all



(Group 4A2)

governing authorities; shall be acceptable to the Owner; and shall in all cases assure the

safety of persons and property.

Existing surfaces to receive new materials or finishes shall be prepared accordingly.

Surfaces exposed by demolition shall be finished to match adjacent surfaces if no

additional work is scheduled or indicated.

Salvaged equipment shall be cleaned and delivered to the Owner at the Orange County

Utilities Department Facility at Presidents Drive. Salvaged equipment shall be

transported and stored on wood pallets with tie down straps.

3-2. EXISTING PIPING AND ELECTRICAL UTILITIES

Shut off or disconnect utilities affecting demolition work. Schedule shutdowns with the

Owner; notify the Owner 14 working days in advance of any shutdown that is required to

perform the work. The Owner will open/close valves on piping required for the

shutdowns unless other arrangements are made during the coordination meeting.

3-3. ABANDONED AND UNUSED PIPING

All abandoned and unused piping both above grade and buried, shall be removed from

the site, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

3-4. REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted, remove all abandoned and unused electrical conduit,

wiring, materials, and equipment from areas indicated for demolition. This

includes, but is not limited to, all unnecessary buried power and control circuits.

Disconnect circuits at their source. Remove exposed and buried conduits and

materials no longer used, including conduit supports, anchors, studs, and straps.

Remove or cut off concealed or embedded conduit, boxes, or other materials and

equipment to a point at least 3/4 inch below the final finished surface.

B. Repair affected surfaces to conform to the type, quality, and finish of the

surrounding surface.

3-5. BALLASTS

A. Electrical discharge lighting ballasts manufactured before 1974 that will be

removed under this contract contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

B. Electrical discharge lighting ballasts manufactured after 1973 may contain PCBs.

C. It is the Contractor's responsibility to identify the presence of PCBs and to dispose

of them in compliance with all local, state, and federal laws, regulations, and

ordinances.



(Group 4A2)

3-6. TRANSFORMERS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL APPARATUS

Transformers, switches, capacitors, resistors, and/or other liquid-filled electrical

apparatus that will be removed under this contract may contain PCBs. It is the

Contractor's responsibility to identify the presence of PCBs and to dispose of them in

compliance with all local, state, and federal laws, regulations, and ordinances.

3-7. PATCHING

A. Patching shall mean the restoration of a surface or item to a condition as near as

practicable to match the existing adjoining surfaces unless otherwise noted,

detailed, or specified.

B. When patching involves painting, special coating, vinyl fabric, or other applied

finish, refinish the entire surface plane (i.e., wall or ceiling), unless complete

refinishing of the entire space is scheduled or specified.

C. Patching includes cleaning of soiled surfaces.

3-8. DEMOLITION

A. Existing buildings, structures, boxes, pipes, pavements, curbs, and other items are

to be removed and disposed of shall be as specified herein or as indicated on the

drawings. Remove and dispose of all portions of these items which interfere with

project construction.

B. Remove from the site all facilities, in their entirety, to be demolished including

belowground footings, foundations, and other associated appurtenances, as shown

on the drawings or as specified herein. Backfill and compact all site areas

disturbed by demolition work with earth backfill material in accordance with

Section 02200. Sod shall be established in all disturbed areas in accordance with

Section 02810.

C. Perform the work in a manner that will not damage adjacent structures or

facilities. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the method of demolition used may

endanger or damage parts of the structure or affect the satisfactory operation of

the facilities, Contractor must promptly change the method when so notified by

the Owner's Representative. No blasting will be permitted.

D. All equipment, material, and piping, except as specified to be salvaged for the

Owner, or removed by others, within the limits of the demolition, excavations,

and backfills, will become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed

from the project site. The salvage value of this equipment, materials, and piping

shall be reflected in the contract price of the demolition work.

E. Material salvaged from demolition work shall not be reused as part of the work,

except as specifically shown.



(Group 4A2)

3-9. SCHEDULE

Certain items cannot be removed, abandoned, or demolished until certain other work has

been accomplished. Contractor shall sequence work such that demolition will not have

any impact on the pump station operations.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02200

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers earthwork and shall include the necessary clearing, grubbing,

and preparation of the site; removal and disposal of all debris; excavation; handling, storage,

transportation, and disposal of all excavated material; all necessary sheeting, shoring, and

protection work; preparation of sub-grades; pumping and dewatering as necessary; protection of

adjacent property; backfilling; construction of fills and embankments; surfacing and grading; and

other appurtenant work.

1-2. GENERAL. With reference to the terms and conditions of the construction standards for

excavations set forth in OSHA "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", Chapter XVII

of Title 29, CFR, Part 1926, Contractor shall employ a competent person and, when necessary

based on the regulations, a registered professional engineer, to act upon all pertinent matters of

the work of this section.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Drawings, specifications, and data covering the proposed materials shall

be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

At least 30 days before starting construction on the sheeting and shoring, the sheeting and

shoring design engineer shall complete and submit to Engineer the Protection System Design

Certificate (Figure 1-02200) and the Contractor shall use the sheeting and shoring design. A

separate certificate shall be submitted for each unique design. The certificate shall be signed and

sealed by the registered professional engineer that designed the protection system. The

professional engineer shall be licensed or registered in the state where the protection system is

located.

1-3.01. Filter Fabric Data. Complete descriptive and engineering data for the fabric shall be

submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Data submitted shall include:

A 12 inch [300 mm] square sample of fabric.

Manufacturer's descriptive product data.

Installation instructions.

1-4. BASIS FOR PAYMENT.

1-4.01. Sheeting for Excavation of Structures. No additional payment above the Contract Price

will be made for steel sheet piling left in place in excavations for structures.

1-5. INSURANCE. Professional Liability insurance shall be provided as specified in the

Supplementary Conditions.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

2-1.01. Filter Fabric. Filter fabric shall be provided in rolls wrapped with covering for

protection from mud, dirt, dust, and debris.

2-1.01.01. Filter Fabric Type A. Filter Fabric Type A shall be provided for installation at

locations indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Filter fabric Type A shall be a non-

woven fabric consisting of only continuous chains of polymeric filaments or yarns of polyester

formed into a stable network by needle punching. The fabric shall be inert to commonly

encountered chemicals; shall be resistant to mildew, rot, ultraviolet light, insects, and rodents;

and shall have the indicated properties:

Property Test Method Unit Min Roll Value*

Fabric Weight ASTM D3776 oz/yd2 [g/m2] 5.7 [193]

Grab Strength ASTM D4632 lb [N] 155 [689]

Grab Elongation ASTM D4632 percent 50

Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D3786 psi [MPa] 190 [1.3]

Apparent Opening

Size

CW-02215 U.S. Standard

Sieve Size

70 [212 µm]

*Minimum average roll value in weakest principal direction.

2-1.01.02. Filter Fabric Type B. Not used.

2-1.01.03. Filter Fabric Type C. Not used.

2-1.02. Polyethylene Film. Polyethylene film beneath concrete slabs or slab base course

material shall be Product Standard PS17, 6 mil minimum thickness.

2-1.03. General Fill and Embankment Materials. To the maximum extent available, excess

suitable material obtained from structure and trench excavation shall be used for the construction

of general fills and embankments. Additional material shall be provided from Contractor's off-

site source. No borrow pits shall be opened on site unless such pits are specifically indicated on

the drawings.

Fill material shall consist of non-plastic sand with less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.

Silty sands may be used as fill provided the material’s moisture content is adjusted to near

optimum to achieve the specified degree of compaction. All material placed in fills and

embankments shall be free from rocks or stones larger than the required size in their greatest

dimension, brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and other organic or deleterious materials. The

maximum size of stone in fills and embankment shall be 4 inches [100 mm]. No rocks or stones

shall be placed in the upper 18 inches [450 mm] of any fill or embankment. Rocks or stones

within the allowable size limit may be incorporated in the remainder of fills and embankments,

provided they are distributed so that they do not interfere with proper compaction.



(Group 4A2)

2-1.04. Granular Fill. Granular fill material shall be crushed rock or gravel suitable for use as a

free draining sub-base beneath slabs and foundations. Granular fill shall be free from dust, clay,

and trash; hard, durable, non-friable; and shall be graded 3/4 inch to No. 4 [19 to 4.75 mm] as

defined in ASTM C33 for No. 67 coarse aggregate. Granular fill shall meet the quality

requirements for ASTM C33 coarse aggregate. Only crushed rock with angular particles shall be

used when the perimeter of the granular fill is not confined or otherwise subject to raveling, such

as on a slope.

2-1.05. Structure Backfill. Structure backfill shall be defined as the material placed around and

outside of structures. Structure backfill shall be as indicated herein.

2-1.05.01. General Fill Structure Backfill. General fill for structure backfill shall meet the

requirements of the previous paragraph entitled "General Fill and Embankment Materials".

2-1.05.02. Crushed Rock Structure Backfill. At Contractor’s discretion crushed rock as

specified herein may be used for structure backfill. Crushed rock for structure backfill shall meet

the following gradation requirements:

Size Percent Passing

1/2 inch [12.5 mm] 100

3/8 inch [9.5 mm] 90 – 100

No. 4 [4.75 mm] 30 – 60

No. 8 [2.36 mm] 0 – 10

No. 200 [75 µm] 0 - 5

2-1.05.03. Clean Sand Structure Backfill. Not used.

2-1.06. Select Fill. Select fill shall be defined as the material placed beneath the structure

foundations and slabs below any granular material layer or lean concrete slab indicated on the

drawings. Select fill shall be used to replace any unsuitable material below the structure

foundations and slabs and to raise the site grades below and within 5 feet of structural footprints

and at locations indicated on the drawings. Select fill shall be as indicated herein.

2-1.06.01. General Fill Select Fill. General fill for use as select fill shall meet the requirements

of the previous paragraph entitled “General Fill and Embankment Materials”.

2-1.06.02. Crushed Rock Select Fill. At Contractor’s discretion crushed rock as specified herein

may be used for select fill. Crushed rock for select fill shall meet the following gradation

requirements:


1/2 inch [12.5 mm] 100

3/8 inch [9.5 mm] 90 - 100



(Group 4A2)


No. 4 [4.75 mm] 30 - 60

No. 8 [2.36 mm] 0 - 10

No. 200 [75 µm] 0 - 5

2-1.06.03. Clean Sand Select Fill. Not used.

2-1.07. Gravel Base Beneath Slabs. Not Used.

2-1.08. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM). Not used.

2-2. MATERIAL TESTING.

2-2.01. Preliminary Review of Materials. As stipulated in the Quality Control section, all tests

required for preliminary review of materials shall be made by an acceptable independent testing

laboratory at the expense of Contractor. Two initial gradation tests shall be made for each type

of general fill, designated fill, backfill, or other material, and one additional gradation test shall

be made for each additional 500 tons [450 Mg] of each material delivered to the jobsite. In

addition, one set of initial Atterberg Limits test shall be made for each fill material containing

more than 20 percent by weight pass the No. 200 sieve and for materials specified by Atterberg

Limits. One additional Atterberg Limits test shall be made for each additional 500 tons

[450 Mg] of each material delivered to the job site.

All material testing on CLSM shall be made by an independent testing laboratory at the expense

of Contractor.

2-2.02. Field Testing Expense. All moisture-density (Proctor) tests and relative density tests on

the materials, and all in-place field density tests, shall be made by an independent testing

laboratory at the expense of Contractor. Contractor shall provide access to the materials and

work area and shall assist the laboratory as needed in obtaining representative samples.

2-2.03. Required Field Tests. For planning purposes the following guidelines shall be used for

frequency of field tests. Additional tests shall be performed as necessary for job conditions and

number of failed tests. Test results shall be submitted as indicated in the Submittals section.

Two moisture-density (Proctor) tests in accordance with ASTM D698 (or, when

required, ASTM D1557), or two relative density tests in accordance with

ASTM D4253 and D4254 for each type of general fill, designated fill, backfill, or

other material proposed.

For area fills and embankments, an in-place field density and moisture test for each

1000 cubic yards [764 m3] of material placed.

One in-place field density and moisture test for every 100 to 200 cubic yards [76 to

153 m3] of structure backfill or select fill.



(Group 4A2)

Around manholes stagger tests within three feet of the structure’s outside diameter.

Perform first test one foot above the structure base. Perform second test two feet

above the first test and perform subsequent tests every two feet up to finished grade.

One in-place density and moisture test whenever there is a suspicion of a change in

the quality of moisture control or effectiveness of compaction.

At least one test for every full shift of compaction operations on mass earthwork.

Additional gradation, proctor, and relative density tests whenever the source or

quality of materials changes.

Testing of CLSM shall be as follows.

Compressive Strength. For every 200 cubic yard [153 m3] of flowable fill

placed, fill four 6 by 12 inch [150 by 300 mm] plastic cylinder molds to

overflowing and then tap sides lightly. Cure cylinders in the molds covered

until time of testing, at least 14 days. Strip the cylinders carefully using a

knife to cut away the plastic mold. Cap the cylinders with high strength

gypsum plaster or other capping process that will not break these low strength

materials. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. Two cylinders

shall be tested at 7 days and the other two cylinders shall be tested at 56 days.

Flow of Fill. Once each day that flowable fill is placed, test the fill material

in accordance with ASTM C939 for the efflux time. Wet screening may be

required to remove coarse particles.

Unit Weight and Yield. Once each day that flowable fill is placed, determine

unit weight and yield in accordance with ASTM C138.

Air Content. Once each day that flowable fill is placed, determine air content

in accordance with ASTM C231.

Penetration Resistance. Once each day that flowable fill is placed, determine

early bearing strength in accordance with ASTM C403 penetration procedure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. SITE PREPARATION. All sites to be occupied by permanent construction or

embankments shall be cleared of all logs, trees, stumps, weeds, roots, brush, tree trimmings,

rubbish, and other objectionable materials and debris. All stumps shall be grubbed. Grubbing

shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter,

matted roots, brush, timber, logs and any other organic or metallic debris not suitable for

foundation purposes, resting on, under or protruding through the surface of the ground to a depth

of 18 inches below the subgrade or to a depth as designated by the Engineer. Subgrades for fills

and embankments and sites to be occupied by permanent construction shall be cleaned and

stripped of all surface vegetation, sod, and organic topsoil. All waste materials shall be removed

from the site and disposed of by and at the expense of Contractor.

3-2. EXCAVATION.



(Group 4A2)

3-2.01. General. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work

to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall

excavation faces be undercut for extended footings.

Sub-grade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any kind when concrete is placed

thereon.

Except where exterior surfaces are specified to be damp-proofed, monolithic concrete manholes

and other concrete structures or parts thereof, which do not have footings that extend beyond the

outside face of exterior walls, may be placed directly against excavation faces without the use of

outer forms, provided that such faces are stable and also provided that a layer of polyethylene

film is placed between the earth and the concrete.

Excavations for manholes and similar structures constructed of masonry units shall have such

horizontal dimensions that not less than 6 inches [150 mm] clearance is provided for outside

plastering.

3-2.02. Classification of Excavated Materials. No classification of excavated materials will be

made for payment purposes. Excavation and trenching work shall include the removal and

subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the

work, regardless of the type, character, composition, or condition thereof.

3-2.03. Preservation of Trees. No trees shall be removed outside excavated or filled areas,

unless their removal is authorized by Owner. Trees left standing shall be adequately protected

from permanent damage by construction operations.

For limits of tree removal along pipeline routes, see the Temporary Facilities section under

“Protection of Public and Private Property”.

3-2.04. Unauthorized Excavation. Except where otherwise authorized, indicated, or specified,

all materials excavated below the bottom of concrete walls, footings, slabs on grade, and

foundations shall be replaced with concrete or lean concrete at the expense of Contractor. If

structural concrete replacement is chosen, it shall be with concrete placed at the same time and

monolithic with the concrete foundation.

3-2.05. Blasting. Blasting or other use of explosives for excavation will not be permitted.

3-2.06. Dewatering. Dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove and dispose of all

surface water and groundwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Each

excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the

structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed to the extent that no damage

from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.

All excavations for concrete structures or trenches which extend down to or below groundwater

shall be dewatered by lowering and keeping the groundwater level to the minimum depth of 24

inches [600 mm], beneath such excavations. The specified dewatering depth shall be maintained

below the prevailing bottom of excavation at all times.



(Group 4A2)

Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from entering excavations or trenches to

the greatest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property.

Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit used for drainage

purposes, and all such pipe or conduit shall be left clean and free of sediment.

3-2.07. Sheeting and Shoring. Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope, excavations

for structures and trenches shall be supported as necessary to prevent caving or sliding.

Steel sheet piling or other excavation support systems shall be furnished and installed as

necessary to limit the extent of excavations for the deeper structures and necessary backfill under

adjacent shallower structures, and to protect adjacent structures and facilities from damage due to

excavation and subsequent construction. Contractor shall assume complete responsibility for,

and install adequate protection systems for prevention of damage to existing facilities.

Excavation support systems and sheeting and shoring shall be all removed after completion of

work.shall be removed or left in place at Contractor's discretion.

The design of the excavation support system shall be such as to permit complete removal while

maintaining safety and stability in the excavation at all times.

Sheeting, shoring and excavation support systems shall be designed by a professional engineer

registered in the state where the project is located.

3-2.08. Stabilization. Sub-grades for concrete structures shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly

compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to

remain firm and intact under the feet of the workers.

Sub-grades for concrete structures which are otherwise solid, but which become mucky on top

due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with crushed rock or gravel as specified for

granular fills. The stabilizing material shall be placed in such a manner that no voids remain in

the granular fill. All excess granular fill with unfilled void space shall be removed. The finished

elevation of stabilized sub-grades shall not be above sub-grade elevations indicated on the

drawings.

3-2.09. Ring-wall Excavation. Not used.

3-2.10. Roadway Excavation. Excavation for the roadways, drives, and parking areas shall

conform to the lines, grades, cross sections, and dimensions indicated on the drawings and shall

include the excavation of all unsuitable material from the subgrade. After shaping to line, grade,

and cross section, the subgrade shall be compacted to a depth of at least 12 inches [300 mm] and

shall meet the following:

Test method to determine maximum

density and moisture.

ASTM D1557.

Relative compaction . 95%.



(Group 4A2)

Moisture content relative to the

optimum.

As required to achieve the specified

compaction

This operation shall include any reshaping and wetting or drying required to obtain proper

compaction. All soft or otherwise unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with

suitable material.

3-3. GENERAL FILLS AND EMBANKMENTS. Fills and embankments not required or

indicated to be designated fills shall be constructed as general fills and embankments. All fills

and embankments shall be constructed to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings.

Backfill materials shall be deposited in layers not to exceed 8 inches [200 mm] in uncompacted

thickness. Unless otherwise specified herein, the following governing standards apply:



ASTM D1557.

Relative compaction and moisture content

relative to the optimum.

95%.

Moisture content relative to the optimum. As required to achieve the

specified compaction

Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be done

except by permission of Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed

on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials, snow, or ice be placed in any backfill, fill, or

embankment.

3-3.01. Sub-grade Preparation. After preparation of the fill or embankment site, the sub-grade

shall be scarified and moisture conditioned to a minimum depth of 12 inches [300 mm], leveled

and rolled so that surface materials of the sub-grade will be at a moisture content and as compact

and well bonded with the first layer of the fill or embankment as specified for subsequent layers.

Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, the sub-grade shall be proof-rolled by a large vibratory

roller (Dynapac CA-25 or equivalent). Extreme caution shall be exercised when operating

vibratory equipment near existing structures to prevent damage to the structures. Provisions

shall be made to monitor the adjacent structures for damaging vibrations. Rollers shall be

operated in the static mode if excessive vibrations are experienced at the adjacent structures.

A minimum of 10 passes of the proof-rolling equipment shall be provided such that the last five

passes are made perpendicular to the first five passes.

All soft, yielding, or otherwise unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with

compacted fill.

Proofrolling shall be continued until the soil at the depth of 12 inches below the compaction

surface has attained a minimum of 95% of the maximum dry density per ASTM D1557.

3-3.02. Placement and Compaction. All fill and embankment materials shall be placed in

approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8 inches [200 mm] in un-compacted thickness.



(Group 4A2)

Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment shall be spread

and leveled before compaction.

Each layer of material shall have the best practicable moisture content for satisfactory

compaction. The material in each layer shall be wetted or dried to achieve the moisture content

relative to optimum as specified above, and shall be thoroughly mixed to ensure uniform

moisture content and adequate compaction. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted to the

required degree of compaction at the required moisture content. If the material fails to meet the

density specified, compaction methods shall be altered. The changes in compaction methods

shall include, but not be limited to, changes in compaction equipment, reduction in uncompacted

lift thickness, increase in number of passes, and better moisture control.

Wherever a trench is to pass through a fill or embankment, the fill or embankment material shall

be placed and compacted to an elevation not less than 12 inches [300 mm] above the top of pipe

elevation before the trench is excavated.

3-3.03. Borrow Pits. Borrow pits are not permitted at the project site.

3-4. DESIGNATED FILLS. Fills required or indicated to be designated fills shall be

constructed using the specific materials and placement requirements as specified herein. In

addition to the specific requirements specified herein, all requirements for general fills and

embankments shall apply. These requirements include, but are not limited to organic or

deleterious materials, subgrade preparation, lift thickness, and moisture conditioning

requirements. All designated fills shall be constructed to the lines and grades indicated on the

drawings. Backfilling and construction of fills during freezing weather shall not be done except

by permission of Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed on

frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials, snow, or ice be placed in any backfill, fill, or

embankment.

3-4.01. Granular Fill. Granular fills shall be provided where indicated on the drawings.

Granular fills shall be placed on suitably prepared sub-grades in uncompacted lift thickness of

6 inches [150 mm] or less and compacted by vibration. Granular fills shall be compacted to not

less than 70 percent relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254.

Where granular fills are to be covered with concrete, the top surface shall be graded to the

required sub-grade elevation. The completed fill shall be covered by a vapor barrier.

3-4.02. Structure Backfill. Backfill materials shall be deposited in layers not to exceed 8 inches

[200 mm] in uncompacted thickness and shall meet the following requirements:



ASTM D1557.

Relative compaction. 95%.

Moisture content relative to the optimum. As required to achieve the




(Group 4A2)

Compaction of structure backfill shall be performed in such a manner that damage to the

structure is prevented. The compaction equipment used within 8 feet [2.4 m] of the walls and for

the top 8 feet [2.4 m] of backfill shall be the static type. Limit of equipment weight shall be 1

ton [907 kg]. Compaction of structure backfill by inundation with water will not be permitted.

No backfill shall be deposited or compacted in water.

Particular care shall be taken to compact structure backfill which will be beneath pipes, drives,

roads, parking areas, walks, curbs, gutters, or other surface construction or structures. In

addition, wherever a trench is to pass through structure backfill, the structure backfill shall be

placed and compacted to an elevation not less than 12 inches [300 mm] above the top of pipe

elevation before the trench is excavated. Compacted areas, in each case, shall be adequate to

support the item to be constructed or placed thereon.

3-4.03 Select Fill. Select fill shall be placed in nearly horizontal layers in uncompacted lift

thickness of 8 inches or less and shall meet the following requirements:



ASTM D1557.

Relative compaction. 95%.

Moisture content relative to the

optimum.

As required to achieve the


3-4.04. Gravel Base Beneath Slabs. Not Used.

3-4.05. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Fill. Not used.

3-4.06. Ringwall Fill. Not used.

3-5. STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PREPARATION.

3-5.01. Excavation. Excavation below proposed foundations and slabs-on-grade shall consist of

removing all loose, soft or otherwise unsuitable material to the depths determined by Engineer.

Excavation shall be performed using methods and equipment that prevent disturbance of the

bearing materials. Should bearing materials become disturbed due to excavation operations, they

shall be recompacted, removed or stabilized to produce a firm, dense and thoroughly compacted

and consolidated subgrade to the satisfaction of Engineer.

3-5.02. Limits of Excavation. Excavations of unsuitable materials shall extend beyond the edge

of the footing a distance equal to the depth of overexcavation below the bottom of the footing or

3 feet, whichever is greater. In no case, however, shall proposed excavations undermine existing

foundations. Foundations and slabs of existing structures shall be positively supported by means

suitable to prevent damage to structures.

Damage to existing structures as a result of the Contractor's operations shall be corrected by the

Contractor to the satisfaction of Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor



(Group 4A2)

shall adequately survey the condition of the structure in the work area and provide a written

report to Engineer prior to excavation.

3-5.03. Subgrade Preparation. Prior to placing fills below footings and slabs and any filter

fabric and granular fill or gravel as indicated on the drawings, the subgrade shall be tested for

soft, loose, or unsuitable soils.

Subgrades to a depth of 24 inches below footings and slabs shall be compacted to at least 95

percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. This requirement does not

apply to the pump station structures designed to be constructed with a tremie concrete slab. For

these structures the subgrade shall be natural undisturbed soils. All loose, disturbed materials

shall be removed to the level of undisturbed materials.

Remove and replace the top 24 inches below the footings and slabs to meet the specified

compaction.

3-5.05. Replacement Materials. Materials used to replace existing unsuitable materials shall

meet the quality, classification and compaction requirements of select fill.

3-6. FINAL GRADING AND PLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL. After other outside work has been

finished, and backfilling and embankments completed and settled, all areas which are to be

graded shall be brought to grade at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours. All cuts, fills,

embankments, and other areas which have been disturbed or damaged by construction operations

shall be surfaced with topsoil to a depth of 4 inches [100 mm]. Topsoil shall be of a quality at

least equal to the existing topsoil in adjacent areas, free from trash, stones, and debris, and well

suited to support plant growth.

Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of

slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to manual methods. All surfaces shall be

graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise indicated, a slope of at least 1 percent

shall be provided.

Final grades and surfaces shall be smooth, even, and free from clods and stones, weeds, brush,

and other debris.

3-7. DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS. Suitable excavated materials may be used

in fills and embankments as needed. All excess excavated material shall be disposed of off site

at the expense of Contractor.

All debris, stones, logs, stumps, roots, and other unsuitable materials shall be removed from the

site and disposed of by, and at the expense of, Contractor.

3-8. RESODDING. All established lawn areas cut by the line of trench, by excavation, or

damaged during the work shall be resodded, after completion of construction, to the complete

satisfaction of the property owner and Owner. All sod used shall be the same type as removed or

damaged, shall be best quality, and, when placed, shall be live fresh growing grass with at least

1-1/2 inches [40 mm] of soil adhering to the roots.



(Group 4A2)

All sod shall be procured from areas where soil is fertile and contains a high percentage of loamy

topsoil and from areas that have been grazed or mowed sufficiently to form a dense turf.

Sod shall be transplanted within 24 hours from the time it is harvested, unless stacked at its

destination in a suitable manner. All sod in stacks shall be kept moist and protected from

exposure to the sun and from freezing. In no event shall more than 1 week elapse between

cutting and planting.

Before placing sod, all shaping and dressing of the areas shall have been completed. After

shaping and dressing, commercial fertilizer of a type acceptable to Owner shall be applied

uniformly in the manner and amounts recommended by the manufacturer, and harrowed lightly.

Sodding shall follow immediately.

All sodding shall be done during the period from March 15 to October 1, unless written

permission is given by Owner to extend the planting season.

3-9. SETTLEMENT. Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, fills, and

embankments which may occur within the correction period stipulated in the General

Conditions.

Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by

settlement within 30 days after notice from Engineer or Owner.

End of Section

PROTECTIVE SYSTEM

DESIGN CERTIFICATE

I undersigned engineer, hereby certify that the protection system for

(structure name) has been designed by me and is in

compliance with the Contract Documents.

Name: State of Registration: ____________

Signature: P.E. Number

Date:

(Seal)

FIGURE 1-02200



(Group 4A2)

Section 02202

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers clearing, grubbing, and preparation of the site; removal and

disposal of all debris; excavation and trenching; tunneled (trenchless construction) crossings; the

handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of all excavated material; all necessary sheeting,

shoring, and protection work; preparation of subgrades; pumping and dewatering as necessary;

protection of adjacent property; backfilling; pipe embedment; surfacing and grading; and other

appurtenant work.

1-2. GENERAL. With reference to the terms and conditions of the construction standards for

excavations set forth in OSHA "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", Chapter XVII

of Title 29, CFR, Part 1926, Contractor shall employ a competent person and, when necessary

based on the regulations, a registered professional engineer, to act upon all pertinent matters of

the work of this section.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Drawings, specifications, and data covering the proposed materials shall


At least 30 days before starting construction on the sheeting and shoring, the sheeting and

shoring design engineer shall complete and submit to Engineer the Protection System Design

Certificate (Figure 2-02202) and the Contractor shall use the sheeting and shoring design. A

separate certificate shall be submitted for each unique design. The certificate shall be signed and

sealed by the registered professional engineer that designed the protection system. The

professional engineer shall be licensed or registered in the state where the protection system is

located.

1-3.01. Filter Fabric Data. Complete descriptive and engineering data for the fabric shall be

submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Data submitted shall include:

A 12 inch square [300 mm] sample of fabric.

Manufacturer's descriptive product data.

Installation instructions.

1-4. BASIS FOR PAYMENT.

1-4.01. Trench Sheeting. No additional payment above the Contract Price will be made for

trench sheeting left in place.

1-5. INSURANCE. Professional Liability insurance shall be provided as specified in the

Supplementary Conditions.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

2-1.01. Filter Fabric. The fabric shall be provided in rolls wrapped with covering for protection

from mud, dirt, dust, and debris.

2-1.01.01. Filter Fabric Type A. Filter fabric Type A shall be provided for installation at

locations indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Filter Fabric Type A shall be a

nonwoven fabric consisting of only continuous chains of polymeric filaments or yarns of

polyester formed into a stable network by needle punching. The fabric shall be inert to

commonly encountered chemicals; shall be resistant to mildew, rot, ultraviolet light, insects, and

rodents; and shall have the indicated properties:

Property Test Method Unit

Minimum Average

Roll Value *

Fabric Weight ASTM D3776 oz/yd2 [g/m2] 5.7 [193]

Grab Strength ASTM D4632 lb [N] 155 [689]

Grab Elongation ASTM D4632 percent 50

Mullen Burst Strength ASTM D3786 psi [MPa] 190 [1.3]

Apparent Opening Size CW-02215 U.S. Standard Sieve

Size

70 [212 µm]

* Minimum average roll value in weakest principal direction.

2-1.01.02. Filter Fabric Type B. Not used.

2-1.02. Polyethylene Film. Polyethylene film beneath concrete slabs or slab base course

material shall be Product Standard PS17, 6 mil [150 mm] minimum thickness.

2-1.03. Tunnel Liner Plates. Not used.

2-1.04. Smooth Steel Pipe. Not used.

2-1.05. Wood Skids. Not used.

2-1.06. Casing Insulators. Not used.

2-1.07. Stabilized Sand Backfill. Not used.Stabilized sand shall be mixed in the proportions of

at least 282 lbs of Portland cement to each cubic yard of sand [167 kg of Portland cement to each

cubic meter of sand]. Cement, sand (fine aggregate), and water shall be as specified for

cast-in-place concrete.

2-1.08. End Closure. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

2-1.09. Inundated Sand Fill. Sand fill shall be clean, with not more than 25 percent retained on

a No. 4 [4.75 mm] sieve and not more than 7 percent passing a No. 200 [75 µm] sieve, and shall

have an effective size between 0.10 and 0.30 mm.

2-1.10. Graded Gravel Fill. Graded gravel for compacted trench backfill shall conform to the

following gradation:

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight

1 inch [25 mm] 100

3/4 inch [19 mm] 85 – 100

3/8 inch [9.5 mm] 50 – 80

No. 4 [4.75 mm] 35 – 60

No. 40 [425 µm] 15 – 30

No. 200 [75 µm] 5 – 10

The gravel mixture shall contain no clay lumps or organic matter. The fraction passing the No. 4

[4.75 mm] sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater

than 5.

2-1.11. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Fill. Not used.

2-1.12. Granular Fill. Granular fill material shall be crushed rock or gravel. Granular fill shall

be free from dust, clay, and trash; hard, durable, non-friable; and shall be graded 3/4 inch to

No. 4 [19 to 4.75 mm] as defined in ASTM C33 for No. 67 coarse aggregate. Granular fill shall

meet the quality requirements for ASTM C33 coarse aggregate.

2-2. MATERIALS TESTING.

2-2.01. Preliminary Review of Materials. As stipulated in the Quality Control section, all tests

required for preliminary review of materials shall be made by an acceptable independent testing

laboratory at the expense of Contractor. Two initial gradation tests shall be made for each type

of embedment, fill, backfill, or other material, and one additional gradation test shall be made for

each additional 500 tons [450 Mg] of each material delivered to the site. In addition, one set of

initial Atterberg Limits test shall be made for each fill materials containing more than 20 percent

by weight passing the No. 200 sieve [75 :m]. One additional Atterberg Limits test shall be made

for each additional 500 tons [450 Mg] of each material delivered to the site.

All material testing on CLSM shall be made by an independent testing laboratory at the expense

of Contractor.

2-2.02. Field Testing Expense. All moisture-density (Proctor) tests and relative density tests on

the materials, and all in-place field density tests, shall be made by an independent testing

laboratory at the expense of Contractor. Contractor shall provide access to the materials and

work area and shall assist the laboratory as needed in obtaining representative samples.



(Group 4A2)

2-2.03. Required Tests. For planning purposes, the following guidelines shall be used for

frequency of field tests. Additional tests shall be performed as necessary for job conditions and

number of failed tests. Test results shall be submitted as indicated in the Submittals section.

a. Two moisture density (Proctor) tests in accordance with ASTM D698 (or,

when required, ASTM D1557), or two relative density tests in accordance

with ASTM D4253 and D4254 for each type of general fill, designated fill,

backfill, or other material proposed.

b. In-place field density and moisture tests at intervals of 300 feet [90 m]

maximum along the trench. Within the trench, perform one test at the pipe

springline, at least one test for each 12-inch layer of backfill within the pipe

zone for pipes 24 inches and larger, one test at an elevation of one foot

above the top of the pipe, and one test for each two feet of backfill placed

from one foot above the top of the pipe to finished grade elevation.

c. One in-place field density and moisture test for every 200 cubic yards

[153 m3] of backfill or one test for every 100 square feet of backfill,

whichever criteria provides a higher number of tests.

d. One in-place density and moisture test whenever there is a suspicion of a

change in the quality of moisture control or effectiveness of compaction.

e. At least one test for every full shift of compaction operations on mass

earthwork.

f. Provide additional field density and moisture testing prior to commencing

further construction if the testing reports and inspection indicate that the fill

that has been placed is below specified density. The Owner may require

additional tests to certify the installation depending on field conditions.

g. Additional gradation, Proctor, and relative density tests whenever the source

or quality of material changes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. CLEARING. All clearing shall be performed as necessary for access, stringing of pipeline

materials, and construction of the pipeline and appurtenant structures.

3-2. EXCAVATION. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the

work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall

excavation faces be undercut for extended footings.

Subgrade surfaces shall be clean and free of loose material of any kind when concrete is placed

thereon.

Except where exterior surfaces are specified to be damp-proofed, monolithic concrete manholes

and other concrete structures or parts thereof, which do not have footings that extend beyond the

outside face of exterior walls, may be placed directly against excavation faces without the use of

outer forms, provided that such faces are stable and also provided that a layer of polyethylene

film is placed between the earth and the concrete.



(Group 4A2)

Excavations for manholes and similar structures constructed of masonry units shall have such

horizontal dimensions that not less than 6 inches [150 mm] clearance is provided for outside

plastering.

3-2.01. Classification of Excavated Materials. No classification of excavated materials will be

made for payment purposes. Excavation and trenching work shall include the removal and

subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the

work, regardless of the type, character, composition, or condition thereof.

3-2.02. Preservation of Trees. No trees shall be removed outside excavated or filled areas,

unless their removal is authorized by Owner. Trees left standing shall be adequately protected

from permanent damage by construction operations.

For limits of tree removal along pipeline routes, see the Temporary Facilities section under

“Protection of Public and Private Property”.

3-2.03. Blasting. Blasting or other use of explosives for excavation will not be permitted.

3-2.04. Dewatering. Dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove and dispose of all

surface water and groundwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work. Each

excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the

structure to be built, or the pipe to be installed therein, is completed to the extent that no damage

from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.

All excavations for concrete structures or trenches which extend down to or below groundwater

shall be dewatered by lowering and keeping the groundwater level to the minimum depth of 24

inches [600 mm], beneath such excavations. The specified dewatering depth shall be maintained

below the prevailing bottom of excavation at all times.

Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from entering excavations or trenches to

the greatest extent possible without causing damage to adjacent property.

Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit which he may use for

drainage purposes, and all such pipe or conduit shall be left clean and free of sediment.

Contractor shall obtain from the appropriate agencies and authorities, the dewatering and

stormwater discharge permits required to remove and dispose of groundwater, surface water, and

any other water used in Contractor's operations. The permits shall be obtained prior to start of

construction.

3-2.05. Sheeting and Shoring. Except where banks are cut back on a stable slope, excavations

for structures and trenches shall be supported with steel sheet piling and shoring as necessary to

prevent caving or sliding.

Sheet piling or other excavation support systems shall be installed as necessary to limit the extent

of excavations for deeper structures and to protect adjacent structures and facilities from damage

due to excavation and subsequent construction. Contractor shall assume complete responsibility

for, and shall install adequate protection systems for prevention of damage to existing facilities.



(Group 4A2)

Sheeting, shoring and excavation support systems shall be designed by a professional engineer

registered in the state where the project is located.

Trench sheeting may be removed if the pipe strength is sufficient to carry trench loads based on

trench width to the back of sheeting. Trench sheeting shall not be pulled after backfilling.

Where trench sheeting is left in place, it shall not be braced against the pipe, but shall be

supported in a manner which will preclude concentrated loads or horizontal thrusts on the pipe.

Cross braces installed above the pipe to support sheeting may be removed after pipe embedment

has been completed. Trench sheeting shall be removed unless otherwise permitted by Engineer.

Trench sheeting will not be removed, if in the opinion of Engineer, removal of the sheeting will

cause damage to the facility it is protecting. If left in place, the sheeting shall cut off 12 inches

below finished grade. The design of the support system shall be such as to permit complete

removal while maintaining safety and stability at all times.

3-2.06. Stabilization. Sub-grades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm,

dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall

be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact under the feet of the workers.

Sub-grades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which

become mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with crushed rock or

gravel as specified for granular fills. The stabilizing material shall be placed in a manner that no

voids remain in the granular fill. All excess granular fill with unfilled void space shall be

removed. The finished elevation of stabilized sub-grades shall not be above sub-grade elevations

indicated on the drawings.

3-3. TRENCH EXCAVATION. No more trench shall be opened in advance of pipe laying than

is necessary to expedite the work. One block or 400 feet [120 m], whichever is the shorter, shall

be the maximum length of open trench on any line under construction.

Except where tunneling is indicated on the drawings, is specified, or is permitted by Engineer, all

trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface.

3-3.01. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover. The alignment and grade or elevation of each

pipeline shall be fixed and determined from offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of

pipes, and the maximum joint deflection used in connection therewith, shall be in conformity

with requirements of the section covering installation of pipe.

Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the contract drawings, trenches shall

be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of

the pipe of ___ inchesmm over pipes below paved and graded streets and, of ___ inchesmm over

pipes in other locations. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to

provide adequate clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other

obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made

vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation, except

where future surface elevations are indicated on the drawings.

3-3.02. Maximum Trench Widths. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

3-3.03. Minimum Trench Widths. Except when maximum trench width is required for certain

conduits, trenches shall be excavated to the minimum trench widths indicated in the following

table. Trenches shall be excavated to a width which will provide adequate working space and

sidewall clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment.

Nominal Pipe Size Minimum Trench Width Clearance

Less than 27 in

[700 mm]

Pipe OD plus 24 in [600 mm] 12 in [300 mm]

27 in through 60 in

[700 mm through

1,500 mm]

Pipe OD plus nominal pipe size ID/2

Greater than 60 in [1,500

mm]

Pipe OD plus 70 in [1800 mm] 30 in [750 mm]

Clearance = Minimum sidewall clearance

OD = Outside diameter (or span) of conduit

ID = Inside diameter (or span) of conduit.

Specified minimum sidewall clearances are not minimum average clearances but are minimum

clear distances which will be required to the trench excavation or the trench protective system.

Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving shall be used

only in areas where the increased trench width will not interfere with surface features or

encroach on right-of-way limits.

3-3.04. Mechanical Excavation. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in

locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, or other existing

property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating

methods shall be used.

Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type, design, and construction,

and shall be so operated, that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled,

and that trench alignment is such that pipe, when accurately laid to specified alignment, will be

centered in the trench with adequate sidewall clearance. Undercutting the trench sidewall to

obtain sidewall clearance will not be permitted.

In locations where maximum trench widths are required for designated rigid conduits,

mechanical equipment shall be operated so that uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are

obtained at least from an elevation 12 inches [300 mm] above the top of the installed pipe to the

bottom of the trench.

3-3.05. Cutting Concrete Surface Construction. Cuts in concrete pavement and concrete base

pavements shall be no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for proper

installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be started with a concrete saw in a manner

which will provide a clean groove at least 1-1/2 inches [40 mm] deep along each side of the

trench and along the perimeter of cuts for structures.



(Group 4A2)

Concrete pavement and concrete base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be

removed so that a shoulder not less than 6 inches [150 mm] in width at any point is left between

the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not

be greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to

and between straight or accurately marked curved lines which, unless otherwise required, shall

be parallel to the center line of the trench.

Pavement removal for connections to existing lines or structures shall not exceed the extent

necessary for the installation.

Where the trench parallels the length of concrete walks, and the trench location is all or partially

under the walk, the entire walk shall be removed and replaced. Where the trench crosses drives,

walks, curbs, or other surface construction, the surface construction shall be removed and

subsequently replaced between existing joints or between saw cuts as specified for pavement.

3-3.06. Excavation Below Pipe Sub-grade. Except where otherwise required, pipe trenches shall

be excavated below the underside of the pipe, as indicated on Figure 1-02202, to provide for the

installation of granular embedment.

Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used for installing pipe. No

part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or granular

embedment when the pipe is jointed.

3-3.07. Artificial Foundations in Trenches. Whenever unsuitable or unstable soil conditions are

encountered, trenches shall be excavated below grade and the trench bottom shall be brought to

grade with suitable material. In such cases, adjustments will be made in the Contract Price in

accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions.

3-4. PIPE EMBEDMENT. Embedment materials both below and above the bottom of the pipe,

classes of embedment to be used, and placement and compaction of embedment materials shall

conform to the requirements indicated on Figure 1-02202 and to the following supplementary

requirements.

Embedment material shall contain no cinders, clay lumps, or other material which may cause

pipe corrosion.

3-4.01. Embedment Classes.

a. Class A Arch Encasement. When arch encasement is indicated on the

drawings, Class A arch encasement shall be used at all locations so

indicated.

When arch encasement is not indicated on the drawings, Class A arch

encasement is not required unless improper trenching or unexpected trench

conditions require its use as determined by Engineer.

Concrete and reinforcing steel for Class A arch encasement shall conform to

the requirements of the Cast-in-Place Concrete section.

b. Class B Bedding. Class B bedding shall be used for all steel, ductile iron,

pretensioned concrete and vitrified clay pipelines, and for all other pipelines

not otherwise specified.



(Group 4A2)

c. Class B Special Bedding. Class B special bedding shall be used for HDPE,

PVC, ABS, FRP, GRP, and when recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

d. Class C Bedding. Class C bedding shall be used for all reinforced concrete

and prestressed concrete pipelines.

3-4.02. Embedment for Ductile Iron, Steel, FRP, and PVC Pipelines. Granular embedment for

ductile iron, coal tar coated steel, FRP, and PVC pipelines shall be pea gravel or crushed rock

with rounded or subrounded particles; crushed rock with sharp edges which could cause

significant scratching or abrasion of the pipe or damage to the polyethylene tube protection shall

not be used. Inundated sand may be used for granular embedment in locations where the use of

water will cause no damage to adjacent property and where it can be placed and properly

compacted without damage to the pipe.

Inundated sand for granular embedment shall be deposited in, or placed simultaneously with the

application of water so that the sand is inundated during compaction. During placement, the

sand shall be compacted with a mechanical probe type vibrator. Water shall be allowed to

escape or shall be removed during vibration, and no ponding shall be allowed to take place.

Inundated sand shall be compacted to 70 percent relative density as determined by ASTM D4253

and D4254. If the required density cannot be achieved, placement and compaction methods shall

be altered.

3-4.03. Placement and Compaction. Granular embedment material shall be spread and the

surface graded to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath the pipe at all points

between bell holes or pipe joints. It will be permissible to slightly disturb the finished subgrade

surface by withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle.

After each pipe has been graded, aligned, and placed in final position on the bedding material,

and shoved home, sufficient pipe embedment material shall be deposited and compacted under

and around each side of the pipe and back of the bell or end thereof by shovel slicing or other

suitable methods to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during subsequent pipe

jointing and embedment operations.

Embedment material shall be deposited and compacted uniformly and simultaneously on each

side of the pipe to prevent lateral displacement.

Class C embedment shall be compacted to the top of the pipe in all areas where compacted

backfill is specified and also around the restrained pipe sections.

Each lift of granular embedment material shall be vibrated with a mechanical probe type vibrator

or shovel sliced during placement to ensure that all spaces beneath the pipe are filled. Granular

embedment shall be placed in maximum lift thickness of 6 inches [150 mm] and compacted.

Each lift of embedment material shall be compacted with three passes (round trip) of a platform

type vibrating compactor.

Where indicated on the drawings, migration of soil into the embedment material shall be

prevented with filter fabric Type A or by use of inundated sand embedment. Filter fabric shall

be placed on the trench surfaces so that it completely surrounds the embedment material. Joints

shall be lapped 12 inches [300 mm].



(Group 4A2)

3-4.04. Groundwater Barrier. Continuity of embedment material shall be interrupted by low

permeability groundwater barriers to impede passage of water through the embedment.

Groundwater barriers for sewer lines that contain manholes with cast-in-place bases shall be

compacted soil around each manhole, extending through any granular material beneath the

manhole, and meeting ASTM D2487 soil classification GC, SC, CL, or ML-CL and shall be

compacted to 92 percent of maximum density at near the optimum moisture content

(ASTM D1557). Material may be finely divided, suitable job excavated material, free from

stones, organic matter, and debris.

Groundwater barriers for sewer lines that contain manholes with precast (developed) bases and

for all other pipelines shall be soil plugs of 3 feet [1 m] in width, extending the full depth and

width of granular material, and spaced not more than 400 feet [120 m] apart. The soil plugs shall

be constructed from soil meeting ASTM D2487 classification GC, SC, CL, or ML, and

compacted to 92 percent of maximum density at near the optimum moisture content

(ASTM D1557).

3-5. TRENCH BACKFILL. All trench backfill above pipe embedment shall conform to the

following requirements.

A layer of backfill material not more than 8 inches [200 mm] deep may be placed over concrete

arch encasement or concrete reaction blocking after the concrete has reached its initial set, to aid

curing. No additional backfill shall be placed over arch encasement or blocking until the

concrete has been in place for at least 3 days.

3-5.01. Compacted Backfill. Compacted backfill will be required for the full depth of the trench

above the embedment in the following locations:

Where beneath pavements, surfacings, driveways, curbs, gutters, walks, or other

surface construction or structures.

Where in street, road, or highway shoulders.

In established lawn areas.

The top portion of backfill beneath established lawn areas shall be finished with at least

12 inches [300 mm] of topsoil corresponding to, or better than that which is underlying adjoining

lawn areas.

Trench backfill material shall be suitable job excavated materialinundated sandgraded gravel and

shall be as specified herein.

3-5.01.01. Job Excavated Material. Job excavated material may be used for compacted backfill

when the job excavated material is finely divided and free from debris, organic material, cinders,

any corrosive material, and stones larger than 3 inches [75 mm] in greatest dimension. Masses

of moist, stiff clay shall not be used. Job excavated materials shall be placed in uniform layers

not exceeding 8 inches [200 mm] in uncompacted thickness. Each layer of material shall have

the best possible moisture content for satisfactory compaction. The material in each layer shall

be wetted or dried as needed and thoroughly mixed to ensure uniform moisture content and

adequate compaction. Increased layer thickness may be permitted for noncohesive material if



(Group 4A2)

Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of Engineer that the specified compacted density will

be obtained. The method of compaction and the equipment used shall be appropriate for the

material to be compacted and shall not transmit damaging shocks to the pipe. Job excavated

material shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density at a moisture content within 2

percent of the optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D1557 when that test is

appropriate, or to 70 percent relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254 when

those tests are appropriate.

3-5.01.02. Inundated Sand. Sand shall be deposited in, or placed simultaneously with the

application of, water so that the sand is inundated during compaction. During placement, the

sand shall be compacted with a mechanical probe type vibrator. Water shall be allowed to

escape or shall be removed during vibration and no ponding shall be allowed to take place.

Inundated sand shall be compacted to 70 percent relative density as determined by ASTM D4253

and D4254.

3-5.01.03. Graded Gravel. Gravel backfill shall be deposited in uniform layers not exceeding

12 inches [300 mm] in uncompacted thickness. The backfill shall be compacted with a suitable

vibratory roller or platform vibrator to at least 70 percent relative density as determined by

ASTM D4253 and D4254.

Groundwater barriers specified under pipe embedment shall extend to the top of the graded

gravel backfill.

3-5.02. Ordinary Backfill. Compaction of trench backfill above pipe embedment in locations

other than those specified will not be required except to the extent necessary to prevent future

settlement. Contractor shall be responsible for backfill settlement as specified.

Ordinary earth backfill material to be placed above embedments shall be free of brush, roots

more than 2 inches [50 mm] in diameter, debris, cinders, and any corrosive material, but may

contain rubble and detritus from rock excavation, stones, and boulders in certain portions of the

trench depth.

Backfill material above embedments shall be placed by methods which will not impose

excessive concentrated or unbalanced loads, shock, or impact on installed pipe, and which will

not result in displacement of the pipe.

Compact masses of stiff clay or other consolidated material more than 1 cubic foot [0.03 m3] in

volume shall not be permitted to fall more than 5 feet [1.5 m] into the trench, unless cushioned

by at least 2 feet [600 mm] of loose backfill above pipe embedment.

No trench backfill material containing rocks or rock excavation detritus shall be placed in the

upper 18 inches [450 mm] of the trench, nor shall any stone larger than 8 inches [200 mm] in its

greatest dimension be placed within 3 feet [900 mm] of the top of pipe. Large stones may be

placed in the remainder of the trench backfill only if well separated and so arranged that no

interference with backfill settlement will result.

3-5.03. Water-Settled Earth Backfill. Settlement or consolidation of trench backfill using water

jetting or ponding shall not be performed.



(Group 4A2)

3-5.04. Structure Backfill. Backfill around manholes and small concrete vaults shall meet the

requirements specified for structure backfill specified in Section 02200.

3-5.05. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM). Not used.

3-6. TUNNEL EXCAVATION. Not used.

3-7. DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE. Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other

trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or watercourses shall not be backfilled prior to

completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the trafficway, to prevent

impounding water after the pipe has been laid. Bridges and other temporary structures required

to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be constructed and maintained by

Contractor. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially

filled trenches. All material deposited in roadway ditches or other watercourses crossed by the

line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is completed, and the original

section, grades, and contours of ditches or watercourses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall

not be obstructed longer than necessary.

3-8. PROTECTION OF TRENCH BACKFILL IN DRAINAGE COURSES. Not used.

3-9. FINAL GRADING AND PLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL. After other outside work has been

finished, and backfilling and embankments completed and settled, all areas which are to be

graded shall be brought to grade at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours. All cuts, fills,

embankments, and other areas which have been disturbed or damaged by construction operations

shall be surfaced with topsoil to a depth of at least 4 inches [100 mm]. Topsoil shall be of a

quality at least equal to the existing topsoil in adjacent areas, free from trash, stones, and debris,

and well suited to support plant growth.

Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of

slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to manual methods. All surfaces shall be

graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise indicated, a slope of at least 1 percent

shall be provided.

Final grades and surfaces shall be smooth, even, and free from clods and stones, weeds, brush,

and other debris.

3-10. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS. Disposal of excess material

from trench excavations on plant and major facility construction sites shall be accomplished as

indicated in the Earthwork section of the specifications for the major construction.

Disposal of excess material from other trench excavation sites shall be as follows. Except as

otherwise permitted, all excess excavated materials shall be disposed of away from the site.

Broken concrete and other debris resulting from pavement or sidewalk removal, excavated rock

in excess of the amount permitted to be installed in trench backfill, debris encountered in

excavation work, and other similar waste materials shall be disposed of away from the site.

Excess earth from excavations located in unimproved property may be distributed directly over

the pipe trench and within the pipeline right-of-way to a maximum depth of 6 inches [150 mm]



(Group 4A2)

above the original ground surface elevation at and across the trench and sloping uniformly each

way. Material thus wasted shall be carefully finished with a drag, blade machine, or other

suitable tool to a smooth, uniform surface without obstructing drainage at any point. Wasting of

excess excavated material in the above manner will not be permitted where the line of trench

crosses or is within a railroad, public road, or highway right-of-way. The disposal of waste and

excess excavated materials, including hauling, handling, grading, and surfacing, shall be a

subsidiary obligation of Contractor and no separate payment will be made therefore.

3-11. RESODDING. All established lawn areas cut by the line of trench or damaged during the

work shall be re-sodded, after completion of construction, to the complete satisfaction of the

property owner and Owner. All sod used shall be the same type as removed or damaged, shall be

best quality, and, when placed, shall be live fresh growing grass with at least 1-1/2 inches

[40 mm] of soil adhering to the roots.

All sod shall be procured from areas where soil is fertile and contains a high percentage of loamy

topsoil and from areas that have been grazed or mowed sufficiently to form a dense turf.

Sod shall be transplanted within 24 hours from the time it is harvested, unless stacked at its

destination in a suitable manner. All sod in stacks shall be kept moist and protected from

exposure to the sun and from freezing. In no event shall more than 1 week elapse between

cutting and planting.

Before placing sod, all shaping and dressing of the areas shall have been completed. After

shaping and dressing, commercial fertilizer of a type acceptable to Owner shall be applied

uniformly in the manner and amounts recommended by the manufacturer, and harrowed lightly.

Sodding shall follow immediately.

All sodding shall be done during the period from March 15 to October 1, unless written

permission is given by Owner to extend the planting season.

3-12. SETTLEMENT. Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of trench backfill

which may occur within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions.

Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by

settlement within 30 days after notice from Engineer or Owner.

End of Section

PROTECTIVE SYSTEM

DESIGN CERTIFICATE

I undersigned engineer, hereby certify that the protection system for

(trench location) has been designed by me and is in

compliance with the Contract Documents.

Name: State of Registration: ____________

Signature: P.E. Number

Date:

(Seal)

FIGURE 2-02202



(Group 4A2)

Section 02605

SEWER MANHOLES AND WETWELLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of wetwells, and standard and

drop sewer manholes. Wetwells, and standard and drop manholes shall be constructed complete

with covers, fittings, and other appurtenances.

Where required, special manholes and wetwells shall be constructed in accordance with the

details indicated on the drawings.

Frames and covers for structures other than sewer manholes are covered in the other sections.

Access hatches for the wetwells are covered in Section 08305.

1-2. GENERAL. Standard and drop manholes shall be constructed with precast concrete

(developed) bases; unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

Only manholes which are required to have outside pipe and fittings for dropping sewage into the

lower line will be designated as drop manholes. Inside drop manholes where the incoming line

discharges directly into the manhole and which do not require special fittings will be considered

standard manholes.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Drawings and data covering precast concrete sections and castings shall


When corrosion protection systems are specified, data submitted shall include corrosion

protection materials, method of application, maintenance requirements, and other pertinent data.

1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the

Shipping section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Handling and Storage

section.

Precast concrete sections shall not be delivered to the job until representative concrete control

cylinders have attained a strength of at least 80 percent of the specified minimum.

Precast concrete sections shall be handled carefully and shall not be bumped or dropped. Hooks

shall not be permitted to come in contact with joint surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.



(Group 4A2)

Precast Concrete Manholes and

Wetwells and Reinforcement

ASTM C478, except as modified herein.

Cement

Concrete Admixtures

Cement type shall comply with ASTM

C150, Type II. Water-cementitious

materials ratio shall not exceed 0.40.

Alternative materials proposed by

Contractor that will provide equivalent

corrosion protection and durability may be

submitted subject to review and acceptance

by Engineer.

Water proofing admixtures shall be utilized

to prevent water intrusion in lieu of

external coatings. Concrete admixtures

shall be Xypex, Kryton, or approved equal.

Admixture dosage rate shall be in

accordance with the admixture supplier’s

recommendations based on the concrete’s

environmental exposure.

Riser and Precast Base Circular, uniform outside diameter.

Minimum Wall Thickness

for Manholes

Minimum Wall Thickness

for Wetwells (12 foot

diameter)

Minimum Base Thickness

for Manholes

1/12 of inside diameter, plus 1 inch.

1/12 of inside diameter

8 inches

Cone Shape shall be concentric or eccentric as

required; wall thickness as specified for

riser sections.

Adjusting Rings Circular, with shear keys.

Cast-in-Place Concrete Bases Materials, handling, forms, finishing,

curing, and other work as specified in the

cast-in-place concrete section.

Nonshrinking Grout Grace "Supreme", L&M "Crystex", Master

Builders "Masterflow 713 Grout" or "Set

Grout", Sauereisen Cements "F-100 Level

Fill Grout", UPCO "Upcon Super Flow", or

Five Star Products "Five Star Grout".

Resilient Manhole/Pipe Connectors ASTM 923, A-Lok "Manhole Pipe Seal",

Press-Seal "Manhole Connectors", or

approved equal.



(Group 4A2)

Mastic Fill Butyl rubber compatible with resilient

connector material.

Gaskets

Mastic ASTM C990; Hamilton-Kent "Kent-Seal

No. 2", Sheller-Globe "Tac-Tite", or Henry

Company "Ram-Nek" or approved equal.

Cross-sectional area as recommended by

manhole manufacturer.

Rubber ASTM C361, Section 6.9.1, except gasket

shall be synthetic, with hardness of 40 ± 5

when measured by ASTM D2240, Type A

durometer. Natural rubber will not be

acceptable.

Rubber Joint Filler Synthetic.

Hardness 40 ± 5 when measured by ASTM D2240,

Type A durometer.

Tensile Strength 1,200 psi minimum.

Corrosion Protection System As specified herein.

Castings ASTM A48, Class 35B or better.

Manhole Rings and Covers US Foundry “USF 225-AS”, Vulcan, or

approved equal.

Manhole Top Encapsulation System ANSI/AWWA C216, Canusa

"WrapidSeal" Manhole Encapsulation

System.

2-2. MANUFACTURE. The first riser sections for use with cast-in-place bases shall be

provided with horseshoe-shaped boxouts for connecting piping to be grouted in, or with circular

openings with continuous, circular, resilient connectors cast into the riser wall. Boxouts for

grouting, if used, shall have surfaces grooved or roughened to improve grout bond.

Precast base sections shall be provided with circular openings, with continuous, circular, resilient

connectors cast into the wall.

Resilient connectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,

except that connectors shall be positioned so that sealing or resealing operations may be

accomplished from inside the manhole.

Precast sections may be provided with lifting notches on the inside faces of walls to facilitate

handling. Lifting notches shall be not more than 3 inches deep; holes extending through the wall

will not be acceptable.



(Group 4A2)

If precast concrete base sections are used, part of the concrete invert fill may be furnished with

the precast unit; however, a rough surface shall be provided to improve bond with the final invert

fill. At least the top 2 inches of the concrete invert fill shall be installed in the field.

2-3. INTERIOR CORROSION PROTECTION SYSTEM. A corrosion protection system shall

be applied to the interior surfaces of the manhole and wetwell. The corrosion protection system

shall adequately protect the concrete from corrosion caused by exposure to hydrogen sulfide

Information regarding the proposed corrosion protection system shall be submitted to Engineer

for review and acceptance. All new wetwells and manholes shall be lined. Any existing

wetwells and manholes shall be coated with approved interior surface coatings.

2-3.01. Manhole Interior.

Corrosion protection systems shall be as follows:

Surface Coatings - Interior

1. Sauereisen “210”

2. Aquata Poxy

3. Permite “PCA-9043 Type II”

4. Quadex “Alumina Liner”

5. THO ROC “HBS 100 Epoxy Liner System”

6. Lafarge Aluminates “Sewpercoat”

7. CCI Spectrum, Inc. “Spectrashield”

2-3.02. Wetwell Liners.

2-3.02.01 Fiberglass Liners.

Fiberglass reinforced polyester wetwell liner shall be manufactured from commercial

grade polyester resin or vinyl ester resin with fibreglass reinforcements. The resin

system shall be suitable for atmospheres containing hydrogen sulphide and dilute

sulphuric acid, as well as other gases associated with the wastewater collection

systems. The wetwell liner shall be a one-piece unit manufactured in accordance with

the requirements of ASTM D3753. All inserts and sleeves for piping shall be in

accordance with the liner manufacturer’s recommendations and shall result in

complete coverage of all pre-cast sections and be capable of passing a spark test.

2-3.02.02 HDPE Liner.

The HDPE embedment sheeting shall be mechanically bonded to the concrete by

integral studs. The liner shall be cast in place by the precast manufacturer and the

CONTRACTOR shall field weld the joints. Minimum thickness of liner is 80 mils.

All inserts and sleeves for piping shall be in accordance with the liner manufacturer’s

recommendations and shall result in complete coverage of all pre-cast sections and be

capable of passing a spark test.

2-3.02.03 Wetwell Lining Systems.

1. GU Liner – Reinforced Plastic Liner

2. AGRU Liner – HDPE Liner



(Group 4A2)

3. Flowtite Liners – Fiberglass Liner

4. GSE Studliner – HDPE Liner

5. L&F Manufacturing – Fiberglass Liner

6. AFE – Fiberglass Liner

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSPECTION. Precast concrete sections shall be inspected when delivered and all cracked

or otherwise visibly defective units shall be rejected.

3-2. CONSTRUCTION.

3-2.01. Bases. If cast-in-place concrete bases are used, concrete shall be placed on undisturbed

earth in accordance with applicable requirements of the Concrete section.

If precast concrete (developed) bases are used, the subgrade materials shall be excavated to

undisturbed earth and to a uniform elevation which will permit at least 4 inches of granular

embedment material, as specified in the Earthwork section, to be installed and compacted. The

surface of the granular material shall be carefully graded and the base section accurately set so

that connecting pipes will be on proper line and grade. The elevation of the granular material

shall be adjusted until proper grade and alignment of the base section has been attained.

No wedging or blocking under precast concrete bases will be permitted.

When resilient connectors are used with cast-in-place bases, the concrete fill under the

connecting pipe outside the manhole shall be deleted and shall be replaced with granular

embedment material to undisturbed earth.

In no case shall the invert section through a manhole be greater than that of the outgoing pipe.

The shape of the invert shall conform exactly to the lower half of the pipe it connects. Side

branches shall be connected with a radius of curve as large as practicable. All inverts shall be

towelled to a smooth, clean surface.

3-2.02. Riser and Cone Sections and Precast Concrete Adjusting Rings. Circular precast

sections and rings shall be provided with a rubber or mastic gasket to seal joints between sections

and rings. Mastic gaskets shall be used only at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.

Lifting notches in manhole and wetwell walls shall be filled with nonshrinking grout.

3-2.03. Connecting Piping. The space between connecting pipes and the wall of precast sections

shall be completely filled with nonshrinking grout, except where resilient connectors are

provided.

When resilient connectors are used, the connecting pipe shall be carefully adjusted to proper line

and grade, and the bedding material shall be compacted under the haunches and to the spring line

of the pipe for a distance of at least 6 feet from the manhole wall and to at least the minimum

trench width. The pipe shall be installed in the resilient connector prior to backfilling outside the



(Group 4A2)

manhole and shall be resealed after completion of the manhole and backfill. All visible leakage

shall be eliminated.

The connecting pipe for installation with resilient connectors shall be plain-end, square cut

spigots and shall not protrude more than 1 inch inside the manhole wall. A clear distance of at

least 1 inch from the end of each connecting pipe and around the pipe shall be provided when the

concrete invert fill is installed. After completion of the manhole, the boxout shall be filled with

mastic filler material, completely filling the space beneath the pipe and extending to at least the

spring line. The filler material shall provide a smooth, uniform surface between the inside

diameter of the pipe and the manhole invert.

At each special manhole, rubber joint filler shall be provided around connecting piping. The

filler shall be securely fastened in place with suitable wires or straps.

3-3. EXTERIOR COATING. Not Used

3-4. CASTING COATING. Not Used

3-5. STUBS. Not Used.

3-6. CONCRETE ADMIXTURES. Water proofing admixtures shall be utilized to prevent

water intrusion in lieu of external coatings. Concrete admixtures shall be Xypex, Kryton, or

approved equal. Admixture dosage rate shall be in accordance with the admixture supplier’s

recommendations based on the concrete’s environmental exposure.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02628

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing polyvinyl chloride (PVC) gravity sewer pipe and

fittings, complete with all jointing materials and appurtenances. Ribbed pipe or open profile pipe

will not be acceptable.

Pipe trenching, bedding, and backfilling are covered in the Trenching and Backfilling section.

1-2. SUBMITTALS. Drawings and data shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals

section. Drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Details of joints.

Gasket material.

Pipe length.

Certification in accordance with ASTM D3034, Section 11; ASTM F679,

Section 10; ASTM F1803, Section 12.

1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the


section.

Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in accordance with Chapter 6 of AWWA

Manual M23, to ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall not be stored

uncovered in direct sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

Pipe and Fittings.

Solid wall 4 through 15 inches. ASTM D3034, Cell Classification 12454.

SDR 35 for depth of cut greater than 4 ft

and less than 12 ft; SDR 26 for any depth.

18 through 60 inches. ASTM F1803, or ASTM F679, Wall T-1,

Cell Classification 12454. SDR 35 for

depth of cut greater than 4 ft and less than

12 ft; SDR 26 for any depth.

Jointing Materials.



(Group 4A2)

Bell-and-Spigot Joints. ASTM D3212, integral bell push-on type

elastomeric gasket joints.

Gaskets. ASTM F477, synthetic rubber. Natural

rubber will not be acceptable.

Field-Cut Joints and

Connections to Other Piping

Materials.

Fernco "Flexible Couplings" or Mission

"Eastern Standard Band-Seal Couplings"

with stainless steel shear rings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION AND TESTING. Pipe will be installed and tested in accordance with

Section 02702.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02630

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of 4 through 30 inch buried

polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe for force mains. PVC pressure pipe shall be furnished

complete with all fittings, jointing materials, anchors, blocking, encasement, and other necessary

appurtenances.

Pressure and leakage tests, cleaning, and disinfection, are covered in other sections. Pipe

trenching, bedding, and backfill are covered in the Trenching and Backfilling section.

Pipe shall be furnished where indicated in the pipeline schedule or where indicated on the

drawings.

1-2. GOVERNING STANDARDS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all PVC

pressure pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C900 and C905.

The supplementary information required in the governing standards is as follows:

Affidavit of Compliance Required.

Plant Inspection Not required.

Special Markings Not required.

Special Preparation for Shipment Not required.

Certification Required.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Drawings and data shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals

section. Drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Gasket material.

Pipe length.

Affidavit of Compliance (ANSI/AWWA C900, Sec. 6.3).

Affidavit of Compliance (ANSI/AWWA C905, Sec. 6.3).

Certification (ANSI/AWWA C900, Sec. 4.2.3).

Certification (ANSI/AWWA C905, Sec. 4.2.3).

1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the


section.



(Group 4A2)

Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in accordance with Chapter 6 of AWWA

Manual M23, to ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall not be stored

uncovered in direct sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. DIMENSIONS. The dimension ratios (DRs: outside diameter to wall thickness) of PVC

pressure pipe shall be as indicated in the PVC Pressure Pipe Schedule 02630-S01.

2-2. MATERIALS.

Pipe ANSI/AWWA C900 or C905 minimum

100 psi working pressure rating; cast iron

pipe OD, dimension ratio as specified

herein.

Fittings Cast iron; ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10,

250 psi pressure rating, except shorter

laying lengths will be acceptable.

Joints

PVC to PVC ANSI/AWWA C900 or C905, stab type,

with elastomeric synthetic rubber gaskets.

Gaskets of natural rubber will not be

acceptable.

PVC to Cast Iron ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11, except

gaskets shall be synthetic rubber. Natural

rubber will not be acceptable.

Tapping Saddles Ductile iron, with galvanized steel straps

and synthetic rubber sealing gasket, 250 psi

pressure rating.

Restrained Joints ASTM F1674, EBAA Iron 2000 PV series

(4 inch through 24 inch), Star Pipe

Products “Stargrip” Series 4000, Ford

Uniflange Series 1500, or approved equal.

Tapping Sleeves Ductile iron, 250 psi pressure rating.

Manufacturing quality control shall be maintained by frequent, regularly scheduled sampling and

testing. Testing shall comply with the governing standards.

2-3. SHOP COATING AND LINING. The exterior surfaces of cast iron fittings shall be coated

with a bituminous coating. The interior surfaces of cast iron fittings shall be lined in accordance

with the Ductile Iron Pipe section.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSPECTION. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects

immediately before installation; spigot ends and bells shall be examined with particular care. All

defective pipe and fittings shall be removed from the site of the work.

3-2. LAYING PIPE. Pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by pipe embedment

material installed as specified in the Trenching and Backfilling section. Pipe shall not be laid in

water or other unsuitable conditions.

Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing the direction of laying, except when reverse laying is

specifically permitted by Engineer.

Foreign matter shall be prevented from entering the pipe during installation.

Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the line shall be sealed with a watertight plug.

All water shall be removed from the trench prior to removing the plug.

3-2.01. Cleaning. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before

installation and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted.

3-2.02. Alignment. Piping shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings.

Pipelines or runs intended to be straight shall be laid straight. Deflections from a straight line or

grade shall not exceed the maximum deflections specified by the manufacturer.

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, and subject to acceptance by Engineer,

either shorter pipe sections or fittings shall be installed as required to maintain the indicated

alignment or grade.

3-2.03. Locating Wire. Locating wire, for electronically locating pipe after it is buried, shall be

attached along the length of and installed with the pipe. This is applicable to all sizes and types

of pressure mains. The tracing wire is to be attached to the pipe with nylon wire tires, as shown

on the Drawings. The wire itself shall be 10-guage single strand solid core copper wire with

non-metallic insulation. The insulation shall be color coded for the type of pipe being installed.

Continuous continuity must be maintained in the wire along the entire length of the pipe run.

Permanent splices must be made in the length of the wire using wire connectors approved for

underground applications as listed in the uniform electric code handbook. The wire shall extend

to the surface and be connected to a test station box at valve locations in the manor, as shown on

the Drawings.

3-3. CUTTING PIPE. Cutting shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and

with Chapter 7 of AWWA Manual M23. Cuts shall be smooth, straight, and at right angles to

the pipe axis. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be dressed to remove all roughness and

sharp corners and shall be beveled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3-4. JOINTS. Joints shall be stab-type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.



(Group 4A2)

3-4.01. Stab Type Joints. Jointing shall conform to the instructions and recommendations of the

pipe manufacturer. All surfaces for gasketed joints shall be lubricated immediately before the

joint is completed. Gaskets and lubricants shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer, shall be

suitable for use in potable water, shall be compatible with the pipe materials, shall be stored in

closed containers, and shall be kept clean. Each spigot shall be suitably beveled to facilitate

assembly.

3-4.02. Mechanical Joints. Mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations. If effective sealing is not obtained, the joint shall be

disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled. Over-tightening of bolts to compensate for

poor installation practice will not be permitted.

3-5. POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT. Not used.

3-6. CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING. Connections with existing pipes shall be

made using fittings suitable for the conditions encountered. Each connection with an existing

pipe shall be made at a time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to

customers, and as authorized by Owner. Facilities shall be provided for proper dewatering and

for disposal of water removed from the dewatered lines and excavations without damage to

adjacent property.

3-7. SERVICE CONNECTIONS. Not used.

3-8. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. Concrete encasement shall be installed as indicated on the

drawings. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete

section. All pipe to be encased shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper position and

shall be anchored against flotation.

3-9. RESTRAINED JOINTS. All bell-and-spigot or all-bell tees, Y-branches, bends deflecting

11-1/4 degrees or more, valves, and plugs which are installed in piping subjected to internal

hydrostatic heads in excess of 30 feet shall be provided with suitable restrained joints.

All steel clamps, rods, bolts, and other metal accessories used in tapping saddles or reaction

anchorages subject to submergence or in contact with earth or other fill material, and not encased

in concrete, shall be coated in accordance with the Protective Coatings section.

3-10. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS. After installation, PVC piping shall be

hydrostatically tested for defective workmanship and materials as specified in the Pipeline

Pressure and Leakage Testing section.

3-11. LEAKAGE. All PVC piping shall be watertight and free from leaks. Each leak which is

discovered within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall be repaired by

and at the expense of Contractor.

End of Section


(Master Pump Station Improvements) 02630-S01--1 October 2011

(Group 4A2)

Schedule 02630-S01

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe Schedule

Size Dimension

Ratio

Location

in.

4 to12 18 Below grade force main piping

16 to 24 25 Below grade force main piping



(Group 4A2)

Section 02631

CURED-IN-PLACE LINING OF GRAVITY MAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The WORK within this section consists of the installation and testing of cured-in-place

sewer pipe lining to rehabilitate deteriorated sections (manhole to manhole) of gravity

mains and sewer laterals.

B. The finished liner shall extend over the installation length in a continuous, tight

fitting, watertight pipe-within-a-pipe and shall be fabricated from materials which,

when installed, will be chemically resistant to withstand internal exposure to domestic

sewage. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm, through field measurements, the actual

length, diameter and depth of the sewer pipe to be rehabilitated prior to fabricating

the liner.

1.02 INSTALLER EXPERIENCE

A. The installer must have a minimum of three years of experience in the commercial

installation of the liner and must have installed a minimum of 200,000 lineal feet of

the liner in sewer collection pipes in the State of Florida. The inability to document

such experience may be grounds for rejecting the proposed installer.

B. Liner installer shall be an underground utilities CONTRACTOR licensed by the State

of Florida and certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner

system in the State of Florida.

1.03 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) LINER

A. Cured-in-place pipe liner shall be as furnished by Insituform “CIP Liner”, National

“CIP Liner”, LMK Enterprises “Performance Liner”, Steven's Technologies “CIP

Liner 2 part 100% epoxy”, Inner Cure Technologies “Reichhold/DION CIP Liner”,

Lanzo Lining “Lanzo CIP Lining System”, Reynolds Inliner “Reichold/Intech”,

FirstLiner “FirstLiner CIP Lining System”, Premier Pipe “Premier Pipe CIP Lining

System” or approved equal.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 LINER MATERIALS

A. The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with an epoxy, vinyl ester or

polyester resin prior to insertion. The liner and resin material shall be in accordance

with the requirements of ASTM F1216 and shall be fabricated to a size that when

installed will neatly fit the interior of the host pipe. Allowance shall be made for

circumferential stretching during inversion. The sewer service lateral liner shall be a

single piece liner that lines the lateral and be a contiguous part of the mainline.



(Group 4A2)

B. The minimum tube length shall be that deemed necessary by the CONTRACTOR to

effectively span the distance between the access points, i.e. from manhole to manhole.

The installer shall verify the lengths in the field before impregnation.

C. Unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR will use a polyester filter felt tube

and a resin and catalyst system compatible with the inversion process and having the

physical properties for the cured pipe identified in Table 3.45-1.

Table 3.45-1. Physical Properties.

Property Standard PSI

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 4,000

Flexural Strength ASTM D790 5,000

Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 400,000

Minimum Long Term (50 years)

Modulus of Elasticity

ASTM D2990 150,000

D. The lining manufacturer shall submit to the COUNTY for approval, complete design

calculations for the liner, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in

the State of Florida and certified by the manufacturer as to the compliance of his

materials to the values used in the calculations. It shall be assumed that a fully

deteriorated gravity sewer pipeline having no structural strength is to be rehabilitated.

E. The criteria for liner design shall provide for H-20 live traffic load, earth load at 120

pounds per cubic foot, the water table at the ground surface, the liner side support

shall be considered as if provided by soil pressure against the liner, the existing pipe

shall not be considered as providing any structural support and the liner shall have a

minimum expected lifetime of 50 years. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a tight fit

to the host pipe by properly sizing the liner. The liner shall be continuous, seamless,

and joint less from manhole to manhole.

F. The liner shall be designed for a safety factor of 2. An enhancement factor K of 7, a

minimum ovality of 3%, and a soil modulus of 700 psi shall be used in the design.

G. The liner shall be designed in accordance with ASTM F1216. In no case shall the

cured-in-place pipe liner finish wall thickness be less than 0.236 inches (6mm) for

pipe sizes 8-inch through 12-inch diameter.

H. As part of the design calculation submittal, the liner manufacturer shall submit a

tabulation of time versus temperature. This tabulation shall show the lengths of time

that exposed portions of the liner will endure without self-initiated cure or other

deterioration beginning. This tabulation shall be at five degree Fahrenheit increments

ranging from 70 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. The manufacturer shall also submit his

analysis of the progressive effects of such “pre-cure” on the insertion and cured

properties of the liner. This information shall be submitted in a timely fashion prior

to construction. The minimum liner thickness is for materials with characteristics as

shown. Bidders with materials with other characteristics must supply complete

information in their bids of the values as listed for ascertaining minimum thickness.



(Group 4A2)

I. No liner shall be installed until the COUNTY has approved the design calculations.

2.02 LATERAL LINING & SEALING SYSTEM

A. Top Hat Type Liner: Amerik Supplies, Inc. Top Hat or equal.

1. Extend at least 7 inches into lateral and create at least a 3 inch brim molded flat

against lined mainline pipe.

2. Tube thickness: Designed for fully deteriorated laterals.

B. T-Liner: LMK Enterprises Inc. T-liner or equal.

1. Provides an internal spot repair over connection at mainline and runs an attached

lateral liner up through cleanout.

C. Lateral Lining

1. Meet minimum chemical resistance and structural requirements of Section 2.01 of

this specification.

2. Shall be equal or better than the Mainline Liner.

2.03 GROUT MATERIAL

A. The grout shall be a "flowable fill" consisting of a mixture of Type 1 Portland

Cement, Type "F" Flyash (ASTM 618), sand and water.

B. The mixture shall contain a minimum of 50 pounds cement and minimum of 400

pounds flyash per cubic yard of grout.

2.04 GROUTING EQUIPMENT

A. All grout shall be mixed with a high shear, high-energy colloidal type mixer to

achieve the best uniform density.

B. The grout shall be pumped with a non-pulsating centrifugal or tri-plex pump.

C. The mixer shall be capable of continuous mixing. Batch mixing shall not be

permitted.


3.01 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES

A. Before proceeding with the installation of the cured-in-place sewer pipe lining, the

CONTRACTOR shall complete all preparatory procedures including, but not limited

to, safety measures, traffic control, flow control, cleaning, television inspection, and

obstruction removal. The preparatory procedures shall be in accordance with the

applicable sections of these specifications and as follows.



(Group 4A2)

1. Notification of Public or Customers:

Customers shall be notified by the CONTRACTOR with door hanger advising the

customers of when the WORK will begin, expected date of completion, the type

of WORK and contact person for any questions.

2. Safety:

The CONTRACTOR shall carry out his operation in strict accordance with all

applicable OSHA standards. Particular attention is drawn to those safety

requirements involving working with scaffolding and entering and working in

confined spaces.

3. Traffic Control:

The CONTRACTOR shall provide all traffic control measures required for the

safety of the public, workers and equipment during the WORK and in accordance

with FDOT and the COUNTY.

4. Flow Control:

a. Flow control shall be exercised as required to ensure that no flowing sewage

comes into contact with sections of the sewer under repair.

b. A sewer line plug shall be inserted into the sewer upstream from the section to

be repaired. The plug shall be so designed that all or any portion of the

sewage flows can be released. During the review, testing and installation

portion of the operation, flows shall be shut off in order to properly install the

cured-in-place pipe lining. The upstream manholes shall be constantly

monitored for degree of surcharging. After the installation is complete, flows

shall be restored to normal level.

c. Wherever lines are blocked off and the possibility of backing up the sewage

and causing harm to public and private property is foreseen, it shall be the

CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to bypass flow from manhole to manhole.

d. Bypassing shall be accomplished using sewer plugs with pump connections,

by pumping down surcharged manholes, or by other methods acceptable to the

COUNTY. All bypassed flow must be discharged to a sanitary sewer.

Bypassed flow shall not be allowed to enter any storm line, drainage ditch or

street gutter.

e. During a bypass operation, the pump shall be manned continuously; the

CONTRACTOR shall maintain the pump and bypass equipment; and shall be

responsible for any damages to public or private property due to the

malfunction of same.

5. Cleaning:

a. Preparation of the interior surface shall be accomplished by a thorough high

pressure water-jet cleaning. The pipe shall be left free of all loose sand, rock,

or other deleterious materials. Any roots in the pipe shall be either removed

or cut off flush with the interior.

b. If conditions such as broken pipe and major blockages are found that will

prevent proper cleaning or where additional damage would result if cleaning

is attempted or continued, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the COUNTY



(Group 4A2)

immediately. The COUNTY will determine what course of action will be

taken to complete the project.

c. Precautions shall be taken by the CONTRACTOR to ensure that no damage or

flooding of public or private property is caused by the cleaning operation.

d. The COUNTY shall inspect the prepared pipe for cleanliness and smoothness

before the CONTRACTOR is authorized to proceed with pipe lining

operations.

6. Television Inspection:

Experienced personnel trained in locating breaks, obstacles and service

connections by closed-circuit television shall perform inspection of sewer line.

The interior of the pipeline shall be carefully inspected to determine the location

of any condition that shall prevent proper installation, such as roots, collapsed or

crushed pipe, significant line sags or deflected joints, and other protrusions with

sharp edges. These conditions shall be documented. A digital data video and a

suitable log shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR during the WORK and

provided to the COUNTY.

7. Obstruction Removal:

The line shall be cleared of obstructions such as solids, roots, intruding service

connections or collapsed pipe that may prevent installation. If inspection reveals

an obstruction that cannot be removed by conventional sewer cleaning equipment,

then the Contractor shall immediately notify the COUNTY, and propose a plan

for removing the obstruction. The proposed plan shall be approved in writing by

the COUNTY’s representative prior to the commencement of the work and shall

be considered as a separate pay item.

3.02 LINER INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

A. The cured-in-place sewer pipe liner shall be installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s written specifications and recommendations and these

SPECIFICATIONS. Should there be any difference between the requirements, the

more stringent shall govern. Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall submit

to the COUNTY such written information which shall include, but not be limited to,

storage and handling of liner before installation, preparing liner for installation,

installing the liner in the sewer pipe, temperature and pressure requirements for

inverting and setting the liner, curing and cool down procedures, end seals and

opening of service connections. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit to the

COUNTY, a description of his methods for avoiding liner stoppage due to conflict

and friction at such locations as the manhole entrance and the bend into the pipe

entrance. He shall also present plans for dealing with a liner stopped by snagging

within the pipe.

B. Process Monitoring

1. Use sensors to monitor and maintain curing temperature and internal pressure

throughout length of liner following manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Sensor Placement



(Group 4A2)

a. The heat source shall be fitted with suitable monitors to gauge the

temperature of the incoming and outgoing heat exchanger circulating

water.

b. Another such gauge shall be placed between the tube and the host pipe in the downstream manhole at or near the bottom to determine the temperatures

during cure. c. Extra temperature gauges shall be placed inside the tube at the invert level of

each end. 3. Record pressure and temperature readings.

a. Electronically record continuous pressure and temperature reading on

printout.

b. Start time along with peak pressure and temperature.

c. Gradual build up to curing period along with maximum temperature

and pressure.

d. Start of gradual dropping of curing temperature.

e. Cool down duration along with relaxing temperature and pressure.

f. Start of gradual release of curing pressure.

g. Ending.

4. If electronic recording fails, record temperature and pressure readings on log

every 10 minutes starting before adding pressure to liner and ending 20

minutes after pressure is relieved.

5. The Contractor shall have on hand at all times, for use by his personnel and the

Engineer, a digital thermometer or other means of accurately and quickly checking

the temperature of exposed portions of the liner.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the COUNTY of any construction

delays taking place during the insertion operation. Such delays may require sampling

and testing by an independent laboratory of some portions of the cured liner at the

COUNTY’s discretion. The cost of such test shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR

and no extra compensation shall be allowed. Any failure of sampling and testing or a

lack of immediate notification of delay shall be automatic cause for rejection of that

part of the WORK at the COUNTY’s discretion.

D. The water circulating and heating system used for curing shall have the written

approval of the manufacturer. The system, together with the manufacturer’s

approval, shall be submitted to the COUNTY for review prior to lining operations.

Temperatures shall be monitored and recorded throughout the installation process to

ensure that each phase of the process is achieved at the manufacturer’s recommended

temperature levels. Copies of these records shall be given to the COUNTY at the

completion of each installation.

E. Curing and cool down procedures shall be as specified by the manufacturer. When

draining water, care shall be exercised not to create a vacuum in the line.

F. Top half of liner sections through manholes shall be removed after curing. Additional

portions may be removed to allow existing side connections to flow into the liner

pipe. CONTRACTOR shall apply a sealant compatible with the resin mixture used in

the liner and completely seal any cut surface of the liner to the manhole.



(Group 4A2)

G. The CIPP liner shall be neatly and smoothly cut off at each manhole. The manhole

trough shall be raised to the invert of the liner to preclude snagging and shoaling of

debris.

H. The CONTRACTOR shall seal the liner at all manhole reconnections with an

approved product, compatible with the liner, to completely seal any annular space

present.

I. The finished product shall be continuous over the length of pipe constructed and be

free from dry spots, delamination and lifts. No visible leaks shall be present and the

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for grouting to remove leaks or fill voids

between the host pipe and the liner.

J. After the liner has been installed, the CONTRACTOR shall reinstate the existing

service connections. This shall be done from the interior of the pipeline without

excavation. Where holes are cut through the liner, they shall be neat and smooth in

order to prevent blockage at the service connections. Cut-in service connections shall

be opened to 100 percent of the inside diameter of the service lateral. All coupons

shall be recovered at the downstream manhole and removed.

K. The CONTRACTOR shall seal the reinstated laterals by utilizing approved materials

as specified in Section 2.02 of this Specification. No visible leakage will be allowed.

L. If the lateral is indicated to be lined, the sealing of the lateral connection shall be

performed after or in conjunction with the lateral liner installation.

3.03 LATERAL LINING INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

A. Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COUNTY for review a

complete description of the methods he intends to use to reline the lateral and seal the

lateral to mainline connection.

B. The Contractor shall clean the lateral to be lined and the main line of all debris, roots and

other materials that would block proper installation of the liner and dispose of any

resulting material.

C. Each lateral to be lined shall be inspected from the mainline or cleanout pit,

showing the lateral ready for lining. The inspection shall be done by CCTV. The

mainline shall also be inspected for problems that will prevent setup at the

connection. The inspection of lateral and main line shall be performed by experienced

personnel trained in locating breaks, obstacles, and service connections using closed

circuit television (CCTV). The interior of each lateral shall be carefully inspected prior to

the day of installation of the liner to determine the location of any conditions that may

prevent proper installation of liner into the lateral. All such conditions shall be

documented. The Contractor shall keep a suitable log for reference and shall record all

CCTV inspections on DVD.

D. In the event that pre-installation inspection reveals an obstruction in the lateral that will

prevent a successful installation process, and that the obstruction can not be removed by

conventional sewer cleaning equipment, then the Contractor shall abandon the liner

installation process and seek the COUNTY’s approval to replace the lateral by open cut

which will be paid under a separate pay item.



(Group 4A2)

E. In the event that the lateral has a less than 2 percent grade, has debris trapping

sags, has heavy grease build-up, or is crushed, it shall not be lined. Instead, the Contractor shall abandon the liner installation and seek the COUNTY’s approval to

replace the lateral by open cut which will be paid under a separate pay item.

F. In the event that the service connection of the lateral to be lined is protruding into the

sewer, it shall be cut or ground down so as to be flush with the pipe prior to liner

installation.

G. In the event that there is no cleanout present, the Contractor shall install a

cleanout just off the property line before lining the lateral.

H. The Contractor shall provide flow control and bypass pumping, if required, of sewage

flows around the section of pipe containing the lateral designated for rehabilitation. The

cost for maintaining sanitary sewer service for the property owners during construction

shall be included in the prices bid and no additional compensation will be allowed.

I. The Contractor shall make every effort to maintain sewer service usage throughout the

duration of the project. In the event that a connection will be out of service, the longest

period of no service shall be 8 hours.

J. When reinstating the sewer services, a suitable dam or weir shall be placed in the

downstream manhole to trap all cut out materials. Passing material from manhole section

to manhole section, which could cause line stoppages, accumulations of sand in wet

wells, or damage pumping equipment, shall not be permitted.

K. The Contractor shall furnish and install the liner in the lateral for the length as shown on

the Drawings. The installation of the liner shall be in complete accordance with the

applicable provisions herein and the manufacture's installation requirements.

1. The Contractor shall rough-up and prepare the main line for installation of liner.

2. Locate temperature sensing devices, such as thermocouples, between existing

pipe and lateral liner to ensure quality of cure of liner.

3. Prepare, install, and handle impregnated felt per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

4. Install the liner with no twist, cutting, kinks, gouging, overstressing, or double-

ups before commencing curing process.

5. Ensure resin and tubes are protected during placement.

6. Do not contaminate or dilute resin by exposure to dirt, debris or water during

placement.

7. Apply resin by vacuum following manufacturer’s recommendation and using

manufacturer’s factory proportioned mix.

8. Save piece of resin impregnated tube identified as Wick to provide verification of

curing.

9. Invert tube from process’s launcher by controlled means, assuring even feed of

tube into lateral and that installing pressures do not exceed 10 to 15 psi.

10. When curing is completed, gradually reduce pressure and remove inflation

bladder including any leftover pieces. Allow the liner to become fully relaxed and

cooled.



(Group 4A2)

11. Open up cleanout access with smooth circular cut, able to pass easily a 4-inch

mini-camera.

12. Re-connect the stub-out to building side lateral using shear clamps.

13. Inspect lateral with internal CCTV equipment.

14. Inspect mainline with internal CCTV equipment.

15. Color copies of the DVD’s and the DVD’s made prior to the liner installation

shall be submitted to the COUNTY for approval.

16. Repair damaged or defective lateral liner to Engineer’s satisfaction and at no

additional cost to the COUNTY.

3.04 FINAL CLEANING AND TELEVISION INSPECTION

A. After the liner has been installed and the service connections reconnected, each

section (manhole to manhole) of lined sewer pipe shall be cleaned and the

CONTRACTOR, in the presence of the COUNTY, shall conduct a post-construction

television inspection. The liner shall be continuous and free of all visual and material

defects except those resulting from pre-lined conditions (such conditions shall be

brought to the attention of the COUNTY prior to lining). There shall be no damage,

deflection, holes, delaminating, uncured resin or other visual defects in the liner. The

liner surface shall be smooth and free of waviness throughout the pipe. No visible

leakage through the liner or at manhole or service lateral connections will be allowed.

Any defects located during the inspection shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR

to conform to the requirements of the specifications and to the satisfaction of the

COUNTY. The CONTRACTOR shall not reactivate any section of lined sewer pipe

until authorized to do so by COUNTY.

3.05 GROUTING

A. Existing sewer pipes that are to be abandoned shall be filled with grout in

individually bulk-headed continuous segments of up to 300 linear feet.

B. Grout shall be placed in a maximum of three stages, with the initial stage volume

equal to or greater than 50% of the total volume for that section of pipe being

grouted. The maximum time wait between grouting stages shall be 24 hours.

C. For each stage, mix and pump the material in one continuous process so as to avoid

partial setting of some grout material during that stage, thus, eliminating voids and

possible subsequent surface damage due to "cave-ins".

D. Each section shall be grouted by injecting grout from the lowest point and allowing it

to flow toward the highest point to displace water from the annulus and assure

complete void-free coverage. Grout shall be placed through tubes installed in the

bulkheads at the insertion pits or manholes. Grout tubes shall be at least 2-inch

nominal diameter.

E. After the ends of each section of pipe are exposed, the entire space, not to exceed 300

linear feet end to end, shall be sealed by controlled pumping of grout until it flows



(Group 4A2)

from the pipe at the opposite end of the grouting. Grouting shall be carried out until

the entire space is filled.

F. Grout pressure in the void space is not to exceed five (5) psi above maximum

hydrostatic groundwater level. An open ended, highpoint tap or equivalent vent must

be provided and monitored at the bulkhead opposite to the bulkhead through which

grout is injected. This bulkhead will be blocked closed as grout escapes to allow the

pressuring of the annular space.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR GROUTING

A. The quality of the grout, application of the equipment and installation techniques are

the responsibility of the Contractor. The review and acceptance or approval of

specific mix design, equipment or installation procedures shall in no way relieve the

Contractor of his obligation to provide the final product as specified herein.

3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. In addition to any specific acceptance criteria specified in the contract, the following

standards shall be satisfied before final acceptance of the liner installation.

1. Finish:

The finished pipe shall be continuous over the length of a run between two

manholes and be free from defects. The CIPP lateral lining shall not inhibit the

CCTV post video inspection of the mainline or service lateral pipes.

2. Defects:

Any defects, which will affect the integrity of the installed pipe, shall be repaired

at the CONTRACTOR’s expense and as directed by the COUNTY.

3. Physical Properties:

Samples of the installed pipe shall have the minimum physical properties (flexural

stress, modulus of elasticity, and thickness) stated herein and as verified by

independent testing, if required.

4. Cut-Off:

a. The CIPP liner cut at the manhole wall interface shall be neat and smooth.

5. Manhole Channel:

a. The surface of the manhole trough shall smoothly transition between the

incoming and outgoing pipe liner to preclude snagging and shoaling of

debris.

6. Service Connections:

a. The CIPP lateral lining shall not inhibit the CCTV post video inspection of

the mainline or service lateral pipes.

b. The reinstatement of all building sewer connections shall be neat and

smooth.

c. Any missing clean outs at the road right-of-way installed.

7. Leakage:



(Group 4A2)

a. No visible or evidence of leakage through the liner or at manhole or service

lateral connections will be allowed.

3.08. WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer for specified material properties for a particular job shall certify

the liner. The manufacturer shall warrant the liner to be free from defects in raw

materials for one year from the date of acceptance.

B. The COUNTY shall conduct the warranty television inspection within one year

after the date of acceptance. Any defective sections of liner located during the

inspection shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR as

directed by the COUNTY. In the event that a sewer liner or service connection is

found to be leaking during the inspection, the CONTRACTOR shall be required

to promptly replace it with a new section of pipe or liner or, if approved by the

COUNTY, to eliminate the leak(s) by other means of repair.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02675

CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers cleaning and disinfection of all potable water lines installed

under this contract.

1-2. GENERAL.

1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall coordinate flushing and disinfection work with adjacent

work as necessary to preclude work interferences or duplication of effort and to expedite the

overall progress of the work.

Contractor shall provide all necessary piping, piping connections, temporary valves, backflow

preventers, flowmeters, sampling taps, pumps, disinfectant, neutralization agents, chlorine

residual test apparatus, and all other items of equipment or facilities necessary to complete the

disinfection work.

Water for flushing and disinfection work will be provided as stipulated in the Temporary

Facilities section..

In all cases where it is necessary to interrupt service, permission of Owner shall be obtained at

least two days before the service will be interrupted.

Unless otherwise specified, final cleaning work shall not be performed until after hydrostatic

testing of the lines and any resulting repair work completed.

Contractor shall notify Orange County Utilities prior to the work to allow their representatives to

be present during cleaning and/or disinfection of the water lines.

1-2.02. Related Work. Other sections directly related to Work covered in this section are:

02704 – Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing

15067 - Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

1-2.03. Governing Standard. All disinfection work shall conform to the requirements of

ANSI/AWWA C651, and the requirements of Florida Department of Environmental Protection,

except as modified herein. If any state or local requirements conflict with the provisions of this

section, the state and local requirements shall govern.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Disinfection Plan. Prior to starting any disinfection work, Contractor shall submit to

Engineer a detailed disinfection plan. The plan shall cover the method and procedure proposed,

necessary coordination, qualification of personnel performing the disinfection, sequence of

operations, equipment to be used, manner of filling and flushing the lines, chlorine injection



(Group 4A2)

points, sample points, testing schedule, potable water source, neutralization, and disposal of

wasted water. Personnel performing the disinfection shall demonstrate a minimum of 5 years

experience in the chlorination and dechlorination of similar pipelines.

1-3.02. Testing. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by Owner's staff.

The chlorine residual test shall be performed by Contractor. The test log shall be made available

to Owner or Engineer upon request and shall be provided to Engineer upon completion of all

chlorine residual testing.

1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE.

1-4.01. Chlorine Residual Tests. Contractor shall provide the necessary apparatus for making

the chlorine residual tests by the drop dilution method as set forth in Appendix A of

ANSI/AWWA C651. Test results shall be recorded in a logbook that includes for each test: the

location, date, time, test results, and test kit manufacturer.

1-4.02. Bacteriological Tests. Sampling and testing of water in the lines shall be performed

after final flushing in accordance with Section 5 of ANSI/AWWA C651, including a standard

heterotrophic plate count for each sample.

1-4.03. Redisinfection. Should the bacteriological tests indicate the presence of coliform

organisms at any sampling point, the lines shall be reflushed, resampled and retested. If check

samples show the presence of coliform organisms, then the lines shall be rechlorinated until

acceptable results are obtained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. All materials furnished by Contractor shall conform to the requirements of

ANSI/AWWA C651 and shall be clean and free of debris which could infer questionable test

results.

2-1.01. Liquid Chlorine. Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.

2-1.02. Calcium Hypochlorite (Dry). Calcium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.

2-1.03. Sodium Hypochlorite (Solution). Sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.

2-1.04. Chlorine Residual Test Kit. Chlorine, residual concentration shall be measured using an

appropriate range, drop count, titration kit or an orthotolidine indicator comparator with wide

range color discs. The color disc range shall be selected to match chlorine concentration limits.

Test kits shall be maintained in good working order and available for immediate test of residuals

at point of sampling. Test kits manufactured by Hach Chemical or Hellige are acceptable.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. APPLICATION.

3-1.01. Disinfection Procedure. The new lines shall be disinfected by the tablet method,

continuous feed method, or slug method. Potable water shall be used in conjunction with the

chlorination agent.

For the continuous feed or slug method, the chlorination agent shall be injected into the line at

the supply end of each new line or valved section thereof.

Admission of disinfectant solution into or the flushing thereof through existing mains shall be

held to the minimum possible, and then only after adequate measures have been taken to prevent

any such solution of wastewater from entering branch service connections to water customers.

During disinfection, all valves and hydrants shall be operated to ensure that all appurtenances are

disinfected. Valves shall be operated such that the chlorine solution in the line being chlorinated

will not flow back into the supply line. Check valves shall be used if needed.

Existing mains which may become contaminated during work requiring connections to the new

water line, involving either tapping or cutting into operations, shall be flushed and disinfected in

accordance with Section 4 of ANSI/AWWA C651.

3-1.02. Final Flushing. Upon completion of chlorination, but before sampling and

bacteriological testing, all heavily chlorinated water shall be removed from the lines by flushing

with potable water until the chlorine residual in the lines is not higher than that generally

prevailing in the adjacent existing system.

Small pipelines shall be flushed with water at the maximum velocity which can be developed,

but not less than 2.5 feet per second [0.76 m/s], unless otherwise permitted by Engineer.

Flushing shall be accomplished through the installed valves or fittings, or through corporation

cocks in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings.

Pipelines may be flushed as specified, cleaned with a hose, or by other methods acceptable to

Engineer.

Booster pumps shall be used if needed to obtain the necessary volume or velocity of water.

Pumping equipment installed under this contract shall not be used for flushing, nor shall the

flushing water be passed through them; temporary bypass piping at each pump shall be provided

as needed.

3-1.03. Cleaning. The potable water mains installed under this contract, including all associated

valves and fittings, shall be flushed or cleaned to the satisfaction of Owner and Engineer.

All new piping shall be cleaned by flushing with water at the maximum velocity which can be

developed until the piping is free of dirt, debris, and other foreign materials. Cleaning shall

precede disinfection. Flushing shall be accomplished through the installed valves or fittings, or

through corporation cocks furnished and installed for that purpose.



(Group 4A2)

3-1.04. Disposal of Chlorinated Wastewater. All chlorinated wastewater to be discharged shall

be neutralized by chemical treatment and disposed in accordance with the requirements of the

governing agency specified herein. Schedule and coordinate rates of flow and locations of

discharge of disinfection and flushing water with Engineer and cognizant state and local

regulatory agencies to ensure compliance with all applicable rules and regulations.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02702

SEWER PIPE INSTALLATION AND TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation and testing of all sewer pipe furnished under

the following specification sections:

Section Description

02628 PVC Sewer Pipe

Pipe trenching, bedding, and backfill are covered in the Trenching and Backfilling section.



section.

Pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be transported, stored, and handled in a manner which

prevents damage. Hooks shall not be permitted to come into contact with joint surfaces. Plastic

pipe shall be shaded if necessary to prevent curvature due to thermal expansion. Damaged pipe

and fittings shall be removed from the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Sewer pipe materials are specified in the pipe sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. ALIGNMENT. Piping shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings.

Batter boards, laser beam equipment, or surveying instruments shall be used to maintain

alignment and grade. At least one elevation measurement shall be made on each length of pipe.

If batter boards are used to determine and check pipe subgrades, they shall be erected at intervals

of not more than 25 feet. At least three batter boards shall always be maintained in proper

position when trench grading is in progress.

If laser beam equipment is used, periodic elevation measurements shall be made with surveying

instruments to verify accuracy of grades. If such measurements indicate thermal deflection of

the laser beam due to differences between the ground temperature and the air temperature within

the pipe, precautions shall be taken to prevent or minimize further thermal deflections.

3-2. LAYING PIPE. Pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by embedment material

installed as specified in the Earthwork section. Pipe shall not be laid in water or under unsuitable

weather or trench conditions.



(Group 4A2)

Pipe laying shall begin at the lowest elevation with bell ends facing the direction of laying,

except when reverse laying is permitted by Engineer.

Foreign material shall be kept out of the pipe during installation. No debris, tools, clothing, or

other foreign objects shall be placed in the pipe.

Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with a tight-fitting end

board to keep out soil. The end board shall have perforations near the center to admit water and

prevent flotation of the pipe in the event the trench becomes flooded.

3-3. JOINTING. All joint preparation and jointing procedures shall comply with the

instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.

3-3.01. Rubber Gasketed Joints. Rubber gaskets shall be positioned on the joint in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Immediately before joints are pushed together, all

joint surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with the lubricant furnished with the pipe.

The gasket shall be lubricated and positioned in the spigot groove so that the gasket is distributed

uniformly around the pipe circumference. The position of the rubber gasket shall be checked

with a feeler gauge after each joint is completed. If the gasket is not in the proper position, the

joint shall be pulled apart, the gasket removed and discarded, and the joint re-assembled using a

new, properly lubricated gasket.

Joint lubricant shall be stored in closed containers and shall be kept clean. When installing pipe

in cold weather, the joint surfaces and gaskets shall be kept warm and the joint lubricant shall be

prevented from freezing.

For rubber and steel joints, each exterior joint recess shall be filled with joint grout. A diaper

shall be used to prevent foreign material from entering the joint recess before grouting and to

serve as a form for the grout. Each diaper shall be of sufficient length to encircle the pipe,

leaving enough space between the ends to allow the grout to be poured. Joint grout shall be

poured between the diaper and the pipe and shall be allowed to run down to the bottom of the

pipe. The grout shall be rodded while being poured, using a stiff wire curved to the approximate

shape of the pipe. Each joint recess shall be completely filled with grout for the full

circumference of the pipe.

Not less than two lengths of pipe shall be in final position in advance of exterior joint grouting.

If placing of pipe embedment is resumed before the grout has attained initial set, care shall be

taken to prevent damage to the grout while placing and compacting embedment material.

After trench backfilling has been completed, the inside joint recess of all pipe with rubber and

steel joints shall be filled with mortar. Joint surfaces shall be damp, but free from surface water,

when the mortar is placed. Mortar shall be thoroughly compacted to completely fill the recess

and shall be finished smooth. All excess mortar shall be removed from the pipe.

3-3.02. Flexible Sealant Joints. Joints made with flexible joint sealant shall be coated with the

recommended adhesive, and the joint sealant shall be positioned in accordance with the

manufacturer’s installation instructions. The pipe sections forming the joint shall be pulled



(Group 4A2)

together with sufficient force to uniformly fill and seal the annular space in the joint. Joints shall

not be made when adverse weather conditions may prevent proper sealing, nor when the

temperature of the pipe and sealing materials is too low to achieve proper sealing.

3-3.03. Mastic Joints. Surfaces of pipe to be joined with mastic joints shall be primed, if

recommended by the mastic manufacturer. Immediately before joining the pipes, a uniform

layer of mastic shall be applied to the joint surfaces. After the pipes are in final position, the

mastic shall completely fill and seal the annular space in the joint. Joints shall not be made when

weather conditions may interfere with obtaining a satisfactory seal.

3-4. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. Concrete encasement shall be installed where indicated on

the drawings. A pipe joint shall be provided within 12 inches of each end of the concrete

encasement. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete

section. All pipe which is to be encased shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper

position and shall be anchored against flotation.

3-5. ACCEPTANCE TESTS. Each reach of sewer shall meet the requirements of the following

acceptance tests. All defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer.

3-5.01. Lamping. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, each section of sewer line

between manholes shall be straight and uniformly graded. Each section will be lamped by

Engineer. Contractor shall furnish suitable assistants to assist Engineer.

3-5.02. Exfiltration. An exfiltration test shall be conducted on each reach of sewer between

manholes. The first line between manholes shall be tested before backfilling and before any

additional sewer pipe is installed. Thereafter, exfiltration testing shall be done after backfilling,

and individual or multiple reaches may be tested at the option of Contractor.

Exfiltration tests shall be conducted by blocking off all manhole openings except those

connecting with the reach being tested, filling the line, and measuring the water required to

maintain a constant level in the manholes. Each manhole shall be subjected to at least one

exfiltration test.

During the exfiltration test, the water depth above the pipe invert at the lower end shall be at

least to the elevation of the ground surface, unless otherwise specified. The maximum depth of

the water at the lower end shall not exceed 25 feet, and the minimum depth of the water at the

upper end shall be at least 5 feet above the crown of the pipe or 5 feet above groundwater

elevation, whichever is higher.

The total exfiltration shall not exceed 25 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per mile [9 liters

per millimeter of nominal diameter per kilometer] of pipe per day for each reach tested. For

purposes of determining maximum allowable leakage, nominal diameter and depth of manholes

shall be included. The exfiltration tests shall be maintained on each reach for at least 2 hours and

shall be longer if necessary, in the opinion of Engineer, to locate all leaks.

Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all necessary piping between the reach to be tested

and the source of water supply, and all labor, equipment, and materials required for the tests.

The methods used and the time of conducting exfiltration tests shall be acceptable to Engineer.



(Group 4A2)

3-5.03. Low Pressure Air Testing. Low pressure air testing may be used in lieu of exfiltration

testing for 24 inch diameter and smaller pipe. Air testing shall not be used for manholes, or for

pipe larger than 24 inches in diameter.

Low pressure air testing shall comply with Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association “Recommended

Practice for Low Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe”. The schedule of testing shall be

submitted to Engineer prior to starting the tests. The time of conducting the tests shall be

acceptable to Engineer.

The time elapsed for a 1 psi drop in air pressure shall be not less than, nor shall the air loss

exceed, the limits set forth in the governing standard.

If the length of sewer to be tested is fully or partially submerged in groundwater, the test pressure

shall be increased if necessary to overcome the actual static pressure exerted by the groundwater.

If a test pressure greater than 8 psi results, air testing shall not be used, and exfiltration testing

will be required.

Leaks shall be located by testing short sections of pipe. Leaks shall be repaired and the reach of

sewer retested.

3-5.04. Infiltration. If, at any time prior to expiration of the correction period stipulated in the

General Conditions, infiltration exceeds 100 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per mile

[9 L/mm of nominal diameter/km] of sewer per day, Contractor shall locate the leaks and make

repairs as necessary to control the infiltration.

3-5.05. Deflection. After backfilling is completed, and before acceptance of the work, each

reach of PVC and composite sewer pipe shall be checked for excessive deflection by pulling a

mandrel through the pipe, or by other methods acceptable to Engineer. Pipe with diametrical

deflection exceeding 5 percent of the inside diameter shall be uncovered, and the bedding and

backfill replaced to prevent excessive deflection. Repaired pipe shall be retested.

3-6. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before

installation and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. All joint contact surfaces

shall be kept clean until the joint is completed.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02704

PIPELINE PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers field hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing of piping. The

term "piping" shall be used in this section to refer to piping systems, pipelines, or sections

thereof.

Testing of other piping is covered in the Sewer Pipe Installation and Testing section and

Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section. Cleaning and disinfection of piping

is covered in another section if required.

1-2. GENERAL. Unless otherwise specified, testing of piping shall be completed prior to final

cleaning and disinfection.

Contractor shall notify federal, state, and local regulatory agencies to determine if any special

procedures or permits are required for disposal of water used for pressure and leakage testing and

to identify acceptable locations for disposal of the water. All requirements and costs associated

with notifications and obtaining any discharge permit or approvals shall be responsibility of

Contractor.

Engineer or Engineer's representative shall be present during testing and shall be notified of the

time and place of testing at least 3 days prior to commencement of the work. All work shall be

performed to the satisfaction of Engineer.

1-2.01. Testing Schedule and Procedure. A testing schedule and test procedure shall be

submitted to Engineer for review and acceptance not less than 21 days prior to commencement

of testing. The schedule shall indicate the proposed time and sequence of testing of the piping.

The testing procedure shall establish the limits of the piping to be tested, the positions of all

valves during testing, the locations of temporary bulkheads, and all procedures to be followed in

performing the testing.

1-2.02. Special Testing Requirements. Special testing requirements include the following:

The basic provisions of AWWA C600 shall be applicable.

1-2.03. Water. Water for testing shall be furnished as stipulated in the Temporary Facilities

section. As a conservation measure, the water shall be collected for reuse in subsequent testing.

Following completion of testing, the water shall be disposed of in a manner acceptable to

Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted, the water shall be kept out of the remainder of the piping.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary connections between the piping to be tested and the

water source, together with pumping equipment, water meter, pressure gauges, and all other

equipment, materials, and facilities required to perform the specified tests, shall be provided. All

required flanges, valves, bulkheads, bracing, blocking, and other sectionalizing devices shall also

be provided. All temporary sectionalizing devices shall be removed upon completion of testing.

Vents shall be provided in test bulkheads where necessary to expel air from the piping to be

tested.

Test pressures shall be applied by means of a force pump sized to produce and maintain the

required pressure without interruption during the test.

Water meters and pressure gauges shall be accurately calibrated and shall be subject to review

and acceptance by Engineer.

Permanent gauge connections shall be installed at each location where test gauges are connected

to the piping during the required tests. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls will not be permitted.

Upon completion of testing, each gauge connection shall be fitted with a removable plug or cap


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. FILLING AND VENTING. Before filling the piping with water, care shall be taken to

ensure that all air release valves and other venting devices are properly installed and in the open

position. Hand-operated vent valves shall not be closed until an uninterrupted stream of water is

flowing from each valve. The rate of filling the piping with water must not exceed the venting

capacity of the installed air vent valves and devices.

3-2. BLOCKING AND BACKFILLING. Piping shall be adequately blocked, anchored, and

supported before the test pressure is applied.

3-3. PRESSURE TESTING. After the piping to be tested has been filled with water, the test

pressure shall be applied and maintained without interruption within plus or minus 5 psi of test

pressure for 2 hours plus any additional time required for Engineer to examine all piping being

tested and for Contractor to locate any defective joints and pipe materials. The test pressure shall

be in accordance with the requirements specified for pipeline or plant piping.

3-3.01. Pipeline Test Pressure. Piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure of 100

psi.

The test pressure, expressed in feet of water, to be applied at any point in the piping shall be

equivalent to the arithmetic difference between the specified test pressure plane elevation and the

elevation of the horizontal center line of the piping at the selected location. The value obtained

shall be multiplied by 0.433 to obtain psi.

3-3.02. Plant Piping Test Pressure. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

3-4. PLANT PIPING LEAKAGE. Not used.

3-5. PIPELINE LEAKAGE TESTING. Following completion of pressure testing and

acceptance by Engineer, the pipeline piping shall be subjected to a leakage test. The duration of

the leakage test shall be 2 hours plus the additional time required for Engineer to make an

accurate determination of leakage. If during test, the integrity of the tested line is in question, the

Owner may require a 6-hour pressure test.

3-5.01. Leakage Test Pressure. The hydrostatic pressure maintained during the leakage test

shall be at least 75 percent, but not more than 100 percent, of the pressure specified for pressure

testing of the piping and shall be maintained within plus or minus 5 psi [35 kPa] during the entire

time that leakage measurements are being performed.

3-5.02. Leakage Measurement. Measurement of leakage shall not be attempted until all trapped

air has been vented and a constant test pressure has been established. After the pressure has

stabilized, piping leakage shall be measured with a suitable water meter installed in the pressure

piping on the discharge side of the force pump.

3-5.03. Allowable Leakage. The term "leakage", as used herein, refers to the total amount of

water which must be introduced into the piping during the leakage test to maintain the test

pressure.

No piping will be accepted if and while it exhibits a leakage rate in excess of that determined by

the indicated formulas:

Q = DLN (using inch-pound units)

148,000

Where

Q = allowable leakage in gallons per hour

D = nominal diameter of pipe in inches

L = length of section tested in feet

N = square root of average test pressure in pounds per square inch

Whenever the piping to be tested contains pipe of different diameters, the allowable leakage shall

be calculated separately for each diameter and the corresponding length of piping. The resulting

allowable leakage rates shall be added to obtain the total allowable leakage for the entire piping.

All joints in piping shall be watertight and free from visible leaks during the leakage test. Each

leak which is discovered within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall

be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor regardless of the amount that the total leakage

may have been below the specified allowable leakage rate during the leakage test.



(Group 4A2)

If the leakage test indicates a higher than allowable leakage rate, Contractor shall locate and

repair leaking joints and other defective work to the extent necessary to reduce the leakage to an

acceptable value.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02810

SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1. DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all materials, water, equipment, transportation, tools, and labor, to establish grass plus all items called for or that can be reasonably inferred from the drawings, including sodding, grading, fertilizing, watering, mowing, replacing and maintaining the area for a complete job.

B. Sod all disturbed areas.

1-2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

Portions of the publications listed below form a part of this specification only to the extent referenced.

A. Florida Department of Transportation, "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction" (Fla. DOT SPEC). B. Turfgrass Producers Association of Florida, "Standards of Sod Quality".

1-3 RECORDS

Submit written weekly records to the Owner of all grassed areas for use in determining the beginning and ending of the maintenance period for each area. The records shall indicate the date of grassing, fertilizing and mowing, the type of sod, quantity (sq. ft., sq. yds, or acres) and location of grassing.

1-4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions. Submit certificates stating that the materials conform to the requirements of this specification as follows:

1. Certificate from sod producer stating that sod meets the requirements for

"Florida Standard Grade" as defined by the Turfgrass Producers Association of Florida, and set forth in paragraph "SOD" of this specification.

2. Fertilizer manufacturer's certificate of analysis including Nitrogen, Phosphorus

Potash and complete micro-nutrients in accordance with paragraph "Fertilizer" of this specification.

B. Submit a copy of the certificate(s) with each delivery.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-1 SOD

A. Argentine Bahia with well matted roots. The sod shall be taken up in commercial-size rectangles, preferably 12-inch by 24-inch or larger, except where 6-inch strip sodding is called for.

B. The sod shall have no visible broadleaf weeds when viewed from a standing position

and the turf shall be visibly consistent with no obvious patches of foreign grasses. In no case may the total amount of foreign grasses or weeds exceed 2% of the total canopy. Florida Standard Grade sod shall be neatly mowed and mature enough that when grasped at one end it can be picked up and handled without damage. The sod shall be sufficiently thick to secure a dense stand of live grass. The sod shall be live, fresh and uninjured, at the time of planting. It shall have a soil mat of sufficient thickness adhering firmly to the roots to withstand all necessary handling.

2-2 FERTILIZER Commercial grade, controlled release, granular fertilizer consisting of blend of coated

prilled urea with iron included in a slowly soluble form, free flowing and uniform in composition conforming to Florida DOT Specification 982-1, and bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis by weight of 12 parts nitrogen, 8 parts phosphoric acid and 8 parts potash, plus complete micronutrient including magnesium, sulfur, zinc, manganese, copper and boron.

2-3 SOURCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SOD Comply with all current restrictions for transporting sod material from or through

quarantine areas for the white fringed beetle, witchweed, and West Indian sugar cane borer weevil, as issued by the Division of Plant Industry, Florida Department of Agriculture and the Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture.

2-4 WATER FOR GRASSING Water shall be free of acid, alkali, or organic materials and shall have a pH of 7.0 to 8.5.

Provide all water needed for grassing. Provide permanent or temporary piping and valves, and temporary trucks to convey water from the source to the point of use. Provide any meters required and pay for water used if the water is taken from a public water system. Water shall be free of petroleum products, pesticides and any other deleterious constituents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-1 COORDINATION OF WORK Coordinate all work activities to provide for establishment of grass cover at the earliest

possible time in the construction schedule to minimize erosion of topsoil.

3-2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS - GENERAL



(Group 4A2)

A. Provide sod and establish grass in all areas designated on the drawings and that are disturbed during construction (except areas to be paved, landscaped or covered with structures).

B. Do not fertilize when wind velocities exceed 15 miles per hour. Sod only when the

soil is in proper condition to induce growth. C. When a length of roadway slopes or adjacent areas have been graded and made

ready, commence grassing in accordance with these specifications. Incorporate grass covering into the project at the earliest practical time in the life of the contract to reduce potential erosion.

D. Store fertilizer in dry locations away from contaminants. Sprinkle sod with water

and protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to circulate so that heating will not develop.

3-3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR GRASSING

A. Sequence of Operations: The operations involved in the work shall proceed in the following sequence:

1. Preparation of the ground. 2. Sodding. 3. Watering and maintaining

3-4 PREPARATION OF AREA TO BE GRASSED

A. Prepare the areas to be grassed by disc-harrowing and thoroughly pulverizing them to a depth of at least 6 inches.

B. Bring all areas to be grassed to finished grades, remove weeds, surplus dirt and rock

debris over 1 inch in diameter, and rough grade the area. C. Test the soil for pH. If the soil is below a pH level of 5.5, spread lime to raise the pH

level to at least 5.5. D. Uniformly apply fertilizer at the rate of 400 to 500 pounds per acre. Immediately

after the fertilizer and/or lime is spread over the area, mix them into the soil to a depth of approximately 4 inches.

E. Float the area to a smooth uniform grade. Slope all areas to drain. Establish flow

lines as shown on the drawings. Finish areas to be grassed approximately 1 inch below top of adjoining curb or pathway.

3-5. SODDING

A. Incorporate sodding into the project at the earliest practical time in the life of the contract. Do not use sod which has been cut for more than 3 days. Stack any sod which is not planted within 24 hours after cutting and maintain properly moistened.

B. Place the sod on a prepared surface, with abutting joints. Fill any gaps or cracks

between sod blocks with sod. Roll with a minimum one-ton roller to obtain an even surface. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub areas and project limits.



(Group 4A2)

C. Where sodding is used in drainage ditches, stagger the setting of the pieces to avoid a continuous seam along the line of flow.

D. On areas where the sod may slide due to height and slope, peg the sod with pegs

driven through the sod blocks into firm earth at suitable intervals. Replace any pieces of sod which, after placing, show an appearance of extreme dryness.

3-6 MOWING

A. Mow first when the grass reaches a height of 3 to 4 inches. Mow a second time when the grass reaches a height of 6 inches and before a seedhead occurs. Subse-quent mowings should establish a uniform grass surface of 2-1/2 inches and be made before seedhead occurs. All mowings should be made with a cut height as low as possible to stop shading of the Bahia grass.

B. Mow sod to establish a uniform grass surface of 2-1/2 inches. C. Provide equipment for mowing that does not rut the soil surface. Fill any ruts that

are in excess of two (2) inches deep with native soil free from twigs and rocks larger than 1 inch in diameter. Temporarily suspend mowing operations when the soil is too wet to provide adequate support and traction for equipment.

3-7 WATERING

A. Maintain a balanced watering program until the acceptance of work. B. Apply water in sufficient quantities and as often as seasonal conditions require to

keep the grassed areas moist. C. Provide supplemental water and irrigate areas when the rainfall is not adequate to

maintain soil moisture necessary for germination and growth of the grass. It is Contractor's responsibility to determine the quantities of water required and when to irrigate. This obligation shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the work by Owner and shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Owner, at his discretion, may relieve Contractor of this obligation at such time as

Owner is able to provide irrigation. This action, however, does not relieve Contrac-tor of the provisions and guarantees set forth in the Contract Documents.

3-8 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain all grassed areas for a period of 90 days after the date of substantial completion and guarantee against all defects and faults of material and workmanship.

B. Maintain grass areas by watering, fertilizing, and mowing to establish an even and

uniform grass surface of 2-1/2 inches, as specified above. C. In the event that the grass exhibits iron chlorosis symptoms during the establishment

period, apply liquid iron at manufacturer's recommended rates.

3-9 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee all grasses areas to be alive and in satisfactory growth at the end of the maintenance period (90 days).



(Group 4A2)

B. Replace any grass that is dead or not in satisfactory growth, as determined by the Owner or Owner's representative. Guarantee new sod for an additional 90 days.

C. The term "Satisfactory Growth" as used in this section is defined as even plant

growth in healthy conditions without bare spots. Bare spots in sodded areas shall be resodded. All sodded areas shall be maintained until satisfactory growth has been demonstrated. In the event that the subsequent stand of grass is found to be contaminated with weeds or other obnoxious or undesirable growth, effectively eliminate such undesirable growth, at the Contractor's expense.

D. Replace sod with the same variety as initially specified.

3-10 INSPECTION

A. Request inspection from the Owner and his representative at least 72 hours in advance of the time inspection is required.

B. Provide an authorized representative to be on-site during inspection.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 02825

ORNAMENTAL SWING GATES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and install the

ornamental aluminum swing gates for manual operation as shown on the Drawings and as

specified herein. Ornamental swing gates shall be provided at the pump stations surrounded by a

block wall.

1-2. SUBMITTALS.

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings

showing details and specifications on materials, layouts and details of

construction and erection of fence, gates, operator and accessories required.

B. Provide samples of specified finishes on proposed aluminum, stainless steel and

steel sections, hardware and sheet showing materials, finish and color for

approval.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

A. Aluminum Extrusions - All components shall be 6063-T5 and 6105-T5 alloy

extrusions as approved, conforming to ASTM B221.

B. Fasteners — All screws shall be Type 410 stainless steel, self-drilling. Provide

masonry anchors and stainless steel machine screws for masonry connections as

approved. All screws shall be painted to match the finish of aluminum.

C. Accessories — Provide aluminum wall brackets and required stainless steel

hardware.

D. Bracing Cables — Stainless steel, Type 304 wire rope with stainless steel

hardware. Size to provide required bracing for gate rigidity in cross-brace

configuration and minimum visual impact.

E. Finish— The gate and components shall be factory coated with Specrail Poly-

Color or equal high- solids acrylic coating meeting AAMA 603.8. Application

shall be by electrostatic spray. Curing shall be at a temperature of 375EF to

400EF. Color shall be black.

F. Operator housing and base — Factory powder coated as approved. Color-black.



(Group 4A2)

2-2. FABRICATION.

A. Horizontal rails, 1-5/8-in square, open extrusions, shall be punched to allow

pickets to pass through the top of the rail and into bottom rail.

B. Pickets, 1-in square, 0.065-in wall, tubes, integral spear point finial, shall be

fastened to stringers mechanically with stainless steel TEK screws on one side of

stringer only.

C. Vertical members, 2-1/2-in square, 0.075-in wall, tubes shall be prepunched to

allow horizontal rails to swing in and be attached with stainless steel TEK. Gate

posts, 4-in square, 0.125-in wall, tubes. Cast aluminum post caps shall be affixed

to all posts and verticals.

D. Provide in configurations shown and approved for rigidity and appearance. Cross

brace on inside with stainless steel cable, each panel shown making up the gate.

2-3. HARDWARE.

A. Gate Hangers, latches, brackets, guide assemblies and stops shall be aluminum, or

steel galvanized after fabrication.

B. Positive latch device shall be provided with provisions for padlocking.


3-1. PREPARATION. Prepare the grade and remove surface irregularities, if any, which may

cause interference with the installation of gate and components.

3-2. INSTALLATION.

A. Set gate posts for gate opening as shown, providing support for gate in open and

closed positions.

B. Insert rail ends into pre-punched posts and fasten with TEK screws.

C. Center and align posts. Place concrete around posts and vibrate for consolidation.

Recheck vertical and top alignment of posts, and make necessary corrections.

Depth of post and full-depth concrete encasement shall be as required and

approved to provide rigidity under all operating and wind conditions.

D. Install gate plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. Use

masonry anchor system specified below where required. Install operator on a

concrete pad, program as required and test to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Clean cement paste from components before it dries.

E. Install fence sections between concrete block columns. Drill the precast for

expansion anchors and set to receive fence and gate post support hardware. Install



(Group 4A2)

fence sections and required gate support appurtenances plumb, level and secure as

approved.

3-3. CLEANING, REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT.

A. Contractor shall clean jobsite of excess materials and excavated matter. Clean

aluminum with mild household detergent and clean water rinse thoroughly.

B. Adjust operator and all hardware for smooth operation of gate and test as ordered.

Repair or replace operator components as required and retest as ordered.

C. The Engineer will inspect all fence/gate components and finishes. Repair or

replace components and finishes as order. Cement paste not removed before it

dried shall be carefully removed and finish repaired or component replaced as

ordered.

End of Section


(Master Pump Station Improvements ) 03301-1 October 2011

(Group 4A2)

Section 03301

CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers all cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcing steel, forms,

finishing, curing, and appurtenant work. All concrete shall be air-entrained.

Both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of measurement are specified herein; the values

expressed in inch-pound units shall govern.

1-2. GENERAL. All cast-in-place concrete shall be accurately formed and properly placed and

finished as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. All submittals of drawings and data shall be in accordance with the

submittals section.

1-4. STORAGE AND HANDLING. Cement shall be stored in suitable moisture proof

enclosures. Cement which has become caked or lumpy shall not be used.

Aggregates shall be stored so that segregation and the inclusion of foreign materials are

prevented. The bottom 6 inches [150 mm] of aggregate piles in contact with the ground shall not

be used.

Reinforcing steel shall be carefully handled and shall be stored on supports that will prevent the

steel from touching the ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. LIMITING REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall be controlled

within the following limiting requirements.

2-1.01. Cement Content. The quantity of Portland cement in the concrete shall be not less than

that indicated in the following table:

Quantity of Cement (lb/yd3) [kg/m

3]

Coarse Aggregate Size

from No. 4 [4.75 mm] Sieve to

3/8 in. [9.5 mm] 1/2 in. [12 mm] 3/4 in. [19 mm] 1 in. [25 mm]

600 [355] 580 [344] 560 [333] 535 [318]



(Group 4A2)

2-1.02. Maximum Water-Cementitious Ratio. The maximum water-cementitious ratio shall be

0.42 on a weight basis. If fly ash is used, the combined mass of cement plus fly ash shall be

used to determine the water-cementitious materials ratio.

2-1.03. Fly Ash Content. At the option of the Contractor, fly ash may be substituted for up to

25 percent of the portland cement, but not less than 15 percent, on the basis of 1.0 lbs [1.0 kg] of

fly ash added for each lb [kilogram] of cement reduction.

2-1.04. Coarse Aggregate. The maximum nominal coarse aggregate size shall be not larger than

1 inch [25 mm].

2-1.05. Slump. Concrete slump shall be kept as low as possible consistent with proper handling

and thorough compaction. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, slump of concrete

without a superplasticizer shall not exceed 4 inches [100 mm]. Slump of concrete with a

superplasticizer, or a midrange water reducer, shall not exceed 8 inches.

2-1.06. Total Air Content. The total volumetric air content of concrete after placement shall be

6 percent ±1 percent.

2-1.07. Admixtures. The admixture content, batching method, and time of introduction to the

mix shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A water-reducing

admixture and an air-entraining admixture shall be included in all concrete. A midrange water

reducer or a superplasticizer may be used at the Contractor’s option. No calcium chloride or

admixture containing chloride from sources other than impurities in admixture ingredients will

be acceptable.

2-1.08. Strength. The minimum acceptable compressive strengths, as determined by

ASTM C39 with 6 inch [150 mm] diameter by 12 inch [300 mm] cylinders, shall be:

Age Minimum Compressive Strength

7 days 3,375 psi [23.5 MPa]

28 days 4,500 psi [31.5 MPa]

2-2. MATERIALS.

Cement ASTM C150, Type II or l/ll, low alkali.

Fly Ash ASTM C618, Class F, except loss on ignition shall

not exceed 4 percent.

Fine Aggregate Clean natural sand, ASTM C33. Artificial or

manufactured sand will not be acceptable.



(Group 4A2)

Coarse Aggregate Non-reactive crushed rock, washed gravel, or other

inert granular material conforming to ASTM C33,

class 4S, except that clay and shale particles shall

not exceed 1 percent.

Water Potable.

Admixtures

Water-Reducing ASTM C494, Type A or D.

Air-Entraining ASTM C260.

Superplasticizing ASTM C494, Type F or G.

Reinforcing Steel

Bars ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185 or A497.

Bar Supports CRSI Class 1, plastic protected; or Class 2,

stainless steel protected.

Mechanical Connector

(Couplers or Form

Savers)

Classified Type 2 per ACI 318-02 or per UBC-97.

Use only where indicated on the drawings.

Water stops

Metal, at construction

joints

Uncoated carbon steel, 12 gage, size as indicated on

the drawings.

PVC, at construction

joints

Extruded, virgin, elastomeric, polyvinyl chloride

(PVC), white (no pigment), flat, ribbed, 3/8 inch

[9.5 mm] thick. Reclaimed material will not be

acceptable. Provide hog rings or grommets spaced

at 12 inches [300 mm] on center entire length.

For concrete sections less

than 12 inches [300 mm]

in thickness

6 inches [150 mm] wide, 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] thick;

Greenstreak “679” or Vinylex “R6-38”

For concrete sections 12

inches [300 mm] or more

in thickness

9 inches [225 mm] wide, 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] thick;

Greenstreak “646” or Vinylex “R9-38”

Forms



(Group 4A2)

Plywood Product Standard PS1, waterproof, resin-bonded, exterior

type, Douglas fir.

Lumber Straight, uniform width and thickness, and free

from knots, offsets, holes, dents, and other surface

defects.

Form Coating Nonstaining and nontoxic after 30 days, VOC-

compliant; Burke "Form Release (WB)", L&M

Chemical "E Z Strip", Nox-Crete "Form Coating",

or Symons "Thrift Kote E".

Pre-Cure Finishing Aid Burke "Finishing Aid Concentrate", Euclid

"Eucbar", L&M Chemical "E-Con", Master

Builders "Confilm", or Sika "Sikafilm".

Polyethylene Film Product Standard PS17 or ASTM D 4397, 6 mils

[150 µm] or thicker.

Vapor barrier and seam tape Polyolefin geomembrane, Stego Wrap, 15 mils

[0.38 mm] Vapor Barrier. Stego Wrap Red

polyethelene tape.

Membrane Curing Compound and

Floor Sealer

VOC – Compliant ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, water based,

VOC-compliant acrylic, maximum VOC

2.9 lb/gal [350 g/L], minimum 30 percent

solids, nonyellowing, unit moisture loss 0.40

kg/m2

in 72 hours maximum.

Waterproofing Admixture See the EXTERIOR COATING paragraph in

Part 3 of this Section

2-3. SUBMITTALS. The source and quality of concrete materials and the concrete proportions

proposed for the work shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before concrete is placed.

2-3.01. Laboratory Shrinkage Limits Test. Based on the modified ASTM C157 test procedures

as specified herein, the shrinkage limits of concrete shall be the average drying shrinkage of each

set of three test specimens cast in the laboratory from a trial batch as measured at the 21 days

drying age, and shall not exceed the 0.036 percent, based on a 4 x4 x 11 inch specimen.

A drying shrinkage test shall be conducted on the preliminary trial batch, including admixtures,

that are proposed for the project. Three test specimens shall be prepared for each test. Drying

shrinkage specimens shall be 4 inch by 4 inch by 11 inch [100 by 100 by 275 mm] prisms with

an effective gauge length of 10 inches [250 mm], fabricated, cured, dried, and measured in

accordance with ASTM C157 except with the following modifications:



(Group 4A2)

Specimens shall be removed from the molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching,

shall be placed immediately in water at 73°F ±3°F [23°C ±2°C] for at least 30 minutes, and shall

be measured within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length and then submerged in

lime-saturated water as specified in ASTM C157. Measurement to determine expansion

expressed as a percentage of original length shall be taken at age 7 days. The length at 7 days

shall be the base length for drying shrinkage calculations ("0" days drying age). Specimens then

shall be stored immediately in a humidity controlled room maintained at 73°F ±3°F [23°C ±2°C]

and 50 percent ±4 percent relative humidity for the remainder of the test. Measurements to

determine shrinkage expressed as a percentage of the base length shall be reported separately for

7, 14, and 21 days ±4 hours of drying from "0" days after 7 days of moist curing for a total of 28

days from the date of casting.

Drying shrinkage deformation for each specimen shall be computed as the difference between

the base length (at "0" days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. Results of

the shrinkage test shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 percent. If drying shrinkage of any

specimen deviates from the average for that test age by more than 0.004 percent, the results for

that specimen shall be disregarded.

2-4. FORMS. Forms shall be designed to produce hardened concrete having the shape, lines,

and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to

prevent leakage of mortar and shall be maintained in proper position and accurate alignment.

Forms for pavement, curbs, or gutters shall be made of steel and shall be supported on

thoroughly compacted earth. The top face of pavement forms shall not vary from a true plane

more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet [2 mm/m].

Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and oiled before concrete is placed.

Where concrete is placed against gravel or crushed rock which does not contain at least 25

percent material passing a No. 4 [4.75 mm] sieve, such surfaces shall be covered with

polyethylene film to protect the concrete from loss of water. Joints in the film shall be lapped at

least 4 inches [100 mm].

2-4.01. Form Ties. Form ties shall be of the removable end, permanently embedded body type,

and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to support and maintain the form in proper position

and alignment without the use of auxiliary spreaders.

2-4.02. Edges and Corners. Chamfer strips shall be placed in forms to bevel all salient edges

and corners, except the top edges of walls and slabs which are to be tooled and edges which are

to be buried. Unless otherwise noted, bevels shall be 3/4 inch [19 mm] wide.

2-4.03. Form Removal. Forms shall not be removed or disturbed until the concrete has attained

sufficient strength to safely support all dead, live, and construction loads. Care shall be taken in

form removal to avoid surface gouging, corner or edge breakage, and other damage to the

concrete.



(Group 4A2)

2-5. REINFORCEMENT. Reinforcement shall be accurately formed and positioned and shall

be maintained in proper position while the concrete is being placed and compacted. Unless

otherwise indicated on the drawings, the details of fabrication shall conform to ACI 315 and 318.

In case of conflict, ACI 318 shall govern. Reinforcement shall be free from dirt, loose rust,

scale, and contaminants. Mechanical connections shall be used only as indicated on the

drawings.

2-6. BATCHING AND MIXING. Concrete shall conform to ASTM C94 and shall be furnished

by an acceptable ready-mixed concrete supplier.

2-6.01. Consistency. The consistency of concrete shall be suitable for the placement conditions.

Aggregates shall float uniformly throughout the mass, and the concrete shall flow sluggishly

when vibrated or spaded. The slump shall be kept uniform.

2-6.02. Delivery Tickets. A delivery ticket shall be prepared for each load of ready-mixed

concrete and a copy of the ticket shall be handed to the Engineer by the truck operator at the time

of delivery. Tickets shall indicate the name and location of the concrete supplier, the project

name, the mix identification, the quantity of concrete delivered, the quantity of each material in

the batch, the outdoor temperature in the shade, the time at which the cement was added, and the

numerical sequence of the delivery.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. PLACEMENT. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of

the times and places at which he intends to place concrete.

Methods of conveying concrete to the point of final deposit and of placing shall prevent

segregation or loss of ingredients. During and immediately after placement, concrete shall be

thoroughly compacted and worked around all reinforcement and embedments and into the

corners of the forms. Concrete shall be compacted by immersion-type vibrators, vibrating

screeds, or other suitable mechanical compaction equipment. The use of "jitterbug" tampers to

compact concrete flatwork will not be permitted.

3-2. WATER STOPS. Each water stop shall be continuous throughout the length of the joint in

which it is installed. Water stops shall be clean, free from coatings, and shall be maintained in

proper position until surrounding concrete has been deposited and compacted.

Junctions between adjacent sections of metal water stops shall be lapped 5 inches [130 mm] and

securely bolted, screwed, or spot welded together.

Junctions between adjacent sections of elastomeric (PVC ) water stops shall be spliced in strict

conformity with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Directional changes and

intersections shall be factory fabricated by the water stop manufacturer prior to delivery to the

site of the work. Field splices will be acceptable only in straight sections.



(Group 4A2)

3-3. FINISHING. Recesses from form ties shall be filled flush with mortar. Fins and other

surface projections shall be removed from all formed surfaces, except exterior surfaces that will

be in contact with earth backfill.

Unless otherwise specified, unformed surfaces shall be screeded and given an initial float finish

as soon as the concrete has stiffened sufficiently for proper working. Any piece of coarse

aggregate which is disturbed by the float or which causes a surface irregularity shall be removed

and replaced with mortar. Initial floating shall produce a surface of uniform texture and

appearance, with no unnecessary working of the surface.

Initial floating shall be followed by a second floating at the time of initial set. The second

floating shall produce a finish of uniform texture and color and the completed finish for

unformed surfaces unless indicated otherwise.

3-3.01. Troweling. Interior floor surfaces which will be exposed after construction is

completed; exposed top surfaces of equipment bases and interior curbs; and other surfaces

designated on the drawings shall be steel trowel finished. Troweling shall be performed after the

second floating when the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent an excess of fines being

drawn to the surface. Troweling shall produce a dense, smooth, uniform surface free from

blemishes and trowel marks.

3-3.02. Application of Pre-Cure Finishing Aid. Concrete flatwork subject to rapid evaporation

due to hot weather, drying winds, and sunlight shall be protected with a pre-cure finishing aid.

The finishing aid shall form a monomolecular film on the surface of fresh, plastic concrete to

retard evaporation.

Immediately following screeding, pre-cure finishing aid shall be sprayed over the entire surface

of fresh, plastic concrete flatwork at a rate of not less than 200 square feet per gallon [4 m2/L], in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The spray equipment shall have sufficient

capacity to continuously spray finishing aid at approximately 40 psi [275 kPa] with a suitable

nozzle as recommended by the manufacturer.

The sprayable solution shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer.

Under severe drying conditions, additional applications of finishing aid may be required

following each floating or troweling, except the last finishing operation.

3-3.03. Pavement. Following placement and consolidation, and the disappearance of bleed

water, the concrete surface shall be broom finished with a broom acceptable to the Engineer.

The broom shall be not less than 18 inches [450 mm] wide and made from good quality bass or

bassine fibers not more than 5 inches [125 mm] long. The broom finishing shall produce regular

corrugations not over 1/8 inch [3 mm] deep. The broom shall be pulled square across the

surface, from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped, and shall not tear the

concrete surface.

The surface of pavements shall not vary more than 1/8 inch [3 mm] under a 10 foot [3 m]

straightedge placed parallel to the center line.



(Group 4A2)

3-3.04. Curb and Gutter. Curb and gutter shall be finished to the shape indicated on the

drawings. After the forms have been removed, all exposed edges shall be rounded, using an

edging tool with a 1/8 inch [3 mm] corner radius. Exposed surfaces shall be float finished and

given a light broom finish applied at right angles to the curb at the time of initial set, using a

horsehair broom.

3-3.05. Sidewalks. Concrete surfaces shall be screeded to the proper elevation and contour. All

aggregates shall be completely embedded in mortar. Screeded surfaces shall be given an initial

float finish as soon as the concrete has stiffened sufficiently for proper working. Any piece of

coarse aggregate which is disturbed by the float or which causes a surface irregularity shall be

removed and replaced with mortar. Initial floating shall produce a surface of uniform texture and

appearance, with no unnecessary working of the surface. Initial floating shall be followed by a

second floating at the time of initial set.

Floated surfaces shall be given a light broom finish, using a horsehair broom, to provide a

nonslip surface. Brooming shall be done at right angles to the length of the walk.

Sidewalks shall be edged using a 3 or 4 inch [75 or 100 mm] wide edging tool with a 1/8 inch

[3 mm] corner radius. Edger lap marks at corners of each slab shall be carefully removed. False

joints shall be provided at right angles to the length of the walk, using a grooving tool with

1/8 inch [3 mm] radius. The finished edge on each side of the joint shall be the same width as

the edging tool used. False joints shall divide each sidewalk into square sections.

The finished surface of all sidewalks shall be neat in appearance, shall be sloped to drain, and

shall not pond water.

3-4. CURING. Concrete shall be protected from loss of moisture by water saturation or by

membrane curing for at least 7 days after placement; however, when concrete is also being

protected from low temperatures, the period of curing by saturation shall be 1 day less than the

duration of the low temperature protection.

Water saturation shall be used on concrete which will be covered later with mortar or additional

concrete. Water saturation or membrane curing compound may be used on all other concrete

surfaces.

Water saturation of concrete surfaces shall begin as soon as possible after initial set. Unformed

surfaces shall be covered with polyethylene film, tarpaulins, or sand to retain the water. Water

shall be applied as often as necessary to keep the concrete saturated for the entire curing period.

Acceptable methods of water curing are described in ACI 308.

Membrane curing compound shall be sprayed at a coverage rate of not more than 300 square feet

per gallon [7 m²/L]. Unformed surfaces shall be covered with curing compound within 30

minutes after final finishing. If forms are removed before the end of the specified curing period,

curing compound shall be immediately applied to the formed surfaces. Curing compound shall

be suitably protected against abrasion during the curing period.

Concrete shall be protected against freezing for at least 8 days after placement.



(Group 4A2)

3-5. EXTERIOR COATING Water proofing admixtures shall be utilized to prevent water

intrusion in lieu of external coatings. Concrete admixtures shall be Xypex, Kryton, or approved

equal. Admixture dosage rate shall be in accordance with the admixture supplier’s

recommendations based on the concrete’s environmental exposure.

3-6. REPAIRING DEFECTIVE CONCRETE. Defects in concrete surfaces shall be repaired to

the satisfaction of the Engineer. All concrete which is honeycombed or otherwise defective shall

be cut out and removed to sound concrete, with edges cut square to avoid feathering.

Concrete repair work shall conform to Article 5.3.7 of ACI 301 and shall be performed in a

manner that will not interfere with thorough curing of surrounding concrete. Repair work shall

be adequately cured.

3-7. FIELD CONTROL TESTING.

3-7.01. Air Content. An air content test shall be made on concrete from each batch of concrete

from which concrete compression test cylinders are made. The Contractor shall provide all

equipment and supplies necessary for the testing. Air content shall be determined in accordance

with ASTM C231.

3-7.02. Slump. A slump test shall be made on concrete from each batch of concrete from which

concrete compression test cylinders are made. Slump shall be determined in accordance with

ASTM C143.

3-7.03. Test Cylinders. Compression test specimens shall be made, cured, stored, and delivered

to the laboratory in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39. Compressive strength tests will be

evaluated in accordance with ACI 318 and as specified herein.

One set of 6 inch [150 mm] diameter by 12 inch [300 mm] concrete test cylinders shall be cast

for each concrete pour. A set of test cylinders shall consist of four cylinders, two to be broken

and to have compressive strengths averaged at 7 days, and two to be broken and to have

compressive strengths averaged at 28 days. All concrete required for testing shall be furnished

by, and at the expense of, the Contractor.

The cured cylinders shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory at the expense of the

Owner.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 03430

STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the design, fabrication, and erection of prestressed, precast

concrete members of hollow core construction for roof and floor applications. For precast

concrete wall panels refer to the Architectural Precast Concrete specification section.

1-2. GENERAL. Structural precast concrete members shall be furnished and installed complete

with all embedments, accessories, and special construction as specified and as indicated on the

drawings.

Layouts and details are based on members of the widths indicated on the drawings. Members

with a different standard width will be considered provided that complete layouts and details are

furnished to show all modifications necessary to accommodate the substitute product.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings and data covering fabrication, layout, and installation

shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. All drawings and calculations shall

bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the state the members will be erected in. If

the laws of that state require a structural engineer to design the members, then the drawings and

calculations shall bear the seal of a structural engineer registered in the state the members will be

erected in.

Information to be submitted for review shall include:

Letter or certification from a registered engineer certifying that the product has

been designed and constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Details of sections where concentrated loads are to be applied and where boxouts

are provided, including saddles, headers, and other special supports.

All dead and live loads used in the design of members as specified on the contract

drawings and in the specification.

Reports covering source and quality of concrete materials.

Test reports showing compressive strength of each design mix.

Test reports for required testing during production.

Certification of the Manufacturer by Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI).

1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Prestressed concrete members shall not be

damaged during handling and shall be kept from contact with adjacent concrete members.



(Group 4A2)

Members shall be stored on timber skids and leveled to avoid twisting or other undesirable

stresses. Members shall not be moved from the Manufacturer's yard until completion of the

specified curing period. The open ends of cores shall be protected from the elements to prevent

trapping of moisture in the cores. Manufacturer will be responsible for the condition of

prestressed members until they are removed from the delivery vehicle at the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Structural precast concrete shall be

suitable for the service conditions as specified and as indicated on the drawings. Members,

including embedments and accessories, shall be designed in accordance with the following

performance and design requirements.

2-1.01. Codes and Standards. Except as otherwise specified herein, design, fabrication, and

installation shall comply with all applicable provisions of the following:

2007 Florida Building Code

ACI 318, American Concrete Institute, "Building Code Requirements for

Structural Concrete".

PCI MNL-116, Prestressed Concrete Institute, "Manual for Quality Control for

Plants and Production of Precast Prestressed Concrete Products".

2-1.02. Fire Rating. Not used.

2-1.03. Performance and Design Requirements. The following requirements shall apply to the

prestressed concrete:

The maximum size of aggregate shall be 3/4 inch [19 mm].

The maximum size of prestressing strand shall be 1/2 inch [12.7 mm].

For all members, under dead load conditions (the dead load of the member plus

the required superimposed uniform dead load), there shall be no flexural tension in

the precompressed tensile zone.

For all members, the maximum flexural tension in the precompressed tensile zone

under applied dead load plus live load shall be:

6 x sqrt f'c, psi [1/2 x sqrt f'c, MPa]



(Group 4A2)

Members shall be designed for the following loading:

Dead load – actual

Superimposed DL – 15 psf

Live load – 20 psf, unreduced

Installed camber shall exceed total deflection caused by superimposed dead load

and longtime effects of shrinkage and creep.

Adjacent members shall have approximately the same camber.

Immediate deflection of members due to live load shall not exceed span/480.

Members shall have embedments and additional reinforcing to satisfy support and

anchorage details.

Manufacturer shall design and detail connections in general accordance with the

configurations indicated on the drawings. Connection design shall satisfy all

applicable requirements of the building code.

2-2. MATERIALS. Materials for the prestressed members shall be new and free from defects,

and shall meet the following requirements unless indicated otherwise on the design drawings.

All materials shall be suitable for prestressed concrete construction.

Prestressing Strand ASTM A416.

Reinforcing Steel ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185 or A497.

Deformed Bar Anchors (DBA) ASTM A496 with a minimum 70,000 psi

[482 MPa] yield strength and minimum

80,000 psi [551 MPa] tensile strength.

TRW/Nelson division or equal.

Headed Studs ASTM A108 with a minimum 50,000 psi

[344 MPa] yield strength and minimum

60,000 psi [413 MPa] tensile strength.

TRW/Nelson division or equal.

Steel Embedments and Accessories

Shapes and Plates ASTM A36, galvanized.

Bolts and Nuts



(Group 4A2)

High Strength ASTM A325, Type 1; tested in accordance

with Article 9.2 thereof.

Unfinished ASTM A307.

Nuts, Self-Locking Prevailing torque type; IFI-100, Grade A.

Washers

Flat ASTM F844.

Flat, Hardened ASTM F436, Type 1.

Lock ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type.

Beveled ASTM F436, Type 1.

Load Indicator ASTM F959, compressible-washer type

direct tension indicator as manufactured by

J&M Turner, Inc.; tested in accordance with

Article 10.2 of ASTM F959.

Galvanizing Hot dipped, G90, in accordance with ASTM

A123, A153, and A385.

Concrete Minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi

[34 MPa] at 28 days.

Cement ASTM C150, Type I or Type III.

Aggregates ASTM C33 or C330.

Water Clean and free from deleterious substances.

Bearing Pads ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 1, tempered

hardboard

Expansion Joint Filler ASTM D1752, Type I, preformed sponge

rubber, except when indicated otherwise on

the drawings.

Mortar (for grouting precast hollow

core concrete members)

Minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi

[34 MPa] at 28 days, unless indicated

otherwise on the drawings.

Cement ASTM C150, Type I.

Sand ASTM C404, natural sharp sand.



(Group 4A2)

Pea Gravel (If used) ASTM C404, coarse aggregate, 90 percent

passing a 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] sieve.

Leveling Mortar Sika "SikaSet Mortar", unless indicated

otherwise on the drawings.


2-3. MANUFACTURE.

2-3.01. Configuration. Members shall be rigid, adequately braced, and free from dents, gouges,

or other irregularities which would impair the quality, appearance, or performance of the

members.

The side edges of cored members shall have a continuous grout key. Side edges shall have a

rounded soffit edge unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER.

2-3.02. Release of Tension. The concrete shall attain a compressive strength of at least 3,500

psi [24 MPa] before the pretensioning stress in the prestressing strands is released.

2-3.03. Embedded Accessories. All plates, inserts, and other accessories which are required to

be embedded in the members shall be installed at the time of manufacture. All embedded items

shall be accurately positioned and shall be rigidly held in position during concrete placement. It

is essential that bearing plates be installed in exact and true position.

Prestressed members shall be provided with lifting loops or similar devices to facilitate handling

as needed.

2-3.04. Openings and Inserts. Openings for roof ventilators, skylights, roof drains, and other

items as indicated on the drawings shall be incorporated into the design and fabrication. The

drawings shall be carefully reviewed for the openings and inserts required by the work of all

trades, and all openings and inserts which are beyond the limitations of field modification shall

be provided by the manufacturer. Side edges of openings shall be formed or cut neatly and shall

have vertical surfaces. Saddles, headers, or other suitable supports shall be provided by the

manufacturer as necessary for the size and location of openings.

The manufacturer's submittals shall state the limitations for field cutting or modification.

2-3.05. Ends of Strands. Protruding ends of prestressing strands shall be cut off flush with the

concrete and coated or finished to prevent rusting.

2-3.06. Surface Finish. The top surface of horizontal members shall be given a smooth float

finish unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings.

Formed surfaces shall have a smooth uniform texture and color. All fins and other projections

shall be removed from formed surfaces, and all holes and other surface defects shall be repaired

to the satisfaction of ENGINEER.



(Group 4A2)

2-3.07. Shop Markings. Each member shall have shop markings, painted or labeled at a place

not exposed to view after installation, to indicate location and position in the structure in

accordance with the manufacturer's layout drawings.

2-3.08. Bearing Pads. Bearing pads shall be used where indicated on the drawings or in

accordance with the manufacturer’s typical connections details as accepted by ENGINEER.

2-4. CEMENTITOUS MATERIALS FOR ERECTION.

2-4.01. Topping Slab Concrete. Not used.

2-4.02. Mortar (For Grouting Precast Hollow Core Members). Mortar for grouting precast

hollow core members shall be fine or shall be coarse concrete grout meeting the requirements of

ASTM C476 (UBC Standard 21-19). Only enough water shall be added to produce a mixture

which is flowable, but which will not show an excess of water when placed. Unless otherwise

specified, mortar shall have a slump ranging from 8 to 11 inches [200 to 275 mm].

2-5. CURING. Concrete shall be cured by continuous surface saturation or inundation,

exposure to steam or saturated air in a tightly closed room or chamber, or other method

acceptable to ENGINEER. Moist curing shall be maintained for at least 7 days when Type I

cement is used, or 48 hours when Type III cement is used. The steam curing period shall be as

needed to reach minimum compressive strength. Members shall be air cured in the fabricator's

yard until they attain an age of at least 30 days.

2-6. TOLERANCES. Tolerances for prestressed concrete members shall be as recommended by

PCI MNL-116, Division VI.

Prestressed members will be rejected for any of the following:

Length variation in excess of 1/2 inch [12.5 mm] (1/4 inch [6 mm] each end) of

adjacent units or 1 inch [25 mm] maximum between the longest and shortest

units.

Edges varying in excess of specified tolerance criteria.

Deviation from design camber, differential camber between adjacent members of

the same design, or warp or camber which cannot be controlled by the fastening

system between members.

Improperly placed accessories or boxouts.

Unsatisfactory surface finish.

Exposure of wire mesh, reinforcing steel, or prestressing strand, except where cut

off at the ends.

Honeycomb.



(Group 4A2)

Fractures, cracks, chips, or spalls which cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of

ENGINEER.

Irregularities resulting from damaged forms.

2-7. TESTING. Six concrete compression test cylinders shall be cast each day of concreting

operations. An additional set of six cylinders shall be cast each time there is a change in the

concrete mixture during the day's operations. Control test specimens shall be tested as necessary

to determine when to transfer stress from the temporary end anchorage to the bond in the

concrete. At least two cylinders from each set shall be tested at an age of 28 days.

Each concrete mixture shall be tested at least once each week, minimum of one test, for water-

soluble chloride ion in accordance with ASTM C1218. Maximum water-soluble chloride ion

concentrations in prestressed, hardened concrete at an age of 28 days shall not exceed

0.06 percent expressed as a percentage of mass of cement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. The Installer shall have been regularly engaged for at least three years

in the installation of precast structural concrete similar to the requirements of the project.

Prestressed concrete members shall be set in position in accordance with the manufacturer's

layout and the drawings. Bearing pads shall be installed as indicated on the design and

fabrication drawings. Members shall rest solidly upon the supports, without rocking.

3-1.01. Hollow Core Slabs. Members in final position shall be loaded as necessary so that

adjacent bottom edges are even, and the grout keys shall be filled with mortar. Mortar dams

shall be provided at openings and other locations as necessary to prevent mortar leakage.

Leveling loads shall be left in place until the mortar has attained sufficient strength to withstand

the shear loads. All mortar that seeps through the joint shall be removed before it hardens.

When all members have been placed, the joints filled with mortar, and the leveling loads

removed, the members shall be anchored to the supports as indicated on the drawings.

3-1.02. Double Tee Members. Not used.

3-1.03. Welding. If welded connections are required, welding shall be done by qualified

welders possessing valid certificates under the qualification procedures of AWS D1.1. Care

shall be exercised to avoid overheating and cracking the concrete adjacent to the anchorage

plates. All members damaged during welding shall be removed and replaced by the Installer

with new, undamaged members at no additional cost to OWNER.

3-1.04. Field Cutting. Openings, within the manufacturer's limitations and not requiring cutting

of prestressing strands, shall be cut in the field by the erector in accordance with the

manufacturer's standard recommendations. Openings requiring cutting of prestressing strands

shall be made during manufacture; prestressing strands shall not be cut in the field.



(Group 4A2)

All cutting of concrete sections shall be done with suitable concrete saws or core drilling

equipment in a manner that will provide smooth, even cut surfaces. Side edges of openings shall

have vertical surfaces.

All lifting loops shall be cut off flush with the top surface of the member before any covering

materials are placed.

3-1.05. Joints. The soffit of all members shall present a neat and uniform appearance.

When installing hollow core members, cementitious mortar shall be firmly placed by methods

which will ensure complete, uniform, and permanent filling of the entire space without

disturbing or displacing the adjacent members. Mortar containing pea gravel shall be limited to

spaces having one dimension greater than 1-1/2 inches [38 mm].

When insulation is required to be installed directly on the roof slab, all joints shall be checked for

unevenness before roofing materials are placed over the prestressed members. Where the top

edges of adjacent members deviate more than 1/8 inch [3 mm] from a flush surface, leveling

mortar shall be placed along the edge to eliminate the sharp offset. The mortar shall slope

uniformly not steeper than 1/2 inch vertically to 12 inches horizontally [10 mm vertically to

240 mm horizontally] from the high edge to the surface of the adjacent member.

The underside of joints that will be permanently exposed to view after the work has been

completed shall be caulked. Caulking requirements, and the areas to be caulked, are covered in

the caulking section.

3-1.06. Topping Slabs. Not used.

3-1.07. Repairs After Erection. Surfaces damaged during handling or erection, and areas from

which fins and projections have been removed, will be repaired to a uniform finish that will

blend in with the rest of the member. All repairs shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of

ENGINEER.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 03600

GROUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers procurement and installation of grout. Unless otherwise

specified, only nonshrinking grout shall be furnished.

Epoxy grouting of anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors, and reinforcing bars is covered in the

anchorage in concrete and masonry section. Grouting of masonry is covered in the building

masonry section.

1-2. SUBMITTALS. A letter of certification indicating the types of grout to be supplied and the

intended use of each type shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section.

1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and

delivered in a manner which will prevent damage of any kind. Materials shall be protected from

moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

Nonshrinking Grout Cementitious grout with demonstrated non-shrinking

properties; L&M "Crystex", Master Builders

"Masterflow 713" or "Set Grout", Sauereisen "F-100

Level Fill Grout", Sonneborn "Sonogrout 10K", Hilti

“CG 200 PC”, or Five Star Products "Five Star

Grout".


2-2. NONSHRINKING GROUT. Nonshrinking grout shall be furnished factory premixed so

that only water is added at the jobsite.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. PREPARATION. The concrete foundation to receive nonshrinking grout shall be saturated

with water for at least 12 hours preceding grouting unless additional time is required by the grout

manufacturer.

3-2. INSTALLATION.



(Group 4A2)

3-2.01. Mixing. Grout shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. No more water shall be used than

is necessary to produce a flowable grout.

3-2.02. Placement. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, grout under

baseplates shall be 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] thick. Grout shall be placed in strict accordance with

the directions of the manufacturer so that all spaces and cavities below the baseplates are

completely filled without voids. Forms shall be provided where structural components of

baseplates will not confine the grout.

3-2.03. Edge Finishing. In all locations where the edge of the grout will be exposed to view, the

grout shall be finished smooth after it has reached its initial set. Except where shown to be

finished on a slope, the edges of grout shall be cut off flush at the baseplate.

3-2.04. Curing. Nonshrinking grout shall be protected against rapid loss of moisture by covering

with wet cloths or polyethylene sheets. After edge finishing is completed, the grout shall be wet

cured for at least 3 days and then an acceptable membrane curing compound shall be applied.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 03700

CONCRETE REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the repair of concrete as indicated on the drawings, as

specified, or as required to complete the Work. This specification covers the furnishing of all

labor, equipment and materials required to repair, rehabilitate or reconstruct spalled, deteriorated,

or structurally damaged concrete surfaces. Depth of repairs shall be adequate to restore concrete

members to original dimensions.

The Work covered by this section includes, but is not limited to, the following locations:

Primary Sedimentation Basins, Plant No. 3 and 4

Sludge Thickeners, Plant No. 1 and 2

1-2. SUBMITTALS. Specifications and data covering physical properties, the mixes,

application procedures, and curing procedures of the materials proposed shall be submitted in

accordance with the Section 01340. Submittals shall include the approvals required from the

material manufacturer.


1-3.01. Manufacturer's Field Services. The material manufacturer shall provide engineering

field services to review the project and the material application prior to any preparation; to

approve the applicator, the material used, and the procedure to be used; to observe surface

preparation; to approve surface preparation; and to observe application and curing. The field

representative of the material manufacturer shall submit, in writing through the Contractor,

approvals of proposed materials, application procedures, applicator, and surface preparation. The

field representative shall instruct, as needed, to assure that handling, mixing, placing, finishing,

and curing of materials are in accordance with specifications and manufacturer’s requirements.

The field representative shall be an employee of the material manufacturer.

1-3.02. Materials. Material manufacturer’s shall be ISO 9001/9002 registered or provide proof

of documented quality assurance. The quality assurance system shall be independent auditing

registrar.

1-3.03. Applicator. The repair contractor shall have experience and proficiency specific to the

repair type and shall be acceptable to the Engineer and the material supplier. The applicator shall

submit, through the Contractor, a satisfactory experience record including references for previous

application of the specified materials to concrete structures of similar design and complexity.

1-3.04. Pre-construction Meeting. At least 30 days prior to concrete repairs, the contractor shall

conduct a meeting to review the detailed requirements for rehabilitation work. Site conditions,



(Group 4A2)

surface preparation, proposed equipment, procedures, material mixing, placing and finishing

procedures, and curing methods shall be discussed and approved by the Engineer and by the

manufacturer’s field representative. The Contractor shall require the attendance of all involved

parties, including but not limited to the contractor’s superintendent, repair contractor,

manufacturer’s field representative and proposed equipment supplier representative. Minutes of

the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the Contractor and distributed to all parties

within 5 days after the meeting.

1-3.05. Site Conditions. Job conditions shall be maintained at standards that allow material

placement within temperature and cleanliness requirements. Unusual conditions as uncovered

during the course of work shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention for analysis and

disposition. These conditions include but are not limited to poor quality base concrete, severely

corroded reinforcing steel, random cracks, and deep oil penetration.

1-4. PRE-BID INSPECTION. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bid submittal to

determine the extent of the required repairs. Final bid shall include unit prices for each repair

type. Unit prices shall be utilized to adjust the final project cost based on quantities more than or

less than the engineering estimate.

1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with Section

1612; handling and storage shall be in accordance with Section 01614.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Concrete repair and restoration products/ materials shall be

manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company, BASF Construction Chemicals, Sika

Corporation, or equal as specified herein. Equivalent products of other manufacturers regularly

producing high quality concrete and restoration products/ materials, providing engineering field

services, and meeting the specified quality assurance requirements may be furnished subject to

acceptance by the Engineer.

2-2. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise specified or authorized, materials shall conform to the

requirements specified herein. Types of materials or concrete repair not specified herein shall be

as specified in other sections, as indicated on the drawings or, in the absence of any definite

requirement, as recommended by the manufacturer's field representative and acceptable to the

Engineer.

2-2.01. Leveling mortar or surface filler. Applied thickness less than one sixth inch. 1-

component or 2-component, polymer-modified, cementitious product.

Emaco R300 CI BASF

SikaTop 121 Plus Sika

Or equal

2-2.02 Horizontal repairs and overlays.



(Group 4A2)

2-2.02.01 Overlay thickness less than one half inch. 1-component or 2-component, polymer-

modified, cementitious product.

Emaco R300 CI BASF

Thin-Top Supreme Euclid


Or equal

2-2.02.02 Overlay thickness greater than one half inch and not exceeding one inch. 1-component

or 2-component, polymer-modified, cementitious product.

Emaco R310 CI BASF

Concrete-Top Supreme Euclid


Or equal

2-2.02.03 Overlay thickness greater than one inch. 1-component, polymer-modified, silica-fume

enhanced, cementitious repair product.

Concrete-Top Supreme Euclid

MonoTop 615 Sika

Or equal

2-2.03 Vertical or Overhead (Non-sag) Repairs. 1-component or 2-component, polymer

modified, cementitious repair mortar.

Verticoat Supreme Euclid


Or equal

2-2.04 Form and Pour. Thickness 6 inch and less. 1-component, silica-fume enhanced,

cementitious repair product; shrinkage compensated or polymer modified.

Emaco S66 CI BASF

MonoTop 611 Sika

Or equal

2-2.05 Shotcrete or Spray Mortar Repair. Thickness 6 inch and less. 1-component, silica-fume

enhanced, cementitious product; fiber reinforced or polymer modified.

Shotpatch 21F BASF

SikaCem 133 Sika

Or equal



(Group 4A2)

2-2.06 Penetrating Sealer. Siloxane-based sealer with minimum 10 percent solids. Minimum

water repellency 85 percent by ASTM C 642. No scaling exhibited at 125 cycles by ASTM C

672.

Euco-Guard 100 Euclid

Sikagard 701W Sika

Or equal

2-2.07 Water. Clean and free from deleterious substances.

2-2.08 Accessory Products.

2-2.08.01 Bonding Agent. Bond repair material to exisiting concrete. Acrylic latex bonding

adhesive.

Flex-Con Euclid

SikaLatex Sika

Or equal

2-2.08.02 Bonding Agent. Protective coating for reinforcing steel and to bond repair material to

reinforcing steel. Water-based epoxy resin.

Corr-Bond Euclid

Armatec 110 EpoCem Sika

Or equal


Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall apply all materials in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions which are made part of this specification.

3-1. INSPECTION. Prior to the placement of repair material, the surface to be repaired shall be

inspected by the material manufacturer’s field representative to assure the surface conditions are

correct for the type of repair and product/material is being used as specified.

3-2. PREPARATION.

3-2.01 Cleaning. The surface of existing concrete shall be clean and the pores free of any dirt or

material that will be detrimental to the bond of the repair material. All oil, dirt, debris, paint, and

unsound concrete shall be removed. Cleaning shall include complete removal of all dust, dirt,

and residue by high pressure washing.

3-2.02 Surface Preparation. All surfaces shall conform to the requirements of the material

manufacturer. All edges shall be square cut to avoid feather edges.



(Group 4A2)

Concrete surfaces shall be clean and rough. As required, surfaces shall be prepared mechanically

using a scabbler, bushhammer, chipping hammer, shotblast, or scarifier which will give a surface

profile of a minimum one-eighth inch and expose the coarse aggregate of the concrete. For

overlays, the concrete surface shall be roughened to the profile (CSP-Concrete Surface Profile)

and thickness recommended by the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Publication

03732 .

3-2.03 Cracks. All cracks shall be repaired. See Section 03710.

3-2.04 Inspection and Replacement of Reinforcing Steel. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall be

excavated to the extent that a minimum of three-quarter inch of clear space is provided all around

the steel to allow placement of repair material.

Replace any reinforcing steel that has corroded to the extent that the cross-sectional area at any

point has been reduced more than 20 percent from the original cross-section.

3-3. APPLICATION. Concrete repair work shall be performed in accordance with the following

requirements.

3-3.01 Bonding and Priming. Bonding agent shall be applied per manufacturer’s

recommendations. The manufacturer’s coverage rate shall be followed. For rough surfaces, scrub

bonding agent into the surface with a stiff broom.

3-3.02 Treatment of Reinforcing Steel. All reinforcement which is loose, shall be secured in

it’s proper position by tying to other secured bars.

Place new reinforcing steel into repair cavity. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer, new

reinforcing steel shall be lap spliced to existing reinforcing.

Reinforcing shall be treated with two coats of anti-corrosion bonding agent.

3-3.03 Forming. Where forms are required, water-tight forms shall be constructed with

sufficient rigidity to withstand head pressure and prevent excessive deflection during material

placement. For pumped applications without open top forms, provide a port connection of

sufficient diameter to allow pumping into the form.

Tolerances for formed work shall be as stipulated in ACI 117 for cast-in-place concrete, unless

otherwise indicated. Formed surfaces stipulated in Article 3.4 of ACI 347 shall be Class C.

3-3.04 Shotcrete Repairs. Shotcrete or spray mortar materials shall be applied per ACI 506.2 and

the recommendations of ACI 506. The material shall have a minimum thickness of one-half

inch.

3-3.05 Shoring and Support. When removal and patching of deteriorated concrete may cause

temporary weakness, excessive deflections, or structural instability, shoring or other suitable

supports shall be provided until completion and adequate curing of repairs.



(Group 4A2)

3-4 FINISHING. All unformed surfaces shall receive a light broom finish.

3-5 CURING. Curing procedures are required to ensure the durability and quality of the repair.

The repair material shall be cured as recommended by the manufacturer before being placed in

service.

Unless specified otherwise, one or more of the following methods shall be used:

3-5.01 Water Curing. Keep concrete surfaces continuously wet with water during the curing

period by immersion, maintaining a continuous flow of water over the surface, continuous

spraying, continuous sprinkling, or a combination of these. The difference in temperature

between the water used for curing and the concrete shall not exceed 20 degrees F. The curing

period shall be a minimum of ten days.

3-5.02 Wet Coverings. Cover the surfaces with burlap, cotton mats, sand, earth, or other

suitable moisture retaining materials and keep these materials fully saturated during the curing

period. Lap all coverings at least 8 inches at all joints. Do not use any type covering which will

discolor the repair or the surrounding surfaces. The curing period shall be a minimum of ten

days.

3-5.03 Membrane Curing Compounds. Unless required by the material manufacturer,

membrane curing compounds shall not be used.

3-6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

3-6.01 Material Storage and Handling. The material shall be delivered in original, unopened

containers. Containers shall be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, product name, and lot

number. Materials shall be stored at the job site under dry conditions and at temperatures

between 50 deg F and 90 deg F.

3-6.02. Environmental Conditions. Repair materials shall not be applied without protection in

temperature below 45 deg F nor when the temperature is expected to fall below 45 deg F during

the curing period, unless otherwise specified by the material manufacturer.

When ambient temperatures below 45 deg F are expected during the curing period, the repair

shall be maintained at 50 deg F for the full curing period. Sudden cooling shall not be permitted.

Gradual temperature drop shall be maintained at not more than 20 deg F in any 24 hour period.

Carbon dioxide or exhaust gases from combustion heaters shall not be allowed within enclosures

or allowed to contact the repair.

3-6.03. Protection. Repair areas shall be protected from other trades and weather for a minimum

of 10 days after material is placed.



(Group 4A2)

3-6.04. Cleaning. Work areas are to be cleaned each day in accordance with Section 01710.

Upon completion of the final cleanup, the Contractor shall restore all areas affected by repair

procedures to their original condition, leaving no trace of material piles or other wasted

materials.

End of Section

This page was left blank itentionally



(Group 4A2)

Section 03710

CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the repair of concrete and shotcrete cracks and joints.

The Work covered by this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Sealing of all cracks and crack networks that are wider than a minimum

thickness of 10 mils (0.01 inch) [250 µm].

b. Sealing of construction and movement joints that require repair.

c. If a liquid-containing structure fails the leakage test, CONTRACTOR

shall make repairs to the structure to stop all leaks. Repairs shall include

all repairs necessary to achieve an acceptable leakage test.

Both inch-pound (English) and SI (metric) units of measurement are specified herein; the values

expressed in inch-pound units shall govern.

1-2. SUBMITTALS. Specifications and data covering physical properties, mixtures, application

procedures, and curing procedures of the materials proposed shall be submitted in accordance

with the submittals section. Submittals shall include the approvals from the material

manufacturer.


1-3.01. Manufacturer's Field Services. The material manufacturer shall provide engineering

field services to review the project and the material application prior to any preparation; to

approve the applicator, the material used, and the procedure to be used; to observe surface

preparation; to approve surface preparation; and to observe application. The field representative

of the material manufacturer shall submit, in writing through CONTRACTOR, approvals of

proposed material, application procedures, applicator, and surface preparation. The field

representative shall be an employee of the material manufacturer.

1-3.02. Applicator. The applicator shall submit through CONTRACTOR a satisfactory

experience record including references from previous application of the specified materials to

structures of similar design and complexity.


shipping section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the handling and storage

section.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Unless otherwise specified or

authorized, repairs shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Types of repairs not

specified herein shall be as specified in other sections, as indicated on the drawings, or, in the

absence of any definite requirement, as recommended by the manufacturer's representative and

subject to acceptance by ENGINEER. The following types of repairs shall be performed as

required.

2-1.01. Pressure-Injected Epoxy Resin. Pressure-injected epoxy resin shall be used to seal

cracks, construction joints, and other repairs in concrete and shotcrete structures as required or as

directed by ENGINEER.

2-1.02. Pressure-Injected Foam Resin. Pressure-injected foam resin shall be used to seal joints

and cracks in concrete and shotcrete structures that will have movement as required or as

directed by ENGINEER.

2-1.03. Crack Sealant. Crack sealant shall be used to seal cracks in structures prior to pressure

injection of resin.

2-2. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Repair products/materials shall be manufactured by the

companies specified herein. Equivalent products of other manufacturers regularly producing

high quality concrete repair products/materials and providing engineering field services may be

furnished subject to review and acceptance by ENGINEER.

2-3. MATERIALS. All materials shall be as specified or as recommended by the manufacturer

for temperature and moisture conditions encountered.

Pressure-Injected Epoxy

Resin

ASTM C881, Type IV, moisture insensitive,

maximum viscosity 350 cps at 77°F [25°C]. Sika

"Sikadur 52", Master Builders "Concresive 1380",

PolySpec "RezRok 107", Prime Resins "Prime Rez

1000".

Pressure-Injected Foam Resin Prime Resins "Prime-Flex 900", DeNeef "HA

Sealfoam", or 3M "ScotchSeal 5600".

Foam Resin Accelerator As recommended by foam resin manufacturer.

Crack Sealant Master Builders "Concresive Paste LPL", Sika

"Sikadur Hi-Mod Gel", or PolySpec "TuffRez 106",

moisture insensitive.

Epoxy Bonding Agent Master Builders "Concresive Liquid LPL", Sika

"Sikadur Hi-Mod Adhesive", or PolySpec

"TuffRez 101", moisture insensitive.


PART 3 - EXECUTION



(Group 4A2)

3-1. INSPECTION. Prior to the placement of the repair materials, the crack to be repaired shall

be inspected by the material manufacturer to assure that preparation and conditions are correct

for the type of repair and the product/material being used as specified herein.

3-2. PREPARATION. All cracks and surfaces around the cracks shall be free of objectionable

substances and shall conform to the requirements of the material manufacturer. Concrete and

shotcrete to be repaired shall be cleaned by methods acceptable to the material manufacturer so

that the cracks are free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance, and other foreign matter. All loose and

deteriorated existing concrete and shotcrete shall be removed down to sound materials. All

concrete and shotcrete surfaces shall be checked for delamination to ensure that all surfaces are

sound. All edges shall be square cut to avoid feather edges.

Any other preparation recommended by the material manufacturer shall be brought to

ENGINEER's attention and may be incorporated into the work if acceptable to ENGINEER.

Concrete and shotcrete surfaces in the area of a crack to be repaired shall be cleaned by wire

brushing, blasting, or other acceptable methods.

Wall surfaces shall be sandblasted clean to expose crack networks and construction joints. If

there is active water seepage in the repair area, the seepage shall be stopped as recommended by

the injection material manufacturer and as acceptable to ENGINEER. Injection ports shall be

installed, when recommended by the injection material manufacturer.

3-2.01. Injected Epoxy Resin. Preparation for injected epoxy resin shall include sealing the

surface at the crack on both sides, when possible, with crack sealant as recommended by the

material manufacturer and as acceptable to ENGINEER for the pressure injection work.

Injection ports for epoxy resin shall penetrate through the crack sealant into the cracks at

spacings recommended by the material manufacturer.

3-2.02. Injected Foam Resin. Preparation for injected foam resin shall include drilling offset

injection holes at an angle that will intersect the crack, joint, or crack network at approximately

one-half the thickness of the concrete or shotcrete up to a thickness of 36 inches [900 mm].

Spacing of injection ports shall be determined as recommended by the injection material

manufacturer and as acceptable to ENGINEER. When the injection material manufacturer

certifies, in writing, that spacing of injection ports and installation procedures are acceptable, the

injection ports may be installed directly into the crack, subject to review by ENGINEER.

3-3. APPLICATION. Concrete and shotcrete repair work shall be performed in accordance with

the following requirements.

3-3.01. Crack Sealant. Crack sealant shall be trowel-applied to a minimum dried thickness of

1/8 inch [3 mm]. The concrete surface where the sealant is applied shall be smooth, uniform,

and free from irregularities. Crack sealant shall be removed after the injection of resin is

completed whenever the sealant will be visible after completion of the work.



(Group 4A2)

3-3.02. Pressure-Injected Resin. The injected areas shall be prepared as specified and as

recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure-injected resin shall be suitable for penetration of

joints, cracks, and crack networks 2 mils (0.002 inch) [50 µm] wide and larger.

After the joints and cracks are prepared and before the injection of the resin, the joints shall be

flushed with water. The water flush shall be terminated when the turbidity of the expelled water

is equal to that of the flush water.

The pumping equipment used for the pressure injection of resin shall have pressure metering.

Written procedures for use and quality control of the injection equipment shall be furnished to

ENGINEER for review and acceptance. The pump shall be electric. The material and process

used for the pressure injection of the resin shall have been in use a minimum of 5 years.

The joints and crack networks shall have a minimum of 90 percent penetration of resin into the

joint or crack network. Core samples may be taken at ENGINEER's discretion.

3-3.02.01. Epoxy Resin. Epoxy resin shall be injected into the structure in accordance with the

material manufacturer's recommendations and as acceptable to ENGINEER. Epoxy resin shall

be injected until the resin appears at the next port.

3-3.02.02. Foam Resin. Foam resin shall be premixed and injected into the structure in

accordance with the material manufacturer's recommendations and as acceptable to ENGINEER.

Foam resin shall be injected into the structure until the resin appears at the next injection port.

Surfaces of cracks and joints may need to be sealed with crack sealant.

3-3.03. Cold Weather. When ambient temperatures below 40°F [4°C] are expected during the

curing period, the repair materials shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50°F [10°C]

for 14 days or 75°F [24°C] for 7 days after placement. Sudden cooling of the repair materials

shall not be permitted.

3-4. PROTECTION. Post-placement curing and protection shall be as specified herein and in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3-5. CLEANING. Work areas shall be cleaned each day in accordance with the project

requirements section. Upon completion of the final cleanup, CONTRACTOR shall restore all

areas affected by the grouting procedures to their original condition, leaving no trace of material

piles or other wasted materials.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 05550

ANCHORAGE IN CONCRETE AND MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the procurement and installation of anchors in concrete and

masonry. It includes cast-in-place anchor bolts, adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, undercut

anchors, and epoxy grouted anchor bolts and reinforcing bars to be installed in concrete and

masonry.

1-2. GENERAL. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings all anchors and anchor

bolts shall be cast-in-place anchor bolts with forged heads or embedded nuts and washers.

Unless otherwise indicated bolts in concrete shall have a diameter of at least 3/4 inch [19 mm],

and bolts in grouted masonry shall have a diameter of at least 1/2 inch [12.7 mm].

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, anchors and anchor bolts used in the following

locations and applications shall be of the indicated materials. Other anchors and anchor bolts

shall be as indicated on the drawings.

Cast-In-Place and Epoxy Grouted Anchor Bolts.

Submerged locations Stainless steel.

Locations subject to splashing Stainless steel.

Buried locations Stainless steel.

Anchorage of structural steel columns Stainless steel.

Other exterior locations Stainless steel.

Other interior locations Stainless steel.

Adhesive, Expansion, and Undercut Anchors.

Submerged locations Stainless steel.

Locations subject to splashing Stainless steel.

Buried locations Stainless steel.

Anchorage of structural steel columns Stainless steel.

Other exterior locations Stainless steel.

Other interior locations Stainless steel.



(Group 4A2)

Adhesive, expansion, and undercut anchors may be used instead of cast-in-place anchors where

specifically indicated or permitted on the drawings or with the specific acceptance by

ENGINEER.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Data and catalog cuts indicating the manufacturer and types of adhesive

anchors, expansion anchors, undercut anchors, and epoxy grouts to be supplied shall be

submitted in accordance with the submittals section.

1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and

delivered in a manner which will prevent damage or corrosion. Damaged materials shall be

promptly replaced. Materials shall be shipped and stored in original manufacturer's packaging.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Materials shall be as indicated below.

Anchor Bolts.

Carbon steel ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with compatible

nuts.

Galvanized steel ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with compatible

nuts; hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153.

Stainless steel Bolts, ASTM F593, Alloy Group 2; nuts,

ASTM F594, Alloy Group 2.

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1; of the same material as

anchor bolts and nuts.

Reinforcing Bars ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.

Reinforcing Bars, weldable ASTM A706, Grade 60, deformed.

Epoxy Grout for Anchor Bolts and

Reinforcing Bars.

Adhesive

For Floors and Horizontal

Surfaces

Sika "Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV"; ChemRex

"Concresive Liquid LPL"; Sika "Sikadur 32

Hi-Mod".

For Vertical Surfaces and

Overhead Applications

Sika "Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel".



(Group 4A2)

Aggregate As recommended by the epoxy grout

manufacturer.


Expansion Anchors Hilti "Kwik-Bolt 3"; ITW Ramset/Red

Head "Trubolt Wedge Anchor"; Powers

Fasteners "Power-Stud Anchor"; Simpson

“Wedge-All”.

Undercut Anchors Hilti “HDA Self Setting Undercut Anchor”;

Drillco “Maxi-Bolt”.

Adhesive Anchors for Concrete and

Grout Filled Masonry.

Threaded Rods and Nuts As specified for Anchor Bolts and as

recommended by the adhesive

manufacturer.

Adhesive Hilti "HIT HY 150 MAX", “HIT-ICE”,

“HIT RE 500”, or “HVA” Systems; ITW

Ramset/Redhead "Red Head Epcon C6"

System; Powers Fasteners "Power Fast

Epoxy Injection Gel" System; Simpson

“SET Epoxy” or “Acrylic-Tie” Systems.

Adhesive Anchors for Hollow

Masonry System.

Threaded Rods and Nuts As specified for Anchor Bolts and as

recommended by the adhesive

manufacturer.

Adhesive Hilti "HIT HY 20" System; ITW

Ramset/Redhead "Epcon Ceramic 6"

System; Powers Fasteners "Power Fast

Epoxy Injection Gel" System; Simpson

“SET Epoxy” or “Acrylic-Tie” Systems.

Screen Tubes As recommended by the manufacturer.

2-2. ANCHORS.

2-2.01. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts. Cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be delivered in time to

permit setting before the structural concrete is placed. Unless installed in pipe sleeves, anchor

bolts shall be provided with sufficient threads to permit a nut to be installed on the concrete side

of the concrete form or the supporting template. Two nuts, a jam nut, and a washer shall be



(Group 4A2)

furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts indicated on the drawings to have locknuts; two nuts and

a washer shall be furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts without locknuts.

2-2.02. Epoxy Grouted Anchor Bolts and Reinforcing. Epoxy grout for installing reinforcing

bars and anchor bolts not indicated to be adhesive anchors shall consist of a two-component

liquid epoxy adhesive of viscosity appropriate to the location and application, and an inert

aggregate filler component, if recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.

Anchor bolts and reinforcing bars shall be free of coatings that would weaken the bond with the

epoxy.

2-2.03. Adhesive, Expansion, and Undercut Anchors. When adhesive, expansion, or undercut

anchors are indicated on the drawings, only acceptable systems shall be used. Acceptable

systems shall include only those systems and products specified or specifically indicated by

product name on the drawings. Alternative anchoring systems may be used only when

specifically accepted by ENGINEER. An acceptable adhesive anchor system may be used as an

alternative in locations where epoxy grouted anchor bolts are specified or indicated.

Unless otherwise required, single nut and washer shall be furnished for adhesive anchors,

expansion anchors, and undercut anchors. Adhesive anchors shall be free of coatings that would

weaken the bond with the adhesive.

Adhesive anchors in hollow masonry shall utilize screen tubes as recommended by the

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. GENERAL. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to projecting, threaded

portions of stainless steel anchors immediately before tightening of the nuts.

3-2. CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS. Cast-in-place anchor bolts shall be carefully

positioned with templates and secured in the forms prior to placing concrete. CONTRACTOR

shall verify that anchorage devices are positioned in accordance with the design drawings and

with applicable equipment submittal drawings. Bolts shall be positioned sufficiently in advance

of the concrete placement so that an on-site representative of ENGINEER or OWNER will have

sufficient time to inspect the bolts prior to placing concrete. If Special Inspection of the anchor

bolts is required by the local building code, anchorage shall be placed in sufficient time and with

sufficient notification so that such inspection can take place without delaying progress of the

work.

Threads, bolts, and nuts spattered with concrete during placement shall be cleaned prior to final

installation of the bolts and nuts.

3-3. EPOXY GROUT. Epoxy grout components shall be packaged separately at the factory and

shall be mixed immediately before use. Proportioning and mixing of the components shall be

done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.



(Group 4A2)

3-3.01. Preparation. Where indicated on the drawings, anchor bolts and reinforcing bars shall be

epoxy grouted in holes drilled into hardened concrete. Diameters of holes shall be as follows:

Item Diameter of Hole

Anchor Bolts and Reinforcing Bars 1/8 inch [3 mm] larger than the outside

diameter of the bolt or bar.

The embedment depth for epoxy grouted anchor bolts and reinforcing bars shall be at least 15

bolt or bar diameters, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

Holes shall be prepared for grouting as recommended by the epoxy grout manufacturer.

3-3.02. Installation. Anchor bolts and reinforcing bars shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and

other foreign matter when installed. The bolts and bars shall be set and the epoxy grout shall be

placed in accordance with the recommendations of the grout manufacturer. Care shall be taken

to ensure that all spaces and cavities are filled with epoxy grout, without voids.

3-4. ADHESIVE ANCHORS. The embedment depth for adhesive anchors shall be at least

15 rod diameters unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

Adhesive for adhesive anchors shall be statically mixed in the field during application. All

proportioning and mixing of the components shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

Anchors shall be installed in holes drilled into hardened concrete or grout filled masonry.

Diameter of holes shall be 1/16 inch [1.5 mm] larger than the outside diameter of the rod unless

recommended otherwise by the anchor system manufacturer. Holes shall be prepared for

insertion of the anchors by removing all dust and debris using procedures recommended by the

adhesive manufacturer.

Adhesive anchors and holes shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and other foreign matter at the

time of installation. The adhesive shall be placed and the rods shall be set in accordance with the

recommendations of the material manufacturer. Care shall be taken to ensure that all spaces and

cavities are filled with adhesive, without voids.

3-5. EXPANSION AND UNDERCUT ANCHORS. Expansion and undercut anchors shall be

installed in accordance with the drawings, but in no case shall the embedment depth be less than

six bolt diameters. The minimum distance between the center of any anchor and an edge or

exterior corner of concrete shall be at least six times the diameter of the bolt. Unless otherwise

indicated on the drawings, the minimum distance between the centers of anchors shall be at least

12 times the diameter of the bolt.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 07600

SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers sheet metal for flashings and moisture protection. The

following sheet metal items are covered in other sections:

Ductwork, louvers, and other sheet metal for the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning

system.

1-2. GENERAL. Installation of roof flashings shall be as indicated on the drawings and as

specified in the building masonry and roofing sections.

Flashing members to be built into masonry, concrete, or roofing shall be delivered at the proper

time for incorporation into the work.

When installing sheet metal items, care shall be taken to avoid marring and improper bending.

All components shall be stored in clean, dry storage areas. Contact with corrosive or staining

materials shall be prevented. All damaged sections shall be replaced and only undamaged units

shall be installed.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the

items furnished under this section shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

Stainless Steel ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304, AISI 2B finish

unless otherwise specified.

Sheet Aluminum ASTM B209, Allow 3003-H14

Solder ASTM B32, Alloy Grade 50A (50-50).

Soldering Flux

For Stainless Steel Zinc chloride type, Fed Spec 0-F-506, Type II.

For Other Metals Acid type, Fed Spec O-F-506, Type I, Form A.

Fasteners Same metal as sheet metal being fastened.



(Group 4A2)

Acrylic Sealant Pecora "Unicrylic" or Tremco "Mono".

2-2. FLASHINGS. All exposed or contacting flashings shall be of the same material.

2-2.01. Types and Materials.

Miscellaneous Hidden Stainless steel, 26 gage.

Flashings

Scuppers Pre-finished .032 in. aluminum,

color and finish to be selected.

Collector Heads Pre-finished .032 in. aluminum,


Downspouts Pre-finished .032 in. aluminum,


Copings Pre-finished, pre-manufactured aluminum,

M&M model SLC-800, color and finish to be

selected.

2-3. CONFIGURATIONS.

2-3.01. Scuppers and Downspouts. The scupper conductor heads and downspouts shall be of the

type indicated on the drawings. Scupper conductor heads shall be installed as indicated on the

drawings and shall be coordinated with roofing and flashing installation. All hold-down clips,

anchors, and fasteners shall be provided for proper installation. The conductor heads and

downspouts shall be finished with a "Kynar 500" fluoropolymer over-baked coating conforming

to AAMA 2605.

2-3.02. Miscellaneous Metal Flashings. Metal flashings shall be provided for vents, sleeves, and

similar projections through the roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. WATERTIGHT JOINTS. Joints in sheet metal work shall be closed watertight unless slip

joints are specifically required. Watertight joints shall be mechanically interlocked and then

thoroughly soldered for metals other than aluminum. Joints in aluminum or between aluminum

and other metals shall be sealed with acrylic sealant.

All joints shall be wiped clean of flux after soldering. Acid flux shall be neutralized by washing

the joints with sodium bicarbonate.

3-2. SCUPPERS AND DOWNSPOUTS. The scupper conductor heads and downspouts shall

be as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Sections of scupper conductor heads shall



(Group 4A2)

be formed to the profiles indicated. All joints in conductor heads and downspouts shall be

watertight. Downspouts shall have bottom terminations canted outward away from the wall for

discharging onto splash blocks or other suitable wear surfacing.

All exposed fasteners shall have exposed portion colored to match the face color of the

connected pieces. All fasteners shall be a non-corroding type.

3-3. MISCELLANEOUS METAL FLASHINGS. Metal flashings shall be installed as specified

in the roofing section.

3-4. PROTECTION. Adequate protection shall be provided during shipment, site storage, and

installation, to prevent damage to materials or finished work.

Aluminum to be placed in contact with concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals shall be given a

heavy coat of coal tar paint.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 07900

CAULKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers caulking and sealing.

1-2. GENERAL. The terms "caulking" and "sealing", as used on the drawings and in these

specifications, are synonymous. Both terms indicate the materials specified herein. Oil-base

caulking shall not be used on this project.

1-3. APPROVALS. All caulking shall meet the requirements of the standards specified herein. All

caulking and sealing to be used in contact with potable water shall meet the requirements of

ANSI/NSF Standard 61.

1-4. SUBMITTALS. Specifications and data covering the materials proposed for use, together

with samples or color cards showing the manufacturer's full line of sealant colors, shall be submitted

in accordance with the Submittals section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS.

Thiokol Sealants (polysulfides) Fed Spec TT-S-00227E, Class A or ASTM

920 Type M; polysulfide rubber, two

component.

Nonsag

Submerged Service,

Non potable water

Pecora "Synthacalk GC-2+"; Sonneborn

“Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant”.

Nonsubmerged Service Pecora "Synthacalk GC-2+"; Sonneborn

"Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant";

Polymeric Systems “PSI-350”.

Self-Leveling, nonsubmerged A. C. Horn "Hornflex Traffic Grade";

Polymeric Systems “PSI-350”.

Urethane Sealants (Polyurethanes) Fed Spec TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type 2

and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, two

component.

Nonsag

Submerged Service



(Group 4A2)

Potable Water Polymeric Systems “RC-270”; Sika

“Sikaflex-2cNS.

Nonpotable Water Pecora "Dynatred"; Polymeric Systems

“RC-270".

Nonsubmerged Service Bostik "Chem-Calk 500"; Tremco "Vulkem

227"; Pecora "Dynatrol II"; Tremco

"DYmeric 240"; Sika “Sikaflex-2cNS”.

Self-Leveling,

Nonsubmerged Service

Bostik "Chem-Calk 550"; Tremco

"Vulkem 245"; Pecora "Urexpan NR-200";

Polymeric Systems “ RC-2SL"; Tremco

"THC-900".

Acrylic Sealant Fed Spec TT-S-230; ASTM C834.

Bostik “Chem-Calk 600”; Pecora “ AC20”;

Tremco “Mono 555”.

Primer As recommended by the sealant

manufacturer.

Backup Material Polyethylene or polyurethane foam as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer;

Dow "Ethafoam SB" or Plateau "Denver

Foam".

Bondbreaker Tape Adhesive-backed polyethylene tape as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2-2. COLORS. Colors of sealants shall be as selected by Engineer from the manufacturer's

standard line of colors. Different colors may be required for different locations.

2-3. LOCATIONS TO BE CAULKED.

2-3.01. With Thiokol or Urethane Sealant (Nonsag) - Submerged Service.

All joints requiring caulking in submerged locations.

2-3.02. With Thiokol or Urethane Sealant (Nonsag) - Nonsubmerged Service.

Entire perimeter of frames for exterior metal doors.

Control joints in masonry walls.

Joints on the underside of prestressed, precast roof members where exposed to view.

Joints between masonry and cast-in-place concrete, where indicated on the drawings.

Other locations where caulking is indicated on the drawings, specified in other sections, or

required for weatherproofing.



(Group 4A2)

2-3.03. With Thiokol or Urethane Sealant (Self-Leveling).

Horizontal joints in walks or drives.

Horizontal joints in traffic-bearing decks and slabs.

2-3.04. With Acrylic Sealant.

Watertight joints in sheet metal work.

2-3.05. With Silicone Sealant. Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. JOINT PREPARATION. All surfaces to receive sealant shall be clean, dry, and free from

dust, grease, oil, or wax. Concrete surfaces which have been contaminated by form oil, paint, or

other foreign matter which would impair the bond of the sealant to the substrate shall be cleaned by

sandblasting. All surfaces shall be wiped with a clean cloth saturated with xylol or other suitable

solvent, and shall be primed before the sealant is applied.

Unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer and permitted by the Engineer, the

depth of sealant in a joint shall be equal to the width of the joint, but not more than 1/2 inch.

Backup material shall be provided as necessary to control the depth of sealant and shall be of

suitable size so that, when compressed 25 to 50 percent, the space will be filled. Backup material

shall be rolled or pressed into place in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions,

avoiding puncturing and lengthwise stretching. If depth of the joint does not permit use of backup

material, bondbreaker tape shall be placed at the bottom of the joint to prevent three-sided adhesion.

3-2. SEALING. Sealing work shall be done before any field painting work is started. The air

temperature and the temperature of the sealed surfaces shall be above 50°F when sealing work is

performed.

Upon completion of the sealing work, each sealed joint shall have a smooth, even, tooled finish,

flush with the edges of the sealing recess, and all adjacent surfaces shall be clean. Sealant shall not

lap onto adjacent surfaces. Any sealant so applied as to prevent the painting of adjacent surfaces to

a clean line, or with an excess of material outside the joint and feathered onto surfaces, shall be

removed and the joint resealed.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 08305

ACCESS HATCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the fabrication and erection of cast-in-place, off-street, floor

access doors and hatches. Roof hatches are specified in the Roof Specialties and Accessories

section. Manhole frames and covers are specified in the Sewer Manhole section.

Fabricated items which are indicated on the drawings but not mentioned specifically herein shall

be fabricated in accordance with the applicable requirements of this section.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in

full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and

recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

Equipment shall be furnished complete with all components and accessories required for proper

operation, and any additional materials or construction required by the manufacturer's design.

1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all

equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in

the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly and installation drawings, together with detailed

specifications, capacities, weight of each component, complete bill of materials, and accessories

forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals

section.

Verification that access hatches are properly sized to remove the pump equipment as intended by

pump manufacturer.



section.

1-5. WARRANTY. The manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or

workmanship for a warranty period of not less than 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. GENERAL. Work on materials shall be fabricated in conformity with dimensions,

arrangements, sizes, and weights or thicknesses specified or indicated on the drawings.



(Group 4A2)

All members and parts shall be free of warps, local deformations, and unauthorized bends. Holes

and other provisions for field connections shall be accurately located and shop checked so that

proper fit will result when the units are assembled in the field. All field connection materials

shall be furnished.

2-2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Access hatches shall be of all-aluminum construction and

designed to withstand a live load of 300 psf, with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span.

Leaves shall pivot so that the cover does not protrude above the channel frame. The door leaves

shall be leaf type, constructed of structural shapes and reinforced diamond pattern checkered

plate. Structural shapes and plates shall have thickness of not less than ¼ inch. All hardware

shall be of stainless steel. The orientation of the access hatches shall be as indicated in the

drawings. The hatch opening size shown on the drawings shall be confirmed with the pump

equipment manufacturer to ensure the hatch is adequately sized to allow for pump equipment

removal. Access hatches shall be as manufactured by Bilco Company, Halliday Products, or US

Foundry, without exception.

Door and hatch frames shall be provided with anchorage devices into the concrete slab. Where

required for drainage, channel frames shall be 1/4 inch thick with a cross sectional area large

enough to allow adequate water drainage. A 1-1/2 inch drainage coupling shall be located in the

channel frame. The frame shall be designed to empty through the coupling. Frames shall have a

neoprene door cushion unless a specific door model without a cushion is specified. All

aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or mortar shall be given a heavy coat of epoxy

enamel unless specified otherwise. Aluminum access doors and hatches shall be given a mill

finish.

Hatches shall be supplied with lifting operators and hold-open devices. All doors shall

automatically lock in the vertical position by means of a hold-open arm with release handle. A

snap lock with a gasketed cover plug and removable turn handle shall be provided. The

operators shall provide for smooth, easy and controlled door operation throughout the entire arc

of opening and closing. Operation shall not be affected by temperature.

Access hatches shall be etched with the words “Confined Space Empty” when located on

wetwells, manholes or other structures where access is confined.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials shall be erected and installed in conformity with the

dimensions and arrangements specified or indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the

manufacturer. Product finishes damaged during erection shall be repaired as recommended by

the manufacturer. Hatch frames with drainage couplings shall be connected to the wetwell.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 09940

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers field applied protective coatings, including surface

preparation, protection of surfaces, inspection, and other appurtenant work for equipment and

surfaces designated to be coated with heavy-duty maintenance coatings. Regardless of the

number of coats previously applied, at least two field coats in addition to any shop coats or field

prime coats shall be applied to all surfaces unless otherwise specified.

1-2. GENERAL. Cleaning, surface preparation, coating application, and thickness shall be as

specified herein and shall meet or exceed the coating manufacturer's recommendations. When

the manufacturer's minimum recommendations exceed the specified requirements, Contractor

shall comply with the manufacturer's minimum recommendations. When equivalent products

are acceptable to Engineer, Contractor shall comply with this specification and the coating

manufacturer's recommendations.

1-2.01. Governing Standards. All cleaning, surface preparation, coating application, thickness,

testing, and coating materials (where available) shall be in accordance with the referenced

standards of the following AWWA, ANSI, NACE, SSPC, NSF, and ASTM.

1-2.02. Delivery and Storage. All coating products shall be received and stored in accordance

with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.

1-2.03. Coatings, Painting, and Linings Covered in Other Sections. Not used.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Contractor shall submit color cards for all coatings proposed for use,

together with complete descriptive specifications and the completed Coating System Data

Sheets, to Engineer for review and color selection. Requests for review submitted directly to

Engineer by coating suppliers will not be considered.

When the proposed products will be in contact with treated or raw water in potable water

treatment facilities, Contractor shall submit certifications that the proposed systems are in

compliance with ANSI/NSF 61.

Contractor shall submit a Coating System Data Sheet for each separately identified surface in the

Coating Schedule that will be used in the project, using the appropriate Coating System Data

Sheet forms (Figures 1-09940 and 2-09940) at the end of this section. Each field coating system

shall be acceptable to the coating material manufacturer. Each Coating System Data Sheet shall

include application temperature limits including recoat time requirements for the ambient

conditions at the site, including temperatures up to 130°F [54°C]. Temperature requirements

shall be specified by the coating manufacturer.

Each proposed coating system shall be assigned a unique number with a prefix letter based on

the following:



(Group 4A2)

Prefix Surfaces Figure

A Iron and steel 2

C Concrete and concrete block 1

E Equipment - submerged

nonsubmerged

1

2

F Nonferrous metal 1

G Galvanized 1

H High temperature 1

P PVC and FRP 1

Each coating system that will be applied entirely in the field shall be assigned only a prefix letter

and no suffix letter. When appropriate under the indicated conditions, the following suffix shall

be added to the coating system numbers:

-F Each shop-applied coating system that includes a finish coat

applied in the field.

A separate Coating System Data Sheet shall be developed and submitted for each variation or

change in a coating system or surface to be coated.


1-4.01. Coating System Data Sheet Certifications. The coating applicator and coating

manufacturer shall review and approve in writing the coating manufacturer's written

recommendations for the coating system and the intended service. Any variations from the

specifications or the coating manufacturers published recommendations shall be submitted in

writing and approved by the coating manufacturer. The coating manufacturer shall observe the

surface preparation, mixing, and application of the coating systems and submit a written report of

his observations and any additional recommendations.

1-4.02. Special Interior Coating Systems. In addition to the requirements for all coating

systems, the coating applicator and coating manufacturer shall develop and submit, in writing,

the proposed detailed procedures for handling, storing, surface preparation, mixing, and

application to verify compliance with this specification and the coating manufacturer's written

recommendations. The procedures shall include copies of the coating manufacturer's published

recommendations and the proposed method for complying with these recommendations and

these specifications. Contractor, coating applicator, and coating manufacturer shall review and

approve, in writing, the proposed detail procedures before they are submitted for review.

Contractor and coating manufacturer shall inspect coating application of the appropriate

application methods.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS.

2-1.01. Equivalent Coatings. Whenever a coating is specified by the name of a proprietary

product or of a particular manufacturer or vendor, it shall be understood as establishing the

desired type and quality of coating. Other manufacturers' coatings will be accepted, provided

that sufficient information is submitted to enable Engineer to determine that the proposed

coatings are equivalent to those named. Information on proposed coatings shall be submitted for

review in accordance with the Submittals section. Requests for review of equivalency will be

accepted only from Contractor, and will be considered only after the contract has been awarded.

2-2. MATERIALS. All coatings shall be delivered to the job in original, unopened containers,

with labels intact. Coatings shall be stored indoors and shall be protected against freezing. No

adulterant, unauthorized thinner, or other material not included in the coating formulation shall

be added to the coating for any purpose.

All coatings shall conform to the air quality regulations applicable at the location of use.

Coating materials that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturer to conform, whether or not

specified by product designation, shall not be used.

Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the compatibility of field coatings with each other or

with any previously applied coatings. Coatings used in successive field coats shall be produced

by the same manufacturer. The first field coat over shop coated or previously coated surfaces

shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to underlying coats.

All coatings used on surfaces that will be in contact with potable or treated water shall be

certified as being in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61. Coatings that cannot be so certified,

whether or not specified by manufacturer and by product designation, shall not be used.

All intermediate and finish coating materials that will be in contact with wastewater atmosphere

shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be fumeproof and suitable for wastewater plant

atmosphere that contains hydrogen sulfide. Coatings that cannot be so guaranteed shall not be

used. Lead-free and mercury-free coatings shall be used if available, but in no case shall

coatings containing lead or mercury be used that become discolored when exposed to wastewater

plant atmosphere.

2-2.01 Primers.

Universal Primer Ameron "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline

"Rustbond", ICI Devoe "Devran 224HS",

Tnemec "Series 27 F.C. Typoxy", or

Sherwin-Williams "Macropoxy 646".

Epoxy Concrete Block Filler Ameron "Amerlock 400BF Epoxy Block

Filler", Carboline "Sanitile 600", ICI Devoe

"Blox Filler 4000", Tnemec "Series 54-660",

or Sherwin-Williams "Kem Cati-Coat HS".



(Group 4A2)

Epoxy Concrete Filler and

Surfacer

Tnemec "Series 63-1500", Ameron NuKlad

114A, or Carboline "Carboguard 510".

2-2.02. Intermediate and Finish Coatings.

Epoxy Enamel (NSF certified

systems)

Ferrous Metal Surfaces and

Concrete Surfaces in Contact

with Treated or Raw Water in

Potable Water Facilities

Ameron "Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy

Coating", Carboline "Carboguard 891", ICI

Devoe "Bar-Rust 233H" Tnemec "Series

N140 Pota-Pox Plus", or Sherwin-Williams

"Macropoxy 646NSF"; immersion service.

Epoxy Enamel

Concrete Floors Ameron "Amerlock 400", Carboline

"Carboguard 890", ICI Devoe "Devran

224HS", Tnemec "Series N69 Hi-Build

Epoxoline II”, or Sherwin-Williams

"Armorseal 1000HS"; nonskid.

Ferrous Metal Surfaces and

Masonry or Concrete Surfaces

Other Than Floors

Ameron "Amercoat 385 Epoxy", Carboline

"Carboguard 890", ICI Devoe Devran

"224HS", Tnemec "Series N69 Hi-Build

Epoxoline II", or Sherwin-Williams

"Macropoxy 646".

Aliphatic Polyurethane Ameron "Amercoat 450H", Carboline

"Carbothane 134HG", ICI Devoe "Devthane

379H" Tnemec "Series 1074 Endura-Shield

II", or Sherwin-Williams "Acrolon 218HS".

Coal Tar Epoxy High-build coal tar epoxy; Ameron

"Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline

"Bitumastic 300 M", Tnemec "46H-413

Hi-Build Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams

"Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy".

Medium Consistency Coal Tar Carboline "Bitumastic 50" or Tnemec

"46-465 H.B. Tnemecol".

Anti-Graffiti Paint American Building “Polyshield Restoration”,

Richard’s Paint “Professional Water Seal &

Graffiti”, or Environmental Products “Graffiti

Proof”.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. SURFACE PREPARATION. All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry and shall

meet the recommendations of the coating manufacturer for surface preparation. Freshly coated

surfaces shall be protected from dust and other contaminants. Oil and grease shall be completely

removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. The gloss on

previously coated surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of topcoats.

Surfaces shall be free of cracks, pits, projections, or other imperfections that would interfere with

the formation of a smooth, unbroken coating film, except for concrete block construction where a

rough surface is an inherent characteristic.

When applying touchup coating or repairing previously coated surfaces, the surfaces to be coated

shall be cleaned as recommended by the coating manufacturer, and the edges of the repaired area

shall be feathered by sanding or wire brushing to produce a smooth transition that will not be

noticeable after the coating is applied. All coatings made brittle or otherwise damaged by heat of

welding shall be completely removed.

3-1.01. Galvanized Surfaces. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared for coating according to the

instructions of the manufacturer of the epoxy enamel. Any chemical treatment of galvanized

surfaces shall be followed by thorough rinsing with clean water.

3-1.02. Ferrous Metal Surfaces. Ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared for

coating by using one or more of the following cleaning procedures as specified: solvents

(SSPC-SP1); blasting (SSPC-SP5, -SP6, -SP7, or -SP10); power tools (SSPC-SP3 or -SP11); or

hand tools (SSPC-SP2). Oil and grease shall be completely removed in accordance with

SSPC-SP1 before beginning any other cleaning method. Surfaces of welds shall be scraped and

ground as necessary to remove all slag and weld spatter. Tools which produce excessive

roughness shall not be used.

All components of equipment that can be properly prepared and coated after installation shall be

installed prior to surface preparation. Components that will be inaccessible after installation

shall have the surfaces prepared and coated before installation. Motors, drive trains, and

bearings shall be protected during surface preparation in accordance with the equipment

manufacturer's recommendations.

All cut or sheared edges shall be ground smooth to a 1/8 inch minimum radius for all material

1/4 inch thickness and larger. For material thickness less than 1/4 inch all cut or sheared edges

shall be ground smooth to a radius equal to 1/2 the material thickness. Grinding of rolled edges

on standard shapes with a minimum radius of the 1/16 inch will not be required.

All ferrous metal surfaces shall have all welds ground smooth and free of all defects in

accordance with NACE Standard RPO178, Appendix C, Designation C and sharp edges ground

smooth, if not previously prepared in the shop. Instead of blending of the weld with the base

metal as required by the NACE standard, it will be acceptable to furnish a welded joint that has a

smooth transition of the weld to the base metal. All welds shall be ground smooth to ensure

satisfactory adhesion of paint.



(Group 4A2)

The cleaning methods and surface profiles specified herein are minimums, and if the

requirements printed in the coating manufacturer's data sheets exceed the limits specified, the

value printed on the data sheets shall become the minimum requirement.

3-1.02.01. Ferrous Metal Surfaces – Non-immersion Service. Ferrous metal surfaces, including

fabricated equipment, in non-immersion service shall be cleaned to the degree recommended by

the coating manufacturer for surfaces to be coated with coal tar epoxy, epoxy enamel, and

heat-resistant coatings, except galvanized surfaces. Blast cleaning to at least SSPC-SP6 shall be

used where recommended by the coating manufacturer, and may be used elsewhere at the option

of Contractor, provided that no dust is permitted to settle on adjacent wet coating. Surface

profile shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than 2 mils [50 µm].

3-1.02.02. Ferrous Metal Surfaces - Immersion Service. Surface preparation of ferrous metal

surfaces in immersion service shall consist of blast cleaning to at least SSPC-SP10 and the first

application of coating shall be performed on the same day. If more surface area is prepared than

can be coated in one day, the uncoated area shall be blast cleaned again to the satisfaction of

Engineer. Surface profile shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer, but not less than 3.5

mils [88 µm]. Immersion service includes any material in wetwells or valve vaults, regardless of

whether material is below water level.

3-1.03. Concrete Surfaces. All concrete surfaces shall be free of objectionable substances and

shall meet the coating manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation. Any other

surface preparation recommended by the coating material manufacturer shall be brought to

Engineer's attention and may be incorporated into the work if acceptable to Engineer.

All concrete surfaces shall be dry when coated and free from dirt, dust, sand, mud, oil, grease,

and other objectionable substances. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of

solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started.

New concrete shall have cured for at least 4 weeks before coating is applied as recommended by

the material manufacturer. Concrete surfaces shall be tested for capillary moisture in accordance

with ASTM D4263. There shall be no capillary moisture when coatings are applied on concrete.

All surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258 and abraded in

accordance with ASTM D4259. Surface profile shall be at least 25 percent of the dry film

thickness specified for the coating system. Prior to application of the coating, the surfaces shall

be thoroughly washed or cleaned by air blasting to remove all dust and residue. Spalled areas,

voids, and cracks shall be repaired in accordance with the Concrete section and as acceptable to

the Engineer. Fins and other surface projections shall be removed to provide a flush surface

before application of coating.

Except where epoxy enamel is applied as damp-proofing, the concrete surfaces, including those

with bug holes less than 1 inch [25 mm] in any dimension, shall be prepared when required and

as recommended by the manufacturer, using an epoxy concrete filler and surfacer. Where coating

with a vinyl ester the concrete filler and surfacer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer

to be compatible with vinyl ester.



(Group 4A2)

3-1.04. Concrete Block Surfaces. Voids and openings in concrete block surfaces shall be

painted. All exposed exterior surfaces and surfaces to be coated with epoxy enamel or anti-

graffiti paint, including the joints, shall be filled so that a continuous unbroken coating film is

obtained.

3-1.05. Copper Tubing. All flux residue shall be removed from joints in copper tubing.

Immediately before coating is started, tubing shall be wiped with a clean rag soaked in xylol.

3-1.06. Plastic Surfaces. All wax and oil shall be removed from plastic surfaces that are to be

coated, including PVC and FRP, by wiping with a solvent compatible with the specified coating.

3-1.07. Hardware. Hardware items such as bolts, screws, washers, springs, and grease fittings

need not be cleaned prior to coating if there is no evidence of dirt, corrosion, or foreign material.

3-1.08. Aluminum. When a coating system is required, remove all oil or deleterious substance

with neutral detergent or emulsion cleaner or blast lightly with fine abrasive.

3-1.09. Stainless Steel. When a coating system is required, surface preparation shall conform to

the coating manufacturer’s recommendations.

3-2. MIXING AND THINNING. Coating shall be thoroughly mixed each time any is

withdrawn from the container. Coating containers shall be kept tightly closed except while

coating is being withdrawn.

Coating shall be factory mixed to proper consistency and viscosity for hot weather application

without thinning. Thinning will be permitted only as necessary to obtain recommended coverage

at lower application temperatures. In no case shall the wet film thickness of applied coating be

reduced, by addition of coating thinner or otherwise, below the thickness recommended by the

coating manufacturer. Thinning shall be done in compliance with all applicable air quality

regulations.

3-3. APPLICATION. Coating shall be applied in a neat manner that will produce an even film

of uniform and proper thickness, with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps, and brush

marks. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry and hard before the next coat is applied. In no case

shall coating be applied at a rate of coverage greater than the maximum rate recommended by the

coating manufacturer.

Coating failures will not be accepted and shall be entirely removed down to the substrate and the

surface recoated. Failures include but are not limited to sags, checking, cracking, teardrops, fat

edges, fisheyes, or delamination.

3-3.01. Priming. Edges, corners, crevices, welds, and bolts shall be given a brush coat (stripe

coat) of primer before application of the primer coat. The stripe coat shall be applied by a brush

and worked in both directions. Special attention shall be given to filling all crevices with

coating.

Abraded and otherwise damaged portions of shop-applied coating shall be cleaned and recoated

as recommended by the manufacturer of the finish coating. Welded seams and other uncoated



(Group 4A2)

surfaces, heads and nuts of field-installed bolts, and surfaces where coating has been damaged by

heat shall be given a brush coat of the specified primer. Before the specified spot or touchup

coating of metal surfaces, edges, corners, crevices, welds, and bolts in the area of the spot or

touchup coating shall be given a brush coat of primer. This patch, spot, or touchup coating shall

be completed, and the paint film shall be dry and hard, before additional coating is applied.

3-3.02. Epoxy Enamel. When used, epoxy enamel shall be applied in accordance with the

coating manufacturer's recommendations, including temperature limitations and protection from

sunlight until top-coated.

When concrete is to be coated, coatings shall not be applied to concrete surfaces in direct

sunlight or when the temperature of the concrete is rising. Preferably the coating shall be applied

when the temperature of the concrete is dropping.

When applying high build epoxy coatings with a roller or brush and where a dry film thickness

of at least 4-6 mils [100-150 µm] per coat is required, two or more coats shall be applied to

achieve the recommended dry film thickness equal to a spray applied coating.

3-3.03. Coal Tar Epoxy. When used, the application of coal tar epoxy, including time limits for

recoating, shall conform to the recommendations of the coating manufacturer.

When concrete is to be coated, coatings shall not be applied to concrete surfaces in direct

sunlight or when the temperature of the concrete is rising. Preferably the coating shall be applied

when the temperature of the concrete is dropping.

3-3.04. Film Thickness. The total coating film thickness including intermediate coats and finish

coat, shall be not less than the following:

Type of Coating Minimum Dry Film Thickness

Medium consistency coal tar 20 mils [500 µm].

Coal tar epoxy (two coats) 20 mils [500 µm].

Epoxy enamel

Floors 5 mils [125 µm].

Surfaces with first coat of epoxy

enamel and final coat of aliphatic

polyurethane

7 mils [175 µm] (5 mils [125 µm]

DFT for epoxy plus 2 mils [50 µm]

DFT for aliphatic polyurethane).

Surfaces with first and second coat

of epoxy enamel and final coat of

aliphatic polyurethane

12 mils [300 µm] (10 mils [250 µm]

DFT for epoxy plus 2 mils [50 µm]

DFT for aliphatic polyurethane).

Other surfaces (two coats) 10 mils [250 µm].

Immersion service (three coats) 15 mils [375 µm].

Other surfaces (one coat) 5 mils [125 µm].

Other surfaces (two coats) 10 mils [250 µm].

3-3.05. Weather Conditions. Coatings shall not be applied, except under shelter, during wet,

damp, or foggy weather, or when windblown dust, dirt, debris, or insects will collect on freshly

applied coating.



(Group 4A2)

Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures lower than the minimum temperature

recommended by the coating manufacturer, or to metal surfaces such as tanks or pipe containing

cold water, regardless of the air temperature, when metal conditions are likely to cause

condensation. When necessary for proper application, a temporary enclosure shall be erected

and kept heated until the coating has fully cured.

Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures higher than the maximum temperature

recommended by the coating manufacturer. Where coatings are applied during periods of

elevated ambient temperatures, Contractor and the coatings manufacturer shall be jointly

responsible to ensure that proper application is performed including adherence to all re-coat

window requirements. Precautions shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the surface

application, especially for metal, at elevated temperatures above 100°F [38°C] including shading

application area from direct sunlight, applying coating in the evening or at night, and ventilating

the area to reduce the humidity and temperature.

3-4. REPAIRING FACTORY FINISHED SURFACES. Factory finished surfaces damaged

prior to acceptance by Owner shall be spot primed and recoated with materials equivalent to the

original coatings. If, in the opinion of Engineer, spot repair of the damaged area is not

satisfactory, the entire surface or item shall be recoated.

3-5. PROTECTION OF SURFACES. Throughout the work Contractor shall use drop cloths,

masking tape, and other suitable measures to protect adjacent surfaces. Contractor shall be

responsible for correcting and repairing any damage resulting from its or its subcontractors'

operations. Coatings spilled or spattered on adjacent surfaces which are not being coated at the

time shall be immediately removed. Exposed concrete or masonry not specified to be coated

which is damaged by coatings shall be either removed and rebuilt or, where authorized by

Owner, coated with two coats of masonry coating.

3-6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. The following inspection and testing shall be performed:

surface profile, visual inspection, and wet and dry film thickness testing. All inspection and

testing shall be witnessed by Engineer.

3-6.01. Surface Profile Testing. The surface profile for ferrous metal surfaces shall be measured

for compliance with the specified minimum profile. The surface profile for concrete shall comply

with SSPC 13/NACE 6 Table 1 for severe service.

3-6.02. Visual Inspection. The surface of the protective coatings shall be visually inspected.

3.6.03. Film Thickness. Coating film thickness shall be verified by measuring the film thickness

of each coat as it is applied and the dry film thickness of the entire system. Wet film thickness

shall be measured with a gauge that will measure the wet film thickness within an accuracy of

±0.5 mil [12.5 µm]. Dry film thickness shall be measured in accordance with SSPC-PA 2.

3-6.04. Spark Testing. Not required.

3-6.05. Adhesion Testing. Not required.



(Group 4A2)

3-7. FIELD PRIMING SCHEDULE. In general, steel and cast iron surfaces of equipment are

specified to be shop primed. Any such surfaces which have not been shop primed shall be field

primed. Damaged or failed shop coatings which have been determined unsuitable by Engineer

shall be removed and the surfaces shall be field coated, including prime coat (if any).

Galvanized, aluminum, stainless steel, and insulated surfaces shall be field primed. Primers used

for field priming, unless otherwise required for repair of shop primers, shall be:

Surface To Be Primed Material

Equipment, surfaces to be coated with

Aliphatic polyurethane Universal primer.

Epoxy enamel Same as finish coats.

Coal tar coating Same as finish coats.

Steel and cast iron, surfaces to be coated with

Epoxy enamel Same as finish coats.

Coal tar coating Same as finish coats.

Aluminum Epoxy enamel.

Galvanized Epoxy enamel.

Copper Epoxy enamel.

Stainless steel Epoxy enamel.

Plastic surfaces, including PVC and FRP Same as finish coats.

Insulated piping As recommended by manufacturer

of finish coats.

Concrete, surfaces to be coated with epoxy enamel

For damp-proofing Epoxy enamel.

For all other surfaces Epoxy concrete filler and surfacer.

Concrete block exposed in exterior locations or to

be coated with anti-graffiti paint

Epoxy concrete block filler.

Concrete block to be coated with epoxy enamel Epoxy concrete block filler.

Unless otherwise recommended by the coating manufacturer or specified herein, priming will not

be required on concrete, or concrete block, nor on metal surfaces specified to be coated with

epoxy enamel, coal tar epoxy, and heat-resistant coatings. Concrete surfaces to be coated with

epoxy enamel shall be filled with epoxy concrete filler and surfacer so that a continuous film is

obtained, except where concrete is damp-proofed with epoxy enamel.

3-8. FINISH COATING SYSTEMS. The following schedule lists coatings systems and coating

system designations.



(Group 4A2)

No. Finish Coating Systems Coating System

Designation

A C E F G H P

1. Epoxy enamel – One coat x x x

2. Epoxy enamel – Two coats x x x x x x

3. Epoxy enamel / NSF – Two coats x x

4. Epoxy enamel – Three coats x x x

5. Epoxy enamel / NSF – Three coats x x

6. Epoxy enamel – First coat

Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat x x x x x x

7. Epoxy enamel – First and second coat

Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat x x x

8. Universal primer – First coat

Aliphatic polyurethane – Finish coat x x

9. Medium consistency coal tar – Two coats x x x

10. Coal tar epoxy – Two coats x x x

11. Vinyl ester – Two coats x

12. Heat resistant – Two coats x

13. High heat resistant – Two coats x

14. Anti-Graffiti – Two coats x

3-8.01. Surfaces Not To Be Coated. Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be

left uncoated:

Exposed aluminum, except ductwork.

Polished or finished stainless steel. Unfinished stainless steel, except flashings

and counter flashings, shall be coated.

Nickel or chromium.

Galvanized surfaces, except piping, conduit, ductwork, and other items

specifically noted.

Rubber and plastics, except as specified.

Exterior concrete.

Surfaces specified to be factory finished.

3-8.02. Field Coating. Items to be field coated include the following. Field coating shall be in

accordance with the field priming schedule, the coating schedule, and the manufacturer's

recommendations.



(Group 4A2)

a. Surfaces not indicated to be shop finished and surfaces where blast cleaning

can be performed in the field.

b. All interior ferrous metal surfaces.

c. Other items as otherwise specified.

3-9. METAL SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Surface To Be Coated Finish Coating System

Non-galvanized and galvanized structural and

miscellaneous steel exposed to view or to the

elements in exterior locations.

A6, A7

Non-galvanized and galvanized structural and

miscellaneous steel exposed to view inside

buildings.

A2

Steel handrails, steel floor plates, doors, door

frames.

A8

Unless otherwise specified, pumps, motors,

speed reducers, and other machines and

equipment exposed to view.

E8

Actuator surfaces for sluice gates, slide

gates, control weirs, unless factory finished.

E7, E6

Metal curbs for skylights and power roof

ventilators.

A1

Heating and air conditioning units, convector

covers, electrical equipment cabinets, and

similar Items and equipment (unless factory

finished) exposed to view.

E8

Surfaces of cranes and hoists exposed to view

indoors.

E2

Surfaces of cranes and hoists exposed to the

elements outdoors.

E6, E7

Steel yard lighting poles exposed to view or to

the elements.

A8

Cast Iron and steel piping inside buildings,

including valves, fittings, flanges, bolts,

supports, and accessories, and galvanized

surfaces after proper priming.

A2



(Group 4A2)


Cast Iron and steel piping above grade exposed

to the elements and to view outdoors, including

valves, fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and

accessories, and galvanized surfaces after proper

priming.

A6, A7

Copper pipe and tubing, including fittings and

valves.

F1, F2

Copper pipe and tubing, including fittings and

valves exposed to view in exterior locations.

F6, F7

All metal surfaces, unless otherwise specified,

which will be submerged or buried, all or in

part, including valves, and scum baffles, and

sluice gates, but excluding piping laid in the

ground.

E4 or A10E5

Miscellaneous castings, including manhole rings

and covers, and manhole steps. (One coat, if not

shop coated.)

E2 or A10E3

Cast iron and steel piping in manholes,

wetwells, and similar locations, including valves

fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and accessories.

A4 or A10E5

All metal harness anchorage for buried piping. A10

All iron and steel parts that will be fully or

partially submerged, exposed to sewage gas, or

concealed inside; and digester mixing

equipment.

E10, E11

Supports and miscellaneous metal for

equipment handling corrosive chemicals.

Outdoor - A6

Outdoor - A7

Indoor - A2

Aluminum in contact with concrete. F1

Engine exhaust piping. H12

Aluminum and galvanized ductwork and

conduit indoors.

F1 or G1F2 or G2

Aluminum and galvanized ductwork and

conduit exposed to elements outdoors.

F6 or G6F7 or G7

Aluminum materials exposed to the elements

outdoors.

F6F7

3-10. CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.




(Group 4A2)

All concrete and concrete block (Except floors

and surfaces scheduled to receive other

coatings) which are exposed to view.

Indoor –C2

Outdoor –C7

PS3006/Huggins

Blockwall –C14

Where indicated on the drawings, walls, floors,

and curbed areas, adjacent to corrosive chemical

storage and feed equipment.

C2

Interior walls of filter boxes, full height above

underdrains and including edges of walkways.

C5

3-11. MISCELLANEOUS SURFACES COATING SCHEDULE.

Plastic Surfaces, including PVC and FRP. Outdoor - P6

Indoor - P2

Piping Insulation Outdoor - P6

Indoor - P2

3-12. PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE. Exposed piping and piping in accessible

chases shall be identified with lettering or tags designating the service of each piping system,

marked with flow directional arrows, and color coded.

Piping scheduled to be color coded shall be completely coated with the indicated colors, except

surfaces specified to remain uncoated shall include sufficiently long segments of the specified

color to accommodate the lettering and arrows. All other piping shall be coated to match

adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

3-12.01. Location. Lettering and flow direction arrows shall be provided on pipe near the

equipment served, adjacent to valves, on both sides of wall and floor penetrations, at each branch

or tee, and at least every 50 feet [15 m] in straight runs of pipe. If, in the opinion of Engineer,

this requirement will result in an excessive number of labels or arrows, the number required shall

be reduced as directed.

3-12.02. Metal Tags. Where the outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch [15 mm]

or smaller, aluminum or stainless steel tags shall be provided instead of lettering. Tags shall be

stamped as specified and shall be fastened to the pipe with suitable chains. Pipe identified with

tags shall be color coded as specified.

3-12.03. Lettering. Lettering shall be painted or stenciled on piping or shall be applied as

snap-on markers. Snap-on markers shall be plastic sleeves, Brady "Bradysnap-On B-915" or

Seton "Setmark". Letter size shall be as follows:

Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters

5/8 inch and smaller Metal tags -1/4 inch



(Group 4A2)

Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters

3/4 to 4 inches 3/4 inch

5 inches and larger 2 inches

3-12.04. Color Coding and Lettering. All piping for the following services shall be color coded.

Bands shall be 6 inches [150 mm] wide spaced along the pipe at 5 foot [1.5 m] intervals. For

services not listed, the color coding and lettering shall be as directed by the Engineer.

Piping Identification

Service Color of Pipe Color of Letters

Fuel Oil Black White

Nonpotable or Raw Water Light blue with white bands Black

Odor Control Dark green with light brown bands White

Oil - Hydraulic Black with white bands White

Plumbing Vents Dark gray White

Potable Water (hot or cold) Light blue Black

Sewage Light gray Black

Electrical conduit shall be coated to match adjacent ceiling or wall surfaces as directed by

Engineer. Vent lines shall be coated to match surfaces they adjoin.

In addition, special coating of the following items will be required:

Item Color

Valve handwheels and levers Red

Hoist hooks and blocks Yellow and black stripes

Numerals at least 2 inches [50 mm] high shall be painted on or adjacent to all accessible valves,

pumps, flowmeters, and other items of equipment which are identified on the drawings or in the

specifications by number.

End of Section


(Master Pump Station Improvements) 09940-F1-1 October 2011

(Group 4A2)

SURFACE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM NO. -

SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION

Solvent SSPC-SP1 Ferrous Metal Nonimmersion SSPC-SP6 Ferrous Metal Immersion

SSPC-SP10 SSPC-SP-5 Other

COATING DFT

mils [µm] MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

First Coat

(Primer)

Second

Coat

Third

Coat

Total

System

Not less than minimum thickness specified.

Notes: (Attached if needed.)

Project:

Coatings Manufacturer: Initials ______

Painting Applicator: Initials ______

BLACK & VEATCH COATING SYSTEM

DATA SHEET

Fig 1-09940


(Master Pump Station Improvements) 09940-F2-1 October 2011

(Group 4A2)

SURFACE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM NO. - -F

SURFACE PREPARATION DESCRIPTION

Solvent SSPC-SP1 Other:

COATING DFT

mils [µm] MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT

Shop

(Primer)

(Identify Product/Type)

Touchup

Intermediate

Coat

Finish

Coat

Total

System

Not less than minimum thickness specified.

Notes: (Attached if needed.)

Project:

Coatings Manufacturer: Initials ______

Painting Applicator: Initials ______

BLACK & VEATCH COATING SYSTEM

DATA SHEET

Fig 2-09940



(Group 4A2)

Section 10990

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the miscellaneous items of work not covered in other sections.

1-2. GENERAL. Miscellaneous specialties shall be furnished and installed as specified herein

and in accordance with the details, arrangements, and dimensions indicated on the drawings.

Where not specifically indicated or specified, fasteners, gaskets, and other accessories shall be

provided as required and as recommended by the manufacturer of the specific item.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete specifications, detailed drawings, and setting or erection

drawings covering miscellaneous specialties shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals

section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. PRODUCTS.

2-1.01. Fire Extinguishers. Portable fire extinguishers of the all-purpose, nitrogen-pressured,

dry chemical type shall be provided as scheduled herein. The fire extinguishers shall be UL-

approved for Class A, B, and C fires and shall have a 10 pound capacity, such as Badger

"10ABC", Buckeye "10H-ABC", or Kidde "10TAS". Finish of shell shall be red with all metal

handle and valve.

Wall-mounted fire extinguishers shall be mounted on suitable wall brackets at the specific

locations designated by the Designer

The following fire extinguishers shall be provided:

Location Quantity Mounting

Rm 101 near D101 1 Surface

2-1.02. Splash Blocks. Precast reinforced concrete splash blocks shall be provided at the

locations indicated on the drawings. The blocks shall be approximately 16 inches wide by 30

inches long by 5 inches high, with curbs on three sides. The splash portion shall be sloped from

not less than 1 inch depth at the inlet end to not less than 2 inches at the outlet end. The block

shall be reinforced with not less than WWF4X4-W4XW4 welded wire fabric.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. All products herein shall be installed as recommended by the

manufacturer and as indicated on the drawings. All moving parts shall be properly lubricated and

adjusted as required for proper operation.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 11060

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers installation of new equipment units that have been purchased

by Contractor as part of this Work.

Startup requirements shall be as indicated in the Startup Requirements section.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper

operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,

instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted

by Engineer.

When pumping units are being installed, hydraulic considerations and definition of terms shall be

as set forth in the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

Any equipment identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for installation

by Contractor. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be purchased are

available.

Any existing equipment which is removed shall be handled as indicated in the Project

Requirements section.

1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services are provided by the equipment

manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment manufacturer.

Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for manufacturer's

field services furnished by others.

Submittals for equipment furnished by others under each procurement contract will be furnished

to Contractor upon completion of review by Engineer. Contractor shall review equipment

submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions,

and field construction criteria.

Flanged connections to equipment including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the

appropriate pipe specification section.

1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.

1-3.01. Storage. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and

protected by Contractor in accordance with the Handling and Storage section until installed in

the Work. Equipment shall be protected by Contractor against damage and exposure from the

elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on or come into contact with the ground,

grass, or any other type of vegetation. Contractor shall keep the equipment dry at all times.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Materials shall be as follows:

Grout As specified in the Grout section.


3-1. INSTALLATION.

3-1.01. General. The following items shall be installed by the Contractor:

Submersible pumps

Engine-generators

Odor Control System

Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of, qualified

personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary to obtain proper results as specified in

the Startup Requirements section.

Each equipment unit shall be leveled, aligned, and shimmed into position. Installation

procedures shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as required herein.

Shimming between machined surfaces will not be permitted.

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all equipment shall be installed on concrete bases at

least 6 inches [150 mm] high. Baseplates shall be anchored to the concrete base with required

anchor bolts. For equipment with grouted bases, the space beneath shall be filled with grout as

specified in the Equipment Grout section. The equipment base shall be grouted after initial

fitting and alignment.

Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel

bolts during assembly.

When specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer will provide installation

supervision and installation checks. For installation supervision, the manufacturer’s field

representative will observe, instruct, guide, and direct Contractor's erection or installation

procedures as specified in the equipment specifications. For installation checks, the

manufacturer’s field representative will inspect the equipment installation immediately following

erection by Contractor, and observe the tests indicated in Startup Requirements section. The

manufacturer's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation

satisfactory to Owner.

3-1.02. Pumping Units. When pumping units are to be installed, the equipment shall be installed

in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards. When installing pumping units, the

equipment base shall be grouted after initial fitting and alignment, but before final bolting of



(Group 4A2)

connecting piping. Special care shall be taken to maintain alignment of pumping unit

components. No stresses shall be transmitted to the pump flanges. After final alignment and

bolting, connections to pumping equipment shall be tested for applied piping stresses by

loosening the flange bolts. If any movement or opening of the joints is observed, piping shall be

adjusted to proper fit.

Couplings shall be realigned after grouting. Final coupling misalignment shall be within one-

half of the coupling manufacturer's allowable tolerance.

3-1.02.01. Vertical End Suction Centrifugal Pumps. Not used.

3-1.02.02. Submersible Pumps. Control cables shall be supported to avoid tension and damage.

Mounting of cable supports in wetwells will be coordinated by the pump supplier. Liquid level

sensors shall operate freely and shall be adjusted to the levels indicated in the respective pump

schedules, or in the electrical schematics or P&ID’s. Each system of sensors will be furnished

by others, and shall be installed complete with all required mounting brackets, weights,

galvanized steel mounting pipes and accessories, control panel transformers, auxiliary relays,

cables, and junction boxes.

3-1.02.03. Plunger Pumps. Not used.

3-1.03. Circular Sludge Collecting Mechanism. Not used.

3-1.04. Straight Line Sludge Collecting Mechanism. Not used.

3-1.05. Submersible Mixers. Not used.

3-1.06. Plate Settlers. Not used.

3-1.07. Surface Aeration Equipment. Not used.

3-1.08. Diffused Aeration Equipment. Not used.

3-1.09. Multistage Centrifugal Blowers. Not used.

3-1.10. Engine-Generators.

3-1.10.01. Cleaning. The exposed finish shall be inspected after completing system installation,

including pipe connections, fittings, valves, and specialties. Burrs, dirt, and construction debris

shall be removed and damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions shall be

repaired.

3-1.10.02. Protection. The equipment shall be protected after installation, but prior to final

acceptance by Owner. Protection provisions shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and

shall include provisions to prevent rust, mechanical damage, and foreign objects entering the

equipment.

3-1.11. Water Pressure Booster Systems. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

3-2. STARTUP AND TESTING. Startup requirements, and tests associated with startup shall

be as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. Other field tests shall be as indicated in the

specific equipment sections. Startup and tests required shall occur in the order listed in the

following paragraphs. Tests shall not begin until any installation supervision and installation

checks by the equipment manufacturer have been completed, except where noted below.

3-2.01. Preliminary Field Tests. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted on all equipment by

Contractor as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. When an installation check is

specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer's representative will participate

in these tests to the extent described in the Startup Requirements section and in the equipment

sections.

3-2.02. Field System Operation Tests. Field system operation tests shall be conducted on all

equipment by Contractor as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. When an installation

check is specified in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer's service personnel will

participate in these tests to the extent described in the Startup Requirements section and in the

equipment sections.

3-2.03. Field Demonstration Tests. Field demonstration tests will be conducted by the

equipment manufacturer on equipment as indicated and as specified in the equipment sections.

3-2.04. Field Performance Tests & Distribution Tests. Field performance tests or distribution

tests will be conducted by the equipment manufacturer on equipment as indicated and as

specified in the equipment sections.

3-2.05. Field Baseline Performance Tests. Field baseline performance tests shall be conducted

by Contractor on the equipment indicated in the equipment sections, and the tests shall be

performed as indicated. When indicated in the equipment sections, the equipment manufacturer

will participate in these tests. This test shall not be considered an acceptance test, but rather a

test to determine initial performance curves and efficiency just prior to the equipment entering

service.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 11150

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing guiderail mounted, single-stage,

submersible, non-clog, end suction centrifugal pumping units and controls as indicated

herein or on the drawings.

Pump Station PS#3006

Pump Application Raw Sewage

Number of Pumps 3

Pump Tag Numbers PSM-3006-1, PSM-3006-2, PSM-3006-3

Location Wetwell

Each pumping unit shall be complete with a close-coupled, submersible electric motor,

and all other appurtenances specified, or otherwise required for proper operation.

Each pumping unit, including motor and all integral controls, shall be rated and labelled

for use in a Class 1, Division 1, Group D area as defined by the National Electric Code.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and

assembled in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,

instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are

noted by Engineer. Hydraulic considerations and definition of terms shall be as set forth

in the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

Pumping units shall be manufactured by Flygt, or ABS without exception.

1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall

apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification

differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified

herein shall take precedence.

1-2.02. Tagging. Each item of equipment and each part shipped separately shall be

tagged and identified with indelible markings for the intended service. Tag numbers shall

be clearly marked on all shipping labels and on the outside of all containers.

1-2.03. Power Supply. Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the equipment shall

be 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase.



(Group 4A2)

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete fabrication and assembly drawings, together with

detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories

forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the

Submittals section. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not

be limited to, the following:

Pumps

Name of manufacturer.

Type and model.

Tag number.

Pump designation.

Pump location.

Rotative speed.

Size of discharge nozzle.

Net weight of pump and motor only.

Complete performance curves showing capacity versus head, NPSH

required, pump efficiency, wire-to-water efficiency, and pump input

power.

Data on shop painting.

Motors


Type and model.

Type of bearings and method of lubrication.

Rated size of motor, hp, and service factor.

Insulation class and temperature rise.

Full load rotative speed.

Efficiency at full load and rated pump condition.

Full load current.

Locked rotor current.

Nameplate data as stipulated by NEMA MG-1.

Moisture Detection System


Type and model.

Enclosure rating and layout if an enclosure is specified.

Electrical schematics and wiring diagram.

Published descriptive data on each item of equipment and all accessories,

indicating all specific characteristics and options.

Control Components

Type and manufacturer.

Model.

Enclosure rating.



(Group 4A2)

Published descriptive data on all components, indicating all specific

characteristics and options.

Where liquid level sensors are provided, provide mounting details.

1-3.02. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and

maintenance information shall be supplied as required in the Submittals section.

Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals

section. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions

or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered.


1-4.01. Balance. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly

perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for

rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that

resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the unfiltered vibration

velocity, as measured at any point on the machine including top of motor, shall not

exceed the maximum velocity as indicated for vertical, end suction, solids handling

pumps in Figure 9.6.4.10 of the governing standard.

At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or its

components shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3.

1-5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with

the Shipping section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Handling and

Storage section.

1-6. SPARE PARTS. One set of all special tolls required for normal operation and

maintenance shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel chest

complete with lock and duplicate keys.

One set of spare parts for each pump station (3) shall be provided. Each set of spare parts

shall include:

1 – Upper bearings

1 – Lower bearings

1 – Set of upper and lower shaft seals

1 – Set of o-rings or gaskets required for replacement of bearings and seals

1 – Set impeller wear ring

1 – Shaft sleeve (if applicable); and

1 – Cable cap for each pump (if applicable)

Spare parts shall be suitably packaged with labels indicating the contents of each

package. Spare parts shall be delivered to Owner as directed.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. The equipment provided under this section shall be

suitable for the following service conditions:

Site elevation:

PS#3006 85.0 Feet MSL

All equipment furnished shall be designed to meet all specified conditions and to operate

satisfactorily at the elevation indicated.

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Pumping units shall be

designed for the performance and design requirements as follows:

Pump tag numbers. PSM-3006-1

PSM-3006-2

PSM-3006-3

Rated head. 90 ft

Capacity at rated head. 1000 gpm

Operating head range for full speed continuous

operation.

58 to 94 ft

Minimum shutoff head. 111.8 ft

Maximum nominal pump speed 1800 rpm

Minimum head at reduced speed N/A ft

Capacity at minimum head at reduced speed. N/A gpm

Approximate minimum pump speed. N/A %

Maximum power required at pump input shaft at

any point from minimum operating head to shutoff

head.

58 bhp

Minimum efficiency at rated head, wire to water. 58 %

Wetwell depth (guide-rail mounted). 22.67 ft

Minimum liquid depth in wetwell (guide-rail and

skid mounted)

3.05 ft

Pump designed for reverse rotation at rated head. No

Minimum NSPHA . 35 ft

Maximum vibration velocity. HIS



(Group 4A2)

Minimum pump discharge nozzle/elbow size. 6 in

Minimum test sphere diameter. 3 in

All specified conditions shall be at rated speed unless otherwise indicated.

Overall (wire-to-water) efficiency shall include losses in the pump and motor.

The minimum hydrostatic test pressure shall be 1.5 times shutoff head plus max suction

pressure.

Pump performance shall be stable and free from cavitation and noise throughout the

specified operating head range at minimum suction submergences. The design running

clearance between the impeller inlet and the casing wearing ring (if provided) shall be not

less than 0.01 inch or 1 mil per inch of casing wearing ring diameter, whichever is

greater.

2-3. MATERIALS.

Stator Housing, Oil Chamber Housing,

Impeller Casing, and Impeller

Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30.

Casing Wearing Ring Martensitic stainless steel,

Brinell 300+.

Impeller Wearing Ring Martensitic stainless steel, Brinell 200-

250.

Shaft Alloy steel, hard chrome plated; or

martensitic stainless steel, AISI

Type 416 or 420.

Mechanical Seals 2 tandem single type, oil lubricated

with silicon or tungsten carbide seal

rings at all points, except the upper

rotating seal, which shall be carbon.

Discharge Base Cast iron or fabricated steel.

Guiderails Stainless steel pipe, ASTM A312,

Schedule 40S.

Upper guiderail bracket, cable hooks,

and chain hooks

AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

2-4. PUMP CONSTRUCTION.



(Group 4A2)

2-4.01. Impeller Casing. The impeller casing shall have well-rounded water passages

and smooth interior surfaces free from cracks, porosity, blowholes, or other irregularities.

The discharge nozzle shall be flanged and sufficiently rigid to support the pumping unit

under all operating conditions.

2-4.02. Impeller. The impeller shall be an enclosed one-piece casting with not more than

two nonclog passages. The interior water passages shall have uniform sections and

smooth surfaces and shall be free from cracks and porosity. The impeller shall be

dynamically balanced and securely locked to the shaft by means of a key and self-locking

bolt or nut.

2-4.03. Wearing Rings. Renewable wearing rings shall be provided in the casing and on

the impeller. The rings shall be positively locked in place.

2-4.04. Oil Chamber Housing. The oil chamber shall contain a drain plug and a vent

plug.

2-4.05. Mechanical Seals. Each pump shall be provided with two mechanical rotating

shaft seals arranged in tandem and running in an oil chamber. Each interface shall be

held in contact by an independent spring system designed to withstand maximum suction

submergence. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be

readily accessible for inspection and replacement.

Shaft seals lacking positively driven rotating members or conventional double

mechanical seals which utilize a common single or double spring acting between the

upper and lower units and requiring a pressure differential to offset external pressure and

effect sealing, will not be acceptable. The seals shall not rely upon the pumped media for

lubrication and shall not be damaged if the pumps are run unsubmerged for extended

periods while pumping under load.

2-4.06. Sealing of Mating Surfaces. All mating surfaces of major components shall be.

The use of O-rings, gaskets, or seals to obtain and maintain compression and

watertightness will not be acceptable. The use of secondary sealing compounds, gasket

cement, grease, or other devices to obtain watertight joints will not be acceptable.

2-4.07. Guiderail Mounted Base. A discharge base and discharge elbow shall be

furnished by the pump manufacturer. The base shall be sufficiently rigid to firmly

support the guiderails, discharge piping, and pumping unit under all operating conditions.

The base shall be provided with one or more integral support legs or pads suitable for

bolting to the floor of the wetwell. The face of the discharge elbow inlet flange shall be

perpendicular to the floor and shall make contact with the face of the pump discharge

nozzle flange. The diameter and drilling of the elbow outlet flange shall conform to

ANSI B16.1, Class 125.



(Group 4A2)

The pump and motor assembly shall be automatically connected to and supported by the

discharge base and guiderails so that the unit can be removed from the wetwell and

replaced without the need for operating personnel to enter the wetwell.

2-4.07.01. Sliding Bracket. Each guiderail mounted pumping unit shall be provided with

an integral, self-aligning guiderail sliding bracket. The bracket shall be designed to

obtain a wedging action between flange faces as final alignment of the pump occurs in

the connected position. The bracket shall maintain proper contact and a suitably sealed

connection between flange faces under all operating conditions. The sliding bracket shall

be nonsparking where the pump is installed in a hazardous area.

2-4.07.02. Guiderails. Each guide rail mounted pumping unit shall be equipped with one

or more guiderails. Guiderails shall be sized to fit the discharge base and the sliding

bracket and shall extend upwards from the discharge base to the location indicated on the

drawings. An upper guiderail bracket shall be provided at the pump access opening.

2-4.07.03. Lifting Chain. Each guide rail mounted pumping unit shall be provided with

a chain and cable suitable for removing and installing. Each pump shall be fitted with 6

feet of Type 316 stainless steel, ¾” chain attached to the lifting mechanism and aircraft

rated ¼” stainless steel cable provided between the cable holder and the chain. A suitable

chain hook shall be provided at the top of the wetwell.

2-4.08. Pedestal Mounted Base. Not used.

2-4.09. Skid Mounted Base. Not used.

2-4.10. Access Hatch Cover. Access hatch covers are specified in the Access Hatches

section.

2-4.11. Shop Painting. All iron and steel parts which will be in contact with pumped

liquid or submerged after installation, including the inside of the casing, the impeller, and

the discharge elbow, shall be shop cleaned in accordance with the coating manufacturer's

recommendations and painted with the epoxy coating system specified. The coating shall

have a dry film thickness of at least 10 mils [250 µm] and shall consist of a prime (first)

coat and one or more finish coats. At least 1 quart [1 L] of the finish coat material shall

be furnished with each pump for field touch-up.

The shop painting of other surfaces shall be in accordance with the shop painting

requirements in the General Equipment Stipulations.

2-4.12. Hoist Assembly. Not used.

2-5. ELECTRIC MOTORS. Each pump shall be driven by an air-filled, totally

submersible electric motor provided by the pump manufacturer. Motor nameplate rating

shall exceed the maximum power required by the pump in the operating head range.



(Group 4A2)

Each motor shall be rated for the power supply provided to the pump, and shall have a

service factor of 1.15. The stator housing shall be an air-filled, watertight casing. A

cooling jacket shall encase the motor housing for each pump where needed to maintain

adequate cooling. The cooling jacket shall require no external source of cooling water.

Motor insulation shall be moisture resistant, Class F, 155°C. Each motor shall be NEMA

Design B for continuous duty at 40°C ambient temperature, and designed for at least 10

starts per hour.

The motor bearings shall be antifriction, permanently lubricated type. The lower bearing

shall be fixed to carry the pump thrust and the upper bearing free to move axially. The

bearings shall have a calculated AFBMA L10 Life Rating of 40,000 hours when operating

at maximum operating head. Maximum shaft runout at the mechanical seals shall not

exceed 2 mils [50 µm] at any point in the operating head range.

Each motor installed in a wetpit shall be capable of continuous operation in air

(unsubmerged) for at least 24 hours under pump full load conditions, without exceeding

the temperature rise limits for the motor insulation system.

Each pump shall be equipped with one or more multiconductor cable assemblies for

power and control. Each multiconductor assembly containing power cables shall be

provided with a separate grounding conductor. Each cable assembly shall bear a

permanently embossed code or legend indicating the cable is suitable for submerged use.

Cable sizing shall conform to NEC requirements.

Cables for wetwell mounted pumps shall be of sufficient length to terminate in a junction

box outside the wetwell as indicated on the drawings, with 10 feet of slack which will be

coiled on a cable hook at the top of the wetwell. Each cable shall be supported by AISI

Series 300 corrosion-resistant stainless steel Kellems or woven grips to prevent damage

to the cable insulation. Mounting of cable supports in the wetwell shall be coordinated

by Contractor to prevent damage to the cable.

The cable entry water seal shall include a strain relief and a grommet type seal designed

so that a specific fastener torque is not required to ensure a watertight, submersible seal.

The cable entry junction box and motor shall be separated by a stator lead sealing gland

or a terminal board. The junction box shall isolate the motor interior from moisture

gaining access through the top of the stator housing.

Motors shall be specifically selected for service with an adjustable frequency type speed

controller when indicated on the drawings and shall be derated to compensate for

harmonic heating effects and reduced self-cooling capability at low speed operation so

that the motor does not exceed Class B temperature rise when operating in the installed

condition at load with power received from the adjustable frequency drive. Motors

driven by adjustable frequency drives shall be supplied with full phase insulation on the

end turns and shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31. In addition to the



(Group 4A2)

requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, motors shall be designed to be continually pulsed

at the motor terminals with a voltage of 1600 volts ac.

2-5.01. Adjustable Frequency Drives. Not used.

2-6. CONTROLS.

2-6.01. Liquid Level Sensors. Sensors shall be in accordance with the pressure and level

instruments section.

2-6.02. Pump Controls. Each motor shall be protected by one motor temperature switch

embedded in each phase winding. Each switch shall be designed to operate at 140°C

(± 5°C). Each switch shall be normally closed automatic reset type rated 5 amps at

120 volts ac. The switches shall be wired in series with end leads wired to terminals

within the motor housing.

2-7. SHOP TESTS. Each pump shall be tested at the factory for capacity, power

requirements, and efficiency at specified rated head, shutoff head, operating head

extremes, and at as many other points as necessary for accurate performance curve

plotting. All tests and test reports shall conform to the requirements and

recommendations of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Acceptance testing shall be Level

A, with no minus tolerance or margin allowed.

Five certified copies of a report covering each test shall be prepared by the pump

manufacturer and delivered to Engineer not less than 10 days prior to the shipment of the

equipment from the factory. The report shall include data and test information as

stipulated in the Hydraulic Institute Standards, copies of the test log originals, test

reading to curve conversion equations, and certified performance curves. The curves

shall include head, bhp [brake kW], pump efficiency, and shop test NPSH available,

plotted against capacity. The curves shall be easily read and plotted to scales consistent

with performance requirements. All test points shall be clearly shown.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Each pumping unit will be installed in accordance with the

Equipment Installation section.



(Group 4A2)


3-2.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of

the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary,

and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the

equipment is placed in operation in accordance with Section 01650, Startup

Requirements, and shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is

corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of

Engineer.

The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the

equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free

from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been

operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.

All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price.

3-2.02. Installation Supervision. Installation supervision by the manufacturer is not

required.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 11910

ENGINE-GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of diesel fuel engine-driven electric generator

units. Each engine-generator shall be located outdoors in a weatherproof enclosure.

Each engine-generator shall be a skid-mounted package unit consisting of an engine, an

alternator, auxiliary systems, controls, and accessories as specified, all mounted in a

weatherproof enclosure, and as required for a complete operating system.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be assembled in full conformity

with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the

equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

Requirements of the engine-generator specified herein shall be coordinated with the electrical

section, plant control system section, miscellaneous piping section, the miscellaneous valves

section, and the aboveground fuel storage tank section.

The contractor shall properly coordinate the work between the suppliers of the equipment to be

used with or connected to the engine-generator to ensure that all required provisions for

mounting the accessories are included.




1-2.02. Coordination. All equipment specified in this section shall be furnished through a single

engine-generator manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, manufacture,

coordination, and proper installation and operation of the entire system.

Each engine-generator unit shall be a standard product of the manufacturer and shall be a

packaged type unit, fully shop assembled, wired and tested, requiring no field assembly of

critical moving parts.

Contractor shall verify that each component of the system is compatible with all other parts of

the system; that all piping, materials, and motor sizes are appropriate; and that all devices

necessary for properly functioning system have been provided.

The engine-generator manufacturer shall coordinate requirements between the automatic transfer

switch and the engine-generator.

Contractor shall, at his own expense, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections,

and approval by the proper authorities in local jurisdiction of such work.



(Group 4A2)

1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except where modified or supplemented by these specifications,

all equipment and materials shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the latest

applicable requirements of the standard specifications and codes of ANSI, ASTM, NEMA,

IEEE, EEI, HEI, ISO, NFPA, SAE, and other such regularly published and accepted standards as

well as state and local codes.

1-2.04. Power Supply. Site power supply provided will be 240 volts, 60 Hz, single phase for

operation of the equipment and accessories. Each engine-generator shall be provided with a

power panel sized to power the required loads inside the enclosure as specified herein. The

engine (starting and controls) will operate from batteries specified herein. When needed, a

control power transformer shall be provided for voltages other than the supply power voltage.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly and installation drawings, together with

detailed specifications and data covering materials, drive unit, parts, devices and accessories

forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals

section. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the

following:

Manufacturer, model, and type:

Engine.

Alternator.

Enclosure.

Battery charger and battery.

Fuel oil cooler (if required by engine design).

Silencer.

Engine output horsepower and efficiency curves at rated capacity.

Fuel consumption at rated capacity.

Ratings at specified conditions:

Engine (net horsepower).

Engine (maximum performance horsepower bare engine).

Generator kW at specified power factor.

Volts.

Amperes.

Overall dimensions and weight:

Length.

Width.

Height.

Net weight.

Wiring diagrams and schematics, including the engine control panel and

generator line circuit breaker.

Alternator insulation class and temperature ratings.

Alternator winding pitch.

Calculations or test results showing compliance with specified motor

starting and voltage dip requirements.

Generator line circuit breaker rating.



(Group 4A2)

Control panel layout, identifying location of all instrumentation being

supplied.

Engine drawing to include location of all piping connections.

Operation instructions.

Letter from the engine-generator manufacturer confirming that the unit will

provide the specified minimum kW rating at the specified design conditions and

time duration.

Maximum output short circuit kvA available.

Exhaust gas emission data, maximum values at loads of 1/2, 3/4, and full:

Carbon Monoxide (CO), lb/hr

Nitrogen Oxides (NOx), lb/hr

Sulfur Dioxide (SO2), lb/hr

Particular Matter (PM), lb/hr

Temperature, F

Flow, acfm

Letter from the engine-generator manufacturer confirming that the unit is in full

compliance with Federal EPA, State of Florida, and local emissions requirements.

Equipment skid drawing including material list.

Conformation confirming that the exhaust through the exhaust silencer

does not exceed the specified maximum pressure loss at the specified power

outage capacity of the unit and that the exhaust silencer provides sound

attenuation equal to or greater at the specified frequencies.

Letter from the engine-generator manufacturer confirming that the

enclosure is suitable for the specified wind velocity and is designed as specified

for rain penetration when the unit is operating.

Name, address, and phone number of manufacturer’s repair facility.

Color chart showing available options for the enclosure color. The color of

the enclosure shall be as directed by Owner during shop drawing review.

Drawings showing engine-generator inside the enclosure that shows

location of all enclosure mounted and engine-generator mounted equipment.

Drawings to indicate maintenance access clearances for electrical and mechanical

equipment. Drawing to show location of all enclosures bracing and location of

doors and removable panels.

Certificate of compliance.

1-3.02. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance information

shall be supplied as required in the Submittals section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall

be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The operation and maintenance manuals

shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment

when delivered.



section.

1-5. SPARE PARTS. The following spare parts and accessories shall be furnished for each

engine-generator in substantial wooden boxes with identifying labels and delivered to the

vicinity of the project site or the Owner as directed:



(Group 4A2)

Spare Parts Quantity

Air filters. 2 sets

Oil filters. 4 sets

Fuel filters. 12 sets

V-belts. 1 sets

1-5.01. Padlocks and Keys. Two stainless steel padlocks and four sets of keys for each door shall

be provided. All keys and padlocks are to be keyed to Orange County standard maintenance key

numbers. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner accordingly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Each engine-generator unit shall be designed to operate under

the following service conditions:

Ambient air temperature range 20 to 110 °F

Design wind speed 120 mph

Site elevations

3006 Huggins 85 ft

Each engine-generator unit will be used as a power unit for selected electrical loads when the

utility supplied power fails.

Each engine-generator shall automatically start and connect to the electrical load when initiated

from the automatic transfer controls.

Fuel for each engine-generator will be furnished from an aboveground tank specified in section

13214, Aboveground Fuel Storage Tanks.

The engine-generator supplier shall provide the correct amount and grade of crankcase oil,

coolant, and other fluids (except fuel) necessary for initial testing and operation.

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Each engine-generator unit shall be

designed for the operating conditions and requirements as follows:

Pump Station Location 3006

Generator

Minimum power rating capacity with

accessories, for generator voltage output and

service conditions specified herein.

145 kW



(Group 4A2)

Output frequency. 60 Hz

Output voltage. 480Y/277V VAC

Output power factor. 0.8

Maximum voltage dip. [SEE

PERFORMANC

E TABLE]

Engine

Fuel supply. No. 2 diesel

Maximum speed. 1,800 rpm

Minimum piston displacement. 400 in3

Black start required. Yes

Guaranteed Emissions Tier 3

Maximum engine-generator length, including

radiator discharge plenum.

17’-0”

Maximum engine-generator width, including air

intake plenums.

14’-0”

Each engine-generator shall be designed to operated during a power outage for a minimum of 64

continuous hours and a maximum of 200 hours per year.

Engine-generators submitted with ratings in excess of current published data will not be

acceptable.

The engine-generator shall at a minimum meet the required Environmental Protection Agency

New Source Performance Standards emission regulation. The engine-generator supplier shall

coordinate with the local air quality management authority to ensure the equipment meets all

current local air emissions requirements.

Engine-generator supplier shall guarantee the equipment supplied meets all local air emissions

requirements in place at the time of startup. Field testing of actual emissions will be required per

section 3-3 to determine compliance with the emissions requirements.

Each engine-generator unit furnished, including any air intake or discharge plenums, shall be of a

design that can be accommodated in the space as indicated on the drawings and as specified

herein. Maximum outside dimensions of the engine-generator enclosure including any plenums

shall be as specified.

Any special fittings or piping required for connection to fuel piping shall be furnished and

installed.



(Group 4A2)

2-2.01 Performance Table Each engine-generator shall satisfactorily start the following loads,

while meeting the indicated voltage dip.

Location: 3006

2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Each engine-generator shall be a current

production model and from the same manufacturer. The engine-generator shall be manufactured

by the supplier Caterpillar or Cummins without exception.

The manufacturer of the engine-generator unit shall have a full-time, fully factory trained

technical staff and an equipped 24 hour service facility having all personnel and all equipment

required to maintain, repair, or overhaul the engine-generator unit and associated equipment.

2-4. ENGINE-GENERATOR UNIT.

2-4.01. Engine. Each engine shall be 4-stroke cycle type and shall be equipped with the

following:

Electronic governor for isochronous regulation of engine speed from no

load to full load alternator output.

Dry type air cleaner with replaceable elements.

2-4.02. Alternator. Each engine-generator alternator shall be a 4 pole, revolving field design

with temperature compensated solid state voltage regulator, brushless rotating rectifier exciter

system, and drip-proof construction with amortisseur windings. The alternator shall be directly

connected to the engine flywheel housing, and the rotor shall be driven through a semi-flexible

driving flange to ensure permanent alignment.

Frequency regulation shall be isochronous ±0.15 Hz from no load to rated load. Voltage

regulation shall be within ±2 percent of rated voltage, steady state, from no load to full load. The

momentary voltage drop shall not exceed the specified percent without starter coils dropping out

or stalling the engine at any time when applying or starting the specified loads. Recovery to

stable operation shall occur within 2 seconds.

The alternator shall have Class F insulation as defined by NEMA MG1-1.65 and temperature rise

shall be within NEMA MG1-22.40 definition at rated condition.

Harmonic filters shall be provided where determined by the supplier for proper operation when

powering solid-state motor starters.

Load Description Rating

Maximum

Voltage

Dip (%)

Time

Delay

(sec)

Comments

Step 1 Static Load (Total) 40KVA 15 0

Pump Motor 1 60 Hp 15 0 Reduced Voltage Starter

Step 2 Pump Motor 2 60Hp 15 20 Reduced Voltage Starter



(Group 4A2)

An alternator winding heater shall be furnished as an integral part of the engine-generator unit.

Alternator winding heater shall be rated 120 volts, single phase. The alternator winding heater

control system shall include an interlock with the engine-generator unit so that the heaters are de-

energized at all times that the generator field is energized. The supplier shall provide all internal

alternator winding heater wiring and used branch circuit protection.

2-4.02.01. Surge Protection. Each engine-generator shall be provided with a voltage surge

protection system installed in the generator terminal box or in a separate enclosure near the

generator terminal box.

2-4.03. Fuel System. A remote aboveground fuel storage tank, as specified in Section 13214,

will be the source of the diesel fuel. Each engine-generator unit shall be furnished with a

complete fuel system including engine-driven fuel pump, engine supply and return line, and with

all accessories as required for proper operation. All items shall be suitable for the specified fuel

and located inside the enclosure and serviceable from inside the enclosure. The engine driven

fuel pump shall transfer the fuel from the remote aboveground fuel storage tank to the engine-

generator.

The fuel system shall be furnished with any equipment required for the engine to supply or return

any unused portion of fuel back to the fuel storage tank with any level in the tank, as indicated on

the Drawings.

All stainless steel flexible connectors shall be provided for the fuel supply and return lines.

A manual shutoff valve shall be located in the fuel supply piping outside the enclosure. The

shutoff valves shall be of firesafe design and shall utilize secondary metal seating surfaces to

ensure shutoff if the primary seats are destroyed by fire. Valves shall be manually operated and

shall be of three-piece design ball valves with carbon steel body and end caps, stainless steel or

hard chrome plated ball and stem, reinforced teflon seats and seals, and socket welding ends.

Firesafe ball valves shall be Contomatics “C-1122-BB-FS” or Jamesbury “4C2236XT-1”.

A fire valve shall be installed in the diesel fuel piping just inside the enclosure. The valve shall

have a spring loaded handle mechanism to provide for automatic closure of the normally open

ball valve. The fire valve shall be FM approved and shall be Jamesbury Figure “1075”.

The combination fuel filter/separator shall be located inside the enclosure and upstream from the

flexible connectors. The combination fuel filter/separator shall be a manifold unit with shutoff

valves and shall permit servicing the filter/separator without engine shutdown. Filter/separator

shall be manufactured by Racor or equal.

The diesel fuel valve train for the engine shall include an electrically operated solenoid valve for

shutoff of the fuel supply on engine shutdown. The valve shall be DC powered and located

upstream from the flexible connection in the fuel line and shall open when the engine start in

initiated.



(Group 4A2)

A suitable check valve shall be located in the fuel return line inside the enclosure. The check

valve shall be suitable for the specified fuel and shall prevent the flow of the fuel back towards

the engine.

Fuel oil coolers shall be provided if the engine fuel system absorbs heat from the unit injectors

and surrounding jacket water. The fuel cooler shall be a radiator mounted, air cooled unit that

uses the air flow from the radiator for the cooling air flow. To prevent over heating of the fuel in

the day tank, the fuel oil cooler shall be adequately sized to cool the return fuel from the engine

to the required fuel usage inlet temperature.

A siphon-break, normally open, solenoid valve shall be provided at the highest point of the fuel

supply line. The anti-siphon valve shall be piped back to the above fuel storage tank vent line

riser pipe to prevent moisture from entering the valve as indicated on the drawings. The valve

shall be used to break siphon when open and to make siphon when closed. It shall be connected

to the day tank level controller to energize (close) whenever fuel is required.

A tamper switch shall be added to the fuel tank to prevent fuel theft.

2-4.04. Exhaust System. Each engine-generator unit shall be furnished with a complete exhaust

system including an exhaust silencer, exhaust piping, stainless steel bellows expansion joints,

and accessories required for a complete operating system.

The silencer shall be chamber type, all welded AISI Type 304L stainless steel construction.

Exhaust piping shall be Schedule 10S, AISI Type 304L stainless steel with buttwelded fittings.

The exhaust silencer shall be furnished with suitable stainless steel bracket supports for

horizontal mounting on top of the enclosure. The silencer shall be sized so that the back pressure

at rated capacity of the engine does not exceed one half the manufacturer's maximum allowable

back pressure. The exhaust from the engine shall enter either the bottom or side. Silencers shall

be Maxim “M51”, Nelson “400” or equal.

Minimum silencer attenuation for the following mid band frequencies shall be as follows:

63 Hz 19 dB

125 Hz 29 dB

250 Hz 35 dB

500 Hz 33 dB

1,000 Hz 29 dB

2,000 Hz 28 dB

4,000 Hz 28 dB

8,000 Hz 28 dB

The exhaust shall discharge horizontally at the silencer outlet. The exhaust shall be directed per

Owner’s preference and end of the pipe shall be cut at 45 degree angle such that rain will not

enter the exhaust pipe. Expanded 0.5 inch stainless bird screen shall be installed over the end to

prevent birds from entering.



(Group 4A2)

Exhaust emission test ports shall be provided in the exhaust piping after the silencer. Ports shall

be threaded and shall be provided with stainless steel threaded caps.

2-4.05. Starting System and Control Power. Each engine-generator unit shall be furnished with

a complete electric motor start system including starting motors, battery pack with rack, cables,

and battery charger.

The batteries shall be of the high rate, nickel-cadmium type and have a 12 volt output. The

battery shall be electrically sized for the engine furnished to maintain minimum cell voltages of

0.65 volt per cell during initial starting, and 0.85 volt per cell throughout the cranking time for

five consecutive starting attempts of 10 seconds each. Battery voltages shall be maintained

under the conditions specified herein.

The battery charger shall be suitable for the nickel-cadmium battery pack. The charger shall have

a DC output suitable to supply power for all continuous loads and to recharge the batteries from

a fully discharged state to normal operating voltage within 8 hours. The battery charger shall be

provided with a NEMA 2 corrosion resistant enclosure. The battery charger shall be provided

with the following: on/off switch, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter, AC input and DC output circuit

breakers or fuses, floating voltage equalization, equalizing timer, and relays with form c contacts

for remote annunciation of loss of AC power, low battery voltage, and high battery voltage.

The batteries, battery rack, and battery charger shall be located inside a separate vented enclosure

inside the engine-generator enclosure. The battery rack frame shall be constructed of corrosion

resistant material.

The engine-generator shall automatically supply power to the remote bus that powers the battery

charger when it is operating and when utility power is not available.

2-4.06. Cooling System. Each engine-generator unit shall be cooled with unit-mounted radiator

cooling system complete with radiator, expansion tank, water pump, belt-driven fan, fan guard,

thermostatic temperature control, high-water temperature cutout, electric jacket water heater and

all accessories required for proper operation. The radiator shall be sized with sufficient capacity

for cooling of the engine and all other accessories required for proper operation. The core shall

be epoxy coated for ocean spray and the fan shall draw air over the engine and discharge through

the radiator.

The cooling system shall be filled with a permanent antifreeze mixture of the ethylene glycol

type with rust inhibitor.

The electric jacket water heater shall be furnished to maintain jacket water at 90°F with a winter

ambient temperature as specified herein. The jacket water heater shall be thermostatically

controlled.

2-4.07. Engine-Generator Enclosure. Each engine-generator unit, including its control panel,

battery rack, battery charger, power panel, and other ancillary equipment, shall be housed in an



(Group 4A2)

aluminum weatherproof enclosure, of the non-walk-in type. The enclosure shall be shop

mounted on the engine generator skid or field erected.

Aluminum enclosure shall be Marine Grade formed sheet aluminum construction, made of

modular panels and louvers. Posts, rails, channels, and roof bows shall be 6061-T6 extruded

aluminum. The panels shall be 0.040 inches thick minimum.

The enclosure shall consist of two side walls, two end walls, and roof. The roof shall be braced

as necessary to support the exhaust silencer. The enclosure shall be designed to withstand the

specified wind velocity without damage. All bracing and reinforcing members shall be integral

to the enclosure. Roof penetrations for the installation of the silencer shall be gasketed to

prevent the entrance of rain.

Doors shall be provided and located for easy access to the engine-generator, controls,

accessories, radiator fill, and to provide easy accessibility for maintenance. Doors shall be

lockable and suitable for use with all stainless steel padlocks. The padlocks shall be suitable for

re-keying.

Engine oil and coolant drains shall be piped to outside of enclosure, with lockable shutoff valves

and caps. All enclosure penetrations shall be gasketed or sealed to prevent the entry of rodents.

The enclosure shall be provided with intake and exhaust louvers with dampers to open on engine

start. Louvers and dampers shall be sized for 120 percent of the cooling air requirements.

Louvers shall be AC powered closed and spring open on unit start. The louvers shall be screened

from the inside to prevent the entry of birds.

The enclosure shall be rain tight type and shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain at the

specified wind velocity when the unit is operating and the wind direction at 90 degrees to the

intake louvers. "Rain Resistant" louvers, vertical air turning plenums, or a combination of the

two shall be provided.

AC/DC operated maintenance lights, controlled with a 1 hour, wind-up timer switch shall also be

provided inside the enclosure. A duplex receptacle rated 20 amp, 125 volts with a weatherproof

enclosure shall be mounted inside and near the middle of the enclosure.

The enclosure shall be pre-wired, requiring only external connection to the power panel and the

control panel outputs.

The enclosure shall be provided with vertical air turning plenums for cooling air intake. The air

inlet turning plenums shall be located on each side of the enclosure.

The enclosure shall be provided with vertical air tuning plenums for radiator discharge air. The

radiator discharge plenum shall direct the air and mechanical noise upwards away from the unit,

and shall be supplied with a bottom sump area, with a one inch drain and shutoff valve to remove

any moisture.

The entire enclosure, except for the louvered openings, shall be provided with noise suppression

insulation and be designed to limit mechanical noise to not more than 75 dB(A) at 25 feet from



(Group 4A2)

any point of the enclosure when operating . Field sound level tests shall be performed on each

unit as specified in the installation section of this specification.

The enclosure shall be thoroughly cleaned after assembly and etched to allow both the interior

and exterior surfaces to be shop painted. The interior finish shall consist of at least one coat of

paint as selected by the Owner.

The enclosure shall be as manufactured by Pritchard-Brown or equal.

2-4.08. Control Panel. Each engine-generator unit shall have a control panel mounted inside the

enclosure with panel mounted controls accessible when the enclosure doors are open. The panel

shall be provided with vibration isolators to prevent damage to the instruments from engine-

generator vibration.

The control panel shall be automatic and safety type and shall, at a minimum, include all items

required by NFPA 110, Level 1.

The control panel shall be provided with a four-position selector switch with the following

positions: “MANUAL-OFF/RESET-STOP-AUTO”. In the “MANUAL” position, the engine

starting sequence shall be initiated providing local control for maintenance, in the “AUTO”

position, the engine-generator will be remotely started and stopped by a run contract from the

automatic transfer switch as described in specification 16491. Isolated contacts for when the unit

is in the “AUTO” position shall be provided for remote indication.

Adequate clearance shall be provided between the panel and the engine to allow engine

maintenance without moving the control panel. The control panel shall be provided with the

following instruments and control devices in addition to those required by NFPA 110, Level 1.:

The Metering equipment shall include 3-1/2-inch diameter meters.

Tachometer.

Non-resetable hour meter.

2% accuracy AC voltmeter, AC ammeter, voltmeter/ammeter selector

switch with “off” position.

Two normally open dry contacts which close when the engine is running

and open with it is stopped.

Dry contact that closes for remote common alarm.

Dry contact that closes when the control selector switch is in “auto” mode.

Frequency Meter

Engine water temperature

Lube Oil Pressure

Fault Indicators for the following:

Individual press-to-test fault indicator lights for low oil pressure

High water temperature

Low water level

Over speed

Over crank



(Group 4A2)

2-4.09. Crankcase Vent Blow-By Absorber. Suitable crankcase ventilation shall be provided by

the engine manufacturer to meet the applicable Tier level emission requirements.

2-4.10. Power Panel. Each engine-generator unit shall have a 12 minimum circuit 120/240-volt

load center with main and feeder breakers, rated as needed. The load center shall be mounted

inside the enclosure and isolated from generator vibration. The load center shall be pre-wired to

all engine generator accessories as needed. The power panel shall supply power to the

following:

Engine-generator starting system battery charger.

Enclosure lights and receptacles.

Day tank fuel system.

Enclosure intake and exhaust louvers/dampers.

Engine jacket water heater.

Alternator windings heater.

2-4.11. Generator Line and Generator Component Overcurrent Protection. A generator line

circuit breaker rated for the generator output voltage, having the trip rating as needed , shall be

provided on the output terminals. The line circuit breaker shall be pre-wired to the generator

output terminals, and shall be provided within the generator enclosure in outdoor applications or

shall be furnished in a skid mounted NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor applications.

Overcurrent protection devices shall be provided as needed by the system design to protect

generator rotor and excitation system components.

2-4.12. Limiting Dimensions. Each engine-generator unit furnished shall be of a design that can

be accommodated in the space available as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

2-5. SHOP PAINTING. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable coatings

applied in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the

life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is

installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to

provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, engine, alternator, enclosure,

piping, and valves shall be shop primed and finish painted prior to shipment to the site.

Stainless steel, nonferrous, and nonmetallic surfaces shall not be painted.

2-6. SHOP TESTS. The manufacturer shall shop test each engine-generator set with its control

panel and unit mounted radiator to demonstrate that the equipment conforms to specified

requirements for load capacity.

All items included on the control panel shall be assembled, wired, and tested in the

manufacturer's shop.



(Group 4A2)

The tests shall consist of repeated starts and stops, operation under a load bank at specified

capacity frequency, voltage, phase, and power factor for a minimum of 1 continuous hour, and

tests to demonstrate that each safety shutdown device is working properly. Contractor shall

submit certified copies of the shop test results prior to shipping the unit.

2-7. OPERATION INSTRUCTION. Step-by-step instructions shall be furnished by each engine

manufacturer for each unit. The instructions shall include, but not be limited to, the following

procedures or information:

Startup of the unit.

Normal shutdown of the unit.

Emergency shutdown of the unit.

Normal operation of the unit, typical temperatures, pressures, speed, etc.,

for gauges and instruments which are displayed on the panel.

The operation instructions shall be submitted for review in accordance with the submittals

section. When the review is complete, the instruction sheets shall be printed on heavy paper or

cardboard stock and laminated with clear plastic. Two copies of the laminated instructions shall

be furnished with the unit. One copy shall be located or displayed at the control panel for the

unit. The reserve copy shall be delivered to Owner. The instructions specified here are in

addition to the operation and maintenance manuals required by the submittals section.

2-8. AIR EMISSIONS PERMIT. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and submitting

air emission permit application on behalf of the Owner to the local air quality authority for the

unit being supplied based on the maximum number of operating hours specified herein and

guaranteed emissions.

Permit to include provisions for the Owner to contact the local air quality authority for

permission to operate the unit in the event the permit hours may be exceeded due to unforeseen

conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Each engine-generator will be installed in accordance with the

Equipment Installation section.


3-2.01. Installation Check. When required, an experienced, competent, and authorized

representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if

necessary, and approve the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the

equipment is placed in operation in accordance with Startup Requirements section, and shall

revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment

installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer.



(Group 4A2)

The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has

been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress

imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions

and that it operated satisfactorily.


3-2.02. Installation Supervision. When required, the equipment manufacturer shall furnish a

qualified field installation supervisor during the equipment installation.


Manufacturers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing

contractor's erection or installation procedures. The equipment manufacturer will be provided

with written notification 10 days prior to the need for such services.

3-3. FIELD TESTING. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided for field testing. All

costs for these services shall be included in the contract price.

3-3.01. Performance Test. Each unit shall be mechanically checked for proper operation. Each

alarm and safety shutdown shall be checked by artificially simulating an alarm condition.

Defective equipment and controls disclosed by the tests shall be replaced or corrected, and the

packages placed in satisfactory operating condition.

The complete system (engine, generator, fuel system, fuel storage tank, and control panel) shall

be field tested together by the manufacturer as a complete system to assure compatibility.

The tests shall consist of repeated starts and stops, operation under a load bank at the specified

power rating and power factor for the durations listed blow, and test of successful operation

under different loads and various fuel tank levels (minimum and full tank fuel levels). Before

each test, the engine shall be brought to steady state conditions as determined by the instrument

readings.

Four (4) continuous hours at specified power rating and power factor

Starting and proper operation of the specified loads in the order listed

for a minimum of two (2) continuous hours

Demonstration of four (4) starts

Contractor shall furnish the lubricants, load bank, and the fuel for the tests.

At the option of the Owner, an independent laboratory will be provided by the Owner for the

exhaust gas sampling and analysis during the 4 hour load test of the engine. The laboratory

analysis will be used for verification the units meets the guaranteed emissions.

Any retesting or modifications to the equipment to meet the above requirements and emission

guarantees shall be approved by the Engineer. All costs of modifications and retesting, including

the independent laboratory for air emission testing, shall be at no cost to the Owner.



(Group 4A2)

The following items shall be measured, recorded at 15 minute intervals, and submitted in a field

test report:

Outdoor ambient temperature.

Indoor ambient temperature.

Barometric pressure.

kW output.

Engine speed, rpm.

Engine jacket water temperature.

Engine oil pressure.

Start time.

Completion time.

Test reports shall verify that the specified tests have been performed and shall state results. Test

results shall be submitted as required in the Submittals section.

3-3.02. Field Sound Level Test. The installed equipment shall be tested for noise. The

maximum measured sound levels outside the enclosure shall not exceed the specified noise level

at any octave band frequencies, at the specified distance when operating alone. Background

noise shall be included in the specified sound level. The Contractor shall take background noise

measurements as necessary to determine the level of sound attenuation required for the

enclosures.

Any retesting or modifications to the equipment or enclosure to meet the above requirements

shall be approved by the Engineer. All costs of modifications and retesting shall be at no cost to

the Owner.

Test reports shall verify that the specified tests have been performed and shall state results. Test

results shall be submitted as required in the Submittals section.

3-4. TRAINING. The manufacturer shall conduct on-site training to instruct the Owner on

operation and maintenance of the units. The training shall be arranged and coordinated with the

Owner though the Contractor. All costs for these services shall be included in the contract price.

Contractor shall include a minimum of four (4) clock hours for up to five (5) persons for each

model unit.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 11911

REMOVAL OF EXISTING ENGINE-GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the removal of the existing diesel fueled engine generator

and associated engine-generator accessories. The engine-generator for PS 3006 (Huggins) is a

135 kW diesel fueled unit.

The engine generator and associated equipment shall be demolished and removed from it’s

current outdoor location by the Contractor. FDEP Permit application for this work shall be done

by Orange County Risk Management Division.

1-2. GENERAL.

1-2.01. Coordination. Equipment removed under this section shall be inspected, disassembled,

and removed in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and

recommendations furnished by the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the

Engineer.

The engine generator shall be removed completely including all accessories. The Owner will not

be responsible for any parts damaged by the Contractor.

The removal of the equipment shall be coordinated with the modifications to the existing engine-

generator area outside. The Contractor shall coordinate the removal from service and storage of

the existing engine generator with the Owner to minimize impact on operations schedules.

The Contractor shall, at this own expense, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits,

inspections, and approval by the proper authorities in local jurisdiction of such work.

The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section.

1-3. STORAGE AND HANDLING. Equipment shall be stored and handled in accordance with

the General Equipment Stipulations and the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2-1. DECOMMISSION. The engine generator, associated wiring for the engine generator as

well as the day tank, exhaust silencer, and all accessories shall be demolished and removed by

the Contractor in accordance to all applicable regulatory requirements.

Provisions shall be made for temporary onsite engine-generators to be used as back-up sources of

power, prior to decommissioning. All cable and connectors shall be provided.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 13214

ABOVEGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of aboveground, steel fuel

storage tanks and accessories as indicated herein. FDEP Permit application for this work shall be

done by Orange County Risk Management Division.

Each tank shall be either constructed with porous concrete between two steel walls or

constructed of steel and encased in concrete.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and installed in full

conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations

of the manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.




1-2.02. Coordination. All equipment for this section shall be furnished by or through a single

manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and proper installation and

operation of the entire system.

Contractor shall properly coordinate the work between the suppliers of equipment to be used

with or connected to each storage tank to ensure that all required provisions for mounting the

accessories are included.

Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be the product

of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the

products of one manufacturer.

Contractor shall verify that each component of the system is compatible with all other parts of

the system; that all piping, materials, pumps, and motor sizes are appropriate; and that all devices

necessary for a properly functioning system have been provided.

Contractor shall, at his own expense, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections,

and approval by the proper authorities in local jurisdiction of such work.

1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by

this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances,

laws, and regulations which pertain to such work. In case of a conflict between these

specifications and any state law or municipal ordinance, the latter shall govern. All materials

and construction methods shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following standards:

ASTM A283 "Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes,



(Group 4A2)

and Bars," or ASTM A569 "Steel, Carbon, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip,

Commercial Quality."

American Petroleum Institute.

National Fire Protection Association.

Underwriters' Laboratories UL 142, Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and

Combustible Liquids; UL 1709, and Rapid Rise Fire Tests for a two hour period.

Applicable local regulations and ordinances.

1-2.04. Power Supply. Power supply for tank fill assembly control panel shall be 120 volts,

60 Hz, single phase.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete fabrication, assembly, and installation drawings, together

with detailed specifications and data covering materials used, parts, devices, and other

accessories forming a part of the tank furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the

Submittals section.

The data shall also indicate the sizes of all major tank components and full information and

details concerning field assembly and installation.

The manufacturer's standard calibration charts shall be submitted.

1-3.02. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance

information shall be supplied as required in the Submittals section. Operation and maintenance

manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The operation and

maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or

attached to the equipment when delivered.



section.

Each tank and component parts shall be adequately protected during all transportation, loading

and unloading, storage, installation, and subsequent construction activities. All nozzles shall be

properly protected at all times and shall be plugged to prevent contamination of the tank interior.

Repairs of minor damage, including scratches and abrasions, may be made where permitted by

Engineer in the manner recommended by the manufacturer. If a tank is damaged beyond

reasonable repair, in the opinion of Engineer, it will be rejected and shall be replaced by

Contractor with an undamaged unit.

At no time shall a tank be dropped or rolled. All lifting shall be done using the lifting lugs or

suitable slings.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS.

All equipment shall be designed to operate under the following service conditions:

Type of environmental exposure. Outdoor

Design ambient air temperature range. 20 to 100 °F

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Each aboveground fuel storage tank

shall be from the same manufacturer and meet the following performance and design

requirements as follows:

Pump Station 3006

Capacity. 1,500 gal

Liquid stored. No. 2 Diesel

Minimum insulation thickness.

Con Vault type 6 in

Phoenix type 3 in

Limiting dimensions.

Length. 132 in

Width. 68 in

Height. 52 in

Minimum primary tank wall thickness. 3/16 in

Minimum top wall thickness of secondary

tank, if applicable.

1/4 in

Minimum sides and bottom wall thickness

of secondary tank, if applicable.

3/16 in

Quantity of supply pipe extractor fittings

with caps.

1

Supply pipe extractor fitting size. 4 in

Supply pipe extractor fitting cap size. 1 ½ in

Quantity of supply pipe foot valves. 1

Supply pipe foot valve size. 1.5 in

Vent cap size 1 ½ in

Primary tank emergency vent size 6 in



(Group 4A2)

The primary internal steel tank shall be vented and normally used to store the specified product

at atmospheric pressure but shall be designed and tested at the factory before shipment to

maintain a 5 psi internal air pressure.

The primary internal steel tank shall be suitable to withstand internal corrosion from the liquid

stored at a maximum temperature of 150°F.

The porous lightweight concrete shall be placed between the two steel walls at the factory or the

tank shall be encased at the factory and either method shall provide a minimum two-hour fire

rating.

The secondary outer steel tank or the concrete encased tank shall be suitable to withstand

external corrosion due to atmospheric conditions.

2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The tank shall be current production model as

manufactured by either ConVault or Phoenix Envirovault.

2-4. CONSTRUCTION. Each storage tank shall be either double wall type with lightweight

concrete between the two steel walls or single wall tank with styrofoam insulation and HDPE

secondary containment and encased in concrete. Each tank shall be aboveground horizontal

rectangular, atmospheric type with support rails or support legs and accessories as indicated on

the drawings and specified herein. Each tank shall be secured to a concrete base by anchor bolts

(cast in reinforced concrete) through the tank support as indicated on the drawings. Each entire

tank package system shall be electrically grounded.

The materials for construction shall be in accordance with the following requirements:

ConVault Type

Tank (primary) Carbon steel.

Encasement Concrete, with minimum design strength of 3,000 psi,

containing no aggregate, suitable for preventing the internal

tank temperature from rising 260°F during a 2000°F fire test

for 2 hours.

Annular space Styrofoam insulation

Secondary containment HDPE

Phoenix Type

Primary Tank Carbon steel

Secondary Tank Carbon steel

Annular Space Porous lightweight concrete

The primary internal steel tank and, if applicable, the secondary outer steel tank shall both be of

welded construction throughout and each shall be UL 142 listed and labeled.

The tank shall have a minimum of 2 hour fire rating and UL listed supports. The tank shall be

UL 2085 listed, and shall meet the requirements of the Uniform Fire Code 7907, and NFPA

30/30A. .



(Group 4A2)

Upon completion of construction, the exterior of the of the double walled steel tank’s outer tank

and the inner tank interior seams shall be ground free of rough areas such that finished welds are

full and rounded.

Each tank shall be constructed, and provided with all connections as required to permit testing of

the tank containment including a nonmetallic secondary containment tank, if applicable.

2-4.01. Surface Preparation. After fabrication, all metal surfaces and connections shall be

blasted clean in conformance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. All mill scale,

rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is applied.

2-4.02. Painting. All exterior surfaces of the primary internal tank and either the secondary

outer steel tank or the concrete encasement shall be shop primed and painted in accordance with

the tank manufacturer's requirements.

2-4.03. Concrete. Porous lightweight concrete insulation or concrete encasement shall be

suitable for preventing the primary tank temperature from rising 260°F during 2000°F fire test

for the fire rating specified above.

2-4.04. Connections and Openings. Each fuel storage tank shall be supplied with the following

connections and openings:

Primary tank emergency vent connection. 6 in

Fill connection. 4 in

Supply connection quantity. 1

Supply connection size. 4 in

Return connection quantity. 1

Return connection size. 2 in

Leak monitor connection. 2 in

Level transducer connection. 4 in

Tank vent connection. 1-1/2 in

Secondary tank emergency vent connection, if applicable. *

Secondary tank test connection with cap, if applicable. *

Manway connection. 18 in

Extra connection quantity. 2

Extra connection size. 4 in

*As recommended by the tank manufacture if applicable.

All connections on the fuel storage tank shall be located on the top of the tank and shall be

forged steel threaded pipe nipples, located as indicated on the drawings. All connections on the

tank that are not used shall be capped.

Extra connections on the tank shall be located on the top and shall be forged steel threaded pipe

nipples with caps, located as indicated on the drawings.



(Group 4A2)

Secondary outer tank emergency vent connection size and secondary tank testing connection size

shall be as required for tank furnished.

All connections shall be sealed to prevent moisture from penetrating the outside of the secondary

outer steel tank and shall maintain the specified fire rating.

The manway for the tank shall be an all welded extension cylinder in the top of the tank.

2-5. ACCESSORIES. The accessories for each fuel storage tank shall be provided as indicated

on the drawings and as specified herein.

2-5.01. Tank Fill Assembly. Each fuel storage tank shall be furnished with a complete fill

system including remote fill box, fill pipe, level gauge, shutoff valves, NEMA 4X stainless steel

control panel (painted white), mounting pole, mounting bracket, and all accessories as indicated

on the drawings and specified herein. All items shall be suitable for the specified fluid.

The remote fill box shall be a grade level fill box with spill containment, overfill prevention and

automatic fill shut-off. The remote fill box shall be a weatherproof, lockable stainless steel

enclosure (painted white), with hinged doors and the following items:

Three-inch quick-disconnect coupling.

Check valve.

Electrically actuated shutoff valve.

Spill containment basin.

Hand pump.

Fire valve with fusible link.

Manual firesafe shutoff valve.

Fitting for outlet of product.

Fuel supply truck ground stud.

Ground lug for grounding the enclosure as indicated on the drawings.

Mounting pole, brackets, and other accessories as required

The remote fill box shall include a rainproof, lockable, NEMA 4X, stainless steel construction

enclosure (painted white) with hinged door for housing the control panel. All stainless steel

surfaces shall be properly prepared to prevent flaking and/or pealing of applied paint. The

control panel shall include the following items:

Control power On-Off switch and control power available indicating light.

Pushbuttons for Open-Close control of fill valve.

Fill valve Open-Close indicating lights.

Fuel tank leak indication light.



(Group 4A2)

90 percent and 95 percent tank level indicating lights.

Alarm horn sounding for 90 percent full, 95 percent full, and leak detected, with

silence pushbutton.

Continuous percent level indicator.

The control panel shall control the operation of the remote fill box mounted fuel

transfer valve. The control panel shall provide restriction of fuel transfer when the

tank is at the 90 percent full level, and stop fuel transfer when the tank is at the 95

percent full level.

Terminal connections for tank-mounted level transducer, 30 percent, 90 percent,

95 percent, and 100 percent level float switches, and leak detection float switch

shall be provided. All cable required between control panel and electrical

components mounted on the tank shall be furnished under this section.

Dry Form C dry contacts rated 5 amps at 120 VAC shall be provided for tank

level at 100 percent and 30 percent, and for leak detected.

4-20 mA output signal for tank level

The tank fill assembly shall be Simplex Compact Automatic Fuel Port as manufactured by

Simplex, Inc., or equal.

The fill pipe for the fuel storage tank shall extend from 4 inches above the bottom of the tank to

the remote fill box. The lower end of the fill pipe shall be cut off at 45 degree angle, and the

upper end inside the tank shall include an anti-siphon bleed hole. Suitable fittings shall also be

provided for the fill pipe to connect to the tank connection.

A suitable means of sealing around the sensor wire entering the leak detection riser pipe shall be

provided to prevent the annular space from being contaminated. Suitable fittings shall also be

provided for the level transmitter to connect to the tank connection.

2-5.02. Supply Pipe Assembly. Each supply pipe assembly for the fuel storage tank shall

consist of an extractor fitting with a top cap, suction piping, and a foot valve. Each suction pipe

length shall be such that the foot valve is located 4 inches above the bottom of the tank. The

extractor fitting shall thread onto the tank connection. The tank connection location shall be as

indicated on the drawings. The extractor fitting shall be OPW "233-E" with cap. The foot valve

shall be of the double poppet type with metal-to-metal replacement seats, 20 mesh Monel inlet

screen, and shall be OPW "86".

2-5.03. Vent Cover. A vent cover suitable for the specified tank vent size, shall be provided on

each fuel storage tank vent as indicated on the drawings. The vent pipe shall screw into the

coupling that is screwed onto the tank connection. The cover shall have an aluminum body, 40

mesh [40 mm] screen over the outlet, and shall prevent rain from entering the vent line. The vent

cover shall be OPW"23".

2-5.04. Primary Internal Tank Emergency Vent. An emergency vent shall be provided on the

top of each fuel storage tank as indicated on the drawings. The emergency vent shall relieve



(Group 4A2)

internal pressure in excess of 8 oz/sq in. The emergency vent shall be Morrison "Figure No.

244", or equal.

2-5.05. Secondary Outer Tank Emergency Vent. A secondary outer tank emergency vent shall

be provided on top of each fuel storage tank for the space between the two steel walls as

indicated on the drawings. The emergency vent shall relieve internal pressure in excess of 8

oz/sq in. The vent size shall be as recommended by the tank manufacturer.

2-5.06. Tank Support. Tank support rails or tank support legs shall be provided with each tank

at the spacing recommended by the manufacturer. Rails shall be fabricated of carbon steel as a

part of the tank structure. Legs shall be fabricated of concrete as a part of the tank structure.

Rails or legs shall be of the size and design required to adequately support the tank and its

contents and shall be suitable to withstand the buoyancy forces when the tank is empty and

covered with water.

2-5.07. Leak Detection System. Each tank shall be provided with a leak detection system to

continuously monitor the fuel storage tank. The system shall consist of porous insulation, a riser

pipe open on the bottom end and placed vertically next to and below the inner primary tank.

Any leakage shall flow through the insulation to the riser pipe.

The system shall use a single float switch to continuously monitor the presence of liquid in the

riser pipe.

The leak detection control panel is specified with the fill assembly and shall be located on the

remote fill box.

2-5.08. Level Transducer and Float Switches. Each tank shall be furnished with a level

transducer and float switch assembly to monitor fuel level in the tank. The level transducer shall

output an analog signal to the level indicator mounted on the control panel. 30, 90, 95, and 100

percent level float switches shall be vertical action SPST 120 VAC pilot duty. Level transducer

and float switches shall be wired to terminals in a weather proof conduit box mounted on top of

the tank.

2-5.09. Return Assembly. Each return pipe assembly shall include a 1-1/2 inch riser pipe that

extends 12 inches above the bottom of the tank up to the tank connection. Riser pipe shall

include anti-siphon bleed hole at the top of the pipe inside the tank. Suitable fittings shall be

provided for attaching the return piping to the tank connection.

2-5.10. Gauge Stick. A suitable gauge stick and calibration chart shall be supplied with each

tank.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. FIELD TESTING. After shipment to the jobsite, but prior to installation, each inner

primary tank shall be pressure tested at 5 psi for one hour. The inner primary tank shall be

checked for leaks, using an air gauge. During testing, connections may be plugged but shall not

be blocked or plugged on the inside. If there are leaks or indications of leaks, the tank shall be

replaced with a new tank and tested after shipment to the jobsite.

3-2. INSTALLATION. Each tank shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions, these specifications, detail drawings, and to the satisfaction of Engineer.

3-3. FIELD PAINTING. After installation of the fuel storage tanks, the contents of the tank and

the words “FLAMMABLE – KEEP FIRE AWAY” shall be painted on four sides of each tank

shall in an arrangement and location acceptable to the Owner. Letters shall be of the block type,

at least 5 inches, spaced and proportioned to provide a well-balanced appearance. Two coats of

paint shall be applied.


3-4.01. Installation Check. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the

manufacturer shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve

the equipment installation. The representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in

operation in accordance with Startup Requirements section, and shall revisit the job site as often

as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are

satisfactory in the opinion of Engineer.

The manufacturer's representative shall furnish a written report certifying that the equipment has

been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress

imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions

and that it operated satisfactorily.


3-4.02. Installation Supervision. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field

installation supervisor during the equipment installation.


Manufacturers' installation supervisor shall observe, instruct, guide, and direct the installing

contractor's erection or installation procedures. The equipment manufacturer will be provided

with written notification 10 days prior to the need for such services.

3-5. CLEANING. The exposed finish shall be inspected after completing system installation,

including pipe connections, fittings, valves, and specialties. Burrs, dirt, and construction debris

shall be removed and damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions shall be

repaired.



(Group 4A2)

3-6. PROTECTION. The equipment shall be protected after installation, but prior to final

acceptance by Owner. Protection provisions shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, and

shall include provisions to prevent rust, mechanical damage, and foreign objects entering the

equipment.

3-7. INITIAL TANK FILL. Upon completion, Contractor shall fill each fuel storage tank with

the specified liquid.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 13500

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of instrumentation and control

system at Pump Station PS 3006 (Huggins).

PS 3006 is currently equipped with an RTU, SCADA Type 3 panel, including communications

equipment. This panel is comprised of a Siemens 216-2 PLC, interface relays, an MDS model

9710 900 MHz radio and other pertinent equipment. The RTU panel, antenna mast and antenna

at this station shall be relocated and reused with the new pump station configuration. The

Contractor shall provide and install a new Pump Control Panel (PCP) that includes devices

shown on the schematic diagram per division 13 and 16 specifications and where referenced by

division 13 and 16 specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate with Orange County Utilities

for the disconnection and reconnection of the panel as well as the relocation of the antenna mast

and antenna.

It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to mount the RTU. A Florida certified

electrical CONTRACTOR shall perform the installation. All work shall be in accordance with

the current edition of the NFPA, NEC, UL and COUNTY electrical codes.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide conduit and wire from all instruments to the SCADA RTU

panel, provide the power required for all instruments, SCADA RTU panel, and provide conduit

from the SCADA RTU panel to the bio-solids control panel as shown on the drawings. Analog

wire shall be run in separate conduit from VAC wiring to minimize inductance and false signals

in the analog signal wiring. The contractor shall provide a drain wire that is connected to the

ground at the RTU cabinet. The drain wire shall not be connected at the device end so as to

minimize ground loops.

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to run power circuits to the RTU panel as shown on

the drawings. The systems shall be furnished as specified, complete with all software, human

machine interface (HMI) hardware, input/output hardware, instrumentation, and all devices,

accessories, appurtenances, testing, and training necessary for proper operation. UTILITIES shall

provide interface wiring between SCADA RTU panel and the pump control panel. The SCADA

RTU panel shall be interfaced to the pump control panel by UTILITIES. Software configuration

as well as all configuration activities at the Central site shall be performed by Orange County.

The contractor shall coordinate with the UTILITIES SCADA section for the wiring to be

installed from the end devices. Final terminations within the SCADA panel are to be completed

by owner. Contractor shall provide all signal wiring from field devices to SCADA panel.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated,

assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the

drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment

manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.



(Group 4A2)


equipment and materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ

from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take

precedence.

1-2.02. Drawings. The drawings indicate locations and arrangements of equipment and may

include installation details and block and one-line diagrams showing connections and interfaces

with other equipment. The input/output (I/O) lists are attached as an appendix to this section.

Principal components of the instrumentation systems shall be as indicated on the P&ID drawings

and instrument device schedule attached to this section.

1-2.03. Codes, Permits and Agency Approvals. All work performed and all materials used shall

be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and with applicable local regulations and

ordinances. Where mandated by codes, assemblies, panels, materials, and equipment shall be

listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). Contractor shall, as part of their work, arrange for

and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and approvals by the authorities having local

jurisdiction of such work. This shall include any third-party inspections and testing of panels

and equipment.

1-2.05. Coordination. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated for

proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other

sections of these specifications, under other contracts, and, where applicable, with related

existing equipment. All equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the

drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the

manufacturer, and the manufacturer of the related equipment.

1-2.06. Related Equipment and Materials. Related equipment and materials may include, but

will not be limited to, instrumentation, motor controllers, valve actuators, chemical feeders,

analytical measuring devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other sections or

furnished under other contracts.

1-2.07. Device Tag Numbering System. All devices shall be provided with permanent

identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with the equipment drawings and shall be as

close as practical to the tag numbers used on the project drawings and device schedules. All

field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags.

Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags

securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable.

1-3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The drawings and specifications indicate the extent and

general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the drawings or specifications are

deemed necessary details of such departures and the reasons shall be submitted to Engineer for

review with or before the first stage submittal. No departures shall be made without prior written

acceptance.

The specifications describe the minimum requirements for hardware and software. Where the

standard configuration includes additional items of equipment or software features not



(Group 4A2)

specifically described herein, such equipment or features shall be furnished as a part of the

system and shall be warranted as specified herein.

1-3.01. Governing Standards. Equipment furnished under this section shall be designed,

constructed, and tested in accordance with IEEE 519, ANSI C37.90, FCC Part 15 - Class A, and

NEMA ICS-1-109.60.

1-3.02. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the

layout area indicated on the drawings is based on typical values. The Contractor shall review the

contract drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make

any modifications requisite for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. At least

three feet of clear access space shall be provided in front of all components of the

instrumentation and control system components.

1-3.03. Workmanship and Materials. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against

faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials,

and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.


acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard

sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like

parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any

time prior to delivery, except for testing.

1-3.04. Corrosive Fluids. All parts, which are exposed to corrosive conditions, shall be made

from corrosion resistant materials. The Contractor shall submit certification that the instrument

manufacturer approves the selection of materials of primary elements that are in contact with the

specified process fluid to be inert to the effects of the process fluid.

1-3.05. Appurtenances. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies,

special cable, special grounding, and isolation devices shall be furnished as needed for proper

performance of the equipment.

1-3.06. Programming Devices. A programming or system-configuring device shall be provided

for systems that contain any equipment that requires such a device for routine calibration,

maintenance, and troubleshooting. The programming device shall be complete, newly purchased

for this project, and shall be in like-new condition when turned over to Owner at completion of

startup.

1-4. SUBMITTALS. Complete dimensional, assembly, and installation drawings, wiring and

schematic diagrams; and details, specifications, and data covering the materials used and the

parts, devices and accessories forming a part of the system furnished, shall be submitted in

accordance with the submittals section. Submittal data shall be grouped and submitted in three

separate stages. The submittal for each stage shall be substantially complete. Individual

drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review.

Equipment tag numbers or identifications used on the drawings shall be referenced where

applicable.



(Group 4A2)

1-4.01. First Stage Submittal. The first stage submittal shall include the following items.

a. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or discrepancies

between the system proposed by the Contractor and this specification.

b. Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware and software items, clearly marked

to show the model number, optional features, and intended service of each

device.

c. A brief, concise description of the proposed system, including major hardware

and software components and personnel training.

d. A block diagram or schematic drawing showing the principal items of

equipment furnished, including model numbers, and their interrelationships.

e. Drawings showing floor space or desktop area requirements for all equipment

items, including allowances for door swings and maintenance access.

f. Environmental and power requirements, including heat release information

for each equipment item.

g. Standard field termination drawings for all process input/output equipment,

showing typical terminations for each type of point available in the system.

h. A copy of the proposed software licenses for all software associated with the

system.

i, Outline for training classes.

1-4.02. Second Stage Submittal. Before any equipment is released for shipment to the site and

before factory testing is scheduled, the following data shall be submitted.

At the Contractor’s option, the first and second stage submittals may be combined.

a. Detailed functional descriptions of all software modules specified and

furnished as part of the Contractor’s standard system. The descriptions shall

be identified with the applicable specification paragraph.

b. Complete panel fabrication drawings and details of panel wiring, piping, and

painting. Panel and subpanel drawings shall be to scale and shall include

overall dimensions, metal thickness, door swing, mounting details, weight,

and front of panel arrangement to show general appearance, with spacing and

mounting height of instruments and control devices.

c. Wiring and installation drawings for all interconnecting wiring between

components of the system and between related equipment and the equipment

furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams shall show complete circuits

and indicate all connections. If panel terminal designations, interdevice

connections, device features and options, or other features are modified during

the fabrication or factory testing, revised drawings shall be submitted before

shipment of the equipment to the site.

d. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related

equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from supplying systems in full

compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment.



(Group 4A2)

e. Input/output listings showing point names, numbers, and addresses.

Input/output identification numbers from the contract documents shall be

cross-referenced in this submittal.

f. Proposed lesson plans or outlines for all training courses specified herein,

including schedule, instructors' qualifications and experience, and

recommended prerequisites.

g. Standard system engineering and user manuals describing the use of the

system and application programming techniques for creating reports, graphics,

database, historical records, and adding new process I/O nodes to the system.

1-4.03. Third Stage Submittal. Complete system documentation, in the form of Operation and

Maintenance Manuals, shall be submitted before the commencement of field acceptance testing.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include complete instruction books for each item of

equipment furnished. Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range

of device, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the device model number and

other special features. A complete set of "as-built" wiring, fabrication, and interconnection

drawings shall be included with the manuals. If field-wiring modifications are made after these

drawings are submitted, the affected drawings shall be revised and resubmitted. Supplemental

documentation requirements are as follows:

1. Complete schematic and wiring diagram, in the latest version of AutoCAD, and bill of

materials on compact disc;

2. Four maintenance manuals with above drawings and manufacturer’s maintenance

literature bound in three-ring binders;

3. A laminated copy of the schematic and wiring diagram shall be permanently affixed to

the interior side of the exterior enclosure door.

4. Documented HMI and/or RTU application program suitable for programming updates

for the RTU.

1-5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All electronic equipment and instruments shall be

suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage.

All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during

shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the

elements, shall be kept dry at all times, and shall not be exposed to adverse ambient conditions.

Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.

Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the

satisfaction of Engineer.

Each shipment shall include an appropriate shipping list that indicates the contents of the

package, including the specific instrument tags. The shipping list shall be accessible without

exposing the instruments to the atmosphere. The shipping list shall also contain any cautionary

notes regarding storage of the instruments, including requirements to protect the instrument from

static discharge, desensitizing chemicals (solvents, paints, etc.), or ambient atmospheric

conditions.



(Group 4A2)

Individual instruments shall be appropriately tagged or labeled to positively identify the device.

All identification shall be visible without the need to unpack the instrument from its protective

packaging.

Instrument shipment and storage requirements shall be coordinated with Engineer or Owner prior

to shipment. The Contractor shall provide adequate storage and be ready to accept the shipment

before shipping any equipment to the site. Additional shipping and storage requirements shall be

as detailed in the individual instrument specifications.

Components which are shipped loose due to transportation limitations shall be assembled and

disassembled by the manufacturer prior to shipment to assure that all components fit together and

are adequately supported.

1-6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND SHIPPING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the

shipping section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the handling and storage

section.

1-7. SPARE PARTS. In addition to spare parts and consumable items specified in other

sections, the following spares and consumable items shall be provided:

Spare Parts Quantity

Lamps for indicating lights 1 full set

1-7.01. Packaging. All spare parts shall be delivered to Owner before final acceptance of the

system. Packaging of spare parts shall provide protection against dust and moisture and shall be

suitable for storage. Circuit boards and other electronic parts shall be enclosed in anti-static

material. All packages shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, part number or

other identification, date of manufacture, and approximate shelf life.

1-7.02. Replacement. The Contractor may utilize spare parts and supplies during system

installation, de-bugging, startup, or training, but shall restore all such materials and supplies to

the specified quantities before final acceptance of the systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All equipment furnished under each section referenced in

SCOPE is a part of this section and shall be selected by the Contractor for its superior quality and

intended performance. Equipment and materials used shall be subject to review.

2-1.01. Standard Products. The systems furnished shall be standard products. Where two or

more units of the same type of equipment are supplied, they shall be the products of the same

manufacturer; however, all components of the systems furnished hereunder need not be the

products of one manufacturer unless specified herein.

To the extent possible, instruments used for similar types of functions and services shall be of the

same brand and model line. Similar components of different instruments shall be the products of



(Group 4A2)

the same manufacturer to facilitate maintenance and stocking of repair parts. Whenever

possible, identical units shall be furnished.

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The design of the systems furnished

hereunder shall utilize concepts, techniques and features that provide maximum reliability and

ease of maintenance and repair.

2-2.01. Factory Assembly. Equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, except

where its physical size, arrangement, configuration, or shipping and handling limitations make

the shipment of completely assembled units impracticable.

2-3. POWER SUPPLY AND INSTRUMENT SIGNAL. Power supply to all control system

equipment will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. The Contractor shall be responsible for

distribution of power among enclosures, consoles, peripherals, and other components of the

system from the power supply receptacles and junction boxes indicated on the drawings. Power

distribution hardware shall include cables and branch circuit overcurrent protection installed in

accordance with the electrical section.

Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the instrumentation will be unregulated 120 volts

ac. Unless otherwise indicated, all transmitted electronic analog instrument signals shall be 4-

20 mA dc and shall be linear with the measured variable.

2-3.01. Facility Distribution System. Equipment not indicated to be powered from an

uninterruptible power source shall be suitable for being supplied from the facility distribution

system and shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations of ±10 percent and harmonics up

to the limits of IEEE 519 without affecting operation. The Contractor shall provide voltage

conditioning or filtering equipment if necessary to meet the requirements specified.

2-3.02. Power Supplies. Power supplies for voltages other than those listed above shall be an

integral part of the equipment furnished. Internal power supplies shall be regulated, current

limiting, and self-protected.

2-3.03. Surge Withstand. All equipment shall meet all surge withstand capability tests as

defined in ANSI C37.90 without damage to the equipment.

2-4. SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. The equipment

provided for the instrumentation and control system shall be suitable for the service conditions

specified in the attached equipment sections.

All equipment shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in performance

throughout the environmental extremes specified. Equipment shall be designed to prevent the

generation of electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with

FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices.

2-4.01. Lightning Protection. In addition to other environmental protection specified herein, the

entire system shall be provided with lightning protection. Lightning protection measures shall

include the following.



(Group 4A2)

2-4.01.01. Grounding. All major components of the system shall have a low resistance ground

connection. Grounding system provisions indicated on the drawings shall be modified as

recommended by the Contractor.

2-4.01.02. Surge Suppressors. Surge and lightning supressors shall be non-faulting, non-

interrupting, and shall protect against line-to-line and line-to-ground surges. Devices shall be per

Appendix D of the Orange County Utilities Standards and Construction Specifications Manual.

2-5. INSTALLATION TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary testing equipment for calibration

and checking of system components shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall

also furnish calibration and maintenance records for all testing and calibration equipment used

on the site if requested by Engineer.

2-6. PROGRAMMING DEVICES. The following programming devices shall be provided for

the instruments specified in other sections:

Instruments Requiring Programming Devices Quantity of Programming

Devices

Flow instruments 1

Pressure and level instruments 1

2-7. PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE. The following programming software shall be provided

for the instruments specified in other sections:

Instruments Requiring Programming Software Number of Copies of

Programming Software

Flow instruments 1

Pressure and level instruments 1

2-8. INSTRUMENTATION. The following paragraphs specify the instrumentation

requirements.

2-8.01. Magnetic Flowmeters, Signal Converters, and Accessories.

1. The magnetic flow meter shall be of the low frequency electromagnetic induction type and

shall produce a DC pulsed signal directly proportional and linear to the liquid flow rate. The

meter shall be designed for operation on 120-VAC plus/minus 10 percent, 60 hertz, plus/minus 5

percent with a power consumption of less than 20 watts for sizes through 12 inches.

2. The metering tubes shall be constructed of stainless steel. All magnetic flow meters shall be

designed to mount directly in the pipe between ANSI Class 150 flanges and shall consist of a

flanged pipe spool piece with laying length of at least 1-1/2 times the meter diameter. Meters

shall have polyurethane liners with stainless steel electrodes.

3. The electronics portion of the magnetic flow meter shall include both a magnet driver to

power the magnet coils and a signal converter. The signal converter shall be integrally mounted.



(Group 4A2)

The converter shall include a separate customer connection section to isolate the electronics

compartment and protect the electronics from the environment. A separate terminal strip for

power connection shall be supplied. The electronics shall be of the solid state, feedback type and

utilize integrated circuitry. The input span of the signal converter shall be continuously

adjustable between 0-1 and 0-31 fps for both analog and frequency outputs. The converter shall

not be affected by quadrature noise nor shall it require zero adjustment or special tools for start-

up.

4. Input and output signals shall be fully isolated. The converter output shall be 4 to 20 ma DC

into 0 to 900 ohms.

5. Meter shall be suitable for outdoors installation and shall be furnished complete with

grounding rings and installation hardware including studs, nuts, gaskets, and flange adapter

hardware.

6. The converter shall include an integral zero return to provide a constant zero output signal in

response to an external dry contact closure.

7. Converter shall also include digital type switches for direct adjustment of scaling factor in

engineering units along with integral calibration self-test feature to verify proper operation of the

electronics.

8. The meter shall be hydraulically calibrated at a facility located in the United States and the

calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. A computer printout of the

actual calibration data giving indicated versus actual flows at a minimum of three flow rates shall

be provided with the meter. A certification letter shall accompany the computer printout of the

calibration data for each meter referencing the meter's serial number. The accuracy of the

metering system shall be 1 percent of rate from 10 to 100 percent of flow for maximum flow

velocities of 3 to 31 feet per second.

9. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the meter system to eliminate the

need to zero adjust the system with a full pipe at zero flow.

10. The meter housing shall be splash-proof and weather resistant design. The meter shall be

capable of accidental submergence in up to 30 feet of water for up to 48 hours without damage to

the electronics or interruption of the flow measurement.

The flowmeter shall be the Unimag model manufactured by EMCO and no other. The flowmeter

transmitter shall be model 4411e manufactured by EMCO and no other.

2-8.02. Radar Level Transmitters. Radar level transmitter shall be a microprocessor-based

electronic unit consisting of a antenna assembly, a signal converter/transmitter, and an

interconnecting cable. The antenna shall be encapsulated in polypropylene. The unit shall be

capable of operating with process temperature: -40 °C to +93 °C (-40 °F to +200 °F) Pressure:

Vacuum to 13,8 bar (200 psi) Dielectric: 1,7 – 100. The radar level transmitter shall be a 2-

wire, intrinsically safe, loop powered instrument. The radar level transmitter shall be by

Magnetrol and shall be the R82-5B0A-011 model.

2-8.03. Weighted Float Type Level Switches. Each level switch shall consist of a single-pole,

double-throw mercury switch, rated not less than 3 amp [A] ac, sealed and housed in a

chemical-resistant polypropylene casing. The switch assembly shall be weighted and suspended

on a waterproof, three-conductor, synthetic covered flexible cable with19 AWG [0.5 mm2]

conductors and of such length that no splice or junction box is required in the wet well. Switches



(Group 4A2)

shall be suitable for operation at up to 150 V ac within an ambient temperature range of 0 to

60°C. Switches shall be suitable for use in a sanitary wastewater wet well. Adjustable mounting

hardware shall be provided for supporting each level switch. Mechanical floats will not be

acceptable. Switches shall be by Anchor Scientific and shall be the “Roto float”.

2-8.04. Pressure Transmitters. Transmitter shall be an all solid state electronic two-wire device

that does not require a direct power connection to the transmitter. Process fluid shall be isolated

from the sensing elements by AISI Type 316 stainless steel, Hastelloy-C, ceramic, or

cobalt-chromium-nickel alloy diaphragms, and the transducer may use a silicone oil fluid fill.

Transmitters shall have self-diagnostics and electronically adjustable span, zero, and damping.

Transmitters shall be enclosed in a NEMA Type 4X housing and shall be suitable for operation

at temperatures from 0° to 180°F [-17° to +82°C], and relative humidity of 5 to 100 percent. All

parts shall be cadmium-plated carbon steel, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant materials.

Transmitters shall have over-range protection to maximum line pressure. Accuracy of the

transmitter shall be 0.075 percent of span, and transmitter output shall be 4-20 mA dc without the

need for external load adjustment. Transmitters shall not be damaged by reverse polarity.

Transmitters shall have an elevated or suppressed zero . For calibrated spans of less than 8 psig

[55 kPa gage] a differential pressure type transmitter with side vents shall be utilized.

Transmitters shall be provided with brackets for wall and pipe-stand mounting.

Transmitters shall be factory calibrated to the required range and provided with the

manufacturer's standard hand-held communications/calibration device. One device shall be

furnished for all transmitters provided by a single manufacturer.

Transmitters tagged on the drawings or specified to be indicating type shall be furnished with

LCD type digital indicators.

Transmitters will have a turndown ration of 30:1, or more.

Transmitters shall be Foxboro "Model IGP10-D", Endress & Hauser “Cerabar S”, or “Deltabar S

Series”, ABB Model 264GS, or Rosemount Model 1151.

2-8.05. Instrument Shutoff Valves. Instrument shutoff valves shall be provided for instruments

as indicated on the drawings and as detailed in the specifications. The indicated shutoff valves

shall be provided by the Contractor for all instruments furnished under this specification.

Shutoff valves shall be compatible with the measured process and shall be selected in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the specified process. Unused ports of multi-port

gauge valves shall be plugged. An instrument shutoff valve schedule shall be submitted

indicating the quantity, material, size, and associated instrument. Permanent tagging of the

instrument valves is not required. However, temporary hand-written tags or other means of

identification shall be provided to ensure that the appropriate valve is installed for a given

instrument.


3-1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. The installation of equipment furnished hereunder

shall be by the Contractor or their assigned subcontractors.



(Group 4A2)

3-1.01. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the

requirements listed in the SCSM, Section 3413 3.01 and 3.02..

3-1.02. Instrument Installation. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read

and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for

some instruments are indicated on the drawings.

3-1.03. Salvage of Existing Equipment. Existing equipment and materials removed or replaced

under this contract shall be delivered to Owner at a location designated by Owner, or shall be

properly disposed of at Owner’s discretion. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to equipment

delivered to Owner.

Any mounting brackets, enclosures, stilling wells, piping, conduits, wiring, or openings that

remain after removal of equipment and support hardware shall be removed or repaired in a

manner acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Transmitters or switches containing mercury shall be

removed and disposed of by personnel trained in the handling of hazardous materials and using

approved procedures.

3-2. FIELD SERVICES. Manufacturer's field services shall be provided for installation, field

calibration, startup, and training as specified in this section.

Instruments shall not be shipped to the Work Site until two weeks prior to the scheduled

installation. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation schedule with

the Installation Contractor. Each shipment shall contain a listing of protective measures required

to maintain sensor operation, including a listing of any common construction or cleaning

chemicals that may affect instrument operation.

3-3. TESTING. The system shall be acceptance tested as specified in the Orange County

Utilities Standards and Construction Specifications Manual.

3-3.01. Site Acceptance Testing. Site acceptance testing shall be per the requirements of the

SCSM, Section 3412 3.01.

3-3.02. Service. Service requirements shall be per the requirements of the SCSM, Section 3412

3.02.

3-3.04. Warranty. Warranty shall be per the requirements of the SCSM, Section 3412 3.03.

3-5. TRAINING. the Contractor shall conduct training courses for personnel selected by

Owner. Instrument training shall be conducted by experienced instructors who are familiar with

the specific equipment supplied.

3-5.01. Instrument Training. Training on the calibration, maintenance, troubleshooting, and

repair for the instrument devices provided under this project shall be provided. Training shall

also be provided for any hand-held or computer-based calibration devices and their associated

software. 4 hours of training for 4 students shall be provided at the Owner’s facility.



(Group 4A2)

3-5.02. Supplemental Training. The Contractor shall provide additional training to Owner’s

personnel on topics of Owner’s choosing. Supplemental training shall be conducted in one

session at Owner’s facilities using the hardware and software installed for this project. The

training shall consist of 4 hours of instruction for 4 students.

End of Section

INSTRUMENT

NAME & SERVICE:

BRAND & MODEL NO.:

TAG OR LOOP NO.:

INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE:

INPUT ACTUAL OUTPUT DESIRED OUTPUT

PROPORTIONAL BAND:

RESET:

POSITION OF SWITCHES, JUMPERS, ETC.

COMMENTS:

DATE OF CALIBRATION:

CALIBRATED BY:

Black & Veatch INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION

REPORT

Figure 1-13500

Black and Veatch Instrument Device Schedule

Item System Service Description Device Type Size Output TypeOutput

RangePower Inst Det P&I Drwg. Comments/Notes

13006 FE 3006-01 FLOW ELEMENT MAGNETIC FLOW TUBE 10" NA

0-2900

GPM N/A I-8 I-4

23006 FIT 3006-01 STATION FLOW

MAGNETIC FLOW INDICATING

TRANSMITTER N/A 4-20 mA

0-2900

GPM 4-WIRE I-8 I-4

33006 LIT 3006-30 FUEL TANK LEVEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER N/A 4-20 mA 4-WIRE NA I-7 GENERATOR PACKAGE EQUIPMENT

43006 LS 3006-10B ALL PUMPS OFF LEVEL BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-8 I-4 CP-1 SUPPLIER

53006 LS 3006-10C LEAD PUMP LEVEL BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-8 I-4 CP-1 SUPPLIER

63006 LS 3006-10D LAG PUMP LEVEL BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-8 I-4 CP-1 SUPPLIER

73006 LS 3006-10E LAG 2 PUMP LEVEL BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-8 I-4 CP-1 SUPPLIER

83006 LSH 3006-10F HIGH BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-8 I-4 CP-1 SUPPLIER

93006 LSH 3006-10G HIGH BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-8 I-4

PUMP EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER TO RTU

ONLY.

103006 LSLL 3006-10A LOW BALL FLOAT N/A DRY CONTACT N/A N/A I-9 I-4 CP-1 SUPPLIER

113006 LT 3006-10 WETWELL LEVEL RADAR LEVEL TRANSMITTER N/A 4-20 mA 0-22 FT 2-WIRE I-8 I-4 CONTRACTOR

123006 PI 3006-01 DISCHARGE PRESSURE GAUGE N/A N/A

0-100

PSI N/A I-9 I-4 CONTRACTOR

133006 PIT 3006-01 STATION DISCHARGE PRESSURE PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTER N/A 4-20 mA

0-100

PSI 2-WIRE I-8 I-4 CONTRACTOR

P&I Drawing. This is the drawing number of the P&ID where the device is shown.

Loc. Drwg. This is the drawing number of the electrical plan or instrument location plan where the device is shown.

InstDet. This is a reference to the applicable installation detail on the drawings if applicable.

Comments/Notes. This column may include a cross reference to another specification section where applicable or to a note which provides additional information. Notes are appended to the end of the

device schedule listings.

Tag

Power. This will typically be either '2-wire' for loop powered devices or '4-wire' for 120 volt powered devices.

Output Range. This is the calibrated range for analog devices or the trip point(s) for discrete devices.

Output Type. This generally will be '4-20 mA' or "Dry Contact'. It could also be a serial output for smart devices (such as HART or FLD-BUS) but only if the serial output is the primary I/O interface.

Item. This is an arbitrary sequential number which is for reference only.

Instrument Device Schedule - Legend/Description Sheet

Device Type & Size. This is the instrument device type and should match the description as listed in the specification. Where appropriate, the size of the device (such as diameter of flowmeters) will be

listed.

Service Description. This is the description of the instrument service (i.e. Filter No. 1 Loss-of-Head).

Loop. This is the numeric (or alphanumeric) loop designation for the instrument.

Tag. This is the ISA (or similar) alpha tag representing the function of the instrument.

(Orange County Utilities)

(Master Pump Station Improvements)

(Group 4A2)

13500-A- 1 Bid Issue

October 2011

Black Veatch Appendix PLC Input/Output List

Signal Type Calibrated Range Power Signal Type Closed State Power Source Interp Relay

1 3006 AI FUEL TANK LEVEL LIT-3006-30 4-20 mA 4-WIRE

2 3006 AI STATION FLOW FIT-3006-01 4-20 mA 0-2900 GPM 2-WIRE

3 3006 AI STATION PRESSURE PIT-3006-01 4-20 mA 0-100 PSI 2-WIRE

4 3006 AI WETWELL LEVEL LT-3006-10 4-20 mA 0-22 FT 2-WIRE INTRINSICALLY SAFE

5 3006 DI BIOFILTER ALARM BIO FILTER CP DRY CONTACT FAIL LOCAL NO

6 3006 DI BIOFILTER RUNNING BIO FILTER CP DRY CONTACT RUNNING LOCAL NO

7 3006 DI COMPUTER/LOCAL CONTROL RTU DRY CONTACT COMPUTER LOCAL NO

8 3006 DI EMERGENCY SOURCE ATS DRY CONTACT

EMERGENCY

SOURCE LOCAL NO

9 3006 DI FUEL TANK ALARM FUEL TANK DRY CONTACT FAIL LOCAL NO

10 3006 DI GENERATOR ALARM ENGINE DRY CONTACT

GENERATOR

FAIL LOCAL NO

11 3006 DI GENERATOR RUNNING ENGINE DRY CONTACT RUNNING LOCAL NO

12 3006 DI HIGH FLOAT LSHH-3006-10 DRY CONTACT HIGH HIGH LOCAL NO INTRINSICALLY SAFE

13 3006 DI LAG 2 FLOAT LS-3006-10D DRY CONTACT TIPPED LOCAL YES INTRINSICALLY SAFE

14 3006 DI LAG FLOAT LS-3006-10C DRY CONTACT TIPPED LOCAL YES INTRINSICALLY SAFE

15 3006 DI LEAD FLOAT LS-3006-10B DRY CONTACT TIPPED LOCAL YES INTRINSICALLY SAFE

16 3006 DI LOW FLOAT LSLL-3006-10 DRY CONTACT LOW LOW LOCAL NO INTRINSICALLY SAFE

17 3006 DI NORMAL SOURCE ATS DRY CONTACT

NORMAL

SOURCE LOCAL No

18 3006 DI OFF FLOAT LS-3006-10A DRY CONTACT TIPPED LOCAL YES INTRINSICALLY SAFE

19 3006 DI PANEL INTRUSION RTU DRY CONTACT INTRUSION LOCAL NO

Discrete Data (Closed State). This will indicate the state of the input or output when it is considered to be closed or energized (normal, alarm, running, failed, etc.).

Panel ID. This is the panel identification for the I/O cabinet, PLC cabinet, or controller where the I/O signal terminates.

Discrete Data (Interp Relay). This will be either 'Yes' or 'No' to indicate whether the input or output requires an interposing relay. Relays are typically required to isolate external voltage sources. See specifications for additional details.

AO = Analog Output

Analog Data (Signal Type). This will typically be 4-20mA, but could also be 1-5Vdc, serial, HART, FLD-BUS, or similar to indicate the signal type of the associated input or output.

Discrete Data (Signal Type). This will be 120VAC, 24VDC, or similar to indicate the signal type of the associated input or output.

ItemAnalog Data Discrete Data

Comments/NotesPanel ID

Type: This is the type of I/O signal, as follows:

Service Description

Input/Output List - Legend/Description Sheet

Analog Data (Power). This will typically be '2-wire' for devices which are loop powered from the PLC enclosure, or '4-wire' for devices which are powered form external power supplies, unless noted otherwise.

DI = Discrete Input

DO = Discrete Output

PI = Pulse Input (totalizer or accumulator type input)

Comments/Notes. This column may include a cross reference to another specification section where applicable, or to a note which provides additional information. Notes are appended to the end of the I/O listing.

Service Description. This is the description or the function (i.e. Filter No. 1 Loss-of-Head).

Local = Power originates from within the PLC or I/O enclosure.

AI = Analog Input

Discrete Data (Power Source). This will indicate the location of the power source for the wetting voltage on the contacts, as follows:

Point. This is the type point number.

Item. This is an arbitrary sequential number which is for reference only.

Field Device

Field Device. This is the tag number of equipment identifier associated with the I/O point.

Type

Field = External field power source. (May require interposing relays or isolated I/O module type.)

Analog Data (Calibrated Range). This will be the scaled value of the input in engineering units.


(Master Pump Stations Imp.)

(Group 4A2)

13500-B- 1 Bid Issue

October 2011

Black Veatch Appendix PLC Input/Output List

Signal Type Calibrated Range Power Signal Type Closed State Power Source Interp RelayItem

Analog Data Discrete DataComments/NotesPanel ID Service Description Field DeviceType

20 3006 DI POWER FAILURE RTU DRY CONTACT POWER FAIL LOCAL NO

21 3006 DI PUMP 1 RUNNING PCP DRY CONTACT RUNNING LOCAL NO

22 3006 DI PUMP 1 SEAL LEAK PCP DRY CONTACT FAIL LOCAL NO





27 3006 DI STATION POWER FAIL ATS DRY CONTACT

STATION

POWER FAIL LOCAL No

28 3006 DO LAG PUMP START/STOP PCP DRY CONTACT START LOCAL YES

29 3006 DO LAG2 PUMP START/STOP PCP DRY CONTACT START LOCAL YES

30 3006 DO LEAD PUMP START/STOP PCP DRY CONTACT START LOCAL YES

31 3006 DO PUMP 1 DISABLE PCP DRY CONTACT

PUMP

DISABLED LOCAL YES


PUMP

DISABLED LOCAL YES


PUMP

DISABLED LOCAL YES


(Master Pump Stations Imp.)

(Group 4A2)

13500-B- 2 Bid Issue

October 2011



(Group 4A2)

Section 13990

REMOVAL OF ABOVEGROUND AND UNDERGROUND

FUEL STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the draining, removal, and completion of closure assessment

activities for one existing above ground fuel storage tank at PS 3006 (Huggins), associated fuel

tank accessories, including the removal of existing fuel dispensers. The above ground diesel fuel

tank has a capacity of 500 gallons. Contractor shall provide necessary labor, materials, and

supervision required to remove and dispose of the stored product, equipment pad, and all related

above ground piping.

All such work must be accomplished in accordance with all federal, state, county, and local

requirements as well as accepted safety standards. Before initiating work, the appropriate

government agencies shall be consulted concerning applicable regulatory requirements and to

obtain any permits required.

1-2 GENERAL.

1-2.01. Coordination. Equipment removed under this section shall be inspected, disassembled,

removed, relocated, and placed in proper storage conditions in full conformity with drawings,

specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations furnished by the equipment

manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.

All equipment for this section shall comply with federal state, county, and local regulations

concerning above ground storage tanks. In the event that state or local regulations exceed the

requirements of this specification, the regulations shall take precedence.

All work shall be performed in accordance with the 1996 Edition of NFPA-30, Chapter 62-762

FAC, and Chapter 62-761 FAC.

The removal of the equipment shall be coordinated with the installation of the new fuel storage

tanks, the Contractor shall coordinate the removal from service and storage of the existing fuel

storage tanks with the Owner to minimize impact on operations schedules.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Prior to starting the work the Contractor shall submit the following;

a. Name of all Subcontractors.

b. Location and method of disposal for all waste materials for recording purposes only.

c. For the underground storage tank, a temporary bracing and sheeting plan shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval, if required, that provides protection for

foundations, piping, utilities, and facilities that are to remain undisturbed and in

service throughout the work.

d. A site specific health and safety plan and contingency plan.



(Group 4A2)

e. Schedule and sequence of each tank removal.

1-4. STORAGE AND HANDLING. Equipment shall be stored and handled in accordance with

the General Equipment Stipulations and the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2-1. PREPARATION AND PERFORMANCE OF TANK REMOVAL. The Contractor shall

be responsible for performing the tasks as identified in the FDEP Storage Tank System Closure

Assessment Requirements, Chapter 62-762.801 F.A.C. and Chapter 62-761.800 F.A.C., which

shall include, but shall not be limited to the following.

a. Perform storage tank closure assessment which includes existing soils and

groundwater evaluation, as stated in the FDEP Storage Tank System Closure

Assessment Requirements.

b. Contact all State and Local regulatory agencies to obtain work permits and to file the

required notice of work commencement, if required.

c. The contractor shall inspect each tank prior to removal activities to the extent

required to be able to safely perform the work.

d. All electrical power connected to the tank or ancillary equipment shall be

disconnected at the circuit breaker.

e. Prior to tank cleaning, remove all stored fuel from each tank and collect in drums or

tank truck and dispose thereof. Drain and flush all piping back into the tank and

remove all residual fuel, sludge, and water.

• If any piping is abandoned in place all contents of the piping shall be removed by

flushing or other approved means. Fluids generated during the pipe flushing

operation must be captured for proper disposal and not allowed to spill onto the

ground or into the tank excavation. The ends of the piping must be capped and

sealed.

• All fuel residues, fluids, sludge, and cleaning materials removed from the tank

shall be disposed of at an approved disposal site as recognized by the State.

Materials shall be manifested, as required by State and Federal regulations.

f. Disconnect and cap, or remove and dispose of the storage tank and associated piping.

Manways shall be secured to prevent access. Remove and dispose of the concrete

equipment pad and any attachments.

• Prior to disposing of the piping, the latest applicable waste disposal regulations

shall be checked to determine if special attention of preparation is required.



(Group 4A2)

g. Close the storage tank systems in accordance with paragraphs 62-762.801(3)(b)

F.A.C, as applicable; and conduct a closure assessment in accordance with subsection

62-762.801(4) F.A.C.

h. The above ground tanks shall be rendered free of pollutant vapors at the time of

closure to prevent hazardous explosive conditions, and maintained to prevent future

explosive conditions.

i. The above ground thanks shall also be protected from flotation in accordance with

NFPA 30, Section 2-6.

j. The underground tank system removal, closure in-place, and disposal shall be

performed:

• In accordance with API RP 1604 and NFPA 30

• By a Certified Contractor if the system is removed from the ground, unless it is

closed in place by filling it with a solid inert material of sufficient density to

prevent a structural collapse of the closed system.

k. When the underground storage tank is removed, the Certified Contractor shall

demonstrate that no unauthorized release of fuel has occurred in accordance with state

and local regulations. The following tasks shall be performed:

i. Visual inspection of the tank upon removal.

ii. Visual inspection of excavation.

iii. Two soil samples shall be analyzed from beneath the tank, one from

directly beneath the fill pipe, the other from a similar position at the

opposite end of the tank.

iv. Soil samples shall be collected from the native soil at, or just below, the

interface of the backfill with native soil.

• If the bottom of the tank is below the groundwater table, then soil samples are not

required. In this case a water sample shall be collected as soon as possible from

the surface of the groundwater in the excavation.

• Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a certificate of destruction which certifies

that the tank has been disposed of in a legal and safe manner. Certificate shall

include description of disposal method and location and signed by the disposal

facility.

• Backfill excavation with clean fill and compact



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 – EXECUTION.

3.1. REMOVAL. Each fuel storage tank and all accessories shall be carefully removed and

disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all requirements.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15010

VALVE INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of new valves and actuators purchased by

Contractor as part of this Work.

Pressure and leakage testing and pipe supports are covered in other sections.

The following specification sections are applicable to valves to be installed:

Section Title

15091 Miscellaneous Ball Valves

15093 Check Valves

15094 Backflow Preventers

15102 Eccentric Plug Valves

15108 Air Release/Combination Air Valves

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper

operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,


by Engineer.

1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services or installation check services are

provided by the valve manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the valve

manufacturer. Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for

manufacturer's field services.

Flanged connections to valves including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the

appropriate pipe specification section.



protected by Contractor in accordance with Handling and Storage section and the manufacturer’s

instructions until installed in the Work. Stored equipment shall be protected by Contractor

against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on

earth or grass surfaces or come into contact with earth or grass. Contractor shall keep the

equipment dry at all times.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSPECTION. All valves and accessories shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness

before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not

be used unless it is repaired and re-cleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such

material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by

Owner or his representative before its use.

3-2. INSTALLATION.

3-2.01. General. Valves shall be installed with sufficient clearance for proper operation of any

external mechanisms, and with sufficient clearance to dismantle the valve for in-place

maintenance. Installation shall be in accordance with the valve manufacturer’s

recommendations.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all valves installed in horizontal runs of pipe having

centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the finish floor shall be installed with their

operating stems vertical. Valves installed in horizontal runs of piping having centerline

elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above the finish floor shall be installed

with their operating stems horizontal. If adjacent piping prohibits this, the stems and operating

hand wheel shall be installed above the valve horizontal centerline as close to horizontal as

possible. Valves installed in vertical runs of pipe shall have their operating stems oriented to

facilitate the most practicable operation, as reviewed by Engineer.

3-2.02. Installation Checks. When specified in the valve sections, the valve manufacturer will

provide installation checks. For installation checks, the manufacturer’s field representative will

inspect the valve installation immediately following installation by Contractor. The

manufacturer's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation

satisfactory to Owner.

Contractor shall perform no Work related to the installation or operation of materials or

equipment furnished by others without direct observation and guidance of the field

representative, unless Engineer and manufacturer furnishing such materials concur otherwise.

3-2.03. AWWA Butterfly Valves. Not used.

3-2.04. Check Valves.

3-2.04.01. Swing Check Valves. Install valves oriented for the correct flow direction. Only

valves designed for vertical installation shall be installed in vertical piping.

3-2.05. Eccentric Plug Valves. Eccentric plug valves shall be installed with the shaft horizontal

and the plug in the upper half of the valve body. Valves in wastewater, sludge, or scum lines

shall be installed with the seat on the upstream end.

3-2.06. Resilient Seated Gate Valves. Not used.

3-2.07. Double Disc Gate Valves. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

3-2.08. Air Release and Combination Air Valves. The exhaust from each valve shall be piped to

a suitable point acceptable to Engineer. Air release valve exhaust piping leading to a trapped

floor drain shall terminate at least 6 inches above the floor.

3-2.09. Valve Boxes. Valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed directly

over the valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the finished grade. After each

valve box is placed in proper position, earth fill shall be placed and thoroughly tamped around

the box.

3-2.10. Yard Hydrants. Not used.

3-2.11. Fire Hydrants. Not used.

3-3. VALVE ACTUATORS. Valve actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance

with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.


3.4.01. Field Testing. After installation, all valves shall be tested in conjunction with the

Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section.

3-4.01.01. Pressure Tests. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and

Leakage Testing section.

3-4.01.02. Leakage Tests. All valves shall be free from leaks. Each leak that is discovered

within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the

expense of Contractor. This requirement applies whether pressure testing is required or not.

3-5. ADJUSTING. After installation, the opening and closing time shall be adjusted as needed

for each pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuated valve.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15020

MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of piping and accessories as indicated on the

drawings for the following piping sections:

Section Description

15060 Miscellaneous Piping and Pipe Accessories

15064 Stainless Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

15065 Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories

Contractor shall furnish all necessary jointing materials, coatings, and accessories that are

specified herein.

Pipe supports and anchors shall be furnished by Contractor, and are covered in the Pipe Supports

section. Pipe trenching and backfilling are covered in the Trenching and Backfilling section.

1-2. GENERAL.

1-2.01. Coordination. Materials installed under this section shall be installed in full conformity

with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the


1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings shall be

submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Items requiring submittals shall include,

but not be limited to, the following:

Watertight/dusttight pipe sleeves.

Materials as specified herein.

1-3.02. Welder Certification. Prior to the start of the work, Contractor shall submit a list of the

welders he proposes using and the type of welding for which each has been qualified. Copy of

certification and identification stamp shall be submitted for each welder. Qualification tests may

be waived if evidence of prior qualification is deemed suitable by Engineer.

1-3.03. Spool Drawings. Not Used.




(Group 4A2)

1-4.01. Welding and Brazing Qualifications. All welding and brazing procedures and operators

shall be qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable

provisions of Section IX of the ASME Code. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be

in written form and subject to Engineer's review. Accurate records of operator and procedure

qualifications shall be maintained by Contractor and made available to Engineer upon request.

1-4.02. Tolerances. These tolerances apply to in-line items and connections for other lines.

The general dimension, such as face-to-face, face or end-to-end, face- or end-to center, and

center-to-center shall be 1/8 inch [3 mm].

The inclination of flange face from true in any direction shall not exceed 3/64 inch per foot

[4 mm per meter].

Rotation of flange bolt holes shall not exceed 1/16 inch [1.5 mm].



section. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type,

and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending.

Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F [4°C and 32°C].

1-5.01. Coated Pipe. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to the

protective coating and shall include the use of end hooks, padded calipers, and nylon or similar

fabric slings with spreader bars. Bare cables, chains, or metal bars shall not be used. Coated

pipe shall be stored off the ground on wide, padded skids. Plastic-coated pipe shall be covered

or otherwise protected from exposure to sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Pipe, tubing, and fittings covered herein shall be installed in the

services indicated in the various pipe sections.

2-2. MATERIALS.

Threaded Fittings

Anti-Seize Thread Lubricant

Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane "Thred Gard

Nickel", Never-Seez "Pure Nickel Special", or

Permatex "Nickel Anti-Seize".

Teflon Thread Sealer Paste type; Hercules "Real-tuff", John Crane

"JC-30", or Permatex "Thread Sealant with

Teflon".



(Group 4A2)

Teflon Thread Tape Hercules "Tape Dope" or John Crane

"Thread-Tape".

Solvent Welded Fittings

Solvent cement for PVC

Systems

ASTM D2564.

Solvent cement for CPVC

Systems

ASTM F493.

Sodium Hypochlorite,

Sodium Hydroxide, and

Sodium Bisulfite Service

IPS Corporation "Weld-On 724"

Primer for PVC Systems ASTM F656.

Solder or Brazed Fittings

Solder Solid wire, ASTM B32, ANSI/NSF 61

certified, Alloy Grade Sb5, (95-5).

Soldering Flux Paste type, ASTM B813.

Brazing Filler Metal AWS A5.8, BCuP-5; Engelhard "Silvaloy

15", Goldsmith "GB-15", or Handy &

Harman "Sil-Fos".

Brazing Flux Paste type, Fed Spec O-F-499, Type B.

Insulating Fittings

Threaded Dielectric steel pipe nipple, ASTM A53,

Schedule 40, polypropylene lined, zinc plated;

Perfection Corp. "Clearflow Fittings".

Flanged Epco "Dielectric Flange Unions" or Central

Plastics "Insulating Flange Unions".

Pipe Insulation See Mechanical Insulation section.

Watertight/Dusttight Pipe Sleeves O-Z Electrical Manufacturing "Thruwall" and

"Floor Seals", or Thunderline "Link-Seals";

with modular rubber sealing elements,

nonmetallic pressure plates, and 316 stainless

steel bolts and nuts.

Pipe Sleeve Sealant Polysulfide or urethane, as specified in the

Caulking section or as indicated on the

drawings.

Protective Coatings

Tape Wrap ANSI/AWWA C209, except single ply tape

thickness shall not be less than 30 mils

[760 µm]; Protecto Wrap "200" or Tapecoat

"CT".



(Group 4A2)

Primer As recommended by the tape manufacturer.

Coal Tar Epoxy High-build coal tar epoxy; Ameron

"Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline

"Bitumastic 300 M", Tnemec "46H-413

Hi-Build Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams

"Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSPECTION. All piping components shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness

before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not

be used unless it is repaired and recleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such

material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by

Owner or his representative before its use.

3-2. PREPARATION.

3-2.01. Field Measurement. Pipe shall be cut to measurements taken at the site, not from the

drawings. All necessary provisions shall be made in laying out piping to allow for expansion

and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of

contact with building construction to avoid transmission of noise resulting from expansion.

3-3. INSTALLATION.

3-3.01. General. All instruments and specialty items shall be installed according to the

manufacturer’s instructions and with sufficient clearance and access for ease of operation and

maintenance.

Flat faced wrenches and vises shall be used for copper tubing systems. Pipe wrenches and vises

with toothed jaws will damage copper materials and shall not be used. Bends in soft temper

tubing shall be shaped with bending tools.

3-3.02. Pipe Sleeves. Piping passing through concrete or masonry shall be installed through

sleeves that have been installed before the concrete is placed or when masonry is laid. Unless

otherwise indicated on the drawings, in all other locations where pipes pass through floors, pipe

sleeves shall project not less than 1 inch [25 mm] nor more than 2 inches [50 mm] above the

floor surface, with the projections uniform within each area. In the case of insulated pipes, the

insulation shall extend through pipe sleeves. Where the drawings indicate future installation of

pipe, sleeves fitted with suitable plastic caps or plugs shall be provided.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all pipes passing through walls or slabs which have

one side in contact with earth or exposed to the weather shall be sealed watertight with special

rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies, or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing

elements.



(Group 4A2)

Piping shall be made dusttight and gastight with sleeves sealed with modular rubber sealing

elements, when pasing through pump station wetwell walls.

3-3.03. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the

indicated requirements.

3-3.03.01. Threaded. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT, and shall be

fully and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall

remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed after threading and before

assembly to remove all burrs. Unless otherwise indicated, threaded joints shall be made up with

teflon thread tape, thread sealer, or a suitable joint compound.

Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with teflon thread tape applied to all male

threads. Threaded joints in stainless steel piping shall be made up with teflon thread sealer and

teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. Threaded joints in steel piping for chlorine service

shall be made up with teflon thread tape or litharge and glycerine paste applied to all male

threads.

3-3.03.02. Compression. Ends of tubing shall be cut square and all burrs shall be removed. The

tubing end shall be fully inserted into the compression fitting and the nut shall be tightened not

less than 1-1/4 turns and not more than 1-1/2 turns past fingertight, or as recommended by the

fitting manufacturer, to produce a leaktight, torque-free connection.

3-3.03.03. Flared. Ends of annealed copper tubing shall be cut square, and all burrs shall be

removed prior to flaring. Ends shall be uniformly flared without scratches or grooves. Fittings

shall be tightened as needed to produce leaktight connections.

3-3.03.04. Soldered and Brazed. Where solder fittings are specified for lines smaller than

2 inches [50 mm], joints may be soldered or brazed at the option of Contractor. Joints in 2 inch

[50 mm] and larger copper tubing shall be brazed. Brazing alloy shall contain no tin. Joints in

copper chlorine tubing and refrigerant piping shall be brazed; solder will not be acceptable.

Surfaces to be joined shall be thoroughly cleaned with flint paper and coated with a thin film of

flux. At each joint, tubing shall enter to the full depth of the fitting socket.

Care shall be taken to avoid overheating the metal or flux. Each joint shall be uniformly heated

to the extent that filler metal will melt on contact. While the joint is still hot, surplus filler metal

and flux shall be removed with a rag or brush.

3-3.03.05. Solvent Welded. Solvent welded connections shall only be used for PVC or CPVC

pipe. All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing procedures shall comply with the pipe

manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to

the dimensions recommended by the manufacturer. Newly assembled joints shall be suitably

blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the setting time recommended by the

manufacturer. Pressure testing of solvent welded piping systems shall not be performed until the

applicable curing time, as set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D2855, has elapsed. Solvent

welding shall be performed by bonding operators who have met the requirements of ASME

B31.3 and A328.



(Group 4A2)

3-3.03.06. Epoxy and Adhesive Bonded. Not Used.

3-3.03.07. Heat Fusion Bonded. Not Used.

3-3.03.08. Flanged. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket

and effect a seal, but shall not be torqued less than the minimum value required by the gasket

manufacturer. Flange bolts shall not be so tight as to fracture or distort the flanges. A plain

washer shall be installed under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges.

Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts

during assembly.

Flange bolt holes shall be oriented as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the spool drawings:

Vertical flange face: Bolt holes to straddle the vertical centerlines.

Horizontal flange face: Bolt holes to straddle plant north-south centerlines.

Pipe sealants, thread compounds, or other coatings shall not be applied to flange gaskets unless

recommended by the gasket manufacturer for the specified service and approved by Engineer.

Welds at orifice flanges shall have internal surfaces ground smooth to the pipe wall.

Slip-on flanges shall be welded inside and outside. There shall be a distance of approximately

1/16 to 1/8 inch [1.5 to 3 mm] between the edge of the fillet weld and the face of the flange. The

seal weld shall be applied so that the flange face shall be free of weld spatter and does not

require refacing.

Flat-faced flanges shall be used when mating to Class 125 flanges. Full-face gaskets shall be

used with flat-faced flanges and ring gaskets shall be used with raised faced flanges.

Weld neck flanges shall be used with butt-weld fittings. The bore of weld neck flanges shall

match the pipe wall thickness.

Insulating joints connecting submerged (buried) piping to exposed piping shall be installed above

the maximum water surface elevation and before the first pipe support not having coated anchor

bolts or adhesive-bonded concrete anchors. All submerged (buried) metallic piping shall be

isolated from the concrete reinforcement. Insulating flanges shall be tested for electrical

isolation after installation and bolt-up but prior to introduction of conducting fluid.

3-3.03.09. Welded. Welding shall conform to the specifications and recommendations

contained in the "Code for Pressure Piping", ANSI B31.1.

Weld cross-sections shall be equal to or greater than the pipe wall thickness. Welds shall be

smooth and continuous and shall have interior projections no greater than 1/16 inch [1.5 mm].

Backing strips or rings shall not be used except with specific prior review by Engineer as to use,

material, and design. Root gap inserts that are completely melted and consumed in the weld

bead are acceptable only when reviewed in advance by Engineer.



(Group 4A2)

Stainless steel welding shall be inert gas tungsten arc (TIG) or the direct current, straight

polarity, inert gas metal arc process (MIG).

Carbon steel welding shall be made by the shielded metal arc process.

3-3.03.10. Grooved Couplings. Not Used.

3-3.03.11. Push-on. Gasket installation and other jointing procedures shall be in accordance with

the recommendations of the manufacturer. Each spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate

assembly. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with a heavy vegetable soap solution

immediately before the joint is completed. Lubricant shall be suitable for use in potable water,

shall be stored in closed containers, and shall be kept clean.

3-3.03.12. Rubber-Gasketed. Not Used.

3-3.03.13. Other Pipe Joints. Not Used.

3-3.04. Pipe. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the drawings, or, in the absence

of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to Engineer.

Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner which would induce

stresses in the pipe, valves, or connecting equipment.

Piping shall be supported in conformance with the Pipe Supports section.

Piping shall be connected to equipment by flanges or unions as specified in the various piping

sections. Piping connecting to equipment shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the

equipment.

Water, gas, and air supply piping shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union at each fixture

or unit of equipment, whether or not indicated on the drawings, to permit isolation and

disconnection of each item without disturbing the remainder of the system. Air supply piping

shall be provided with sectionalizing valves and valved air inlet connections as needed for

isolation of portions of the system for periodic testing. Gas supply lines to buildings shall be

provided with a shutoff valve and union located above grade immediately outside the building.

A capped drip leg shall be provided at the bottom of the vertical riser of gas supply piping

adjacent to gas-fired appliances.

A union shall be provided within 2 feet [600 mm] of each threaded-end valve unless there are

other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in

piping adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and where

required by the drawings or the specifications.

Taps for pressure gauge connections on the suction and discharge of pumping units shall be

provided with a nipple and a ball type shutoff valve.

Drilling and tapping of pipe walls for installation of pressure gauges or switches will not be

permitted.



(Group 4A2)

In all piping, insulating fittings shall be provided to prevent contact of dissimilar metals,

including but not limited to, contact of copper, brass, or bronze pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or

appurtenances, or stainless steel pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances with iron or steel

pipe, fittings, valves, or appurtenances. Insulating fittings shall also be provided to prevent

contact of copper, brass, or bronze pipe, tubing, fittings, valves or appurtenances with stainless

steel pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances.

Branch connections in horizontal runs of steam, air, and gas piping shall be made from the top of

the pipe.

Buried PVC piping shall be "snaked" in the trench and shall be kept as cool as possible during

installation. PVC pipe shall be kept shaded and shall be covered with backfill immediately after

installation.

Piping adjacent to flow sensors shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the

manufacturer of the flow sensor and commonly accepted design practices of the appropriate

straight pipe runs both upstream and downstream.

Drains required for operation are shown on the drawings. However, vents at all high points and

drains at all low points in the piping that are required for complete draining for pressure test may

not be shown on these drawings. Contractor shall add such items as found to be necessary

during detail piping design and/or piping installation.

Locating wire, for electronically locating pipe after it is buried, shall be attached along the length

of and installed with the pipe. This is applicable to all sizes and types of pressure mains. The

tracing wire is to be attached to the pipe with nylon wire tires, as shown on the Drawings. The

wire itself shall be 10-guage single strand solid core copper wire with non-mettalic insulation.

The insulation shall shall be color coded for the type of pipe being installed. Continuous

continuity must be maintained in the wire along the entire length of the pipe run. Permanent

splices must be made in the length of the wire using wire connectors approved for underground

applications as listed in the uniform electric code handbook. The wire shall extend to the surface

and be connected to a test station box at valve locations in the manor, as shown on the Drawings.

3-3.05 Valves. Isolation valves provided with equipment and instruments shall be located in a

manner which will allow ease of access and removal of the items to be isolated. Prior to

soldering or brazing valves, teflon and elastomer seats and seals shall be removed to prevent

damage.

3-3.06. Directional Drilling. Polyethylene pipe shall be installed by horizontal directional

drilling in accordance with Orange County Standard Specification Section 3115: Directional

Drilling. In case of conflict between section 3115 and this specification, the more stringent

requirement shall govern.

3-4. PIPING ASSEMBLY.



(Group 4A2)

3-4.01. General. Contractor shall only use labor that has been qualified by training and

experience to capably perform the specified activities required to accomplish the work in a

satisfactory manner

If there is a conflict between the mechanical drawings and piping and instrumentation drawings

(P&IDs), the P&ID shall take precedence. Any deviations from the Specifications or piping

locations shown on the drawings require prior review and approval by Engineer.

3-4.02. Buttwelded Piping. Not Used.

3-5. PROTECTIVE COATING. Standard weight steel pipe in buried locations will have

exterior surfaces protected with a shop applied plastic coating.

Where specified in the Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories section, extra strong

steel pipe in buried locations will have exterior surfaces protected with a shop applied plastic

coating or a shop applied tape wrap. Where not specified to be shop coated or wrapped in the

Miscellaneous Steel Pipe, Tubing and Accessories section, a tape wrap shall be field applied.

The exterior surfaces of all fittings, couplings, specials, and other portions of buried piping not

protected with plastic coating shall be tape-wrapped in the field.

All surfaces to be tape-wrapped shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in accordance with the

tape manufacturer's recommendations immediately before wrapping. The tape shall be applied

by two-ply (half-lap) wrapping or as needed to provide a total installed tape thickness of at least

60 mils [1.5 mm]. Joints in plastic-coated pipe shall be cleaned, primed, and tape-wrapped after

installation.

Joints in galvanized steel piping in underground locations shall be field painted with two coats of

coal tar epoxy coating.

3-5.01. Inspection. All shop-applied plastic coatings and tape wrap on pipe or fittings shall be

inspected for holidays and other defects after receipt of the pipe or fitting on the job and

immediately before installation. All field-applied tape wrap on pipe, joints, fittings, and valves

shall be inspected for holidays and other defects following completion of wrapping. Inspection

of plastic coatings after installation of the pipe or fitting in the trench shall be made where, in the

opinion of Engineer, the coating may have been damaged during installation. Holidays and

defects disclosed by inspection shall be repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the

coating or tape wrap manufacturer, as applicable.

The inspection shall be made using an electrical holiday detector. The detector and inspection

procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.4 of ANSI/AWWA C209.

3-6. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING. All specified tests shall be made by and at the

expense of Contractor in the presence, and to the satisfaction of Engineer. Each piping system

shall be tested for at least 1 hour with no loss of pressure. The Contractor shall coordinate this

section with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. Piping shall be tested at the

indicated pressures:



(Group 4A2)

Service Test Pressure Test Medium

Water supply 1-1/2 times working pressure but

not less than 120 psi [828 kPa]

Water

Other piping 1-1/2 times working pressure but

not less than 50 psi [345 kPa]

Suitable fluid

Compressed air or pressurized gas shall not be used for testing plastic piping unless specifically

recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

Leakage may be determined by loss-of-pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other

positive and accurate method acceptable to Engineer. All fixtures, devices, or accessories which

are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test

pressure shall be disconnected and the ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as needed

during the testing.

Unless otherwise required by the applicable codes, drainage and venting systems shall be water

or air tested. For water testing, the drainage and venting system shall be filled with water to the

level of the highest vent stack. For air testing, the system shall be charged with air to a minimum

pressure of 5 psig [35 kPa]. Openings shall be plugged as necessary for either type of test. To

be considered free of leaks, the system shall hold the water or air for 30 minutes without any

drop in the water level or air pressure.

All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances and devices, shall be

furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of Contractor and at the time directed

by Engineer.

All joints in piping shall be tight and free of leaks. All joints which are found to leak, by

observation or during any specified test, shall be repaired, and the tests repeated.

3-7. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free

of blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when installed. Before being

placed in service, the interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of

Engineer.

Metal anhydrous ammonia, chlorine and sulfur dioxide piping shall be cleaned as recommended

by the gas chemical feed system supplier. All surfaces which may come into contact with gas

chemical shall be thoroughly dry and free of oil or grease before being placed in service. The

recommended cleaning procedures shall be submitted for review in accordance with the

Submittals section.

Tin-lined copper tubing for distribution of distilled water shall be flushed and cleaned with

distilled water in accordance with the tubing manufacturer's recommendations.

3-8. ACCEPTANCE. Owner reserves the right to have any section of the piping system which

he suspects may be faulty cut out of the system by Contractor for inspection and testing. Should

the joint prove to be sound, Owner will reimburse Contractor on a time-and-material basis as



(Group 4A2)

specified in the Contract. Should the joint prove to be faulty, the destructive test will continue

joint by joint in all directions until sound joints are found. Costs for replacement of faulty work

and/or materials shall be the responsibility of Contractor.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers general mechanical building system requirements as

referenced from other sections and furnishing and installation of:

Mechanical equipment identification

Protective coatings

for the plumbing; heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.

1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated,



manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer.

1-2.01. Coordination. Where two or more units of the same class of materials are required, they

shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system

need not be the products of one manufacturer.


materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in



this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable local codes and ordinances,

laws, and regulations which pertain to such work. In case of a conflict between these

specifications and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern.

1-2.04. Metal Thickness. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum

requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete information, detailed specifications, and data covering

materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the materials furnished, shall be

submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

Number Plates

Product data on number plates.

A listing of equipment to receive number plates shall be submitted.

Protective Coatings




(Group 4A2)

Coating type.

Color.

Chemical resistance data.

Temperature range data.

Surface preparation.

Application data.

Film thickness per coat.

Drying and curing time information.

Equipment Motors

Name of Manufacturer.

Type and Model.

Horsepower (kW) rating and service factor.

Temperature rise and insulation rating.


Type of bearings and method of lubrication.

Net weight.

Overall dimensions.

Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 loads.

Full load current and power factor.



1-4.01. Welding Qualifications. All welding procedures and welding operators shall be

qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable provisions of

AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be in

written form and subject to Engineer's review. Accurate records of operator and procedure


1-4.02. Manufacturer's Experience. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in

this section, the manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified

which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years.

1-5. EXTRA MATERIALS. The following extra materials shall be furnished for the listed

equipment:

Touchup protective coating material

Extra materials shall be packaged in accordance with the Shipping section, with labels indicating

the contents of each package. Each label shall indicate manufacturer's name, equipment name,

equipment designation, part nomenclature, part number, address of nearest distributor, and

current list price. Extra materials shall be delivered to Owner as directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. All equipment shall be designed and selected to meet the



(Group 4A2)

specified conditions. Where equipment is provided with protective coatings, unit capacities shall

be corrected to account for any efficiency losses from the selected protective coating.

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.


layout area indicated on the drawings is based on typical values of the first manufacturer listed.

Contractor shall review the contract drawings, the manufacturer’s layout drawings, and

installation requirements and shall make any modifications required for proper installation

subject to acceptance by Engineer.

2-2.02. Elevation. Equipment shall be designed to operate at the elevation as indicated on the

drawings.

2-2.03. Drive Units. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hour continuous service.

2-2.03.01. V-Belt Drives. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable tension

adjustment. V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.5 at maximum speed based on

the nameplate horsepower [kW] of the drive motor unless otherwise indicated in the specific

equipment paragraph.

2-2.03.02. Electric Motors. Motor horsepowers scheduled on the drawings are minimum motor

horsepowers. Larger motors shall be provided if required to meet the specified capacities for the

equipment furnished. Motors furnished with equipment shall meet the following requirements.

a. All motors shall meet the minimum efficiency standards required by the

Energy Policy Act (EPACT) of 1992.

b. Designed and applied in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, AFBMA, and

NEC for the duty service imposed by the driven equipment, such as frequent

starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or

service environment.

c. Rated for continuous duty at 40°C ambient.

d. Motors used in applications which exceed the usual service conditions as

defined by NEMA, such as higher than 40°C ambient, altitude exceeding

3,300 feet [1005 m], explosive or corrosive environments, departure from

rated voltage and frequency, poor ventilation, frequent starting, or adjustable

frequency drive applications, shall be properly selected with respect to their

service conditions and shall not exceed specified temperature rise limits in

accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for insulation class, service factor, and

motor enclosure type.

e. To ensure long life, motors shall have nameplate horsepower [kW] equal or

greater than the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment and shall

carry a service factor rating as follows:

Motor Size Enclosure Service Factor



(Group 4A2)

Fractional hp [kW] Open 1.15*

Other Than Open 1.15*

Integral hp [kW] Open 1.15*

Other Than Open 1.15*

For items marked with “*”: All motors shall have a non-inverter duty service

factor of 1.15. Motors for inverter duty shall be rated for inverter duty, with a

service factor of 1.0.

f. Designed for full voltage starting.

g. Designed to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of

5 percent voltage distortion according to IEEE 519.

h. Totally enclosed motors shall have a continuous moisture drain that also

excludes insects.

i. Bearings shall be either oil or grease lubricated.

j. Motor nameplates shall indicate as a minimum the manufacturer name and

model number, motor horsepower, voltage, phase, frequency, speed, full load

current, locked rotor current, frame size, service factor, power factor, and

efficiency.

k. Dripproof motors, or totally enclosed motors at Contractor's option, shall be

furnished on equipment in indoor, above-grade, clean, and dry locations.

l. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished on:

(1) Outdoor equipment.

(2) Equipment for installation below grade.

(3) Equipment operating in chemical feed and chemical handling

locations.

(4) Equipment operating in wet or dust-laden locations.

m. Explosionproof motors shall be furnished as specified by applicable codes or

as specified in other sections.

n. A manufacturer's standard motor may be supplied on packaged equipment

and fans in which case a redesign of the unit would be required to furnish

motors of other than the manufacturer's standard design. However, in all

cases, the motor types indicated are preferred and shall be furnished if offered

by the manufacturer as a standard option.

2-3. MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION.

2-3.01. Welding. All welds shall be continuous (seal type) on submerged or partially submerged

components.

2-3.02. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, expansion anchors, nuts, and

washers shall be as indicated in the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section unless



(Group 4A2)

otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2-3.03. Edge Grinding. Sharp corners of cut or sheared edges which will be submerged in

operation shall be dulled by at least one pass of a power grinder to improve paint adherence.

2-3.04. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors, shall be shop cleaned by

sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer’s

recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is

applied.

2-4. MATERIALS.

2-4.01. Mechanical Identification. Mechanical equipment shall be identified with engraved or

stamped equipment plates securely affixed to the equipment in an accessible and visible location.

Equipment plates shall be in addition to the number plates specified in the following paragraph.

Equipment plates shall indicate the manufacturer's name, address, product name, catalog number,

serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and

any other pertinent design data. Equipment plates listing the distributing agent only will not be

acceptable.

2-4.01.01. Number Plates. All equipment, panels, and control equipment denoted on the

drawings by a symbol and an identifying number shall be provided with an identifying number

plate. The identifying text shall be identical to the symbols indicated herein or on the drawings

and shall be located in a conspicuous place. Number plate symbols and numbers shall be

capitalized block letters with a minimum height as indicated below.

Item Identified Letter Height, inches [mm]

Major Equipment 3/4 [19]

Minor Equipment 1/2 [13]

Control Panels 3/16 [5]

Number plate height shall be twice the letter height. Number plate length shall be as needed,

with suitable margins all around. Lettering shall be placed in one row where practicable;

however, where necessary due to excessive length, lettering shall be placed on more than one

row and centered.

Number plates shall be in the form of nameplates unless equipment is too small to accommodate

the specified nameplate, then tags shall be used. Nameplates and tags shall be metal or plastic.

Plastic nameplates and tags shall be laminated phenolic not less than 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick and

shall be black with a white core. Metal nameplates and tags shall be at least 12 gage [2.66 mm]

thickness with engraved or imprinted symbols. Tags shall have smooth edges and shall be a

minimum diameter of 1-1/2 inches [38 mm]. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable.

Tags shall be installed with corrosion-resistant chains or straps. Nameplates shall be installed

with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners.

Number plates for control equipment such as but not limited to thermostats, control stations, and

emergency ventilation shutoff switches shall in addition to the specific device identification list



(Group 4A2)

the controlled equipment in parenthesis below the device number.

2-4.01.02. Piping. Piping identification shall be as specified in the Protective Coatings section.

The lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices shall

be in accordance with ASME A13.1.

2-4.01.03. Valves. Valves that have been assigned an identification number shall be identified

with tags. Valve tags shall comply with the requirements listed in the Number Plates paragraph.

2-4.01.04. Ductwork. Ductwork shall be identified with nameplates as specified herein, or

stenciled painting as specified in the Protective Coatings section. Ductwork shall be identified

with the equipment number and area served, direction of airflow, and service (supply, return,

mixed, exhaust, and outside air). The identification shall be located at equipment, at each side of

structure or enclosure penetrations, and at each obstruction.

2-4.02. Seismic Restraints. Not used.

2-4.03. Protective Coatings. Where indicated on the drawings, sheet metal ductwork, dampers,

registers, grilles, and equipment shall be given a protective coating suitable for the corrosive

atmosphere indicated. Sheet metal ductwork, dampers, registers, grilles, and equipment

construction shall be suitable to allow proper application of the protective coating system in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper

operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data,

instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the

Engineer.

The installation of identifying devices shall be coordinated with the application of covering

materials and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. All surfaces to receive adhesive

number plates shall be cleaned before installation of the identification device.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15060

MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND PIPE ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous piping and pipe accessories.

Miscellaneous piping shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, and other

accessories specified herein.

1-2. SUBMITTALS.

1-2.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data and catalog cuts or drawings shall be

submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping,

fittings, gaskets, sleeves, and accessories, and shall include the following data:

Name of Manufacturer

Type and model

Construction materials, thickness, and finishes

Pressure and temperature ratings

Contractor shall obtain and submit a written statement from the gasket material manufacturer

certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified herein and are

recommended for the specified field test pressures and service conditions.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Miscellaneous piping materials shall be as specified herein.

2-1.01. Material Classification BR-1.

BR-1 – Regular Weight

Brass Pipe

Gauge piping for hot/cold

water.

Pipe

Fittings

ASTM B43, red brass, seamless,

regular weight.

ANSI/ASME B16.15, Class 125.

2-1.02. Material Classification BR-2. Not used.

2-1.03. Material Classification HS-1. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

2-1.04. Material Classification HS-2. Not used.

2-1.05. Material Classification TG-1. Not used.

2-1.06. Material Classification CRP-1. Not used.

2-1.07. Accessories. Accessories for the miscellaneous piping systems shall be as indicated.

Unions for brass pipe Fed Spec A-A-59617, Class 125.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance

with the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15061

DUCTILE IRON PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of ductile iron pipe. Ductile

iron pipe shall be furnished complete with all fittings, jointing materials, pipe hangers and

supports, anchors, blocking, encasement, and appurtenances. Piping shall be furnished by

Contractor.

Piping furnished hereunder shall be complete with all joint gaskets, bolts, and nuts required for

installation of any valves and equipment furnished by others for installation under this contract.

Pipe hangers and supports, pressure and leakage testing, cleaning, disinfection, and cathodic

protection are covered in other sections. Cast iron soil pipe is covered in the Miscellaneous

Piping section. Pipe trenching, embedment, and backfill are covered in the Trenching and

Backfilling section.

1-1.01. Main Pipe Supplier. All ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials shall be fabricated, lined,

coated, and furnished under the direction and management of one pipe supplier, (the Main Pipe

Supplier). The Contractor shall designate the Main Pipe Supplier and notify them in writing of

their responsibilities, which shall include, at a minimum; ensure and certify that all pipe, fittings,

specials, and other materials specified herein, are being manufactured in full accordance with the

contract documents; prepare and submit all submittal information and shop drawings; and make

any corrections that may be required to submittal information and shop drawings.

1-1.02. Main Pipe Supplier’s Experience and Field Services. The Main Pipe Supplier’s

minimum required experience qualifications shall include manufacture of a pipeline at least

1 mile [1.6 km] in length, of a diameter equal to or larger than the pipe to be provided, with

joints, lining, and coating suitable for the same or a higher pressure rating, which has performed

satisfactorily for the past 5 years.

All ductile iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Main Pipe Supplier

recommendations.

1-2. SUBMITTALS. Drawings, details, specifications, and installation schedules covering all

ductile iron pipe and accessories shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Certification by manufacturer for each item furnished in accordance with the

ANSI/AWWA Standards.

Restrained joints details.

Certification of pipe manufacturer’s field services, including a copy of the initial

services, and all subsequent inspection reports.



(Group 4A2)

Certification of gaskets, certifying that gasket material is suitable for services

intended.

Certification of joint lubricant.

Certification of proof-of-design tests for joints, including restrained joints.

Certification of pipe manufacturer of fabricator and certification of proof-of-design

tests for welded-on outlets.

Laying schedule complete with an explanation of all abbreviations used in the

schedule. For long, straight pipe runs, the laying schedule shall list the pipeline

station and centerline elevation at least every 100 feet.

Two samples of the polyethylene encasement, each sample clearly identified as

required by the Governing Standards and test results from an independent third

party laboratory of the requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.

The method that the Contractor proposes to use for measuring deflection of pipe

joints.

Submittal data shall clearly indicate the country of origin of pipe, fittings, flanges, restraining

devices, and accessories.

Contractor shall submit a written statement from the gasket material manufacturer certifying that

the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified herein and are recommended for the

specified field test pressures and service conditions.

1-2.01. Emergency Repair Manual. Not used.

1-3. SHIPPING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE. Shipping shall be in accordance with the


section, and as specified herein.

Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be handled in a manner that will ensure installation in sound,

undamaged condition. Equipment, tools, and methods used in handling and installing pipe and

fittings shall not damage the pipe and fittings. Hooks inserted in ends of pipe shall have broad,

well-padded contact surfaces. Unpadded hooks, wire brushes or other abrasive tools shall not be

permitted to come into contact with polyethylene lining if such lining is specified.

Contractor-furnished pipe and fittings in which the lining has been damaged shall be replaced by

and at the expense of Contractor. With the concurrence of Engineer, small and readily accessible

damaged areas may be repaired.

If the lining of Owner-furnished pipe or fittings is damaged by Contractor during unloading or

handling, the damaged pipe or fittings shall be replaced by and at the expense of Contractor.

Where the damaged areas are small and readily accessible, Contractor may be permitted to repair

the lining.

Contractor shall repair any damage to pipe coatings before the pipe is installed.



(Group 4A2)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS.

Each length of pipe shall bear the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the location of the

manufacturing plant and the class or strength classification of the pipe. The markings shall be

plainly visible on the pipe barrel, Pipe, which is not clearly marked is subject to rejection. The

Contractor shall remove all rejected pipe from the project site within five normal working days.

2-1. PIPE CLASS. The class of ductile iron pipe shall be as indicated in the Ductile Iron Pipe

Schedule. The specified class includes service allowance and casting allowance.

Pipe wall thickness for grooved and threaded end pipe shall be increased if necessary to comply

with the following minimum thickness:

Pipe Size Minimum Class

inches Mm Threaded Ends (1) Grooved Ends

(2)

4-16 100-400 53 53

18 450 53 54

20 500 53 55

24 600 53 56

30-54 750-1400 53 --

60 & 64 1500-1600 350 --

(1) Complies with ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15 for minimum pipe wall

thickness for threaded flanges.

(2) Complies with ANSI/AWWA C606 for grooved and shouldered joint

ductile iron pipe.

2-2. MATERIALS.

Pipe Ductile iron, ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, Table 1 or Table

3.



(Group 4A2)

Gaskets – All Joint

Types

Synthetic rubber; natural rubber will not be acceptable.

Gaskets for potable water service shall be certified as

suitable at the pipe pressure and for chlorinated and

chloraminated potable water; a certificate of gasket

suitability shall be submitted. Gaskets shall be furnished by

the pipe manufacturer.

Gas and oil-resistant gaskets shall be made of Nitrile (NBR

[Acrylonitrile Butadiene]) rubber. The name of the

material shall be permanently marked or molded on the

gasket. Gaskets shall be certified as suitable where soils

may be contaminated with gas and oil products. A

certificate of gasket suitability shall be submitted.

Joint Lubricant Vegetable-based lubricant recommended by the pipe

manufacturer. Petroleum or animal-based lubricants will

not be acceptable. Lubricants that will be in contact with

treated or potable water shall be certified as being in


Fittings ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 (except shorter laying lengths

will be acceptable for U.S. Pipe), or ANSI/AWWA

C153/A21.53, minimum working pressure rating as

follows, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

Fitting Size

in. [mm] Material Type

Min. Working

Pressure Rating,

psi [kPa]

4 to 24 [100 to 600] DI Mechanical and

Push-on joints

350 [2,400]

4 to 24 [100 to 600] DI Flanged joints 250 [1,700]

30 to 48 [750 to 1,200] DI All joints 250 [1,700]

54 to 64 [1,350 to 1,600] DI All joints 150 [1,000]

All fittings shall be ductile iron and suitable for a factory test pressure of 100 psi

or 1.5 times rated working pressure, whichever is less, without leakage or damage.

Push-on Joints ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

Restrained Push-on Joints,

gaskets with stainless steel

gripping segments, (4 inch

through 12 inch) [100 mm

through 300 mm]

American “Fast Grip” or "Field Lok 350

Gasket" manufactured by U.S. Pipe and

furnished to licensed Tyton® joint

manufacturer.


locking wedge type, (4 inch


through 600 mm]

EBAA Iron "Megalug" Series 1700; U.S.

Pipe “TR Flex Gripper Ring”; Star Pipe

Products “StarGrip 3100”; or American

“Field Flex Ring”, without exception.



(Group 4A2)


positive locking segments

and/or rings, (4 inch through

64 inch) [100 mm through

1,600 mm]

American "Flex-Ring," or "Lok-Ring";

Clow "Super-Lock"; U.S. Pipe "TR Flex";

or Griffin "Snap-Lok."

Flanged Joints ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15.

Flanges

Class 250

(where identified)

Ductile iron, flat faced, with ANSI/ASME

B16.1, Class 250 diameter and drilling.

All Others Ductile iron, Class 125, ANSI/AWWA

C115/A21.15.

Flanges All flanges shall be suitable for test

pressure of 1.5 times rated pressure

without leakage or damage.

Bolts ASTM A307, chamfered or rounded ends

projecting 1/4 to 1/2 inch [6.3 to 12.7 mm]

beyond outer face of nut.

Nuts ASTM A307, hexagonal, ANSI/ASME

B18.2.2, heavy semifinished pattern.

Gaskets ASTM D1330, Grade I rubber, full face

type, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick. Gaskets shall

be furnished by the pipe manufacturer.

Gaskets for potable water service shall be

certified as suitable for chlorinated potable

water; a certificate of gasket suitability

shall be submitted.

Insulated Flanges

Flanges As specified herein, except bolt holes shall

be enlarged as needed to accept bolt

insulating sleeves.

Insulation Kits As manufactured by Central Plastics or

Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

Insulating Gaskets Type E, NEMA G-10 glass reinforced

epoxy, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, with Buna-N

sealing element for water and air service.

For wastewater service use Viton sealing

element. Gaskets shall be furnished by the

pipe manufacturer. Gaskets for potable

water service shall be certified as suitable

for chlorinated potable water; a certificate

of gasket suitability shall be submitted.



(Group 4A2)

Bolt Insulating Sleeves Mylar, 1/32 inch [0.79 mm] thick.

Insulating Washers Phenolic laminate, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick,

two for each flange bolt.

Backing Washers Steel, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, two for each

flange bolt.

Mechanical Joints ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

Restrained Mechanical Joints

(factory prepared spigot),

(4 inch through 48 inch)

[100 mm through 1,200 mm]

American "MJ coupled Joints", or Griffin

"Mech-Lok".

Restrained Mechanical Joints,

(field cut spigot), (4 inch


through 600 mm]

EBAA Iron "Megalug" Series 1100, or Star

Pipe Products “StarGrip Series 3000”

without exception.

Wall Pipes or Castings

Mechanical joint with water stop and

tapped holes; single casting or fabricated

ductile iron pipe; holes sized in accordance

with the details on the drawings and

provided with removable plugs.

Mechanical Joints with Tie

Rods

As indicated on the drawings.

Tie Rods ASTM A307.

Steel Pipe ASTM A53, Schedule 40 or 80 as


Washers ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, plain steel.

Threaded Connections ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT; with boss or

tapping saddle wherever wall thickness

minus the foundry tolerance at the tapped

connection is less than that required for 4-

thread engagement as set forth in Table

A.1, Appendix A, of ANSI/AWWA

C151/A21.51.

Mechanical Couplings

Couplings Dresser "Style 38"; Smith-Blair "r 411

Steel Coupling"; or Romac “Style 400” or

"Style 501"; without pipe stop.



(Group 4A2)

Gaskets Oil-resistant synthetic rubber. Gaskets

shall be furnished by the pipe

manufacturer. Gaskets for potable water

service shall be certified as suitable for

chlorinated potable water; a certificate of

gasket suitability shall be submitted.

Flanged Adapters

Restrained (4 inch through

12 inch) [100 mm through

300 mm]

EBAA Iron “Megaflange” Series 2100,

Ford Star Pipe Products Flange Adapters

Series 400.

Dismantling Joints

Restrained (3 inch and larger

[350 mm and larger] -

Dismantling Joint)

Romac "DJ400"; Dresser "Style 131

Dismantling Joint" or Viking Johnson. For

use in potable water systems, coating to be

in accordance with NSF-61. Bolts, nuts,

and tie rods shall be stainless steel ASTM

A304 of A316.

Unrestrained (14 inch and

larger) [350 mm and larger]

Smith-Blair "Type 913" or Romac "Style

FC400", 14 inches [350 mm] and larger.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, flanged coupling adapters shall be

restrained.

Tapping Sleeves Ductile iron, with steel straps and rubber

sealing gasket, 250 psi [1,700 kPa]

pressure rating.

Watertight/Dusttight Pipe Sleeves PSI "Thunderline Link-Seal", insulating

type with modular rubber sealing elements,

nonmetallic pressure plates, and 316

stainless steel bolts and nuts.

Shop Coating and Lining

Cement Mortar Lining with Seal

Coat

ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4.

Ceramic Epoxy Lining (exterior

piping)

Induron “Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy”.

Glass Lining Two-coat system applied over blast-

cleaned surface; ground and finish coats

separately fired; finished lining thickness

at least 8 mils [200 µm], Mohs’ Hardness 5

to 6 density [2,500 to 3,000 kg/m3] as

determined by ASTM D792; Fast

Fabricators, Inc. "MEH 32" or "SG-14".



(Group 4A2)

2-3. SHOP COATING AND LINING. The interior of all pipe and fittings, unless noted

otherwise, shall be cement mortar lined and seal coated. The interior of all air piping shall be

unlined and uncoated.

Lining for pipe and fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be as follows shall be as specified below:

For exterior DIP: Induron “Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy”

Glass-lined pipe buried or embedded in concrete shall be ductile iron with mechanical or push-on

joints; glass-lined pipe installed in interior locations may be flanged ductile iron with flanged

cast or ductile iron fittings.

2-3. SHOP COATING AND LINING. The interior of all pipe and fittings, unless noted

otherwise, shall be ceramic epoxy lined.

The exterior surfaces of all pipes and fittings which will be above grade and exposed to the

elements, shall be shop primed. Flange faces shall be coated with a suitable rust preventive

compound. Exterior surfaces of all other pipe and fittings shall be coated with asphaltic coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


immediately before installation; pipe ends shall be examined with particular care. All defective

pipe and fittings shall be removed from the site.

3-2. PREPARATION. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all

foreign matter prior to installation. Before jointing, all joint contact surfaces shall be wire

brushed if necessary, wiped clean, and kept clean until jointing is completed.

Precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe during installation.

Debris, tools, clothing, or other objects shall not be placed in or allowed to enter the pipe.

Universal Primer Manufacturer’s standard. If in contact with

treated or potable water, certify as being in


Asphaltic Coating Manufacturer’s standard.

Coal Tar Epoxy Manufacturer’s standard.

Liquid Epoxy ANSI/AWWA C210, non-coal tar

modified, or when in contact with treated

or potable water, certify as being in


Medium Consistency Coal Tar Carboline "Bitumastic 50" or Tnemec

"46-465 H.B. Tnemecol."



(Group 4A2)

3-3. CUTTING PIPE. Cutting shall be done in a neat manner, without damage to the pipe or the

lining. Cuts shall be smooth, straight, and at right angles to the pipe axis. After cutting, the ends

of the pipe shall be dressed with a file or a power grinder to remove all roughness and sharp

edges. The cut ends of push-on joint pipe shall be suitably beveled.

All field cutting of existing gray cast iron pipe shall be done with mechanical pipe cutters, except

where the use of mechanical cutters would be difficult or impracticable.

Contractor shall use factory prepared pipe ends unless a field cut is required for connections.

Ends of ductile iron pipe shall be cut with a portable guillotine saw, abrasive wheel, saw, milling

cutter, or oxyacetylene torch. The use of hydraulic squeeze type cutters will not be acceptable.

Field-cut holes for saddles shall be cut with mechanical cutters; oxyacetylene cutting will not be

acceptable.

3-4. ALIGNMENT. Piping shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings.

Pipelines or runs intended to be straight shall be laid straight. Deflections from a straight line or

grade shall not exceed the values stipulated in Table 3 or Table 4 of AWWA C600, unless

specially designed bells and spigots are provided.

Either shorter pipe sections or fittings shall be installed where needed to conform to the

alignment or grade indicated on the drawings.

3-5. LAYING PIPE. Buried pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by placing the

specified pipe embedment material installed as specified in the Trenching and Backfilling

section. Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid under

unsuitable weather or trench conditions.

Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a watertight plug,

which will prevent trench water from entering the pipe.

Pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing the direction of laying, except where reverse laying is

specifically acceptable by Engineer.

3-6. FIELD JOINTS. Joints in buried and tunnel locations shall be mechanical or push-on type

unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or where required to connect to existing piping or to

valves. Bells on wall castings and wall sleeves shall be mechanical joint type, with tapped holes

for tie rods or stud bolts. All other joints shall be flanged unless otherwise indicated on the

drawings.

Certification of joint design shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11,

Section 4.5, Performance Requirements, as modified herein. The joint test pressure shall be not

less than 2 times the working pressure or 1-1/2 times the test pressure of the pipeline, whichever

is higher. The same certification and testing shall also be provided for restrained joints. For

restrained joints, the piping shall not be blocked to prevent separation and the joint shall not leak

or show evidence of failure. It is not necessary that such tests be made on pipe manufactured

specifically for this project. Certified reports covering tests made on other pipe of the same size



(Group 4A2)

and design as specified herein and manufactured from materials of equivalent type and quality

may be accepted as adequate proof of design.

Restrained joints shall be extended after they are assembled to minimize further take-up.

Field closure pieces shall be located away from the bends beyond the length over which joints

are to be restrained.

3-7. MECHANICAL JOINTS. Mechanical joints shall be carefully assembled in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. If effective sealing is not obtained, the joint shall be

disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to the

torque values listed in Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Over tightening of bolts to

compensate for poor installation practice will not be acceptable.

The holes in mechanical joints with tie rods shall be carefully aligned to permit installation of the

tie rods. In flange and mechanical joint pieces, holes in the mechanical joint bells and the

flanges shall straddle the top (or side for vertical piping) centerline. The top (or side) centerline

shall be marked on each flange and mechanical joint piece at the foundry.

3-8. PUSH-ON JOINTS. The pipe manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for proper

jointing procedures shall be followed. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with a soap solution

provided by the pipe manufacturer immediately before the joint is completed. Lubricant shall be

suitable for use in potable water, shall be stored in closed containers, and shall be kept clean.

Each spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly.

Pipe ends for restrained joint pipe shall be prepared in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s

recommendations.

3-9. FLANGED JOINTS. Pipe shall extend completely through screwed-on flanges. The pipe

end and flange face shall be finish machined in a single operation. Flange faces shall be flat and

perpendicular to the pipe centerline.

When bolting flanged joints, care shall be taken to avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe

or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket compression or would cause unnecessary stress in

the flanges. One flange shall be free to move in any direction while the flange bolts are being

tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and at a uniform rate, to ensure uniform

compression of the gasket.

Special care shall be taken when connecting piping to any pumping equipment to ensure that

piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges. All connecting piping shall be

permanently supported to obtain accurate matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the

entire surface of flanges before any bolts are installed in the flanges. Pump connection piping

shall be free to move parallel to its longitudinal centerline while the bolts are being tightened.

Each pump shall be leveled, aligned, and wedged into position which will fit the connecting

piping, but shall not be grouted until the initial fitting and alignment of the pipe, so that the pump

may be shifted on its foundation if necessary to properly install the connecting piping. Each

pump shall, however, be grouted before final bolting of the connecting piping. After final

alignment and bolting, the pump connections shall be tested for applied piping stresses by



(Group 4A2)

loosening the flange bolts which, if the piping is properly installed, should result in no movement

of the piping relative to the pump or opening of the pump connection joints. If any movement is

observed, the piping shall be loosened and re-aligned as needed and then the flanges bolted back

together. The flange bolts shall then be loosened and the process repeated until no movement is

observed.

3-10. FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS. Flanged coupling adapters shall be installed in

strict accordance with the coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. After the pipe is in place

and bolted tight, the proper locations of holes for the anchor studs shall be determined and the

pipe shall be field-drilled. Holes for anchor studs shall be drilled completely through the pipe

wall. Hole diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch [3 mm] larger than the diameter of the stud

projection. Unless indicated on the drawings, all flange coupling adapters shall be restrained.

The inner surfaces of couplings shall be prepared for coating in accordance with instructions of

the coating manufacturer and shall then be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance with

ANSI/AWWA C210. The remaining surfaces, except flange mating surfaces, shall be cleaned

and shop primed with universal primer.

3-11. DISMANTLING JOINTS. Dismantling joints shall be provided for restrained coupling

14 inch and larger and where indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Dismantling

joints shall comply with AWWA C219 and shall be restrained flange by flange couplings

manufactured as a single unit. Dismantling joints shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations.

3-12. MECHANICAL COUPLINGS. Mechanical couplings shall be carefully installed in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. A space of at least 1/4 inch [6 mm], but

not more than 1 inch [25 mm], shall be left between the pipe ends. Pipe and coupling surfaces in

contact with gaskets shall be clean and free from dirt and other foreign matter during assembly.

All assembly bolts shall be uniformly tightened so that the coupling is free from leaks, and all

parts of the coupling are square and symmetrical with the pipe. Following installation of the

coupling, damaged areas of shop coatings on the pipe and coupling shall be repaired to the

satisfaction of Engineer.

The interior surfaces of the middle rings shall be prepared for coating in accordance with

instructions of the coating manufacturer and shall then be coated with liquid epoxy in accordance

with ANSI/AWWA C210. The remaining components shall be cleaned and shop primed with

universal primer.

3-13. GROOVED-END JOINTS. Not used.

3-14. POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT. Not used.

3-15. OUTLETS. Where a 12 inch [300 mm] or smaller branch outlet is indicated and the

diameter of the parent pipe is at least twice the diameter of the branch, a tee, a factory welded-on

boss, or a tapping saddle will be acceptable.

Where a 4 inch [100 mm] or larger branch outlet is indicated on the drawings and the diameter of

the branch pipe for a given diameter of parent pipe is less than equal to the maximum diameter



(Group 4A2)

listed herein, a factory welded-on outlet fabricated from centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe will

be acceptable.

Parent Pipe Diameter Versus Maximum Branch Pipe

Diameter for Welded-On Outlets

Parent

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Max Branch

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Parent

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Max Branch

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

8 [200] 4 [100] 30 [750] 20 [500]

10 [250] 6 [150] 36 [900] 24 [600]

12 [300] 8 [200] 42 [1050] 30 [750]

14 [350] 8 [200] 48 [1200] 30 [750]

16 [400] 10 [250] 54 [1350] 36 [900]

18 [450] 12 [300] 60 [1500] 36 [900]

20 [500] 14 [350] 64 [1600] 36 [900]

24 [600] 16 [400]

All 30 inch [750 mm] and smaller branch pipe diameter welded-on outlets shall be rated for a

working pressure of 250 psi [1,700 kPa], 36 inch [900 mm] branch diameter welded-on outlets

shall be rated for a working pressure of 200 psi [5,000 kPa], and all outlets shall have a minimum

factor of safety of 2.0. The pipe manufacturer shall provide test data and certification of proof of

design. It is not necessary that these tests be performed on pipe manufactured specifically for

this project. Certified reports covering tests made on other pipe of the same size and design as

specified herein and manufactured from materials of equivalent type and quality may be

accepted as adequate proof of design. Welded-on outlets may be provided as a radial (tee) outlet,

a tangential outlet, or a lateral outlet fabricated at a specific angle to the parent pipe (in

15 degrees [0.262 rad] increments between 45 degrees and 90 degrees [0.785 to 1.570 rad] from

the axis of the parent pipe), as indicated on the drawings. The fillet weld dimensions for welded-

on outlets shall be as specified herein. Parent pipe and branch pipe shall meet hydrostatic test

requirements in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, Sec. 5.2, prior to fabrication.



(Group 4A2)

Welded-on Outlet Fillet Weld Dimensions for Specified

Outlet Configurations

Radial and Lateral Outlets Tangential Outlets

Parent

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Branch

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Weld Fillet

Size

inches [mm]

Parent

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Branch

Pipe Dia

inches [mm]

Weld Fillet

Size

inches [mm]

24 [600] and

smaller

24 [600] and

smaller

1 x 1

[25 x 25]

8-30

[200-750]

24 [600] and

smaller

1-1/4 x 1-1/4

[32 x 32]

30-48

[750-1200]

24 [600] and

smaller

1-1/4 x 1-1/4

[32 x 32]

36-54

[900-1350]

24 [600] and

smaller

1-1/2 x 1-1/2

[38 x 38]

54-64

[1350-1600]

24 [600] and

smaller

2-1/4 x 2-1/2

[57 x 64]

60-64

[1500-1600]

24 [600] and

smaller

2-1/2 x 2-1/2

[64 x 64]

42-64

[1050-1600]

30 [750] 2-1/2 x 2-1/2

[64 x 64]

42-54

[1050-1350]

30 [750] 2-1/2 x 2-1/2

[64 x 64]

54-64

[1350-1600]

36 [900] 2-3/4 x 2-3/4

[70 x 70]

60-64

[1500-1600]

30 [750] 2-3/4 x 2-3/4

[70 x 70]

All joints on welded-on branch outlets shall be made in accordance with the latest revision of

ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and/or ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15, as applicable. All outlets

shall be fabricated from centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe designed in accordance with

ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and manufactured and tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA

C151/A21.51. Ni-Rod FC 55®

electrodes manufactured by International Nickel Corporation (or

an electrode with equivalent properties) shall be used in the manufacture of the fillet welds.

Carbon steel electrodes will not be acceptable. Special Thickness Class 53 pipe shall be used for

all branch pipe and parent pipe in 4 to 54 inch [100 to 1350 mm] sizes. Pressure Class 350 pipe

shall be used for 60 inch and 64 inch [1,500 and 1,600 mm] parent pipe. After welding, each

fabricated outlet shall be subjected to a 15 psi [100 kPa] air test. A soap and water solution shall

be applied during the testing procedure to inspect the weld for leakage. Any welds that show air

seepage shall be refabricated and retested.

Welded-on outlets shall be fabricated by the pipe manufacturer at its production facilities.

Manufacturers of welded-on outlets shall have at least 5 years of satisfactory experience in the

manufacture and performance of these products. The manufacturer shall have a documented

welding quality assurance system and shall maintain resident quality assurance records based on

ANSI/AWS D11.2, the Guide for Welding Iron Castings. The manufacturer shall also maintain

appropriate welding procedure specifications (WPS) and procedure qualification (PQR), and

welder performance qualification test (WPQR) records.

The type of pipe end for the branch outlet shall be as specified or indicated on the drawings. The

maximum size and laying length of the welded-on branch outlet shall be as recommended by the

pipe manufacturer and shall be acceptable to Engineer for the field conditions and the connecting

pipe or valve. Pipe embedment material and trench backfill shall be placed and compacted under

and around each side of the outlet to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during the

subsequent pipe jointing, embedment, and backfilling.



(Group 4A2)

At locations acceptable to Engineer, drilling and tapping of the pipe wall for 2 inch [50 mm] and

smaller pipe connections will also be acceptable, provided that the wall thickness, minus the

casting allowance, at the point of connection equals or exceeds the wall thickness required for 4-

thread engagement in accordance with Table A.1, Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

3-16. WALL PIPES OR CASTINGS. Wall pipes or castings shall be provided where ductile

iron pipes pass through concrete walls, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

Where a flange and mechanical joint piece is to connect to a mechanical joint wall pipe or

casting, the bolt holes in the bell of the wall pipe or casting shall straddle the top (or the side for

vertical piping) centerline of the pipe or casting and shall align with the bolt holes in the flange

and mechanical joint piece. The top centerline shall be marked on the wall pipe or casting at the

foundry.

3-17. REDUCERS. Reducers shall be eccentric or concentric as indicated on the drawings.

Reducers of eccentric pattern shall be installed with the straight side on top, so that no air traps

are formed.

3-18. CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING. Connections between new work and

existing piping shall be made using fittings suitable for the conditions encountered. Each

connection with an existing pipe shall be made at a time and under conditions which will least

interfere with service to customers, and as authorized by Owner. Facilities shall be provided for

proper dewatering and for disposal of all water removed from dewatered lines and excavations

without damage to adjacent property.

Special care shall be taken to prevent contamination when dewatering, cutting into, and making

connections with existing potable water piping. Trench water, mud, or other contaminating

substances shall not be permitted to enter the lines. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and valves

installed in such connections shall be thoroughly cleaned and then all potable water pipe, fittings,

and valves shall be swabbed with, or dipped in, a 200 mg/L chlorine solution.

3-19. INSULATED FLANGED JOINTS. Insulated flanged joints shall be installed where

indicated on the drawings. In addition to one full-faced insulated gasket, each flange insulating

assembly shall consist of one full-length sleeve, two insulating washers, and two backing

washers for each flange bolt. The insulating gasket ID shall be 1/8 inch [3 mm] less than the ID

of the flange in which it is installed. The insulated flanged joint accessories shall be installed in

accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.

3-20. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT. Concrete encasement shall be installed where indicated on

the drawings. A pipe joint shall be provided within 12 inches [300 mm] of each end of the

concrete encasement. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in the Cast-in-Place

Concrete section. All pipe to be encased shall be suitably supported and blocked in proper

position, and shall be anchored to prevent flotation.

3-21. REACTION ANCHORAGE AND BLOCKING. Concrete blocking shall be installed

where indicated on the drawings. The blocking size shall be of the dimensions indicated on the

drawings, shall extend from the fitting to solid, undisturbed earth, and shall be so installed that



(Group 4A2)

all joints are accessible for repair. If adequate support against undisturbed ground cannot be

obtained, restrained joints shall be installed to provide the necessary support. If the lack of

suitable solid vertical excavation face is due to improper trench excavation, restrained joints shall

be furnished and installed by and at the expense of Contractor.

Reaction blocking, anchorages, or other supports for fittings installed in fills or other unstable

ground, installed above grade, or exposed within structures, shall be provided as indicated on the

drawings.

Coatings for the appurtenances listed below shall be as specified in the Protective Coatings

section, or if a Protective Coatings section is not included, shall be as specified below.

All ferrous metal clamps, rods, bolts, and other components of tapping saddles, reaction

anchorages, or joint harness, subject to submergence or in contact with earth or other fill material

and not encased in concrete, shall be protected from corrosion by two coats of medium

consistency coal tar applied in the field to clean, dry metal surfaces. The first coat shall be dry

and hard before the second coat is applied. Metal surfaces exposed above grade or within

structures shall be given one prime coat and two finish coats of a coating acceptable to Engineer.

3-22. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS. Pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a pressure

test and a leakage test in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section.

Pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a pressure test and a leakage test. The Contractor shall

provide all necessary pumping equipment; piping connections between the piping and the nearest

available source of test water; pressure gauges; and other equipment, materials, and facilities

necessary for the tests.

All pipe, fittings, valves, pipe joints, and other materials which are found to be defective shall be

removed and replaced with new and acceptable materials, and the affected portion of the piping

shall be retested by and at the expense of Contractor.

All joints shall be watertight and free from visible leaks. Any visible leak which is discovered

within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the

expense of Contractor.

3-23. CLEANING. The interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean of any foreign matter

until the work has been accepted.

End of Section

Orange County Utilities) Bid Issue

(Master Pump Station Improvements) 15061-S01-1 October 2011

(Group 4A2)

Schedule 15061-S01

Ductile Iron Pipe Schedule

Size Location and Service ANSI/AWWA

Class

in.

4-12 All 350

14-24 All 250

30-64 All 200

End of Document



(Group 4A2)

Section 15064

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of stainless steel pipe, tubing and accessories

for the services as indicated herein. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings,

flanges, unions, and other accessories specified herein.

1-2. SUBMITTALS.


submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping,



Type and model










PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Stainless steel pipe materials shall be as specified herein.

2-1.01. Material Classification SS-1. Not used.



2-1.04. Material Classification SS-4.



(Group 4A2)

SS-4 – Schedule 40S with

Beveled Ends

Pipe Sleeves

2-1/2 inch and larger.

Pipe

Fittings

ASTM A312, Grade TP316L.

Buttwelded, ASTM A403, WP316L.

Fittings shall conform to ANSI/ASME

B16.9, Schedule 40S with beveled ends.

2-1.05. Material Classification SS-5.

SS-5 – Schedule 40S with

Flanged Ends

Piping in wetwells.


Pipe

Fittings

ASTM A312, Grade TP316L.

Flanged, ASTM A403 and ASTM A774,

WP316L. Fittings shall conform to

ANSI/ASME B16.9, Schedule 40S.





2-1.10. Accessory Materials. Accessory materials for the stainless steel pipe systems shall be as

indicated.

SS-5 Pipe Flanges

ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150, flat faced, AISI

Type 316L, to match piping.

Flange Bolts ASTM A193 Class 2, AISI Type 316, ANSI

B18.2.1, heavy hex head, length such that, after

installation, the bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch [3

to 10 mm] beyond outer face of the nut.

Flange Nuts ASTM A194, AISI Type 316,

ANSI/ASME B18.2.2, heavy hex pattern.

Flange Gaskets ASTM D1330, Grade I, red rubber, ring type, 1/3

inch thick. Gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe

manufacturer.

2-2. WELDING OF STAINLESS STEEL. Filler metal for welding austenitic stainless steel, P-

number 8 base materials shall be in accordance with the following:

Material Type/Grade 316L shall use Type 316L filler metal.



(Group 4A2)

The following requirements shall apply when fabricating austenitic stainless steel components.

Grinding shall be by aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, or silicon carbide grinding wheels that

shall not have been used on carbon or low alloy steels. Hand or power wire brushing shall be by

stainless steel brushes that shall not have been used on carbon or low alloy steels. All tools used

in fabrication shall be protected to minimize contact with steel alloys or free iron. Grinding

wheels and brushes shall be identified and controlled for their use on these materials only to

ensure that contamination of these materials does not occur.

Antispatter compounds, marking fluids, marking pens, tape, temperature indicating crayons, and

other tools shall have a total halogen content of less than 200 parts per million.

Heat input control for welding shall be specified in the applicable WPS and shall not exceed

55,000 joules per inch (22,000 joules per cm) as determined by the following formula:

.)min/.in(SpeedTravel

60xAmperagexVoltage.)in/J(InputHeat =

Complete penetration pressure retaining welds shall be made using the GTAW process for the

root and second layer as a minimum.

Austenitic stainless steel instrument tubing shall be welded using only the GTAW process.

Socket welds or butt welds in all austenitic stainless steel instrument tubing lines shall require an

inert gas backing (purge) using argon during welding to avoid oxidation.

The application of heat to correct weld distortion and dimensional deviation without prior written

approval from the Engineer is prohibited.

Unless otherwise approved in writing, the GTAW process shall require the addition of filler

metal.

The maximum preheat and interpass temperature for austenitic stainless steel shall be 350° F

(176° C). The minimum preheat temperature shall be 50° F (10° C).

Complete joint penetration welds welded from one side without backing, weld repairs welded

from one side without backing, or weld repairs in which the base metal remaining after

excavation is less than 0.1875 inch (5 mm) from being through wall, which are fabricated from

austenitic stainless steel ASME P-number 8 base metal or unassigned metals with similar

chemical compositions, shall have the root side of the weld purged with an argon backing gas

prior to welding. Backing gas (purge) shall only be argon. The argon backing gas shall be

classified as welding grade argon or shall meet Specification SFA-5.32, AWS Classification SG-

A. The backing gas (purge) shall be maintained until a minimum of two layers of weld metal

have been deposited.

2-3. SHOP CLEANING AND PICKLING OF STAINLESS STEEL PIPING AND WELDS. All

stainless steel piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and pickled at the mill in accordance with

ASTM A380.



(Group 4A2)

Pickling shall produce a modest etch and shall remove all embedded iron and heat tint. After

fabrication, pickled surfaces shall be subjected to a 24 hour water test or a ferroxyl test to detect

the presence of residual embedded iron. All pickled surfaces damaged during fabrication

including welded areas shall either be mechanically cleaned or repickled or passivated in

accordance with ASTM A380. Materials that have been contaminated with steel alloys or free

iron shall not be used until all contamination is removed. When cleaning to remove steel or iron

contamination is required, it shall be performed in accordance with ASTM A380, Code D

requirements. Mechanical cleaning is not an acceptable cleaning method for oxygen or ozone

piping. Oxygen and ozone piping shall be repickled or passivated as specified herein. All

stainless steel surfaces shall be adequately protected during fabrication, shipping, handling, and

installation to prevent contamination from iron or carbon steel objects or surfaces. Particulate

matter shall be removed from piping and welds. Labels shall be affixed to the piping sections to

indicate shop cleaning has been performed. Welds shall be either mechanically cleaned, pickled,

or passivated on the exterior of the pipe.

For oxygen or ozone piping, welds shall be pickled or passivated on the interior and exterior of

the pipe.

2-4. HIGH TEMPERATURE EPOXY COATING. Not used.

2-5. INSULATING FITTINGS. In all piping except air and gas piping, insulating fittings shall

be provided to prevent contact of dissimilar metals, including but not limited to, contact of

copper, brass, or bronze pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances, or stainless steel pipe,

tubing, fittings, valves, or appurtenances with iron or steel pipe, fittings, valves, or

appurtenances. Insulating fittings shall also be provided to prevent contact of copper, brass, or

bronze pipe, tubing, fittings, valves or appurtenances with stainless steel pipe, tubing, fittings,

valves, or appurtenances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15065

MISCELLANEOUS STEEL PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous steel pipe, tubing and

accessories that for pipe diameters 24 inches [600 mm] and smaller. Pipe and tubing shall be

furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, and other accessories specified herein.

1-2. GENERAL.




1-3. SUBMITTALS.


submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping,



Type and model










1-4.01. Coated Pipe. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to the

protective coating and shall include the use of end hooks, padded calipers, and nylon or similar

fabric slings with spreader bars. Bare cables, chains, or metal bars shall not be used. Coated

pipe shall be stored off the ground on wide, padded skids. Plastic coated pipe shall be covered or

otherwise protected from exposure to sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE. Not used.



(Group 4A2)

2-2. STEEL PIPE. Steel pipe materials and service shall be as specified herein.

2-2.01. Material Classification CS-1. Not used.


2-2.03. Material Classification CS-3.

CS-3 – Standard Weight Steel with

Buttwelded Fittings.

Diesel fuel piping outdoors above grade.


Pipe

Fittings

ASTM A53, Type S,

standard weight

Grade B; or ASTM

A106, of equivalent

thickness. Bevel ends.

Buttwelded. Fitting

shall conform to

ANSI/ASME B16.9,

standard weight.

2-2.04. Material Classification CS-4.

CS-4 – Extra Strong Steel with Threaded

Fittings.

Fuel oil or diesel fuel piping in interior

locations or outdoors above grade.

2 inch and smaller.

Pipe

Fittings

ASTM A53, Type S,

extra strong, Grade B; or

ASTM A106, of

equivalent thickness.

Threaded ends.

Forged steel, threaded.

Fittings shall conform to

ANSI B16.11, Class

2000 or 3000; Bonney,

Crane, Ladish, or Vogt.












(Group 4A2)


2-2.15. Accessory Materials. Accessory materials for the miscellaneous steel pipe and tubing

systems shall be as indicated.

Nipples ASTM A733, seamless, extra strong

(Schedule 80); "close" nipples will be permitted

only by special authorization in each case.

Unions (Malleable Iron) Fed Spec WW-U-53l, Class 2; Type B

(galvanized) for galvanized pipe or Type A

(black) for ungalvanized pipe.

Flanges

Standard Weight Pipe ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150, flat faced when

connected to flat faced flanges; otherwise, raised

face.

Extra Strong Pipe

Chemical Gas Piping ASTM A105, forged steel, tongue and groove

flanged union type, with nonmetallic gasket;

rated for a working pressure of 1,500 psi

[10.3 MPa].

Other services ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 300, raised face.

Plastic Lined Pipe Steel, forged or cast, diameter and drilling in

accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150

or 300 as required.

Flange Bolts and Nuts ASTM A193, Grade B7 with ASTM A194

Grade 2H nuts. Length such that, after

installation, the bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch

[3 to 10 mm] beyond outer face of the nut.

Flange Gaskets

For Process Air Service

Raised Face Flanges Non-asbestos inorganic fiber with EPDM binder;

dimensions to suit flange contact face, 1/16 inch

[1.5 mm] minimum thickness for plain finished

surfaces, 3/32 inch [2 mm] minimum thickness

for serrated surfaces, rated for 275°F [135°C]

service; Garlock "IFG 5507".

Flat Faced Flanges Premium Grade, EPDM, full face for 12 inch

[300 mm] and smaller ring type for 14 inch [350

mm] and larger, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, rated for

275°F [135°C] service; Garlock "8314".



(Group 4A2)

For Boiler Exhaust

Service

Garlock "Blue-Gard, Style 3000".

For Oil Service Non-asbestos filler with neoprene or nitrile

binder; dimensions to suit flange contact face;

1/16 inch [1.5 mm] minimum thickness for plain

finished surfaces, 3/32 inch [2 mm] minimum

thickness for serrated surfaces.

For Heating Water

Service

Non-asbestos inorganic fiber with nitrile binder;

dimensions to suit flange contact face, 1/16 inch

[1.5 mm] minimum thickness for plain finished

surfaces, 3/32 inch [2 mm] minimum thickness

for serrated surfaces; Garlock "IFG 5500".

For Water Service ASTM D1330, Grade I, red rubber, ring type,

1/8 inch [3 mm] thick.

For Chemical Service Suitable for chemical.

For Other Services

Flat Faced Flanges Non-asbestos filler with neoprene or nitrile

binder; dimensions to suit flange contact face;

1/16 inch [1.5 mm] minimum thickness for plain

finished surfaces, 3/32 inch [2 mm] minimum

thickness for serrated surfaces.

Raised Face Flanges Continuous stainless steel ribbon wound into a

spiral with non-asbestos filler between adjacent

coils with a carbon steel gauge ring.

Compressed gasket thickness shall be 0.095 inch

±0.005 inch [2.4 mm ±0.13 mm].

Grooved Couplings

Rigid AWWA C606; Gustin-Bacon "No. 120 Rigid" or

Victaulic "07 Zero-Flex".

Standard AWWA C606; Gustin-Bacon "No. 100 Standard" or

Victaulic "Style 77".

Mechanical Couplings Dresser "Style 38" or Smith-Blair "Type 411 Flexible

Coupling"; without pipe stop.

2-3. COATINGS. Standard weight steel pipe in buried locations, except hot piping such as

aeration air piping, shall have exterior surfaces protected with a shop applied plastic coating.

Coatings for hot piping shall be as specified.

Extra strong steel pipe in buried locations shall have exterior surfaces protected with a shop

applied plastic coating.shall have exterior surfaces protected with a shop applied tape wrap.will

have exterior surfaces protected with a field applied tape wrap as specified in the Miscellaneous

Piping and Accessories Installation section.



(Group 4A2)

All surfaces to be tape-wrapped in the shop shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in

accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations immediately before wrapping. The

tape shall be applied by two-ply (half-lap) wrapping or as needed to provide a total installed tape

thickness of at least 60 mils [1.5 mm].

Shop applied coatings shall be as follows:

External Coatings

Plastic Liberty Coating Company “Pritec" or Bredero-Shaw

“Entec". The products of other manufacturers will not be

acceptable.

Tape Wrap ANSI/AWWA C209, except single ply tape thickness

shall not be less than 30 mils [760 µm]; Protecto Wrap

"200" or Tapecoat "CT".

High temperature

epoxy for aeration

and process air

piping

Shop or field applied high solids epoxy; suitable for

protection at continuous pipe wall temperatures up to 300

F. Coating shall be abrasion resistant. The finished

coating shall have a minimum total film thickness of 10

mils. The surface shall be prepared in accordance with

SSPC-SP7 as a minimum unless otherwise recommended

by the coating manufacturer. The coating shall be

Carboline “Thermaline 450”, Ameron “Amerlock 400

with Amercoat 880 Additive”, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15066

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE (AIR SERVICE)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing low pressure fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe for

application in exhaust air systems indicated on the drawings as odor control. Piping shall be

furnished complete with all fittings, transitions, jointing materials, expansion joints, and other

necessary appurtenances.

Pipe supports, anchors, and odor control dampers are covered in other sections.

1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated,



manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall verify that each component of the system furnished is

compatible with all other parts of the system, that all piping and materials are appropriate for the

expected services, and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning system have been

provided.

1-2.02. Pipe Identification. Piping identification shall be as specified in the Protective Coating

section.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data and catalog cuts, and shop assembled

layout drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The data and

specifications shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Pipe


Brand designation.

Type of resin.

Pressure, vacuum, and temperature rating of pipe.

AWWA M-45 pipe stiffness calculation for buried pipe.

Certification of compliance with referenced standards.

Layouts and dimensions of subassemblies to be shipped.

Detailed instructions for field butt joints including lay-up sequence, width of

each reinforcement layer, and total number of layers.

Where the pipe sizes needed for the project are larger than the named

manufacturer’s standard pipe sizes, the following information shall be

submitted for the pipe and fittings that are being provided:


Certificate of compliance that states compliance with referenced

construction standards and test methods.



(Group 4A2)

Material sources.

Material types.

Average reinforced wall thickness for each pipe size.

Minimum reinforced wall thickness for each pipe size.

Average outside diameter for each pipe size.

Liner material.

Nominal liner thickness for each pipe size.

Expansion Joints


Type and model.

Materials of construction.

Force required for expansion and contraction.


1-4.01. Manufacturer’s Field Services. The pipe manufacturer shall provide hands-on training

for the installation contractor’s employees in the proper assembly of butt joints. The pipe

manufacturer’s representative shall be on-site for at least one 8-hour day, during which they shall

observe the assembly of at least three butt joints. The pipe manufacturer shall submit written

certification that the installation contractor's employees have satisfactorily completed all training

and instruction and can perform the jointing required for this project in accordance with the pipe

manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. All field butt joints shall be made by

representatives of the pipe manufacturer or by employees of the installation contractor who have

been trained and certified by the pipe manufacturer. Qualified fitters shall carry and have visible

at all times a certificate of qualification issued by the pipe manufacturer. Contractor shall

arrange the qualifying training.

1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping shall be in accordance with the


section. Pipe and fittings shall be properly supported to avoid damage caused by flexural strains.

Pipe and fittings shall not be thrown or dropped.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Fiberglass reinforced pipe will be used in odor control service

condition(s).

2-2. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.

2-2.01. Minimum Pipe Wall Stiffness. The minimum pipe wall stiffness, at 5 percent deflection,

determined in accordance with ASTM D2412 and Section 3 of AWWA C950, shall be not less

than the following:



(Group 4A2)

Nominal Pipe Diameter Pipe Stiffness

inches [mm] psi [kPa]

1-8 [25-200] 36 [250]

10 [250] 18 [125]

12-16 [300-400] 9 [62]

18 and larger, buried [450 and larger, buried] 10 or greater as required [70]

18 and larger, other

locations

[450 and larger, other

locations]

5 [35]

2-2.02. Temperature. All pipe, fittings, and appurtenances shall be suitable for the following

temperature conditions.

Design maximum temperature 120 °F

Design minimum temperature. 0 °F

2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe, fittings and

specials provided under this section shall be limited to the products of Ameron, Conley, or

Smith/Fibercast as specified herein without exception.

2-4. MATERIALS.

The materials for the specified service conditions shall be as follows:

Service Condition Pipe Resin

Odor Control, FA Epoxy (20” and smaller)

Piping materials shall be as follows:

Epoxy Pipe

Centrifugally Cast

14 inches

[350 mm] and

smaller

ASTM D2997, RTRP-21C, centrifugally cast, reinforced

epoxy resin pipe with 30 mil [750 µm] liner;

Smith/Fibercast "Centricast RB-1520"; without exception.

Filament-Wound

16 inches

[400 mm] and

smaller

[ASTM D2996, RTRP-11FE-111, RTRP-11FF-312, and

RTRP-11FQ-311, with at least a 20 mil [500 µm] reinforced

liner; [Ameron "Bondstrand Series 2000;Conley

"Schedule 20E"; Smith/Fibercast "Green Thread"; without

exception.



(Group 4A2)

18 through

20 inches [450

through 500 mm]

ASTM D2310, RTRP-11FQ, with at least a 20 mil

[500 µm] reinforced liner; Conley "Schedule 20E" without

exception.

Fittings Manufacturer's standard, glass fiber reinforced, thickness to

match pipe, compatible with the pipe and with chemical

resistance equal to or greater than the pipe. Elbows 24 inch

[600 mm] and smaller shall be smooth radius. Elbow 30

inch [750 mm] and larger shall be smooth radius or mitered.

Mitered elbows shall be constructed of a least 4 sections

and 3 mitered joints.

Flanges ASTM D3982 made on the specified pipe.

Flange Bolts or Studs ASTM F593, Type 304 stainless steel having a length such

that, after installation, bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch [3 to

9 mm] beyond the outer face of the nut.

Nuts ASTM F594, Type 304 stainless steel.

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1, Type 304 stainless steel.

Flange Gaskets Full face, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, 40-50 durometer, EPDM.

Bell-and-Spigot Joints Matched tapered bell-and-spigot ends bonded with

adhesive.

Butt Joints Butt and wrap, resin bonded using same resin as pipe, PS

15-69, with pressure rating equal to the pipe.

Expansion Joints As specified herein.

Adhesive Pipe manufacturer's standard.

All above grade pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall contain ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors.

Resins used in the piping system laminates, except for the inner corrosion liner, shall have a

flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. The

manufacturer’s products named shall be used with a fire retardant resin substitution that is

certified to meet or exceed ASTM requirements by the manufacturer.

2-5. FABRICATION.

2-5.01. Jointing Method. Unless otherwise specified, 14 inch [350 mm] and smaller pipe shall

have adhesive bonded joints. Sixteen inch [400 mm] and larger pipe shall have adhesive bonded

butt joints. Shop fabricated assemblies should be provided to the maximum extent possible, to

minimize the number of field joints. Shop fabrications including fittings and specials must be

constructed by the pipe manufacturer or pipe manufacturer’s certified pipe fabrication source.

Flanged joints shall be provided at each damper and item of equipment to facilitate disassembly,

at each change in material, and where indicated on the drawings. Bolts, nuts, washers, and

gaskets shall be provided for all flanged connections in the piping system, including connections

to equipment.



(Group 4A2)

Field butt joints shall be located at least 12 inches [300 mm] from any increasing or decreasing

cross-section of pipe where the pipe to be jointed has the same diameter.

2-5.02. Transitions. Fiberglass reinforced plastic transition sections shall be furnished for

connecting round pipe to rectangular openings on equipment. Transitions shall have a pressure

rating and wall stiffness equal to those of the pipe. Internal lining shall be of the same type of

material and thickness as specified for the pipe. Transitions shall have flanged end connections

compatible with the connecting pipe and equipment.

2-5.03. Expansion Joints. Expansion joints shall be furnished at the locations indicated on the

drawings and at other locations required for proper pipe installation. Expansion joints shall be

resistant to ultraviolet light and shall be suitable for the service conditions.

Expansion joints shall be fully molded type rated for a minimum 3 psi [21 kPa] working pressure

and shall consist of an inner tube, body, and outer cover to be compatible with the specified

service conditions. The tube shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch [6 mm] thick EPDM with two ply

of high tensile nylon, polyester, or kevlar fabric reinforcement. The cover shall be a minimum

1/16-inch [1.5 mm] elastomer and shall be resistant to ultraviolet light.

Slip on type expansion joints shall fit tightly on the outside diameter of the piping and shall be

secured in place by stainless steel adjustable bands with worm screw type adjustments to provide

a gastight connection.

Flanged type expansion joints shall have split stainless steel retaining rings and shall have ASTM

D3982 diameter and drilling. Expansion joints shall be Red Valve "Duct Expansion Joints",

Mercer Rubber Company, or Holz Rubber Company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


immediately before installation. Any pipe that is damaged or shows evidence of contamination

shall not be installed in the piping system.

3-2. PREPARATION.

3-2.01. Field Measurement. Pipe shall be cut to measurements taken at the site, not from the

drawings. All necessary provisions shall be made in laying out piping to allow for expansion

and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipe shall be held free of

contact with building construction to avoid transmission of noise resulting of expansion.

3-3. INSTALLATION. Pipe shall be installed as specified and as indicated on the drawings.

All necessary provisions shall be taken in the fabrication and installation of piping to provide for

expansion and contraction. Expansion joints shall be installed as specified in the Pipe Supports

section.



(Group 4A2)

The piping shall be supported as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the

requirements of the Pipe Supports section. The inside of pipe, fittings, and transitions shall be

smooth, clean and free from blisters, when installed.

3-3.01. Pipe Sleeves. Piping passing through concrete or masonry shall be installed through

sleeves installed before the concrete is placed or when masonry is laid.

3-3.02. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the

following specified requirements. All field joints made by trained and certified employees that

are not representatives of the pipe manufacturer shall be made using individually packaged joint

kits.

3-3.02.01. Adhesive Bonded Joints. All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing for adhesive

bonded joints shall comply with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. Adhesive shall be

mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Newly assembled

joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the recommended

curing period.

3-3.02.02. Flanged Joints. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the

gasket and make a good seal, but not so tight as to distort the flanges. A flat washer shall be

installed under each nut and bolt head.

3-3.02.03. Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and as specified herein. Twenty inch [500 mm] and larger pipe shall be

overlaid both inside (when accessible) and outside. Eighteen inch [450 mm] and smaller pipe

shall be overlaid on the outside only. The minimum width of the overlay shall be as specified in

the following table. Inside overlaps shall be made to seal the joint but shall not be considered in

meeting the strength requirements.

Pipe Size Minimum Total Width of Overlay

inches [mm] inches [mm]

18-20 [450-500] 14 [350]

24-36 [600-900] 18 [450]

42-54 [1050-1350] 24 [600]

60-72 [1500-1825] 26 [650]

Finished joints shall be built up in successive layers, shall be as strong as the pieces being joined,

and shall be as crevice-free as is commercially practicable, in accordance with ASTM D2563.

The width of the first layer shall be at least 4 inches [100 mm]. Successive layers shall be

increased uniformly to provide the specified minimum total width of overlay which shall be

centered on the joint. Crevices between jointed pieces shall be filled with resin, leaving a

smooth inner surface. The interior of joints shall also be sealed by covering with not less than

0.1 inch [2 mm] of liner of the same material as the pipe.

The inner surface shall be free of cracks and crazing, with a smooth finish, and with an average

of not more than two pits per square foot [21 pits per square meter], provided the pits are less



(Group 4A2)

than 1/8 inch [3 mm] in diameter, not more than 1/32 inch [0.7 mm] deep, and covered with

sufficient resin to avoid exposure of inner surface fabric. Some waviness is permissible as long

as the surface is smooth and free of pits. Such surfaces may be reinforced with glass surfacing

mat, synthetic fibers, or other suitable material.

3-3.03. Alignment. Piping installed below grade shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated

on the drawings. Batter boards, laser beam equipment, or surveying instruments shall be used to

maintain alignment and grade.

Batter boards, if used, shall be erected at intervals of not more than 25 feet [7 m]. Batter boards

shall be used to determine and check pipe subgrades. At least three batter boards shall be

maintained in proper position at all times when trench grading is in progress.

If laser beam equipment is used, periodic elevation measurements shall be made with surveying

instruments to verify accuracy of grades. If such measurements indicate thermal deflection of

the laser beam due to differences between the ground temperature and the air temperature within

the pipe, precautions shall be taken to prevent or minimize further thermal deflections.

3-3.04. Laying Pipe. Pipe installed below grade shall be protected from lateral displacement by

placing the specified pipe embedment material. Pipe shall not be laid in water or under

unsuitable weather or trench conditions.

Pipe laying shall begin at the lowest elevation with bell ends facing the direction of laying,

except when reverse laying is permitted by Engineer.

Whenever pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with an end board

closely fitting the end of the pipe, to keep sand and earth out of the pipe. The end board shall

have several small holes near the center to permit water to enter the pipe and to prevent flotation

in the event of flooding of the trench.


3-4.01. Field Testing. All joints in piping shall be tight and free of leaks. All joints which are

found to leak, by observation or during any specified test, shall be repaired, and the tests

repeated. All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances, and

devices, shall be furnished by Contractor. All tests shall be made by and at the expense of

Contractor and at such time as directed by Engineer. All tests shall be conducted in a manner

acceptable to Engineer and shall be repeated as many times as necessary to demonstrate

compliance with specified requirements. Engineer shall be present during all testing.

Leakage may be determined by loss-of-pressure, soap solution, or positive and accurate method

acceptable to Engineer. All equipment or other accessories which would be damaged if

subjected to the specified test pressure shall be disconnected, and ends of branch lines plugged or

capped, as required, during the testing procedures.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15067

MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous plastic pipe, tubing, and

accessories. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions,

jointing materials and other necessary appurtenances.

1-2. SUBMITTALS.

1-2.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data and catalog cuts or drawings shall be

submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping,



Type and model










Pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. FRP PIPE. Not used.

2-2. PVC PIPE MATERIALS. PVC pipe materials and services shall be as specified herein.

2-2.01. Material Classification PVC-1.

PVC-1 – Schedule 40

PVC Pipe with Solvent

Welded Joints.

Condensate drain piping.

Pipe

Fittings

ASTM D1785, Cell Classification 12454,

bearing NSF seal, Schedule 40.

ASTM D2466, Cell Classification 12454,

bearing NSF seal.



(Group 4A2)

2-2.02. Material Classification PVC-2.

PVC-2 – Schedule 80 PVC Pipe

with Solvent Welded Joints.

Potable water service piping.

Odor control drain piping.

Air release valve discharge

piping.

Pipe

Fittings

ASTM D1785, Cell Classification

12454, bearing NSF seal,

Schedule 80.

ASTM D2467, Cell Classification

12454, bearing NSF seal.

Flanges or unions shall be

provided where needed to

facilitate disassembly of

equipment or valves. Flanges or

unions shall be joined to the pipe

by a solvent weld.

2-2.03. Material Classification PVC-3. Not used.






2-2.09. Accessory Materials. Accessory materials for the PVC Pipe systems shall be as

indicated.

Flanges Diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5,

Class 150.

Schedule 80 for DWV systems.

Flange Bolts and Nuts ASTM A307, Grade B, length such that, after installation, the

bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch [3 to 10 mm] beyond outer

face of the nut.

Stainless steel for DWV and chemical feed systems,

galvanized steel for all other systems.

Flat Washers ANSI B18.22.1, plain. Same material as bolts and nuts.

Flange Gaskets Full face, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, chemical-resistant

elastomeric material suitable for the specified service.

Expansion Joints Edlon "Thermo-molded TFE" or Resistoflex "Style R6905"

molded expansion joint.



(Group 4A2)

2-3. PE PIPE. Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15091

MISCELLANEOUS BALL VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of manually operated or remote activated two

position (open-close) ball valves as specified herein.

Miscellaneous ball valves shall be provided where AWWA type ball valves are not required.

Piping, pipe supports, insulation, and accessories that are not an integral part of the valves or are

not specified herein are covered in other sections.

1-2. GENERAL.


equipment and materials furnished under this section. If the requirements in this section are

different from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements in the section shall

take precedence.

1-2.02. Permanent Number Plates. Not used.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the valves and

their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Included in the

submittal shall be drawings by the valve manufacturer to indicate the position of the valve

actuator and valve shaft.



section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. CONSTRUCTION. Ball valves shown on the drawing, but not specified herein, shall be

selected to match piping material they are installed in.

2-1.01. Valves Type VB-1.

VB-1

Supply Water

Service.

2 inch and

smaller

Rating

Code

Type

Body/Bonnet

Trim

500 psi [3.4 MPa] nonshock cold

WOG

MSS SP-110

In-line, two piece, end entry, full port

ASTM B584–C84400 bronze

Reinforced Teflon



(Group 4A2)

Seat

Ball

Stem

Thrust Washer

Stem Seal

End Connection

Temp. Limitations

Valve Operator

Manufacturers

Brass, or chrome plated brass

Brass or bronze

Reinforced Teflon

Teflon or Viton

Threaded End

-20 to 400°F [-29 to 204°C]

Lever

Conbraco Industries "Apollo 77-100

Series"; Powell "Fig 4210T"

2-1.02. Valves Type VB-2.

VB-2

Supply Water

Service.

2-1/2 inch and 3

inch

Rating

Code

Type

Body/Bonnet

Trim

Seat

Ball

Stem

Thrust Washer

Stem Seal

End Connection

Temp. Limitations

Valve Operator

Manufacturers

500 psi [3.4 MPa] nonshock cold

WOG

MSS SP-110

In-line, three piece, end entry, full

port

ASTM B584-C84400 Bronze

Reinforced Teflon

Brass or chrome plated

Brass or Bronze

Reinforced Teflon

Teflon or Viton

Threaded End

-20 to 400°F [-29 to 204°C]

Lever

Conbraco Industries "Apollo

82-100 Series"

2-1.03. Valves Type VB-3. Not used.











(Group 4A2)







2-1.18. Length Tolerance. Unless otherwise specified, the actual length of valves shall be

within plus or minus 1/16 inch [1.6 mm] of the specified or theoretical length.

2-1.19. Shop Coatings. All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, both interior and

exterior, shall be shop coated for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer’s standard

coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating.

Coating Materials

Asphalt Varnish Fed Spec TT-C-494.

Coal Tar Epoxy High-build coal tar epoxy; Ameron "Amercoat

78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline "Bitumastic

300 M", Tnemec "46H-413 Hi-Build

Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil

Sher-Tar Epoxy".

Epoxy Enamel (for liquid service) Ameron "Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy

Coating", Carboline "Carboguard 891", or

Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus".

Rust-Preventive Compound As recommended by the manufacturer.

Surfaces To Be Coated

Unfinished Surfaces

Interior Surfaces

Liquid Service Asphalt varnish (two coats) or epoxy enamel.

Exterior Surfaces of Valves To

Be Buried, Submerged, or

Installed in Manholes or Valve

Vaults

Asphalt varnish or coal tar epoxy.

Exterior Surfaces of all other

valves

Universal primer.



(Group 4A2)

2-2. VALVE ACTUATORS. Ball valve, except those which are equipped with power actuators

or are designed for automatic operation, shall be provided with manual actuators. Unless

otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, each manual actuator shall be equipped with a

lever operator. Ball valves with center lines more than 7’-6” [2.3m] above the floor shall be

provided with chain levers.

Valves indicated to be electric motor operated on the drawings shall have reversible electric

motor operators designed for 120 volt ac, single phase operation. Actuators shall include integral

thermal overload protection and a declutchable manual override. Actuators shall be equipped

with motor operation limit switches and two additional single-pole, double-throw limit switches

for auxiliary open and closed indication. An internal heater and thermostat shall be provided in

each actuator housing to prevent condensation. Actuators in Class I, Division 1 and Division 2,

Group D hazardous areas indicated on the drawings shall have NEMA Type 7 housings.

Actuators in other areas shall have NEMA Type 4X housings.

2-3. ACCESSORIES. If the drawings indicate the need for extension stems, stem guides;

position indicator; floor boxes; valve boxes; or operating stands, refer to the Valve and Gate

Actuator section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in accordance

with the Valve Installation section.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15093

CHECK VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of check valves as specified herein and as

indicated in the Check Valve Schedule.

Piping, pipe supports, insulation, and accessories that are not an integral part of the valves or are

not specified herein are covered in other sections.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in


recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

Valves shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on the drawings,

specified, otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the

latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of valves.




1-2.02. Temporary Number Plates. Not used.

1-2.03. Permanent Number Plates. All check valves, except buried or submerged valves, that

have been assigned a number on the drawings or in the Check Valve Schedule, shall be provided

with a permanent number plate. The location of number plates and the method of fastening shall

be acceptable to Engineer. Numerals shall be at least 1 inch [25 mm] high and shall be black

baked enamel on anodized aluminum plate.


their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Included in the

submittal shall be drawings by the valve manufacturer to indicate the position of the valve

actuator and valve shaft.



section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. CONSTRUCTION.

2-1.01. Valves VC-1. Not used.



(Group 4A2)









2-1.10. Valves VC-10.

VC -10

Wastewater

pump discharge

service

6 inch [150

mm] and larger

pipe

Rating

Code

Type

Body

Trim

Seat Ring

Disc

Hinge Pins

Bearings

Cover Gasket

End Connection

Temp. Limitations

Valve Operator

Manufacturers

Class 125

AWWA C508

Horizontal swing, bolted bonnet

ASTM A126 Class B cast iron

ASTM B763 Alloy 84400 bronze

ASTM A126 Class B cast iron

Stainless steel

Bronze bushings

Manufacturer’s standard

Flanged, ASME B16.1, Class 125,

flat faced

-20 to 212°F [-29 to 100°C]

Weighted lever

American Flow Control “50 SC”,

M&H “Style 159”, Mueller “A2600-

6-01”








(Group 4A2)





2-1.20. Shop Coatings. All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, both interior and

exterior, shall be shop coated for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer’s standard

coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating.

Coating Materials

Asphalt Varnish Fed Spec TT-C-494.




Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil

Sher-Tar Epoxy".

Epoxy Enamel (for liquid service) Ameron "Amerlock 400 High-Solids Epoxy

Coating", Carboline "Carboguard°891", or

Tnemec "Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus".

Rust-Preventive Compound As recommended by the manufacturer.

Surfaces To Be Coated

Unfinished Surfaces

Interior Surfaces

Liquid Service Epoxy enamel.

Exterior Surfaces of Valves To Be Buried,

Submerged, or Installed in Manholes or

Valve Vaults

Asphalt varnish or coal tar epoxy.

Exterior Surfaces of All Other Valves Universal primer.

Polished or Machined Surfaces Rust-preventive compound.

Actuators and Accessories Universal primer.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


with Valve Installation section.

End of Section

Schedule 15093-S01

Check Valves Schedule

1.010

1.020

1.030

1.040

1.050

1.060

Tag Number Size

Type of Valve

Service

Design

Capacity

Ends(1)

1 2 3 4 5 6

(in) (gpm)

VCK-3006-01 12 VC-10 WW Pump Discharge 1200 F




(Master P.S. Improvements)

(Group 4A2) 15093-S01-1

Bid Issue

October 2011

Notes:

(1) Abbreviations for valve ends are as indicated:

F

MJ

P

END OF SCHEDULE



(Group 4A2)

Section 15094

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of backflow preventers and associated

appurtenances, as indicated herein.

Piping, pipe supports, insulation, and accessories which are not an integral part of the backflow

preventers or are not specified herein are covered in other sections.

1-2. GENERAL.


equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ


precedence.

1-2.02. Permanent Number Plates. All backflow preventers that have been assigned a number

on the drawings or in the Backflow Preventer Schedule, shall be provided with a permanent

number plate. The location of number plates and the method of fastening shall be acceptable to

Engineer. Numerals shall be at least 1 inch [25 mm] high and shall be black baked enamel on

anodized aluminum plate.

1-3. SUBMITTALS.

1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete fabrication and assembly drawings, together with

detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part

of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. The

data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to the following:


Type and model.

Construction materials and finishes.

Net weight.

Unit dimensions.

Performance curves indicating flow capacity versus pressure drop.

1-3.02. Operations and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance







(Group 4A2)


Shipping section. Handling and Storage shall be in accordance with the handling and storage

section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Backflow preventers shall be

designed to meet the requirements as indicated herein.

2-2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Acceptable manufacturers and specific products

are listed in the Design and Construction paragraph.

2-3. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION. Backflow prevention device type shall be as indicated

herein.

2-3.01. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventers. Reduced pressure zone (RPZ) backflow

preventers shall consist of isolation valves, two independent check valves, and differential relief

valve. The assembly shall automatically reduce the pressure in the zone between the check

valves. In the event that the reduced pressure is not maintained, the differential relief valve shall

open, maintaining the proper zone differential. RPZ backflow preventers shall comply with

AWWA C511-92 and ASSE Standard 1013 requirements and shall be suitable for horizontal

installation. Each RPZ backflow preventer shall be provided with a relief valve air-gap drain

fitting.

RPZ backflow preventers in 2-1/2 inch [63 mm] and larger sizes shall be provided with ductile

iron bodies, epoxy-coated interior and exterior, and a flanged, resilient-seated gate valve on each

end of the device. Flange diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125.

2-1/2 inch [63 mm] and larger RPZ backflow preventers shall be Febco “Model 860”, Wilkins

“Model 975”, or Watts Regulator Company “Series 909”.

RPZ backflow preventers in 2 inch [50 mm] and smaller sizes shall be provided with bronze

bodies and with a threaded bronze bodied ball valve on each end of the device. Two inch

[50 mm] and smaller RPZ backflow preventers shall be Febco “Model 860”, Wilkens “Model

975XL”, or Watts Regulator “Series 909”.

2-3.01.01 Strainers. Strainers shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. Strainer

screen size shall be 20 mesh unless otherwise indicated. The blowoff from each strainer shall be

equipped with a shutoff valve.

Strainers located in ductile iron piping systems shall be Y-pattern type with iron body, flanged

ends, and monel or stainless steel screens. Strainers shall be Hoffman ITT “Series 400” or

Metraflex “Model TF”.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


with Section 15010.

End of Section

(This page is intentionally blank)

(Orange County Utilities) 15094-S01 Bid Issue

(Master Pump Station Improvements) -1- May 2009

(Group A2 – 147929)

Backflow Preventer Schedule

Device

Number

Location

Size (in)

Max Flow

(gpm)

Max Pressure

Drop (psi)

Type

(1)

BFP-3006 PS 3006 yard 2 50 13 RPZ

Notes:

(1) Abbreviations for backflow preventer type:

RPZ Reduced Pressure Zone

(This page is intentionally blank)



(Group 4A2)

Section 15102

ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing all eccentric plug valves as required by the Work

and as indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule. Plug valves shall be furnished complete

with actuators and accessories as specified herein, as indicated in the schedule, and as specified

in the Valve and Gate Actuators section.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in




specified, or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the



equipment and materials furnished under this section. If the requirements in this section are

different from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements in the section shall

take precedence.

1-2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all eccentric plug

valves and manual actuators shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA

C517.

1-2.03. Marking. Each valve shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, valve size, and

pressure rating, and the country of origin of the body casting. All markings shall be cast on the

exterior surface of the valve body. An identifying serial number shall be stamped on a

corrosion-resistant plate attached to the valve body.


1-2.05. Permanent Number Plates. All plug valves, except buried or submerged valves, that

have been assigned a number on the drawings or in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule, shall be

provided with a permanent number plate. The location of number plates and the method of

fastening shall be acceptable to Engineer. Numerals shall be at least 1 inch [25 mm] high and

shall be black baked enamel on anodized aluminum plate.


their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

Certified copies of reports covering proof-of-design testing of valves as set forth in Section 5. of

ANSI/AWWA C517, with an affidavit of compliance as indicated in Section 6.3 of C517, shall

be submitted to Engineer before the valves are shipped.



(Group 4A2)



section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS. Eccentric plug valves furnished under this section shall be

manufactured by DeZurik, Pratt, Milliken, Val-Matic or Clow, without exception.

2-2. MATERIALS. Materials used in the manufacture of eccentric plug valves shall be as

indicated:

Body Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or ductile iron,

ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.

Plug Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B; or ductile iron,

ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.

Plug Facing Chloroprene, Neoprene or Buna-N, 70 Type A

durometer hardness in accordance with ASTM D2240.

Body Seat Welded nickel overlay.

Upper and Lower Trunnion

Bearings

Sleeve type; stainless steel or bronze.

Upper Thrust Bearing TFE, Nylatron, or Delrin.

Stem Seal V-type packing or U-cups, Buna-N or TFE.

The following are acceptable shop coatings.




Tneme-Tar", or Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil Sher-

Tar Epoxy".

Epoxy

For Gas Service Ameron “Amercoat 385 Epoxy”, Carboline

“Carboguard 890”, Tnemec “Series N69 Hi-Build

Epoxoline II”, or Plasite "Plasguard 7122”.

For Liquid Service other

than in potable water

facilities

Ameron “Amercoat 385 Epoxy”, Carboline

“Carboguard 890”, or Tnemec “Series N69 Hi-

Build Epoxoline II”.

For Raw or Treated Water

Service in potable water

facilities (NSF certified)

Ameron “Amercoat 400 High Solids Epoxy”,

Carboline “Carboguard 891”, or Tnemec “Series

N140 Pota-Pox Plus”.



(Group 4A2)

2-3. VALVE CONSTRUCTION.

2-3.01. Valve Body. The valve port area of each valve shall be at least 80 percent of the cross

section of the connecting piping for 20 inch [500 mm] and smaller valves and 70 percent for

24 inch [600 mm] and larger valves. Valves shall provide tight shutoff at the rated pressure from

either direction. An adjustable closed position plug stop shall be provided.

Each valve body shall be plainly marked to indicate the seat end. The actual length of 10 inch

[250 mm] and smaller valves shall be within plus or minus 1/16 inch [1.6 mm] of the theoretical

length. The actual length of 12 inch [300 mm] and larger valves shall be within plus or minus

1/8 inch [3 mm] of the theoretical length.

Valve ends shall be compatible with connecting piping. All valves shall have flanged, grooved

or mechanical joint ends as indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule. Flange diameter and

drilling shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Flanges shall be flat faced and finished to true

plane surfaces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch [0.12 mm]. The finished face shall be

normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular variation tolerance of

0.002 inch per foot [0.16 mm per meter] of flange diameter. Grooved end dimensions shall

conform to AWWA C606, Table 5, for rigid joints. When grooved end valves are to be installed

in flanged piping, two flange adapters compatible with the connecting piping shall be provided

with each valve. Mechanical joint ends shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.

Valve bodies shall be rated for a working pressure as indicated on the Eccentric Plug Valve

Schedule.

2-3.02. Plug. The plug shall be of one-piece construction and shall have a cylindrical or

spherical seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the plug shaft. The interference

between the plug face and the body seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall be externally

adjustable in the field with the valve in the line under pressure. Plug surfaces shall be faced with

a resilient material.

2-3.03. Seats. Seats shall be cast in the body and shall have raised, welded-in nickel overlay not

less than 0.050 inch [1.30 mm] thick on all surfaces in contact with the plug face. The overlay

shall be at least 90 percent nickel and have a Brinell hardness of 200 or greater.

2-3.04. Stem Seals. The valve shaft shall be sealed by U-cups or by at least four self-adjusting

chevron type packing rings.

2-4. VALVE ACTUATORS. Requirements for valve actuators shall be as specified herein and

as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuators section. Valve actuators shall be manual.

Geared actuators shall be used for manually operated valves in the following applications:

a. For all 4 inch [100 mm] and larger buried valves.

b. For all 6 inch [200 mm] and larger valves.



(Group 4A2)

c. For all 6 inch [150 mm] valves in throttling or free discharge applications.

d. For all 6 inch [150 mm] valves where the unseating pressure exceeds 25 psi

[170 kPa].

e. For all chainwheel operated valves.

f. For all valves in gas service.

Geared actuators for plug valves not listed in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule shall be rated

for a differential pressure across the valve, on the seating side, of 100 psi [680 kPa] for 8 inch

[200 mm] and smaller valves, 50 psi [340 kPa] for 10 inch [250 mm] and larger valves, and 25

psi [170 kPa] for gas service valves.

2-5. SHOP PAINTING. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces, except bearing and

finished surfaces and stainless steel components of valves and accessories, shall be shop painted

for corrosion protection. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable, provided

it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible with the specified field

painting.

Surfaces shall be painted as follows:

Unfinished Surfaces

Interior Surfaces

For Liquid Service Epoxy.

For Gas Service Epoxy.

Exterior Surfaces of Valves To Be Buried,

Submerged, or Installed in Manholes or Valve

Vaults.

Coal tar epoxy.

Exterior Surfaces of All Other Valves Universal primer.


Interior epoxy coatings shall comply with AWWA C550 and shall be free of holidays. The total

dry film thickness of shop-applied coatings shall be not less than:


Coal Tar Epoxy 15 mils [380 µm]

Epoxy 10 mils [250 µm]

Universal Primer 3 mils [75 µm]

2-6. ACCESSORIES. Requirements for extension stems and stem guides, position indicators,

floor boxes, operating stands, and valve boxes shall be as indicated in the Eccentric Plug Valve

Schedule as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuators section.



(Group 4A2)

2-7. TESTING. Except as modified herein, eccentric plug valves shall be tested in accordance

with Section 5 of ANSI/AWWA C517. Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance

with Section 5.2. The leakage test shall be applied to the seating face of the plug (tending to

unseat the plug) at the rated pressure of the valve.

Each valve shall be leaktight in both directions when closed by the actuator with the maximum

differential pressure applied to the plug as specified in the Eccentric Plug Valve Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Valves will be installed in accordance with Valve Installation section.

3-1.01. Installation Check. An installation check by an authorize representative of the

manufacturer is not required.

.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15104

RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing resilient-seated AWWA gate valves . Resilient-

seated gate valves shall be furnished complete with actuators and accessories as specified herein

and as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuator section.










1-2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all resilient-seated

gate valves shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C509 or ANSI

/AWWA C515.


1-2.04. Permanent Number Plates. Not used.


their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

All valves shall be tested in accordance with Section 5 of the governing standard. Certified

copies of the results of all tests, together with an affidavit of compliance as indicated in Section

6.3 of the governing standard, shall be submitted to Engineer before the valves are shipped.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials used in the

manufacture of resilient-seated gate valves shall conform to the requirements of the governing

standard.

2-1.01. Bronze Components. All bronze valve components in contact with liquid shall contain

less than 16 percent zinc. All aluminum bronze components in contact with liquid shall be

inhibited against dealuminization in accordance with Section 4.2.2.4.3 of ANSI/AWWA C509.



(Group 4A2)

2-1.02. Gaskets. Gaskets shall be free of asbestos and corrosive ingredients.

2-1.03. Shop Coatings.


78HB Coal Tar Epoxy", Carboline "Bitumastic 300

M", Tnemec "46H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar", or

Sherwin-Williams "Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy".

Epoxy Manufacturer’s standard fusion-bonded or liquid

epoxy.

Rust-Preventive Compound As recommended by manufacturer.

2-2. VALVE CONSTRUCTION.

2-2.01. Valve Ends. Valve ends shall be compatible with connecting piping. Tapping valves

shall be compatible with tapping sleeve and ends shall be flange by mechanical joint. Except as

modified or supplemented herein, the ends shall conform to the applicable requirements of the

governing standard.

Flanges shall be finished to true plane surfaces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch [125 µm].

The finished face shall be normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular

variation tolerance of 0.001 inch per inch [1 µm/mm] of flange diameter.

2-2.02. Stem Seals. Valve stems shall be the non-rising type. Stuffing box stem seals shall be

provided for all gate valves with rising stems (outside screw-and-yoke type). O-ring stem seals

shall be provided for all buried gate valves, and for all gate valves with non-rising stems.

2-2.03. Rotation. The direction of rotation of the handwheel or the wrench nut to open the valve

shall be to the left (counterclockwise).

2-2.04. Shop Coating. All interior and exterior ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories

shall be shop coated for corrosion protection. Except as specified below, the valve

manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the

specified coating and is compatible with the specified field coating.

Surfaces shall be coated as follows:

Interior surfaces Epoxy.

Interior surfaces (potable water) Epoxy (NSF certified).

Exterior surfaces of valves to buried, submerged,

or installed in manholes or valve vaults

Epoxy or coal tar epoxy

Exterior surfaces of all other valves Universal primer.

Polished or machined surfaces Rust-preventive compound.



(Group 4A2)

The protective epoxy coating on the interior surfaces of each valve shall be applied in three

coats, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 13 mils [325 µm]. Alternatively, the

manufacturer’s standard coating may be used and the interior surfaces of each valve shall be

subjected to a nondestructive holiday test in accordance with ASTM G62, Method A, and shall

be electrically void-free.

Interior coatings shall comply with AWWA C550. The total dry film thickness of shop-applied

coatings shall be not less than:


Coal Tar Epoxy 15 mils [380 µm].

Epoxy 10 mils [250 µm] or 13 mils [325 µm] where

specified herein.

Universal Primer 3 mils [75 µm].

2-3. VALVE ACTUATORS. Actuators shall be of the manual type with a wrench nut.

Requirements for valve actuators shall be as specified in the Valve and Gate Actuator section.

2-4. ACCESSORIES. When the drawings indicate the need for extension stems, stem guides,

position indicators, floor boxes, valve boxes, or operating stands, refer to the Valve and Gate

Actuator section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Valves will be installed in accordance with Valve Installation section.

3-1.01. Installation Check. An installation check by an authorize representative of the

manufacturer is not required.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15108

AIR RELEASE VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing air release valves as required by the Work, and as

indicated in the Air Release Schedule.










1-2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all valves furnished

under this section shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C512.

1-2.03. Permanent Number Plates. All valves that have been assigned a number on the drawings

or in the Industrial Butterfly Valve Schedule, shall be provided with a permanent number plate.

The location of number plates and the method of fastening shall be acceptable to Engineer.

Numerals shall be at least 1 inch high and shall be black baked enamel on anodized aluminum

plate.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly drawings, together with detailed specifications and

data covering materials used and accessories forming a part of the valves furnished, shall be

submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.



section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. CONSTRUCTION. Air release valves shall be GA Industries “929BW”, APCO

“400SBW”, Val-Matic “48ABW”, Crispin “S20 SB”, or ARI “ARI-S-020”.

A stainless steel isolation valve shall be provided.



(Group 4A2)

2-2. MATERIALS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials of construction shall

comply with the governing standard. The use of stressed thermoplastic components will not be

acceptable.

Valve Trim 316 stainless steel.

Float 316 stainless steel.

2-3. SHOP PAINTING. Not used.

2-4. SHUTOFF VALVES. A shutoff valve shall be provided in the piping leading to each air

release valve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Air release valves will be installed in accordance with the Valve

Installation section.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Schedule 15108-S01

Air Release Valves Schedule

1.000 Requirements

1.010 Valve Number VR-3006-01,02,03,04,06

1.011 Quantity 4 total

1.020 Type (1) ARV

1.030 Location (2) Discharge Piping

1.040 Inlet Size

inches 2

mm

1.050 Outlet Size

inches 2

mm

1.060 Orifice Size

inches 3/32

mm

1.070 Inlet Type (3) T

1.080 Outlet Type (4) T

1.090 Working

Pressure

psi 75

kPa



(Group 4A2)

Notes:

(1) Abbreviations for types are as indicated:

ARV Air Release Valve

CAV Combination Air Valve

ARVR Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valve

(2) Abbreviations for locations are as indicated:

IP In-plant

IV In-vault

(3) Abbreviations for inlet types are as indicated:

T Threaded, ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT

125F Flanged, ANSI/ASME B16.1, Class 125


(4) Abbreviations for outlet types are as indicated:

T Threaded, ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT


PH Protective hood

End of Schedule



(Group 4A2)

Section 15130

PRESSURE GAUGES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers analog dial-type gauges and accessories to be furnished and

installed at the locations indicated on the drawings and as specified in the Gauge Schedule at the

end of this section.

Gauges to be furnished by an equipment supplier, either with an item of equipment or as a

component of an equipment package, are covered in the applicable equipment section.

Gauge piping and fittings are covered in other sections.

1-2. GENERAL.




1-2.02. Governing Standard. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all gauges shall conform

to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B40.1.

1-2.03. Accuracy Grade. Unless otherwise specified, gauge accuracy shall be ANSI Grade 2A or

better. Overall accuracy for diaphragm seal protected and liquid-filled gauges shall be ANSI Grade

A or better.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings or catalog cuts, together with detailed specifications and

data covering materials used, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. GAUGE CONSTRUCTION. Gauges shall be stainless steel dial type with moving stainless

pointer, liquid filled, stem mounted, range 0 to 30 psi, Buna-N multi-function plug with removable

nipple, , shatterproof sealed case window with Buna-N gasket, silicone filled, 316 stainless steel

Bourdon tube, ½” NPT stainless steel stem, accuracy +/- 1% of space. Pressure gauges shall be

Ashcroft “Model 40-10090-60”, H.O. Trerice Co. “700 LFSS-G-40-FSL 250 PSI 100”, Winter

Gauges “Q770 0-60 PSI”, or Palmer Gauges “45-S-W-Q-60#-J”..

The dial shall be 4 inches in diameter, with white background and black markings. The units of

measurement shall be indicated on the dial face. Subdivisions of the scale shall conform to the

requirements of the governing standard. Pointer travel shall be not less than 200 degrees nor more

than 270 degrees of arc.



(Group 4A2)

Unless otherwise indicated, pressure gauges shall measure in psig. All gauges shall have a

suitable range to give mid-scale readings under normal conditions

2-2. GAUGE ACCESSORIES.

2-2.01. Isolation Valves. Each gauge shall be provided with a threaded end ball-type shutoff valve

as specified in the Miscellaneous Ball Valves section.

2-2.02. Gauge Isolators.

2-2.02.01. In-line Diaphragm Seals. In-line, flow-through type diaphragm seals shall be provided

where indicated on the drawings.

For in-line diaphragm seals in pipe 4 inches and larger, flange type gauge isolators shall be

provided. Diaphragm seals shall be Ashcroft “Type 200”, H.O. Trerice “”01FF”, or Winter “D950

top D954 bottom”.

Each diaphragm seal and the gauge served shall be factory assembled, filled with a suitable fluid,

and calibrated as a unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Gauges shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings.

Installation configurations shall conform to the requirements of the detail indicated on the drawings.

All gauges and diaphragm seals shall be installed in the vertical upright position. Threaded

connections shall be assembled using teflon thread tape or teflon thread sealer, as specified in the

Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section. Teflon thread sealer shall not be used

for liquid oxygen or oxygen gas piping. All connections shall be free from leaks.

Lines shall be purged of trapped air at gauge locations prior to installation of the gauge or

diaphragm seal.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15140

PIPE SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of pipe hangers, brackets, and

supports. Pipe supports shall be furnished complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods,

washers, and other accessories. This section also covers the spacing of expansion joints in

piping systems. Expansion joint products and materials are covered in the respective piping

sections.

Concrete and fabricated steel supports shall be as indicated on the drawings, as specified in other

sections, or, in the absence of such requirements, as permitted by Engineer.

This section covers pipe supports for the following pipe materials:

Cast or ductile iron

Stainless Steel

Hot-dip galvanized steel

Steel (other)

PVC/CPVC Schedule 80 (other)

FRP (LP)

1-2. GENERAL. Pipe supports, anchors, and expansion joints have been indicated on the

drawings in certain locations, but no attempt has been made to indicate every pipe support,

anchor, and expansion joint. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to provide a complete system

of pipe supports, to provide expansion joints, and to anchor all piping, in accordance with the

requirements specified herein. Additional pipe supports may be required adjacent to expansion

joints, couplings, or valves. When supports are shown on the drawings, Contractor shall not

relocate supports without Engineer’s approval.

All piping shall be rigidly supported and anchored so that there is no movement or visible

sagging between supports.

Pipe supports and expansion joints are not required in buried piping, but concrete blocking or

other suitable anchorage shall be provided as indicated on the drawings or specified in other

sections.

Piping support system components shall comply with specified piping code requirements.






(Group 4A2)

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete data and catalog cuts or drawings covering fabricated pipe

supports, fabricated inserts, and stainless steel, galvanized, and copper- and plastic-coated pipe

supports shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section.

Data shall include a listing of the intended use and general location of each item submitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe supports shall comply with ANSI/MSS

SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Materials of construction for fabricated steel supports are covered in the

Structural and Miscellaneous Metals section. All pipe support materials shall be packaged as

necessary to ensure delivery in satisfactory condition.

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, pipe supports shall be fabricated of

manufacturer's standard materials and provided with manufacturer's standard finish.

Design loads for inserts, brackets, clamps, and other support items shall not exceed the

manufacturer's recommended loads.

Pipe supports shall be manufactured for the sizes and types of pipe to which they are applied.

Strap hangers will not be acceptable. Threaded rods shall have sufficient threading to permit the

maximum adjustment available in the support item. Continuously threaded rod is not acceptable

for hanger rods over 12 inches in length.

Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, the use of supports which rely on stressed

thermoplastic components to support the pipe will not be acceptable.

Contact between dissimilar metals, including contact between stainless steel and carbon steel,

shall be prevented. Supports for brass or copper pipe or tubing shall be copper plated. Portions

of pipe supports which come into contact with other metals that are dissimilar shall be rubber or

vinyl coated.

Stainless steel supports shall be furnished, and shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.

Stainless steel supports fabricated by welding shall be AISI Type 304L or 316L.

Hot-dip galvanized supports shall be furnished and shall be in accordance with ASTM A153 and

A385.

Pipe support types and application shall comply with Table 1.

2-2. WIND AND SEISMIC LOADS. For pipe supports that are designed by the Contractor,

wind and seismic loads shall be considered in the design. The applicable building code and

design criteria are included in the structural general notes on the drawings.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. APPLICATION. Concrete inserts or anchor bolts shall be used to support piping from new

cast-in-place concrete. Expansion anchors shall be used to fasten supports to existing concrete

and masonry.

Anchorage shall be provided to resist thrust due to temperature changes, changes in diameter or

direction, or dead-ending. Anchors shall be located as specified to force expansion and

contraction movement to occur at expansion joints, loops, or elbows, and as needed to prevent

excessive bending stresses and opening of mechanical couplings. Anchorage for temperature

changes shall be centered between elbows and mechanical joints used as expansion joints.

Anchorage for bellows type expansion joints may be located adjacent to the joint.

When expansion joints are required, pipe guides shall be provided adjacent to bellows type

expansion joints. Guides will not be required where mechanical couplings are permitted as

expansion joints. Guides shall be located on both sides of expansion joints, except where

anchors are adjacent to the joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, one guide shall be

within four pipe diameters from the joint and a second guide within 14 pipe diameters from the

first guide. Pipe supports shall allow adequate movement; pipe guides shall not be used for

support. Pipe guides shall be provided at locations as recommended by the manufacturer.

Pipe supports for insulated cold piping systems shall be sized for the outside diameter of the

insulated pipe, and an insulation protection shield shall be installed between the support and the

insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed between the pipe and the insulation shields

for piping larger than 2 inches or when needed to prevent crushing of the insulation. Inserts shall

be of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed.

Insulated hot piping systems shall be supported by clevises, clamps, support saddles, or rollers.

Pipe clamps shall be attached directly to the pipe. Support saddles and rollers shall be sized for

the outside diameter of the insulated pipe, and an insulation protection saddle shall be installed at

the support.

When supports for the FRP piping systems are in contact with less than 180 degrees of the pipe

surface or when the width of the support is less than one-third the nominal pipe diameter

(4 inches minimum), an FRP or steel saddle, shaped to the outside diameter of the pipe, shall be

bonded to at least the bottom 120 degrees of the pipe.

3-2. TYPES OF SUPPORTS. The specific products for pipe supports shall be as indicated in

Table 1 for the specified type and size of support.

TABLE 1 - TYPES OF SUPPORTS

Description and Service

Type

MSS SP 69

(Note 1) Other

Hangers

2-1/2 inch [63 mm] and

smaller pipe



(Group 4A2)



Type

MSS SP 69

(Note 1) Other

For hot and cold

insulated piping

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100" or Anvil "260".

Other services

J-style 5 B-Line "B3690", Anvil "67", or

Unistrut "J Hanger".


3 Through 10 inch [75

through 250 mm] pipe

For hot insulated

piping

Double bolt 3 B-Line "B3144" or Anvil "295".

For cold insulated

piping


For uninsulated cold

piping

Clamp 4 B-Line "3140" or Anvil "212".


Other services

Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100" or Anvil "260"

for steel pipe; B-Line "B3102" or

Anvil "590" for cast iron pipe.

12 inch [300 mm] pipe

Clevis or saddle 1 See drawings.

14 inch [350 mm] and

larger pipe

Saddle -- See drawings.

Concrete Inserts, Steel


smaller pipe

18 Channel 12 ga [2.66 mm thick],

galv, 1-5/8 by 1-3/8 inches [41.3

by 34.9 mm], min. 8 inches

[200 mm] long, anchor lugs on

4 inch [100 mm] centers, at least

three lugs, end caps, and filler

strip.


larger pipe, fabricated

insert, except as noted

-- See drawings.

Beam Clamps, Malleable Iron or

Steel, 12 inch [300 mm] and

smaller pipe

21 B-Line "3050" and "3055" or

Anvil "133" and "134".

28, 29 Anvil "292".

30 B-Line "3054" or Anvil "228".



(Group 4A2)



Type

MSS SP 69

(Note 1) Other

Side Beam Bracket 34 B-Line "B3062" or Anvil "202".

Wall Supports and Frames,

Steel, 12 inch [300 mm] and

smaller pipe (Note 2)

Brackets 32 B-Line "B3066" or Anvil "195".

33 B-Line "B3067" or Anvil "199".

Prefabricated channels -- 12 ga [2.66 mm thick], galv,

1-5/8 inches [41.3 by 41.3 mm],

with suitable brackets and pipe

clamps.

Offset pipe clamp,

1-1/2 inch [38 mm] and

smaller pipe

-- Galv, 1-1/4 by 3/16 inch [32 by

4.7 mm] steel, with 3/8 inch

[9.5 mm] bolts.

Offset pipe clamp, 2 to

3-1/2 inch [50 to 88 mm]

pipe

-- Galv, 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch [32 by

6 mm] steel, with 3/8 inch

[9.5 mm] bolts.

Floor Supports, Steel or Cast

Iron

6 inch [150 mm] and

smaller pipe

37 (with

base) B-Line "B3090" or Anvil "259".

8 through 24 inch [200 to

600 mm] pipe

38 B-Line "B3093" or Anvil "264".

Pipe Alignment Guides -- B-Line "B3281" through

"B3287" or Anvil "255".

Turnbuckles Steel 13 B-Line "B3202" or Anvil "230".

Hanger Rods, Carbon Steel,

Threaded Both Ends, 3/8 inch

[10 mm] minimum size

-- B-Line "B3205" or Anvil "140".

Weldless Eye Nut, steel 17 B-Line "B3200" or Anvil "290".

Insulation Protection Saddle 39 B-Line "B3160 Series" or Anvil

"160 Series".

Insulation Protection Shield 40 B-Line "B3151" or Anvil "167".

Table 1 Notes:

1. MSS SP-69 supports and hangers are illustrated on Figure 1-15140.

2. Pipe clamps or other devices which rely on the application of a clamping

force to the supported pipe in order to maintain the clamp position or location

in a prefabricated channel or track will not be acceptable for use with

nonmetallic pipe or tubing.

3-3. SUPPORT SPACINGS. Pipe supports and expansion joints shall be spaced in accordance

with Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5. The types of pipes to be supported are as specified herein. Table 2



(Group 4A2)

covers spacings for the standard operating conditions specified for each pipe material. Tables 3

and 4 cover PVC and FRP pipe spacings where operating conditions are in excess of the

temperature and specific gravity requirements covered in Table 2. Table 5 covers PVC and FRP

pipe which carries air or liquids with a specific gravity other than 1.0.

TABLE 2 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACINGS AT STANDARD

TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES

Type of Pipe Pipe Support

Max Spacing

Max Run

Without

Expansion

Joint, Loop, or

Bend

(Note 1)

Expansion

Joint Max

Spacing

(Note 2)

Type of

Expansion

Joints

feet [m] feet [m] feet [m]

Cast iron or Ductile

iron

15 [4.5] 80 [24.4] 80 [24.4] Note 6

Steel, for other services

1-1/4 inch

[31 mm] and

smaller

7 [2.1] 30 [9.1] 100 [30.5] Note 3

1-1/2 to 4 inch

[38 to 100 mm]

10 [3.0] 30 [9.1] 100 [30.5] Note 3

Over 4 inch

[100 mm]

15 [4.5] 80 [24.4] 80 [24.4] Note 6

Stainless steel

1-1/4 inch

[31 mm] and

smaller

7 [2.1] 30 [9.1] 100 [30.5] Note 3

1-1/2 to 4 inch

[38 to 100 mm]

10 [3.0] 30 [9.1] 100 [30.5] Note 3

Over 4 inch

[100 mm]

15 [4.5] 80 [24.4] 80 [24.5] Note 3

PVC, Schedule 80, for other services at a maximum temperature of 100°F [38°C]

and a maximum specific gravity of 1.0.

1/8 and

1/4 inch [3 and

6 mm]

Continuous

Support

20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

1/2 inch

[13 mm]

4 [1.2] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

3/4 inch

[19 mm]

4-1/2 [1.3] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

1 and

1-1/4 inch [25

and 31 mm]

5 [1.5] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

1-1/2 and

2 inch [38 and

50 mm]

5-1/2 [1.6] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3



(Group 4A2)

TABLE 2 – MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACINGS AT STANDARD

TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES

Type of Pipe Pipe Support

Max Spacing

Max Run

Without

Expansion

Joint, Loop, or

Bend

(Note 1)

Expansion

Joint Max

Spacing

(Note 2)

Type of

Expansion

Joints

feet [m] feet [m] feet [m]

2-1/2 inch

[63 mm]

6 [1.8] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

3 inch

[75 mm]

7 [2.1] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

4 inch

[100 mm]

7-1/2 [2.3] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

6 inch

[150 mm]

8-1/2 [2.6] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

8 inch

[200 mm]

9-1/2 [2.8] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

10 inch

[250 mm]

10 [3.0] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

12 inch

[300 mm]

11 [3.3] 20 [6.1] 60 [18.3] Note 3

FRP, for low pressure and odor control pipe at a maximum temperature of 150°F

[66°C] and a maximum specific gravity of 1.0.

1 inch

[25 mm]

4 [1.2] 60 [18.3] 100 [30.5] Note 3

1-1/2 inch

[38 mm]

4-1/2 [1.3] 60 [18.3] 100 [30.5] Note 3

2 inch

[50 mm]

5-1/2 [1.6] 60 [18.3] 100 [30.5] Note 3

3 inch

[76 mm]

6 [1.8] 60 [18.3] 100 [30.5] Note 3

4 inch

[100 mm]

6-1/2 [2] 40 [12.2] 100 [30.5] Note 3

6 inch

[150 mm]

7-1/2 [2.3] 40 [12.2] 100 [30.5] Note 3

8 inch

[200 mm]

8-1/2 [2.6] 40 [12.2] 100 [30.5] Note 3

10 inch

[250 mm]

9-1/2 [2.8] 40 [12.2] 100 [30.5] Note 3

12 inch

[300 mm] and

larger

10 [3.0] 40 [12.2] 100 [30.5] Note 3

Table 2 Notes:



(Group 4A2)

1. Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, an expansion joint shall be

provided in each straight run of pipe having an overall length between loops

or bends exceeding the maximum run specified herein.

2. Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, the spacing between expansion

joints in any straight pipe run shall not exceed the maximum spacing

specified herein.

3. Expansion joint fittings are specified in the respective piping procurement

sections.

4. At least two properly padded supports for each pipe section.

5. At least one support for each pipe section.

6. Expansion joints shall be mechanical couplings.

7. No expansion joints are required.

8. Supports for 5 and 10 foot [1.5 and 3 m] long pipe sections shall be located

within 18 inches [460 mm] of each joint. Supports shall be positioned to

maintain the piping alignment and to prevent the piping from sagging.

3-3.01. Temperature Adjustments for PVC Pipe. Not used.

3-3.02. Temperature Adjustments for FRP Pipe. Not used.

3-3.03. Specific Gravity Adjustments for PVC and FRP Pipe. Not used.

3-4. INSTALLATION.

3-4.01. General. All piping shall be supported in a manner which will prevent undue stress on

any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes

in direction or elevation, adjacent to flexible couplings, and where otherwise shown. Pipe

supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas.

Where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines, trapeze hangers may be used

in lieu of individual hangers. Trapeze assembly shall consist of structure attachments as

previously specified with rod size dependent upon total weight supported. Spacing of assemblies

shall be determined by the minimum pipe size included in the group supported. Trapeze

horizontal assemblies shall be structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent

measurable sag between rods. All lines shall be attached to the horizontal with intermediate pipe

guides and U-bolts or one-hole clamps. Pre-engineered support equipment may be used when

selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

No copper pipe shall contact a pipe support or hanger of dissimilar metal. Hangers and supports

for copper pipe shall be copper-plated, plastic coated, or copper pipe shall be galvanically

isolated using Neoprene strips or other material as approved.

No piping shall be supported from the pipe above.

Horizontal piping hanger support rods shall attach to steel beams with center-loading I-clamps,

or welded beam clips. Hanger support rods shall attach to concrete slabs or beams with inserts.



(Group 4A2)

Anchorage shall be provided to resist both lateral and longitudinal seismic forces. Seismic

forces shall be calculated assuming the pipes are full.

3-4.02. Inserts. Reference building structural concrete drawings for concrete inserts. When not

provided as part of the building concrete structure, provide inserts for suspending hangers from

reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts flush with the slab surface.

Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with

recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. X-ray locate

existing reinforcing rods before drilling.

3-4.03. Pipe Hangers and Supports. Hanger rod sizing for copper pipe and plastic pipe shall be

same as for steel pipe. Install hangers to provide a minimum 1/2 inch [13 mm] space between

finished covering and adjacent work.

A hanger shall be placed with 18 inches of each horizontal elbow, and on both sides of all piping

accessories and valves weighing 20 lbs [9 kg] or more.

Hangers shall have 1-1/2 inches minimum vertical adjustment.

Support horizontal cast iron, ductile iron and no-hub piping systems adjacent to each joint.

Support vertical piping at every floor using riser clamps.

Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

Hanger and hanger components shall be sized specifically for the pipe size it is to be used on.

3-5. PLACEMENT. Unless closer spacing is indicated on the drawings, the maximum spacing

for pipe supports and expansion joints shall be as indicated in Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Rubber hose and flexible tubing shall be provided with continuous angle or channel support.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or acceptable to Engineer, piping shall be supported

approximately 1-1/2 inches out from the face of walls and at least 3 inches below ceilings.

End of Section

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FIG 1-15140(B)



(Group 4A2)

Section 15180

VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers furnishing manual and powered valves and gate actuators and

accessories as specified herein.




Actuators shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on the drawings,


latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of actuators.




1-2.02. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all powered actuators

shall conform to applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C540.

Except as modified or supplemented herein, all manual and cylinder actuators for butterfly and

eccentric plug valves shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C504.

Except as modified or supplemented herein, all manual actuators for ball valves shall conform to

the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C507.

Except as modified or supplemented herein, all manual actuators for sluice and slide gates shall

conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C560.

1-2.03. Power Supply. Power supply to electric actuators will be 480-volts three phase.

1-2.04. Marking. Each actuator shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, model number,

and the country of origin. An identifying serial number shall be stamped on a corrosion-resistant

plate attached to the actuator.

1-2.05. Temporary Number Plates. Each actuator shall be factory tagged or marked to identify

the actuator and the applicable valve or gate by number or service as indicated in the valve or

gate schedule.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the actuators and

their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittal

drawings shall clearly indicate the country of origin of each actuator and its components.



(Group 4A2)

The drawings shall include separate wiring diagrams for each electrically operated or controlled

actuator and the electrical control equipment. Each actuator drawing shall be identified with the

respective valve number or name.

For electric or cylinder actuators, certified copies of reports covering proof-of-design testing of

the actuators as set forth in Section 5 of ANSI/AWWA C540, together with an affidavit of

compliance as indicated in Section 6.3 of ANSI/AWWA C540, shall be submitted to Engineer

before the actuators are shipped.



section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2-1.01. General. Actuators and appurtenances shall be designed for the conditions and

requirements as indicated in the respective valve and gate sections.

Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout the design, especially in the design of parts

subject to intermittent or alternating stresses. In general, working stresses shall not exceed

one-third of the yield point or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of each material.

2-1.02. Valve Actuators. Each actuator shall be designed to open or close the valve under all

operating conditions. Actuators shall be designed for the maximum pressure differential across

the valve and maximum velocities through the valve where indicated in the respective valve

schedules.

Valve actuators shall be provided and adjusted by the valve manufacturer. Actuator mounting

arrangements and positions shall facilitate operation and maintenance and shall be determined by

the valve manufacturer unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or directed by Engineer.

When valves are to be buried, submerged, or installed in vaults, the actuators and accessories

shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of water. The design water depth shall be as indicated in

the respective valve schedules but not less than 20 feet [6.1 m].

2-1.03. Gate Actuators. Actuators shall be sized to produce the torque or thrust required to

operate the gate when subject to the seating and unseating operating heads as indicated in the

respective gate schedules.

Both the design head and the operating head shall be measured from the surface of the liquid to

the center line of the gate.

2-1.04. Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be provided as indicated on the drawings or in the

valve and gate schedules.



(Group 4A2)

For manual or cylinder type actuators, each limit switch shall be heavy duty type, with a cast

NEMA Type 4 enclosure, a spring return roller lever, and four isolated contacts (two normally

open and two normally closed) rated 10 amperes at 120 to 480 volts ac and 5 amperes at

125 volts dc. The switches shall be Allen Bradley "802T" or Square D "9007 Type C".

Limit switches for programmable and standard electric actuators shall be as indicated in their

respective paragraphs.

2-2. MATERIALS. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials used in the

manufacture of actuators shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C504 and C540.

2-3. VALVE MANUAL ACTUATORS.

2-3.01. General. Manual actuators of the types listed in the valve specifications or schedules

shall be provided by the valve manufacturer.

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, each geared manual actuator shall be equipped with an

operating handwheel.

The direction of rotation of the wheel, wrench nut, or lever to open the valve shall be to the left

(counterclockwise). Each valve body or actuator shall have cast thereon the word "Open" and an

arrow indicating the direction to open.

The housing of traveling-nut type actuators shall be fitted with a removable cover which shall

permit inspection and maintenance of the operating mechanism without removing the actuator

from the valve. Travel limiting devices shall be provided inside the actuator for the open and

closed positions. Travel limiting stop nuts or collars installed on the reach rod of traveling-nut

type operating mechanisms shall be field adjustable and shall be locked in position by means of a

removable roll pin, cotter pin, or other positive locking device. The use of stop nuts or

adjustable shaft collars which rely on clamping force or setscrews to prevent rotation of the nut

or collar on the reach rod will not be acceptable.

Each actuator shall be designed so that shaft seal leakage cannot enter the actuator housing.

Valves for throttling service shall be equipped with an infinitely variable locking device or a

totally enclosed gear actuator.

Actuators shall produce the required torque with a maximum pull of 80 lbs [356 N] on the lever,

handwheel, or chain. Actuator components shall withstand, without damage, a pull of 200 lbs

[890 N] on the handwheel or chainwheel or an input of 300 foot-lbs [407 J] on the operating nut.

2-3.02. Handwheels. Handwheel diameters shall be at least 8 inches [200 mm] but not more

than 24 inches [600 mm] for 30 inch [750 mm] and smaller valves and not more than 30 inches

[750 mm] for 36 inch [900 mm] and larger valves.

2-3.03. Chainwheels. Unless otherwise specified in the valve schedules, all valves with center

lines more than 7'-6" [2.3 m] above the floor shall be provided with chainwheels and operating

chains. Each chainwheel operated valve shall be equipped with a chain guide which will permit



(Group 4A2)

rapid handling of the operating chain without "gagging" of the wheel and will also permit

reasonable side pull on the chain. Suitable extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to prevent

interference of the chain with adjacent piping or equipment. Operating chains shall be hot-dip

galvanized or zinc plated carbon steel and shall be looped to extend to within 4 feet [1.2 m] of

the floor below the valve.

2-3.04. Levers. Levers shall be capable of being locked in at least five intermediate positions

between fully open and fully closed. In any building or structure containing lever operated

valves, at least two operating levers shall be provided for each size and type of lever operated

valve.

2-3.05. Chain Levers. Suitable actuator extensions shall be provided, if necessary, to prevent

interference of the chain with adjacent piping or equipment. Operating chains shall be hot-dip

galvanized carbon steel and shall be looped to extend to within 4 feet [1.2 m] of the floor below

the valve.

2-3.06. Wrench Nuts. Unless otherwise specified in the valve schedules or on the drawings,

wrench nuts shall be provided on all buried valves and on all valves that are to be operated

through floor boxes. Unless otherwise directed by Owner, all wrench nuts shall comply with

Section 4.4.13 of AWWA C500. At least two operating keys shall be furnished for operation of

the wrench nut operated valves.

2-3.07. Operating Stands. Operating stands shall be provided in the locations indicated on the

drawings or as indicated in the valve and gate schedules. Operating stands shall support the

handwheel approximately 36 inches [900 mm] above the floor. A sleeve made from standard

weight galvanized steel pipe shall be provided for the opening in the floor beneath each

operating stand. When stems are 10 feet [3 m] or longer, a suitable thrust bearing shall be

provided in each operating stand to carry the weight of the extension stem.

2-3.08. Wall Brackets. Wall brackets shall be provided to support manual actuators in the

locations indicated on the drawings or in the respective valve schedules. The horizontal face of

the bracket shall be predrilled to accept the actuator and the stem without modification. The top

of the bracket shall extend sufficiently to bear on and transfer thrust loads to the top of the

supporting structure.

2-4. GATE MANUAL ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-5. PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRIC ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-6. STANDARD ELECTRIC ACTUATORS.

2-6.01. General. Standard electric actuators as listed in the valve and gate schedules

(specification 11291) shall be provided by the valve or gate manufacturer.

Standard electric actuators for 12 inch [300 mm] and smaller butterfly valves and eccentric plug

valves shall be quarter-turn type and shall be Auma "SGBV05" through "SGBV12",

EIM “Series P, Q, or R”, Limitorque "LY", or Rotork "AQ", without exception.



(Group 4A2)

All other standard electric actuators shall be multiturn type and shall be Auma "SABV07.1"

through "SABV48.1", EIM “Series 2000”, Limitorque "L120", or Rotork "A Range", without

exception.

Standard electric actuators produced by other manufacturers are not acceptable.

Each standard electric actuator shall be furnished complete with a motor, gearing, handwheel,

limit switches and torque sensors, lubricants, heating elements, wiring, and terminals. Each

actuator shall be constructed as a self-contained unit with a cast iron or aluminum alloy housing,

of a type as indicated in the valve and gate schedules, and shall be integrally assembled on the

applicable valve or gate by the valve or gate manufacturer.

Actuators shall be designed to cycle the valve or gate from the fully open to the fully closed

position or the reverse in approximately 60 seconds or as indicated in the valve and gate

schedules.

Actuator motors may be mounted horizontally adjacent to or vertically above the reduction

gearing. All gearing shall be oil or grease lubricated.

2-6.02. Motors. Motors shall be totally enclosed, high torque design made expressly for valve

actuator service, capable of operating the valve under full differential pressure for two complete

strokes or one complete cycle of travel without overheating. Motors shall be designed in

accordance with NEMA standards and shall operate successfully at any voltage within

10 percent above or below rated voltage. Motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated.

2-6.03. Power Gearing. Power gearing shall consist of hardened steel spur or helical gears and

alloy bronze or hardened steel worm gear, all suitably lubricated, designed for 100 percent

overload, and effectively sealed against entrance of foreign matter. Steel gears shall be hardened

to at least 350 Brinell. Planetary or cycloidal gearing or aluminum, mild steel, or nonmetallic

gears will not be acceptable. Gearing shall be designed to be self-locking so that actuation of a

torque switch by a torque overload condition will not allow the actuator to restart until the torque

overload has been eliminated. If a secondary gear box is required, it shall be designed to

withstand the locked rotor torque of the actuator.

2-6.04. Handwheel Mechanism. The handwheel shall not rotate during motor operation. During

handwheel operation the motor shall not affect the actuator operation. The actuator shall be

responsive to electrical power and control at all times and, when under electrical control, shall

instantly disengage the handwheel. The handwheel shall rotate counterclockwise to open the

valve. An arrow indicating the opening direction and the word "Open" shall be cast on the

handwheel. The force required to operate the handwheel shall not exceed 80 lbs [350 N]. The

handwheel shall have a padlockable declutch lever.

2-6.05. Torque Sensing. Torque and thrust loads in both closing and opening directions shall be

limited by a torque sensing device. Each torque sensing device shall be provided with an

adjustment setting indicator. The adjustment shall permit a variation of approximately

40 percent in torque setting. Switches shall have a rating of not less than 6 amperes at 120 volts

ac and 0.5 ampere at 115 volts dc.



(Group 4A2)

2-6.06. Limit Switches. Each standard electric actuator shall be designed to be readily field

adaptable for four limit switch assemblies. Each switch assembly shall consist of at least three

separate limit switches, shall be operated by the driving mechanism, and shall be independently

adjustable to trip at any point at and between the fully open and fully closed valve positions. All

switches shall have an inductive contact rating of not less than 6 amperes at 120 volts ac,

3 amperes at 240 volts ac, 1.5 amperes at 480 volts ac, and 0.5 ampere at 115 volts dc.

Each quarter-turn actuator shall be provided with end-of-travel limit switches in addition to four

spdt switches, each independently adjustable at any point of valve travel.

2-6.07. Position Transmitter. When indicated in the valve and gate schedules, actuators shall be

provided with an electronic type position transmitter. The transmitter output shall be an isolated

4-20 mA dc capable of driving an external load of 0 to 500 ohms. Accuracy of the transmitted

signal shall be ±2 percent of span. Repeatability and hysteresis shall be within 1 percent. The

transmitter shall transmit to a remote position indicator which is specified in the Instrumentation

section.

2-6.08. Heating Elements. Space heating elements shall be provided to prevent condensation in

the motor and limit switch housing. Heating elements shall be rated 120 volts ac. Heaters shall

be continuously energized.

2-6.09. Terminal Facilities. Terminal facilities for connection to motor leads, switches, position

transmitter, and heating elements shall be provided in readily accessible terminal compartments.

Each terminal compartment shall have at least two openings for external electrical conduits, one

sized at least 3/4 inch [19 mm] and the other at least 1-1/4 inches [31 mm]. Each terminal

compartment shall be large enough to allow easy routing and termination of fifteen 12 AWG

[4 mm2] conductors.

2-6.10. Controller. Each valve or gate shall be furnished with a reversing controller located

inside the actuator enclosure and shall have controller devices as indicated in the valve and gate

schedules. The controller shall be equipped with:

a. A motor overload protective device in each phase or solid state motor protection.

b. A space heater element, rated 120 volts ac, sized to be continuously energized for

prevention of condensation within the controller enclosure.

c. A fused control power circuit taken from one power lead on the load side of the

breaker and line side of the reversing starter to ground. If power supply is greater

than 120 volts ac, a control power transformer with fused secondary, with volt-

ampere capacity suitable for starter control plus continuous service to space heater

elements in motor housing, limit switch compartment, and controller enclosure.

d. A terminal block with connectors for all external controls. All leads from the

actuator motor and limit switch assembly shall be routed to terminal connections

in the controller for external connections to all other control devices.

e. Auxiliary control contacts as indicated in the electrical schematics.



(Group 4A2)

Reversing controllers shall be both mechanically and electrically interlocked and shall be

provided with the necessary direct-operated auxiliary contacts for required interlocking and

control.

Valve controllers shall be expressly selected for long life and reliable, low maintenance service

under rugged service conditions.

2-6.11. Control Module. Valves or gates indicated for modulating service in the valve and gate

schedules shall be provided with a control module for position modulating type service. The

control module shall be mounted within the valve actuator limit switch housing. The module

shall accept a standard 4-20 mA dc analog input signal with a load impedance of not greater than

400 ohms. The control module shall contain adjustments for span, zero, gain, and deadband.

The actuator shall have a slide-wire type position feedback potentiometer which provides a

position feedback signal to the control module.

2-6.11.01. Control Performance. For any operating torque within the specified range of the

valve actuator, the valve and actuator shall perform within these specified limits:

Linearity Linearity of actual valve position as compared to demand signal

shall be within ±4 percent of span over the entire operating range.

Repeatability For any repeated demand signal to the valve actuator, the actual

valve position shall be repeated.

Deadband Deadband of the valve actuator shall be adjustable from 1 to

10 percent of span.

Hysteresis For any repeated demand signal to the valve actuator, from either

an increasing or a decreasing direction, the actual valve position

shall be repeated within 1 degree of valve shaft rotation.

2-7. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-8. AIR CYLINDER ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-9. AIR-OIL CYLINDER ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-10. PORTABLE ELECTRIC ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-11. PORTABLE HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS. Not used.

2-12. ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES.

2-12.01. Extension Stems. Extension stems and stem guides shall be furnished when indicated

in the respective valve schedules, indicated on the drawings, or otherwise required for proper

valve operation. Extension stems shall be of solid steel and shall be not smaller in diameter than

the stem of the actuator shaft. Extension stems shall be connected to the actuator with a single

Lovejoy "Type D" universal joint with grease-filled protective boot. All stem connections shall

be pinned.



(Group 4A2)

At least two stem guides shall be furnished with each extension stem, except for buried valves.

Stem guides shall be of cast iron, bronze bushed, and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide

spacing shall not exceed 100 times the stem diameter or 10 feet [3 m], whichever is smaller. The

top stem guide shall be designed to carry the weight of the extension stem. The extension stem

shall be provided with a collar pinned to the stem and bearing against the stem thrust guide.

Extension stems for chemical resistant butterfly valves located in drainage sumps shall be the

two-piece type with stainless steel stem, PVC housing, wall support, and collar. Unless otherwise

indicated on the drawings, the length of the stem extension shall be as necessary to position the

valve operator 12 inches above the maximum liquid level in the immediate area.

Extension stems for buried valve actuators shall extend to within 6 inches [150 mm] of the

ground surface, shall be centered in the valve box using spacers, and shall be equipped with a

wrench nut.

Extension stems for buried valve actuators shall be provided with position indicators as specified

in the valve schedules.

2-12.02. Position Indicators. Unless otherwise specified, each valve actuator shall be provided

with a position indicator to display the position of the plug or disc relative to the body seat

opening.

For quarter turn plug, ball, or cone type valves installed in interior locations, the indicating

pointer shall be mounted on the outer end of the valve operating shaft extension and shall operate

over an indicating scale on the operating mechanism cover. Where the shaft passes through the

cover, a suitable stuffing box or other seal shall be provided to prevent the entrance of water.

Each actuator for butterfly valves, except where located in manholes, buried, or submerged, shall

have a valve disc position indicator mounted on the end of the valve shaft. A disc position

indicator shall also be provided on each operating stand or the actuator mounted thereon.

2-12.02.01. Position Indicators for Buried Actuators. When specified in the respective valve

schedules, each buried valve actuator shall be equipped with a position indicator. Position

indicators shall be Indico "Model 179 Valve Position Indicators" manufactured by the Mills

Engineering Company, Needham Heights, Massachusetts, or "Diviner" ground level position

indicator manufactured by the Henry Pratt Company, Aurora, Illinois. Each indicator assembly

shall be designed for installation on the extension stem connected to the operating stem of the

buried actuator mechanism and shall be mounted in the top section of the valve box beneath the

valve box cover. Each indicator shall be equipped with a wrench nut. Internal gearing shall be

sealed and protected from the elements.

2-12.03. Floor Boxes. Openings through concrete slabs provided for key operation of valves

shall be provided with a cast iron floor box complete with cover. The floor box shall be of the

depth indicated on the drawings. Where the operating nut is in the slab, the stem shall have a

guide to maintain the nut in the center of the box; where the nut is below the slab, the opening in

the bottom of the box shall accommodate the operating key.



(Group 4A2)

Each floor box and cover shall be shop coated with manufacturer’s standard coating.

2-12.04. Torque Tubes. Torque tube shall utilize pipe rather than solid shafting between the

valve input shaft and the output shaft of the valve floorstand operator. An adjustment of 2 inches

[50 mm] shall be provided in the torque tube installation. Torque tube shall be coated with the

same material as the submerged valve.

2-12.05. Valve Boxes. Not used.Each valve buried to a depth of 4 feet [1.2 m] or less shall be

provided with a slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be cast iron, extension sleeve type,

suitable for the depth of cover indicated on the drawings. Only one extension will be allowed

with each slide type valve box. Valve boxes shall be at least 5 inches [125 mm] in inside

diameter, shall be at least 3/16 inch [4.7 mm] thick, and shall be provided with suitable cast iron

bases and covers.

Each valve buried deeper than 4 feet [1.2 m] shall be provided with a valve box consisting of a

cast iron cover and a 6 inch [150 mm] Cast Iron Pipe section. The cover shall be Clay & Bailey

"No. 2193". The pipe shaft shall extend from the valve to 5 inches [125 mm] inside the valve

box cover.

All parts of valve boxes, bases, and covers shall be shop coated with manufacturer's standard

coating.

Valve boxes which are to be provided with position indicators shall have top sections and covers

designed for proper installation of the position indicator and accessories.

2-13. SHOP PAINTING. All ferrous metal surfaces, except bearing and finished surfaces and

stainless steel components of valve actuators and accessories, shall be shop painted for corrosion

protection. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable, provided it is

functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible with the specified field

painting.

The following surfaces shall be painted:


Other Surfaces Epoxy enamel.

Actuators and Accessories Universal primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Actuators will be installed on the valves in accordance with the Valve

Installation section and gates in accordance with the Gate Installation section.

3-2. NETWORK SETUP. A manufacturer’s representative for the programmable electric

actuator manufacturer shall inspect all network terminations for conformity with the

manufacturer’s recommended methods of terminating the network to each actuator, and shall

notify the Contractor of any wiring modifications required. The manufacturer’s representative



(Group 4A2)

shall also set addresses for each valve and prove communication over the network. The valve

manufacturer shall furnish the required information to the control system supplier that will allow

the specified control and monitoring for each programmable electric actuator.

The Contractor shall coordinate these activities between the actuator manufacturer and the

control system supplier.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 15400

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of materials, fixtures,

equipment, and appurtenances associated with the plumbing systems as specified herein and as

indicated on the drawings. Additional requirements for plumbing systems shall be as indicated

in the schedules on the drawings. Suitable connections shall be provided for each fixture, piece

of equipment, and appurtenance.

Pipe materials, valves, thermal insulation, and pipe supports which are not an integral part of the

fixture or piece of equipment and are not specified herein are covered in other sections.




manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer.

1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall verify that each component of the plumbing system is

compatible with all other parts of the system; that all piping, fixtures, and appurtenances are

appropriate; and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning system have been provided.

Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be the product

of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the

products of one manufacturer.

Where several manufacturers' names have been listed in this section as possible suppliers, only

the products of the first manufacturer listed have been checked for size, functions, and features.


equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ


precedence.


this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances,

laws, and regulations. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local

ordinance, the latter shall govern.

All work shall conform to the requirements of AGA, ASTM, NFPA, and UL safety

requirements.

1-2.04. Power Supply. Unless otherwise specified, power supply to equipment with motors

shall be as indicated on the drawings.



(Group 4A2)

1-2.05. Metal Thickness. Metal thicknesses and gages specified herein are minimum

requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage.

1-3. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION.

1-3.01. Number Plates. All plumbing equipment, piping, and valves denoted on the drawings by

a symbol and an identifying number shall be provided with an identifying number plate. The

identifying text shall be identical to the symbols indicated herein or on the drawings and shall be

located in a conspicuous place. Number plate symbols and numbers shall be capitalized block

letters with a minimum height as indicated below.

Item Identified Letter Height, inches [mm]

Major Equipment 3/4 [19]

Minor Equipment 1/2 [13]

Number plate height shall be twice the letter height. Number plate length shall be as needed,

with suitable margins all around. Lettering shall be placed in one row where practicable;

however, where required due to excessive length, lettering shall be placed on more than one row

and centered.

Number plates shall be in the form of nameplates unless equipment is too small to accommodate

the specified nameplate, then tags shall be used. Nameplates and tags shall be metal or plastic.

Plastic nameplates and tags shall be laminated phenolic not less than 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick and

shall be black with a white core. Metal nameplates and tags shall be at least 12 gage [2.66 mm]

thickness with engraved or imprinted symbols. Tags shall have smooth edges and shall be a

minimum diameter of 1-1/2 inches [38 mm]. Tags shall be installed with corrosion-resistant

chains or straps. Nameplates shall be installed with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners.

1-3.02. Equipment Plates. Plumbing equipment shall be identified with engraved or stamped

equipment plates securely affixed to the equipment in an accessible and visible location.

Equipment plates shall be in addition to the number plates specified in the preceding paragraph.

Equipment plates shall indicate the manufacturer's name, address, product name, catalog number,

serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and

any other pertinent design data. Equipment plates listing the distributing agent only will not be

acceptable.

1-3.03. Piping. Piping identification shall be as specified in the protective coatings section.

1-3.04. Valves. Valves that have been assigned an identification number shall be identified with

tags.

1-4. SUBMITTALS.

1-4.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly and installation drawings, and wiring and

schematic diagrams, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts,

devices, and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in

accordance with the submittals section. Device tag numbers indicated on the drawings shall be



(Group 4A2)

referenced on the wiring and schematic diagrams where applicable. The data and specifications

to be submitted for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Equipment, Piping Accessories, and Appurtenances


Type and model.

Construction materials, thicknesses, and finishes.

Capacities.

Pressure and temperature ratings.

Overall dimensions.

Piping connection sizes and locations.

Net weight.

Horsepower [kW].

Power requirements.

Wiring diagrams.

Plumbing Fixtures


Type and model.

Construction materials, thicknesses, and finishes.

Water consumption data.

Overall dimensions.

Rough-in dimensions.

Piping connection sizes and locations.

Net weight.

1-4.02. Operations and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Not used.


1-5.01. Welding Qualifications. All welding procedures and welding operators shall be

qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable provisions of

AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be in

written form and subject to Engineer’s review. Accurate records of operator and procedure


1-5.02. Qualification. The plumbing system installer shall be licensed as stipulated by the

authority having jurisdiction.

1-5.03. Manufacturer's Experience. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in

this section, the manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified

which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years.

1-5.04. Construction. Plumbing fixtures shall be constructed in accordance with the following

standards:

Stainless Steel ANSI/ASME A112.19.3M

Faucets ANSI/NSF 61



(Group 4A2)


shipping section. Handling and storage shall be in accordance with the Handling and Storage

section.

1-7. EXTRA MATERIALS. Not used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be designed and

selected to meet the specified conditions.

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. All fixtures and equipment shall be

designed to meet the performance and design conditions specified herein and indicated on the

drawings.


layout area indicated on the drawings is based on typical values. Contractor shall review the

contract drawings, the manufacturer’s layout drawings, and installation requirements and shall

make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer.

2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed in the

respective product description paragraphs.

2-4. MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION.

2-4.01. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, expansion anchors, nuts, and

washers shall be as indicated in the anchorage in concrete and masonry section unless otherwise


2-4.02. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors and speed reducers, shall

be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance with the paint

manufacturer’s recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before

shop primer is applied.

2-4.03. Shop Painting. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable coatings applied

in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of

the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed.

Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a

smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other

self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with an oil-resistant

enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in the field with a universal primer and

aliphatic polyurethane system.

Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the

paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of the

specified primer.



(Group 4A2)

Surface finish damaged during installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer. Field

painting shall conform to the requirements of the painting section.

2-4.04. Equipment Bases. Not used.

2-4.05. Special Tools and Accessories. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment

shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for

proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be

furnished complete with those devices.

2-4.06. Piping Systems. Unless otherwise specified herein, piping system materials shall be as

specified in other sections.

2-4.07. Valves. Unless otherwise specified herein, valves indicated to be a part of the plumbing

systems shall be as specified in other sections.

2-5. WATER SUPPLY PIPING ACCESSORIES.

2-5.01. Water Hammer Arresters. Not used.

2-5.02. Trap Primers. Not used.

2-5.03. Thermostatic Mixing Valves. Not used.

2-5.04. Vacuum Relief Valves. Not used.

2-5.05. Thermometers. Not used.

2-5.06. Strainers. Not used.

2-5.07. Hose Faucets. Hose faucets shall be constructed with nickel or chrome plated cast brass

body, solid brass stem, threaded bonnet, and “T” style handle. Hose faucets shall be provided

with a ¾ inch male pipe thread inlet and a ¾ inch male hose thread outlet unless otherwise

indicated on the drawings. Hose faucets shall be Prier Brass “Model C-138NP.75” or

Arrowhead Brass Products.

2-5.08. Hose Valves. Not used.

2-5.09. Wall Hydrants. Not used.

2-5.10. Pressure Gauges. Not used.

2-6. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING ACCESSORIES.

2-6.01. Cleanouts. Cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and required by

the referenced codes, and shall be of the required type.



(Group 4A2)

Floor cleanouts shall consist of a two piece body, a threaded plug, an adjustable head, and a

cover. Cleanouts installed in floors that include a waterproofing membrane shall be provided

with a flashing flange and membrane clamp. Cleanouts installed in partition walls shall be

provided with an access cover and frame with a securing screw installed over the cleanout plug.

Wall cleanout covers shall be stainless steel. Cleanouts installed in exposed piping shall consist

of a ferrule or threaded adapter and a cast brass or bronze plug installed in a T-pattern, 90 degree

drainage fitting.

Cast iron cleanouts shall be manufactured by Smith, Josam, or Wade. Polypropylene cleanouts

shall be manufactured by Orion or Enfield. PVC cleanouts shall be manufactured by Sioux

Chief.

2-6.02. Bell-Up Drains. Not used.

2-6.03. Funnel Receptors. Funnel receptors shall consist of cast iron funnels with cast iron

dome type bottom strainers. Funnel receptors shall be provided with waterstop flange and

threaded or no-hub outlet connections suitable for connection to the waste piping. Funnel

receptors shall be furnished with a factory applied chemical resistant interior coating. Unless

otherwise indicated, funnel receptors shall be installed 1 inch [25 mm] above the finished floor.

Funnel receptors shall be Smith “Series 3800 Figure SQ-3-1793-DBS”, Josam, or Wade.

2-7. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES. Not used.

2-8. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT. Not used.

2-8.01. General. Plumbing equipment shall be provided with all supports, fasteners, fittings, and

escutcheons required for a complete installation.

2-8.02. Water Heaters and Accessories. Not used.

2-8.03. Neutralization Tanks. Not used.

2-8.04. Hose Reels. Not used.

2-8.05. Hoses. Hose type, diameter, manufacturer, and model shall be as indicated on the

drawings.

Unless otherwise indicated, each hose shall be provided with one male swivel type brass hose

connector, one female brass hose connector, and one regulating wash-up spray nozzle. Spray

nozzles in 1 inch [25 mm] and 1-1/2 inch [38 mm] sizes shall be Potter-Roemer Inc. "Series

2970" with a cast brass body, a rubber bumper, and a female hose thread.

2-8.05.01. Type 1 Hoses. Not used.





(Group 4A2)

2-8.05.04. Type 4 Hoses. Type 4 hoses shall be suitable for lay flat water discharge service and

shall be rated for 75 psig [500 kPa gauge] working pressure. The hose shall be 1-1/2 inch

[38 mm] ID with a heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride (PVC) body and synthetic, high tensile textile

cord reinforcement. Type 4 hoses shall be Gates Rubber Company "Masterflex 500".

2-9. COLOR. Plumbing equipment shall have the manufacturer's standard color and finish

unless otherwise indicated in the schedules.

2-10. ELECTRICAL. Electrical controls and disconnects shall be furnished and installed under

the electrical section, except where specified herein. All electrical controls shall have enclosures

suitable for the environment and NEMA rating as indicated on the electrical drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSPECTION. Equipment installed in existing facilities with limited access shall be

suitable for being installed through available openings. Contractor shall field verify existing

opening dimensions and other provisions for installation prior to submittal of bids.

3-2. PREPARATION.

3-2.01. Surface Preparation. All surfaces to be field painted shall be dry and free of dirt, dust,

sand, grit mud, oil, grease, rust, loose mill scale, or other objectionable substances, and shall

meet the recommendations of the paint manufacturer for surface preparation. Cleaning and

painting operations shall be performed in a manner which will prevent dust or other

contaminants from getting on freshly painted surfaces. Oil and grease shall be completely

removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. The gloss of

previously painted surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of top coats.

3-3. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper

operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data,


by Engineer.

Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be provided for all pipe penetrations through concrete

and masonry walls. Sleeves and sealing requirements shall be as indicated in the miscellaneous

piping and accessories installation section and as indicated on the drawings.

Not all required reducing fittings and unions are indicated. Additional fittings and unions shall

be provided as needed to connect all equipment and appurtenances.

Insulating fittings shall be provided to prevent the contact of dissimilar metals in piping systems.

When located indoors, fuel gas pressure regulator vents and fuel train vent valves shall be piped

to the exterior of the building in accordance with the applicable codes and standards.



(Group 4A2)

Piping shall not be routed over or in front of electrical switchboards or panels unless acceptable

to Engineer.

3-3.01. Water Supply Piping and Accessories. Water hammer arresters shall be provided in the

hot and cold water supply piping at all quick closing valves, at solenoid valves, and at plumbing

fixtures. When not indicated on the drawings, arresters shall be located and sized by Contractor

in accordance with PDI Standard No. WH201. Contractor shall submit arrester location and

sizing plans to Engineer for approval prior to installation. Where possible, water hammer

arresters shall be installed in an accessible location.

Water supply piping to hose faucets and hose valves shall be secured with a pipe support within

6 inches [150 mm] of the fixture.

3-3.02. Drainage and Vent Piping and Accessories. Unless otherwise indicated or required by

code, horizontal sanitary drainage piping 3 inches [75 mm] in diameter or smaller shall be

installed at a uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot [2 percent]; horizontal sanitary drainage piping

larger than 3 inches [75 mm] in diameter shall be installed at a uniform slope of 1/8 inch per foot

[3 mm/300 mm]; horizontal storm drainage piping shall be installed at a uniform slope of

1/8 inch per foot [3 mm/300 mm].

Drainage fittings shall be installed to convey flow in the piping in the intended direction. To the

extent possible, changes in direction shall be made by sweep type fittings. Quarter-bends and

sanitary tee fittings shall not be installed for vertical to horizontal or horizontal to horizontal

changes of direction.

Plumbing vents through roofs shall be located at least 12 inches [300 mm] from a parapet or

from the intersection of a cant with the roof deck, and shall be installed with watertight flashings.

Plumbing vents shall be located no closer to operable windows or air intakes than is allowed by

the applicable code.

Vents connecting to horizontal sanitary piping shall connect above the centerline of the piping

and shall rise at an angle of not less than 45 degrees from the horizontal to a point at least

6 inches [150 mm] above the flood level rim of the fixture served before offsetting horizontally.

Cleanouts on drainage piping inside structures shall be located where indicated on the drawings.

Additional cleanouts shall be provided where required by the applicable code or authority having

jurisdiction. Cleanouts located in drainage risers shall be located 12 inches [300 mm] above the

finished floor.

Unless otherwise indicated or required by the applicable code, cleanout size shall equal the line

size for 4 inch [100 mm] and smaller drainage piping, and 4 inches [100 mm] in diameter for

drains larger than 4 inch [100 mm]. Proper clearance shall be provided for access to cleanouts.

Floor cleanouts shall be installed flush with the finished floor.

Floor drains, trench drains, floor sinks, funnel receptors, and bell-up drains indicated to be

equipped with traps shall be provided with deep seal "P" traps located as close to the drain as

possible.



(Group 4A2)

3-3.03. Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories. Not used.


3-4.01. Installation Check. An installation check by an authorized representative of the

manufacturer of equipment specified herein is not required.

3-4.02. Startup and Testing. Field performance tests shall be conducted to demonstrate that each

system is functioning as specified and to the satisfaction of Engineer.

If inspection or tests indicate defects, the defective work or material shall be replaced, and

inspection and tests repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking

of threaded joints or holes will not be acceptable.

3-5. ADJUSTING. All devices shall be adjusted for proper flow and quiet operation. Faucet

and supply assemblies shall be adjusted or repaired to eliminate leaks. All drains shall be

checked for proper operation.

3-6. PROTECTION. Plumbing fixtures, equipment and appurtenances shall be protected from

damage immediately after installation.

3-7. CLEANING. After completion of testing and immediately before the final inspection,

plumbing fixtures, equipment, piping, and appurtenances shall be thoroughly cleaned. Cleaning

materials and methods shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All faucet aerators shall

be removed, cleaned, and reinserted.

Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings

shall be repaired at no additional cost to Owner.

3-8. DISINFECTION. Not used.

3-9. OPERATOR INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING. Not used.

End of Section

(Orange County Utilities) Bid Issues


(Group 4A2)

Section 16050

ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of equipment and materials

needed for this contract. It also covers conduit, wiring, and terminations for electrical equipment

installed under Section 16100.

This section applies to installation and interconnection of electrical equipment furnished under

other sections, except electrical items designated to be installed under those sections.

1-2. GENERAL. Electrical apparatus on equipment shall be installed complete and placed in

readiness for proper operation.

Electrical materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled,

erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings,

specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment


1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to

equipment provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in

the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence

Coordination. Electrical work shall conform to the construction schedule and the progress of

other trades.

1-2.02. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and expansion

anchors shall comply with section 05550, Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry, except smaller

than 3/4 inch [19 mm] will be permitted to match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and

electrical equipment.

1-2.03. Drawings. Supplementing this section, the drawings indicate locations of equipment and

enclosures and provide one-line and schematic diagrams regarding the connection and

interaction with other equipment.

1-3. CODES AND PERMITS. Work shall be performed and materials shall be furnished in

accordance with the NEC - National Electrical Code, the NESC - National Electrical Safety

Code, and the following standards where applicable

NEC National Electrical Code

NESC National Electrical Safety Code,

ANSI American National Standards Institute.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.



(Group 4A2)

AWG American Wire Gauge.

Fed Spec Federal Specification.

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

NEIS National Electrical Installation Standards

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

UL Underwriters' Laboratories.

Equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL, or by a nationally recognized third

party testing laboratory. Costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of

Contractor. If no third-party testing laboratory provides the required listing, an independent test

shall be performed at Contractor’s expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit

a copy of the testing procedure to be used.

1-4. IDENTIFICATION.

1-4.01. Conduit. Conduits in manholes, hand holes, building entrance pull boxes, junction

boxes, and equipment shall be provided with identification tags. Identification tags shall be

19 gage [1 mm thick] stainless steel, with 1/2 inch [13 mm] stamped letters and numbers as

indicated on the drawings. Identification tags shall be attached to conduits with nylon tie wraps

and shall be positioned to be readily visible.

1-4.02. Conductors. Conductors in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be

identified and color coded as described herein.

1-4.02.01. Conductor Identification Number. Except for lighting and receptacle circuits, each

individual conductor in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with wire

identification markers at the point of termination.

Wire markers shall be heat-shrinkable tube type, with custom typed identification numbers. The

wire numbers shall be as indicated on the equipment drawings. The wire markers shall be

positioned to be readily visible for inspection.

1-4.02.02. Conductor Color Coding. Power conductors shall be color coded as indicated below.

For conductors 6 AWG and smaller, the color coding shall be the insulation finish color. For

sizes larger than 6 AWG, the color coding may be by marking tape. The equipment grounding

conductor shall be green or green with one or more yellow stripes if the conductor is insulated.

The following color coding system shall be used in order of a, b, c, or 1, 2, 3:

120/240V — black, red, and white (neutral)

208Y/120V — black, red, blue, and white (neutral)

240/120V — black, orange (high leg), blue, and white(neutral)



(Group 4A2)

480V – brown, orange, yellow

480Y/277V — brown, orange, yellow, and gray (neutral)

Where 120/240 and 208Y/120 volt systems share the same conduit or enclosure, the neutral for

either the 120/240 volt system shall be white with a permanent identifiable violet stripe.

Control and instrumentation circuit conductors shall be color coded as indicated in the Cable

Data Figures at the end of this section.

1-4.03. Motor Starters Motor starters shall be provided with nameplates identifying the related

equipment. Pilot controls and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends

Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch [3 mm] engraved letters,

and shall be securely fastened to the motor starters with stainless steel screws.

1-4.04. Control Stations. ControlControl stations shall be provided with nameplates identifying

the related equipment. Pilot controls and indicating lights shall have engraved or etched legends

("start", "stop", etc.) as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated

black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch [3 mm] engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to

the control stations with stainless steel screws.

1-4.05. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be provided with nameplates identifying related

equipment. Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch [3 mm]

engraved letters, and shall be permanently fastened to the circuit breakers with stainless steel

screws.

1-4.06. Disconnect Switches. Switches shall have front cover-mounted permanent nameplates

that include switch type, manufacturer's name and catalog number, and horsepower [kW] rating.

An additional nameplate, engraved or etched, laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch

[3 mm] letters, shall be provided to identify the associated equipment. Both nameplates shall be

securely fastened to the enclosure with stainless steel screws.

1-4.07. Arc Flash Hazard Labels. Lighting panels, power panels, power centers, and meter

socket enclosures shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and

shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998 and shall include

the following:

WARNING

Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. SEE NFPA 70E. Equipment must be

accessed by qualified personnel only.

Turn off power sources prior to working on or inside equipment.

1-5. SUBMITTALS. Submit documents in accordance with the submittals section. The

drawings and data shall include, but not limited to:

Installation Manual



(Group 4A2)

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Starters, all types

Motor nameplate data

Complete set of final conform to construction documents

1-5.01. Submittal Identification. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly

marked to identify the material or equipment as applicable:

a. Lamp fixture descriptive sheets shall show the fixture schedule letter,

number, or symbol for which the sheet applies.

b. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the

specification paragraph for which the equipment applies.

c. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have

inapplicable information crossed out.

d. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and materials descriptive

literature not readily cross-referenced with the drawings or specifications.

e. Schematics and connection diagrams for electrical equipment shall be

submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard connection diagram or

schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be

acceptable.

f. Transient voltage surge suppressor submittals shall include drawings

(including unit dimensions, weights, component and connection locations,

mounting provisions, and wiring diagrams), equipment manuals that detail

the installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the specified unit(s),

and manufacturer’s descriptive bulletins and product sheets.

Contractor shall submit the name and qualifications of the Engineering and Testing Services firm

proposed to perform the coordination study and the on site testing.

1-6. PROTECTION AND STORAGE. During construction, the insulation on electrical

equipment shall be protected against absorption of moisture, and metallic components shall be

protected against corrosion by strip heaters, lamps, or other suitable means. This protection shall

be provided immediately upon receipt of the equipment and shall be maintained continuously.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. POWER SERVICE ENTRANCE. Contractor shall consult the local electric utility, prior to

bidding, regarding their service installation requirements, and shall furnish the service equipment

in compliance with these requirements. Contractor’s bid shall include costs for installation

complying with utility requirements. The Utility Company contact information for the pump

station is indicated below.

PS-3006 – Orlando Utilities Commission – Mr. Chris Fatkin – 407-423-9100 Ext 4336



(Group 4A2)

2-2. CABLE. Cables of each type (such as lighting cable or 600 volt power cable) shall be from

the same manufacturer.

Cables shall conform to the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section and as described herein.

2-2.01. Lighting Cable. Lighting cable (Figure 1-16050 XHHW-2) shall be provided only in

lighting and receptacle circuits operating at 277 volts or less.

2-2.02. 600 Volt Power Cable. Cable in power, control, indication, and alarm circuits operating

at 600 volts or less, except where lighting, multi-conductor control, and instrument cables are

required, shall be 600 volt (Figure 1-16050 XHHW-2).

2-2.03. Instrument Cable. Cable for electronic circuits to instrumentation, metering, and other

signaling and control equipment shall be two- or three-conductor instrument cable twisted for

magnetic noise rejection and protected from electrostatic noise by a total coverage shield. Types

of instrument cables shall be as indicated in Figures 2, 3 or 4-16050.

2-2.04. Multi-conductor Control Cable. When indicated on the Drawings, cable in control,

indication and alarm circuits shall be multiconductor. Cable shall be Figure 5-16050 14 AWG

THHN-THWN.

2.3. CONDUIT.

2-4.01. Rigid Steel Conduit. Not Used

2-4.02. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). Not Used

2-4.03. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be hot-dip

galvanized steel, shall be covered with a moisture-proof polyvinyl chloride jacket, and shall be

UL listed.

2-4.04. Utility (PVC) Duct. Not Used

2-4.05. Rigid Nonmetallic (PVC) Conduit. PVC conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 80, UL

labelled for aboveground and underground uses, and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL 651.

2-4.06. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). Not Used

2-4.07. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC). Rigid aluminum conduit and fittings shall be

manufactured of 6063-T1 alloy, shall conform to ANSI C80.5, and shall be manufactured in

accordance with UL 6.

2-5. WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS. Concealed conduit systems shall have

flush-mounted switches and convenience outlets. Exposed conduit systems shall have

surface-mounted switches and convenience outlets.

2-5.01 Conduit Boxes and Fittings.



(Group 4A2)

a. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings

shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or O Z Gedney. In

applications utilizing aluminum conduit systems, aluminum boxes and

fittings manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or O Z Gedney shall be

installed.

b. Sheet steel device boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton, Raco, or Steel

City.

c. Hub arrangements on threaded fittings shall be the most appropriate for the

conduit arrangement to avoid unnecessary bends and fittings.

2-5.02 . Device Plates.

a. Galvanized or cadmium-plated device plates shall be used on surface

mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are not required.

b. Device plates on flush mounted outlet boxes where weatherproof plates are

not required shall be AISI Type 302 stainless steel, Eagle "93nnn series",

Hubbell "S series", or Leviton "840nn-40 series"; nylon or polycarbonate,

Eagle "513nV series", Hubbell "Pn series", or Leviton "807nn-I series".

c. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and finished to

match the plate.

d. Device plates for switches outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall have

provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off", and shall be Appleton

"FSK-1VS", Crouse-Hinds "DS185" or O Z Gedney "FS-1-WSCA".

e. Device plates for receptacles indicated as weatherproof shall be Appleton

"FSK-WRD", Crouse-Hinds "WLRD1", or O Z Gedney "FS-1-WDCA.

f. Flush-mounted, weatherproof plates shall be provided with adapter plates,

Appleton "FSK-SBA" or Crouse-Hinds "FS031".

g. Device plates for ground fault interrupter receptacles indicated to be

weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK-WGFI", Eagle "966", or O Z Gedney

"FS-1-GFCA".

h. Receptacle covers outdoors or otherwise indicated to be weatherproof

while in-use shall be die cast aluminum and shall include a padlock eye.

Covers for standard convenience outlets shall be Hubbell “WP8M” or

Thomas and Betts Red Dot “CKMDV”. Covers for ground fault interrupter

receptacles shall be Hubbell “WP26M” or Thomas and Betts Red Dot

“CKMGV”.

i. Engraved device plates, where required, shall be manufactured by Leviton,

or equal.

2-5.03. Wall Switches.

a. Switches on ac lighting panel load circuits through 277 volts shall be 20

amperes, 120/277 volts.



(Group 4A2)

b. Switches for pulse control of lighting contactors shall be 20 amperes,

120/277 volts, momentary, double-throw, center "Off",

c. Switches on ac lighting panel load circuits through 277 volts in Class I,

Division 1 and Division 2, Group D hazardous areas indicated on the

drawings shall be 20 ampere, 120/277 volts. Hazardous area switches shall

be factory sealed tumbler switches

2-5.04. Receptacles.

a. Standard convenience outlets shall be duplex, three-wire, grounding,

20 amperes, 125 volts

b. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amperes,

125 volts

e. Receptacles in Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Group D hazardous

areas indicated on the drawings shall be three-wire, grounding, 20

amperes, 125 volts. Hazardous area receptacles shall be factory sealed,

with an integral switch that is only activated when an approved

matching plug is fully inserted and rotated into the engaged position.

2-6. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND WIRING GUTTERS. Indoor boxes and

gutters shall be constructed of sheet steel, shall be galvanized after fabrication, and shall be

rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and

bolts.

Indoor boxes and gutters in corrosive areas and outdoor boxes and gutters shall be NEMA Type

4X, stainless steel and shall be rigidly supported by stainless steel framing materials. Mounting

hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. Damaged coatings

shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet [900 mm] square or larger, or heavier than 25 lbs [11 kg],

shall have rigid handles. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet [900 by 1200 mm] shall be split.

Junction and pull boxes with a removable side opposite the underground conduits shall be

provided over building ends of underground conduit banks. Boxes shall be sized in accordance

with the National Electrical Code, including space for full size continuations of underground

conduits not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space for future

conduits.

2-7. LIGHTING FIXTURES. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as described in the fixture

schedule. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Pendant fixtures shall have

swivel type box covers and threaded conduit pendants unless otherwise specified.

2-7.01. Electronic Ballasts. Electronic ballasts furnished with fluorescent type lighting fixtures

shall be CBM certified as meeting requirements of ANSI C82.11 with a THD level of not more

than 20 percent.



(Group 4A2)

2-8. LIGHTING PANELS. Each lighting panel shall be a dead-front, 120/240 volt or 208Y/120

volt panelboard with bolt-on circuit breakers.

2-8.01. Cabinet. The panel shall have a flush-mounted or surface-mounted enclosure with a

NEMA designation appropriate for the location where it will be installed. The enclosure shall

have a hinged trim cover. Breaker operating handles shall be accessible through a latched,

lockable, door. At the completion of the contract, a neatly printed or typed directory listing the

panel and circuit identities shall be mounted inside the door. Hand written will not be acceptable.

2-8.02. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic, bolt-in, individually front

replaceable, and shall indicate "On", "Off", and "Tripped". Breakers indicated as multiple-pole

shall be common trip. Breakers shall have interrupting ratings not less than required by analysis.

Handle clips to prevent casual operation of breakers shall be provided for 10 percent (at least

two) of the breakers and applied to the circuits directed. Breakers and provisions for future

breakers shall be provided in the quantities, number of poles, and ampere ratings indicated.

2-8.03. Buses. The panel shall have main and neutral buses insulated from the cabinet, and a

ground bus bolted to the enclosure. Buses shall be copper. The ground bus shall be similar to a

neutral bus and shall have a good ground connection to the cabinet, a removable bond to the

neutral bus, clamp type lugs for the ground cable in each supply conduit, and connections for a

ground cable in each load conduit.

2-9. CONTROL PANEL (CP-1) Control panel CP-1 shall be as specified in the Orange County

Utilities “Standards and Construction Specifications Manual” section 3412 Wastewater Pump

Station Electrical Power & Control System, latest edition, with modifications as indicated in the

contract drawings. Control panel manufacturer shall be one of the approved suppliers as listed in

APPENDIX D of the Orange County Utilities “Standards and Construction Specifications

Manual”.

2-9.01. Cabinet. The panel shall be a surface-mounted or free standing enclosure with a NEMA

3R, Type 316 Stainless Steel, 14-gauge enclosure, with drip shield and door gasket. The

enclosure shall have a door with latch and lock.

2-9.02. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic, bolt-in, individually front

replaceable, and shall indicate "On", "Off", and "Tripped". Breakers indicated as multiple-pole

shall be common trip type. Breakers shall have interrupting ratings not less than that required by

analysis.

2-9.03. Combination Solid-State Starters. As required, or as indicated on the drawings, the

control panel enclosure shall include a breaker combination, solid-state, reduced voltage solid

state starter (RVSS). Six back-to-back silicon controlled rectifiers shall be used to provide

smooth, stepless motor acceleration. When the motor reaches full speed, a bypass contactor shall

close and carry the continuous duty motor current. This bypass contactor shall bypass the SCRs

of the solid state starter once the motor is up to speed. The effect of the bypass contactor during

run shall be for the elimination of heat buildup resulting from the voltage drop across the SCRs

of the solid state starter. The RVSS shall be rated for motor starting duty and a selector switches

and pilot lights and control shall be provided as indicated on the drawing schematic.

a. Starters shall be 3 phase, 60 Hz, with overloads, a 120 volt ac



(Group 4A2)

bypass contactor coil, a dry-type control transformer, and a

molded-case circuit breaker. Control transformers shall be

mounted with the removable starters and shall have capacity for

all simultaneous loads. Control transformers shall have both

primary leads fused, one secondary lead fused, and one

secondary lead grounded.

b. As required, spare interlock contacts, whether on the starter or

on a relay, shall be wired separately to the unit terminal board.

c. Starters shall include smooth starting and stopping, adjustable

starting torque, adjustable ramp time, inverse time overload

current trip, current limit, phase loss protection, and adjustable

electronic overloads.

d. An external manual breaker operating handle with provisions for

up to three padlocks shall be provided on each starter. The

access door shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker so that

the door cannot be opened, except by an interlock override,

while the breaker is closed.

e. CONTRACTOR shall match control transformers, overloads,

and the minimum sizes of starters to equipment furnished, which

may differ from the estimated values indicated on the drawings.

Overload relay devices shall be adjusted to reflect reduced motor

current caused by load-side power factor correction capacitors (if

required).

f. Unless otherwise specified, spare starters shall have breakers and

overloads sized for the largest rated motor and 100 watts extra

transformer capacity.

g. As required, starters shall include an auxiliary contactor for

connection to a line-side power factor correction capacitor. The

contactor shall be interlocked to prevent the capacitor from

being connected before the bypass contactor has energized.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Combination Solid State starters (RVSS) shall be

manufactured by Siemens-Robicon, Allen-Bradley, Eaton Cutler-Hammer or Square D without

exception. The products of other manufacturers will not be acceptable.

2-10. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD’S) .

2 -10.01. Scope. Surge Protection Devices (SPD) shall be provided as specified. Each unit shall

be designed for parallel connection to the wiring system and shall utilize non-linear voltage-

dependent metal oxide varistors (MOV) in parallel.

SPD devices shall be furnished and installed for the electrical equipment indicated, and as

specified herein.



(Group 4A2)

Lighting panels shall be rated for the low exposure level capacity.

Power panels, Switchboards, main breakers and main pumps station control panels shall have

SPD devices rated for a high exposure levels.

2-10.02. Standards. The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in

compliance with the following standards:

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45;

ANSI/IEEE C62.1 and C62.11;

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA LS1 Guidelines);

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 70 [NEC], 75, and 78);

Underwriters Laboratories UL 1449 Latest Edition and 1283

The unit shall be UL 1449 Second Edition Listed as a Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor and

UL 1283 Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter.

2-10.03. Environmental Requirements.

a. Operating Temperature: -40°F to +140°F [-40°C to +60°C].

b. Relative Humidity: Reliable operation with 5 percent to 95 percent non-

condensing.

2-10.04. Electrical Requirements.

a. Unit Operating Voltage. The nominal unit operating voltage and

configuration shall be as indicated on the drawings.

b. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV). The SPD device shall be

designed to withstand a MCOV of not less than 115 percent of nominal RMS

voltage.

c. Operating Frequency. Operating frequency range shall be 47 to 63 Hertz.

d. Protection Modes. protected modes are defined per NEMA LS-1, Paragraph

2.2.7. Following IEEE Standard 1100, section 9.11.2 recommendations, Four-

wire configured systems shall provide, Line-to-Neutral (L-N), Line-to-Ground

(L-G), and Neutral-to-Ground (N-G), and Line-to-Line (L-L) protection.

Three-wire configured systems shall provide, Line-to-Line (L-L) protection

and Line-to-Ground (L-G) protection.

e. Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity. The rated single pulse surge

current capacity, in amps, for each mode of protection of the unit shall be as

required and shall be no less than listed in the following table.

L-N L-G N-G L-L

High Exposure Level 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA



(Group 4A2)

Low Exposure Level 80 kA 80 kA 60 kA 80 kA

f. UL 1449 Second Edition Suppression Voltage Rating (SVR). The maximum

SVR per mode for the device (inclusive of disconnect) shall be as required and

shall not exceed the following:

Voltage L-N L-G N-G L-L

120/240 500 V 500 V 500 V 800 V

480 V 900 V 1000 V 1500 V 1800 V

g. Noise Attenuation. EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be

measured in accordance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in

NEMA LS-1. The unit shall be capable of a minimum -40 dB attenuation at

100kHz when tested per the 50 ohm insertion loss method as defined by MIL-

STD-220A.

h. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity. The minimum number of

repetitive surges per mode as a result of testing a 20 kV, 10kA ANSI/IEEE

C62.41 Category C3 surge current with less than a 10 percent degradation of

clamping voltage shall be as follows:

For integral and external installation and power panels: 5,000.

For lighting panels: 3,500.

i. Overcurrent Protection. At high exposure levels, the SPD device shall

incorporate internal fusing capable of interrupting, at minimum, up to 200 kA

symmetrical fault current with 600 volts ac applied.

At low exposure levels, the SPD device shall incorporate internal fusing

capable of interrupting, at minimum, up to 65kA symmetrical fault current

with 600 volts ac applied.

The device shall be capable of allowing passage of the rated maximum surge

current for every mode without fuse operation.

j. Unit Status Indicators. The unit shall include long-life, externally visible

phase indicators that monitor the on-line status of the unit. When furnished

integral to the panelboard, the status indicators shall be viewable through a

clear window within the panelboard door, or similar provision made to ensure

visibility with the door closed.

2-10.05. Warranty. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum Ten Year Limited Warranty

from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local

electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions.

2-10.06. Installation. The SPD devices shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations. If possible for the integral units, provide direct bus connections.



(Group 4A2)

2-10.07. Options.

a. Disconnect Switch. Each SPD device shall be furnished with an integral

disconnect switch. The unit shall be UL 1449 Second Edition listed as such,

and the UL 1449 Second Edition Suppression Voltage Ratings shall be

provided. The disconnect switch shall be fused and capable of withstanding,

without failure, the published maximum surge current magnitude without

failure or damage to the switch. A circuit breaker may be used in lieu of an

integral disconnect switch.

b. Enclosure. For the SPD units to be mounted externally of the protected

electrical equipment, provide NEMA 4x SS or plastic rated enclosures

suitable for the locations indicated on the drawings.

2-10.08. Acceptable Manufacturers. SPD devices shall be manufactured by Surge Suppression

Incorporated, Josyln or Current Technology. The products of other manufacturers will not be

acceptable.

2-11. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOTOR STARTERS. Separately enclosed motor starters,

unless otherwise specified, shall be full voltage, magnetic, non- reversing and NEMA rated. The

starter enclosures shall have NEMA type designations appropriate for the locations where they

will be installed. NEMA Type 4X stainless steel enclosures shall be provided for outdoor

locations.

One thermal overload relay shall be provided in each phase lead. Each starter shall be provided

with an external, manually reset push button for resetting the thermal overload relays.

Each starter shall include auxiliary contacts as required, plus one spare NO and one spare NC

contact.

Contractor shall match the sizes of control power transformers, overload devices, heaters, and

starters to the equipment furnished, as they may differ from the values indicated on the drawings.

Control power transformers shall have both primary leads fused, one secondary lead fused, and

one secondary lead grounded.

Starters shall be provided with control terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type

rated 20 amperes. Current carrying parts shall be tin-plated. The removable portion of the

terminal blocks shall be used for factory installed wiring.

Push buttons, selector switches, and pilot lights indicated on the schematics to be provided on or

in the starter enclosure shall be 30.5 mm heavy-duty, oiltight construction. Pilot lights shall be

full voltage type with LED lamps. Push buttons on starters located outdoors shall be provided

with protective caps.

2-11.01. Three Phase Starters. Three phase starters shall be circuit breaker combination type

consisting of 3 phase, 60 Hz contactors with thermal overloads, a 120 volt ac coil, a dry type

control power transformer where required, and a circuit breaker disconnect. Control power

transformers shall be sized to handle simultaneous loads. Starters shall be at least NEMA Size 1,

or as indicated on the drawings.



(Group 4A2)

Circuit breakers shall be 600 volt magnetic motor circuit protectors for motors smaller than

100 horsepower [75 kW] and 600 volt thermal-magnetic type for 100 horsepower [75 kW] and

larger motors. Each breaker shall be manually operated with a quick-make, quick-break,

trip-free toggle mechanism.

Three phase starters shall be furnished with external manual breaker operating handles and

provisions for up to three padlocks. The access door shall be interlocked with the motor circuit

protector, so that the door cannot be opened, except by an interlock override, while the breaker is

closed.

The complete 3 phase starter shall have an interrupting rating of at least 42,000 amperes at

480 volts.

2-11.02. Single Phase Starters. Single phase starters shall consist of single phase, 60 Hz

contactors with thermal overloads and an integral or separately enclosed short-circuit protection

device. Starters shall be at least NEMA Size 0, or shall be sized as indicated on the drawings.

Integral short-circuit protection devices for single-phase starters shall be 120/240 volt, magnetic

motor circuit protectors.

Separately enclosed short-circuit protection devices for single phase starters shall be molded case

circuit breakers for motor loads 6 amperes and higher and fused switch disconnects for motor

loads lower than 6 amperes. Circuit breaker disconnects shall be 120/240 volt, molded-case,

thermal-magnetic circuit breakers. Fused switch disconnects shall have quick-make, quick-break

mechanisms and 250 volt, dual-element, time-delay fuses.

The short-circuit protection devices shall have external operating handles capable of being

padlocked in the open position, and shall have an interrupting rating of at least 22,000 amperes at

240 volts.

2-13. CONTROL STATIONS. Control stations shall be provided as indicated on the one-line

diagrams or schematics or as required by the equipment furnished. Pilot devices shall be 30.5

mm heavy-duty, oiltight construction, and shall perform the functions indicated. Pilot lights

shall be full voltage type with LED lamps. Indoor control stations shall have NEMA Type 13

enclosures. Control stations outdoors or indicated to be weatherproof shall have NEMA

Type 4X stainless steel enclosures with protective caps on the control devices. Control stations

in NEC Class I, Division 1 and Division 2, Group D hazardous areas shall have NEMA Type 7

enclosures, or be factory sealed type.

2-14. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS/Main Disconnect Switch (MDS-1).

MDS-1 shall be service entrance rated and provided with SPD in accordance with this

specification and the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be 3 pole, 480 volt, molded-case circuit

breakers of not less than 42,000 amperes interrupting rating at 480 volts ac, complete with

thermal and instantaneous trip elements. Breaker enclosures shall have NEMA designations

appropriate for the locations where they will be installed. NEMA Type 4X stainless steel

enclosures shall be provided for outdoor locations. Each breaker shall be manually operated

with a quick-make, quick-break, trip-free toggle mechanism. Bimetallic thermal elements shall

withstand sustained overloads and short-circuit currents without injury and without affecting

calibration.



(Group 4A2)

Circuit breakers shall have "On", "Off", and "Tripped" indication and pad-lockable exterior

handles.

2-15. DISCONNECT SWITCHES. Unless otherwise specified, each disconnect switch shall be

3 pole, non-fusible, 600 volts, with a continuous current rating as indicated.

Switches located indoors shall have NEMA type enclosure designations as required by the

locations where they will be installed. Switches located outdoors shall have NEMA Type 4X

stainless steel enclosures. Switches in chlorine rooms, or in other areas where contact with

caustic substances may occur, shall have NEMA Type 4X enclosures of molded reinforced

polyester.

Switches shall have high conductivity copper, visible blades; non-teasible, positive, quick-make,

quick-break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the

enclosure base. Each switch shall have a handle whose position is easily recognizable and which

can be locked in the "Off" position with three padlocks. The "On" and "Off" positions shall be

clearly marked.

Switches shall be UL listed and horsepower [kilowatt] rated, and shall meet the latest edition of

NEMA KS1. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from being

opened while the operating handle is in the "On" position.

2-16. LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY POWER TRANSFORMERS. Separately mounted

transformers shall be provided in the phases, kVA, and voltages indicated. Transformers shall be

self-air-cooled, dry type, encapsulated, wall- or floor-mounted, and enclosed for wiring in

conduit. Transformers installed outdoors shall be weatherproof. Transformers shall have at least

two full capacity voltage taps. Transformers shall meet NEMA TP1 guidelines for energy

efficiency.

2-17. LIGHTING CONTACTORS. Not used.

2-18. PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS. Not Used.

2-19. RELAY ENCLOSURES. Relay enclosures shall be furnished as indicated. The enclosure

shall have a NEMA designation appropriate for the location where it will be installed. Pilot

devices shall be heavy duty, oiltight construction. Relays and timers shall have 120 volt, 60 Hz

coils rated for continuous duty in 40 C ambient and 10 ampere, 120 volt ac contacts.

Intrinsically safe relays shall be installed within the enclosures in accordance with NEC

requirements.

2-20. DOOR ENTRY SWITCHES. Switches shall be heavy-duty industrial, adjustable,

magnetic wide gap type. Switch and magnet housings located in NEC Class I, Division 1 and 2,

Group D hazardous areas shall be die-cast aluminum, explosion-proof. Switch and magnet

housings located in other areas shall be anodized aluminum.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. Material, equipment, and

components specified herein shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in

compliance with NECA 1000 – NEIS Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000,

testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment.

3-2. ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS. Contractor shall commission an Arc Flash Hazard

Analysis for each piece of electrical equipment in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910,

NEC, NFPA 70E, and IEEE 1584 and shall submit an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis report as

specified herein.

The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in association with, or as a continuation of,

the short circuit study and protective-device coordination study.

Arc Flash Hazard Analysis calculations shall lead to a selection of a level of Personal Protective

Equipment (PPE) that is a balance between the calculated incident energy exposure and the work

activity being performed, while meeting the following concerns:

Provide adequate protection.

Avoid the need for more protection than is warranted.

Results of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be used to identify the flash-protection boundary

and the incident energy at assigned working distances throughout any position or level in the

overall electrical generation, transmission, distribution, or utilization system.

The analysis shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

A tabulation of the symmetrical RMS bolted fault current available and X/R ratio at

each piece of electrical equipment.

A tabulation of the arc fault current available at each piece of electrical equipment.

A list containing the incident energy and the flash-protection boundary for electrical

equipment.

A list containing each piece of electrical equipment, its corresponding incident energy,

hazard rating, and the required Personal Protective Equipment.

An Engineering and Testing Services firm acceptable to Engineer shall conduct the Arc Flash

Hazard Analysis.

3-2.01. Arc Flash Analysis Software. The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed using

the latest version of ETAP or SKM Power*Tools for Windows software, without exception.

After the final version of the study and analysis are completed and accepted, Contractor shall

provide two (2) copies of the SKM working electronic files to Owner.

3-2.02. Arc Flash Hazard Report. Contractor shall be responsible for submitting complete and

accurate arc flash analysis information in the Arc Flash Hazard Report. The report shall be

submitted to Engineer for review before the final report is prepared. Contractor shall ensure that



(Group 4A2)

calculated values for flash-protection boundary, working distance, incident energy, and required

Personal Protective Equipment is submitted and provide substantiation that the information will

be prominently displayed on electrical equipment.

The Arc Flash Hazard Analysis report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2 by 11 inch three-ring

binder and shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Final selection of

required Personal Protective Equipment shall be subject to review and acceptance by Engineer.

3-2.03. Arc Flash Labeling. After approval of the Arc Flash Hazard Report, Contractor shall

furnish and install arc flash warning labels on the applicable electrical equipment. electrical

equipment shall be provided with the appropriate ANSI compliant arc flash labeling. Labels

shall include the flash protection boundary distance, incident energy, and minimum required

Personal Protective Equipment.

3-3. COORDINATION STUDY. Contractor shall commission a short circuit study and

protective-device coordination study of relays, fuses, circuit breakers, and other protective

devices and shall submit a coordination report as specified herein. The study shall include the

entire distribution system, or the portion of the system indicated as required, starting with the

smallest – 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz – circuit protective device on the load end, to the nearest

protective device on the power company's line side.

Contractor shall be responsible for and shall ensure that relays and circuit breakers are set

according to the study results.

The study shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Color-coded printouts of coordination curves prepared with calculation software.

A tabulation of protective relay and circuit breaker trip settings and recommended sizes

and types of medium-voltage fuses.

Motor starting profiles for 50 horsepower [37 kW] and larger motors.

Transformer damage curves and protection, evaluated in accordance with ANSI/IEEE

C57.109.

Coordination curve(s) from the power company, if available.

Calculated short-circuit values at nodes in the distribution system included within the

scope of the coordination study.

An Engineering and Testing Services firm acceptable to Engineer shall conduct the coordination

study.

Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the following:

The coordination curves for relays, fuses, and circuit breakers.

Transformer damage curves.

Motor data.

Other applicable information for new and existing electrical equipment.



(Group 4A2)

Contractor shall coordinate with the power company to obtain the required protective device

curves and shall be responsible for the field work associated with obtaining the necessary data on

existing relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and transformers to be included in the coordination study.

The available 3 phase, symmetrical fault current at the point of service shall be obtained from the

Power Company.

The coordination report shall be bound in a standard 8-1/2 by 11 inch [210 by 275 mm] three-

ring binder and shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Final selection of

protective device settings or sizes shall be subject to review and acceptance by Engineer.

3-4. POWER AND SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION. Contractor shall consult the

local electric utility regarding their service installation requirements, and shall install the service

equipment in compliance with these requirements. Contractor shall install power service

equipment components except for components installed by the utility as directed in the utility

service installation requirements.

Contractor shall coordinate details and timing of service entrance installations with the utility.

Contractor shall complete and submit service applications to the electric utility as necessary.

The Utility Company contact information for the pump station is indicated below.

PS-3006 – Orlando Utilities Commission – Mr. Chris Fatkin – 407-423-9100 Ext 4336

3-5. TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION. Not Used

3-6. CABLE INSTALLATION.

3-6.01. General. Cable shall be installed according to the following procedures, taking care to

protect the cable and to avoid kinking the conductors, cutting or puncturing the jacket,

contamination by oil or grease, or any other damage.

a. Stranded conductor cable shall be terminated by lugs or pressure type

connectors. Wrapping stranded cables around screw type terminals is not

acceptable.

b. Stranded conductor cable shall be spliced by crimp type connectors.

Twist-on wire connectors may be used for splicing solid cable and for

terminations at lighting fixtures.

c. Splices may be made only at readily accessible locations.

d. Cable terminations and splices shall be made as recommended by the

cable manufacturer for the particular cable and service conditions.

Shielded cable stress cone terminations shall be IEEE Class 1 molded

rubber type. Shielded cable splices shall be tape or molded rubber type

as required. Shielded cable splices and stress cone terminations shall be

made by qualified splicers.



(Group 4A2)

e. Cable shall not be pulled tight against bushings nor pressed heavily

against enclosures.

f. Cable-pulling lubricant shall be compatible with cable jackets; shall not

contain wax, grease, or silicone.

g. Cables operating at more than 2000 volts shall be fireproofed in cable

vaults, manholes, and handholes. Fireproofing shall be applied with a

half-lapped layer of Arc-Proofing Tape, anchored at each end with a

double wrap of Glass Cloth Tape.

h. Where necessary to prevent heavy loading on cable connections, in

vertical risers, the cable shall be supported by woven grips.

i. Spare cable ends shall be taped, coiled, and identified.

j. Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than the minimum recommended

by the manufacturer. For cables rated higher than 600 volts, the

minimum radius shall be 8 diameters for non-shielded cable and

12 diameters for shielded cable.

k. Cables in one conduit, over 1 foot [305 mm] long, or with any bends,

shall be pulled in or out simultaneously.

l. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices

are indicated on the one-line diagrams. Conductors in designated

numbers and sizes shall be installed in conduit of designated size.

Circuits shall not be combined to reduce conduit requirements unless


3-6.02. Underground Cable Pulling Procedure. Care shall be taken to prevent excessive physical

stresses that would cause mechanical damage to cables during pulling.

The procedure shall include the following:

a. Point of cable entrance into the duct system.

b. Point of cable exit from the duct system.

c. Type of cable grip to be used.

d. Type of pulling device to be used.

e. Method of continuously monitoring cable tension during pulling.

f. Identification of manholes through which cable will be pulled or where

splices will be made.

g. Size and type of cable sheave assemblies to be used.

3-6.03. Cable Insulation Test. Not Used

3-7. CONDUIT INSTALLATION. Contractor shall be responsible for routing conduits listed

on the circuit schedule and panel schedules. Where conduit routing is shown on plans, it shall be

considered a general guideline. Contractor field verify locations are suitable prior to installation,



(Group 4A2)

and make adjustments as required to avoid interferences with existing facilities, and other new

construction activities.

Unless specified otherwise, conduit installation and identification shall be completed according

to the following procedures.

3-7.01. Installation of Interior and Exposed Exterior Conduit. This section covers the

installation of conduit inside structures, above and below grade, and in exposed outdoor

locations. In general, conduit inside structures shall be concealed. Large conduit and conduit

stubs may be exposed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. No conduit shall

be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the drawings.

a. Conduit installed in exposed indoor locations, except corrosive areas

indicated on the drawings, and in floor slabs, walls, and ceilings of

hazardous (classified) locations, shall be rigid aluminium. Exposed

conduit shall be rigidly supported by stainless steel hardware and

framing materials, including nuts and bolts.

b. Conduit installed in floor slabs and walls in non-hazardous locations

shall be rigid Schedule 80 PVC.

c. Conduit installed in exposed outdoor locations shall be Rigid

Aluminum. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and

anchors, shall be stainless steel.

d. Final connections to dry type transformers, to motors without flexible

cords, and to other equipment with rotating or moving parts shall be

liquidtight flexible metal conduit with watertight connectors installed

without sharp bends and in the minimum lengths required for the

application, but not longer than 6 feet [1.8 m] unless otherwise


e. Terminations and connections of rigid aluminum conduit shall be taper

threaded. Conduits shall be reamed free of burrs and shall be

terminated with conduit bushings.

f. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpendicular to

structural members and surfaces.

g. Two or more conduits in the same general routing shall be parallel, with

symmetrical bends.

h. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches [150 mm] from high temperature

piping, ducts, and flues.

i. Conduit installed in corrosive chemical feed and storage areas as

indicated by Area Type on the drawings shall be rigid Schedule 80

PVC.

j. Rigid Schedule 80 PVC conduit shall have supports and provisions for

expansion as required by NEC.

k. Metallic conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures shall be securely



(Group 4A2)

fastened by locknuts inside and outside.

l. Rigid Schedule 80 PVC conduit shall be secured to sheet metal device

boxes using a male terminal adapter with a locknut inside or by using a

box adapter inserted through the knockout and cemented into a

coupling.

m. Conduits in walls or slabs, which have reinforcement in both faces, shall

be installed between the reinforcing steel. In slabs with only a single

layer of reinforcing steel, conduits shall be placed under the

reinforcement. Conduits larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness shall be

concrete encased under the slab.

n. Conduits that cross structural joints where structural movement is

allowed shall be fitted with concrete tight and watertight

expansion/deflection couplings, suitable for use with metallic conduits

and rigid Schedule 80 PVC conduits.

o. Conduit shall be clear of structural openings and indicated future

openings.

p. Conduits through roofs or metal walls shall be flashed and sealed

watertight.

q. Conduit installed through any openings cut into non-fire rated concrete

or masonry structure elements shall be neatly grouted. Conduit

penetrations of fire rated structure elements shall be sealed in a manner

that maintains the fire rating as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.

r. Conduits shall be capped during construction to prevent entrance of dirt,

trash, and water.

s. Exposed conduit stubs for future use shall be terminated with

galvanized pipe caps.

t. Concealed conduit for future use shall be terminated in equipment or

fitted with couplings plugged flush with structural surfaces.

u. Where the drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired

hereunder, concealed portions of conduits for future equipment shall be

provided.

v. Horizontal conduit shall be installed to allow at least 7 feet [2.1 m] of

headroom, except along structures, piping, and equipment or in other

areas where headroom cannot be maintained.

w. Conduit shall not be routed across the surface of a floor, roof, or

walkway unless approved by Engineer.

x. Conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated with acceptable

fittings that will not affect the NEMA rating of the enclosure.

y. Nonmetallic conduit, which turns out of concrete slabs or walls, shall be

connected to sweep 90 degree elbows of PVC-coated rigid aluminum

conduit before it emerges.

z. Power conductors to and from adjustable frequency drives shall be



(Group 4A2)

installed in rigid aluminum conduit.

3-7.02. Underground Conduit Installation. Excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall

conform to the respective sections of these specifications.

a. Underground conduits indicated not to be concrete encased shall be

rigid Schedule 80 PVC.

b. Underground conduit bend radius shall be at least 2 feet [600 mm] at

vertical risers and at least 3 feet [900 mm] elsewhere.

c. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have at least 2 feet

[600 mm] of earth cover, except where indicated otherwise.

d. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in

place, or concreted into boxouts, with water stops on sides of the

boxout. Water stops are specified in the cast-in-place concrete section.

e. Underground nonmetallic conduits, which turn out of concrete or earth

in outdoor locations, or turn underground, shall be connected to sweep

90 degree elbows of mastic coated rigid aluminum conduit before they

emerge.

f. Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls, which have

one side in contact with earth, shall be sealed watertight with special

rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and

modular rubber sealing elements.

g. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings to

manholes.

h. Each 5 kV or higher voltage cable, each 250 kcmil [120 mm2] or larger

cable, and each conduit group of smaller cables shall be supported from

manhole walls by inserts, or brackets and fiberglass reinforced polyester

cable saddles.

i. Telephone cables shall not be installed in raceways, conduits, boxes,

manholes, or hand-holes containing other types of circuits.

j. Intercommunication and instrument cables shall be separated the

maximum possible distance from power wiring in pull-boxes, manholes,

and hand-holes.

3-7.03. Sealing of Conduits. After cable has been installed and connected, conduit ends shall be

sealed by forcing nonhardening sealing compound into the conduits to a depth at least equal to

the conduit diameter. This method shall be used for sealing conduits at hand-holes, manholes,

and building entrance junction boxes, and for 1 inch [25 mm] and larger conduit connections to

equipment.

Conduits entering chlorine feed and storage rooms shall be sealed in a junction box or conduit

body adjacent to the point of entrance.



(Group 4A2)

Conduits entering hazardous (classified) areas and submersible or explosion proof enclosures

shall have sealing fittings with sealing compound.

3-7.04. Reuse of Existing Conduits. Existing conduits shall not be reused.

3-8. WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS. Metallic and nonmetallic conduit boxes

and fittings shall be installed in the following locations:

3-8.01. Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

a. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and

fittings shall be installed in concrete walls, ceilings, and floors; in the

outdoor faces of masonry walls; and in locations where weatherproof

device covers are required.

b. Galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes shall be installed in the

indoor faces of masonry walls, in interior partition walls, and in joist

supported ceilings.

c. Rigid PVC device boxes shall be installed in exposed nonmetallic

conduit systems.

d. PVC coated boxes and fittings shall be installed in PVC coated conduit

systems.

3-8.02. Device Plates. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard-sized plates do not

fully cover the wall opening.

3-8.03. Wall Switches.

a. Wall switches shall be mounted 3'-6" [1.05 m] above floor or grade.

b. After circuits are energized, wall switches shall be tested for proper

operation.

3-8.04. Receptacles.

a. Convenience outlets shall be 18 inches [450 mm] above the floor unless

otherwise required.

b. Convenience outlets outdoors and in garages; in basements, shops,

storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be hosed down; shall be

4 feet [1.2 m] above floor or grade.

c. After circuits are energized, each receptacle shall be tested for correct

polarity and each GFCI receptacle shall be tested for proper operation.

d. Conduit and wire for convenience outlet installation is not shown on the

drawings and shall be sized, furnished, and installed by Contractor.

Conductors shall be minimum 12 AWG and conduit shall be minimum

3/4 inch for convenience outlet installation.



(Group 4A2)

3-8.05. Special Outlets.

a. Wall thermostats shall be 4'-6" [1.35 m] above the floor unless

otherwise required. Thermostats on exterior walls shall be suitably

insulated from wall temperature.

b. Telephone outlets shall be 18 inches [450 mm] above the floor unless

otherwise required. Telephone outlets outdoors and in garages; in

basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be

hosed down; shall be 4 feet [1.2 m] above floor or grade.

c. Clock outlets shall be located 7 feet [2.1 m] above the floor.

d. Horns and strobe lights for audio/visual alarms shall be mounted a

minimum of 8 feet above finished floor and shall be positioned to

provide maximum penetration of the surrounding area.

3-9. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. Except as otherwise specified the following procedures

shall be used in performing electrical work.

3-9.01. Setting of Equipment. Equipment, boxes, and gutters shall be installed level and plumb.

Boxes, equipment enclosures, metal raceways, and similar items mounted on water- or

earth-bearing walls shall be separated from the wall by at least 1/4 inch [6 mm] thick

corrosion-resistant spacers. Where boxes, enclosures, and raceways are installed at locations

where walls are not suitable or available for mounting, concrete equipment pads, framing

material, and associated hardware shall be provided.

3-9.02. Sealing of Equipment. Outdoor substation, switchgear, motor control center, and similar

equipment shall be permanently sealed at the base, and openings into equipment shall be

screened or sealed with concrete grout to keep out rodents and insects the size of wasps and mud

daubers. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with 100% silicone sealant.

3-10. GROUNDING.

3-10.01. General. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with

the National Electrical Code and the following requirements:

a. Ground conductors shall be at least 12 AWG [4 mm2] soft drawn copper

cable or bar.

b. Ground cable splices and joints, ground rod connections, and equipment

bonding connections shall meet the requirements of IEEE 837, and shall

be exothermic weld connections or irreversible high-compression

connections. Mechanical connectors will not be acceptable. Cable

connections to bus bars shall be made with high-compression two-hole

lugs.



(Group 4A2)

c. Ground cable through exterior building walls shall enter within 3 feet

[900 mm] below finished grade and shall be provided with a water stop.

Unless otherwise indicated, installation of the water stop shall include

filling the space between the strands with solder and soldering a 12 inch

[300 mm] copper disc over the cable.

d. Ground cable near the base of a structure shall be installed in earth and as

far from the structure as the excavation permits, but not closer than 24

inches [600 mm]. The tops of ground rods and ground cable

interconnecting ground rods shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches [750

mm] below grade, or below the frost line, whichever is deeper.

e. Powered equipment, including lighting fixtures and receptacles, shall be

grounded by a copper ground conductor in addition to the conduit

connection.

f. Ground connections to equipment and ground buses shall be made with

copper or high conductivity copper alloy ground lugs or clamps.

Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground

terminals shall be made with irreversible high-compression type lugs

inserted under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and

inserted through enclosures, other than explosion proof enclosures, or by

grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections to anchor

bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable

access covers will not be acceptable.

g. The grounding system shall be bonded to the station piping by connecting

to the first flange inside the building, on either a suction or discharge

pipe, with a copper bar or strap. The flange shall be drilled and tapped to

provide a bolted connection.

h. Ground conductors shall be routed as directly as possible, avoiding

unnecessary bends. Ground conductor installations for equipment ground

connections to the grounding system shall have turns with minimum bend

radii of 12 inches [300 mm].

i. Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch

[19 mm] in diameter by 30 feet [3 m] long, with a copper jacket bonded

to a steel core.

j. Test wells and covers for non-traffic areas shall be molded high density

polyethylene. Test wells for traffic areas shall be precast concrete

construction rated for traffic duty with concrete or cast iron covers.

3-10.02. Grounding System Resistance. The grounding system design depicted on the contract

drawings is the minimum design required for each building or structure. Each system shall

comply with the maximum resistance of 5 ohms to ground, which may require additional

equipment which exceeds minimum required by NEC. Contractor shall confirm the system

grounding resistance with the results of the testing specified herein. Systems exceeding the

maximum resistance specified shall be supplemented with additional grounding provisions and

retested until the maximum specified resistance is achieved.



(Group 4A2)

3-10.03. Grounding System Testing. The grounding system of each new building, electrical

distribution system or structure and each existing building or structure indicated below, shall be

tested to determine the resistance to earth. Testing shall be performed by an independent

electrical or grounding system testing organization. Testing shall be completed after not less

than three full days without precipitation and without any other moistening or chemical treatment

of the soil.

3-10.03.01. New Grounding Systems. Grounding systems of each new building, electrical

distribution system or structure shall be tested for resistance to earth utilizing the three-point fall

of potential test as defined by IEEE 81. Testing shall be completed prior to installation of the

electrical distribution equipment to ensure the grounding system is isolated from the utility

grounding system and the systems of other structures. The current source probe for the test shall

be placed in soil at a distance of 5 to 10 times the distance of the widest measurement across the

grounding system ring or grid to ensure adequate measurements outside of the grounding

system’s sphere of influence. Test probe measurements shall be taken at a distance of one foot

from the grounding system reference connection and at each 10 percent increment from the

grounding system reference connection to the current source probe location. Test results shall be

documented on a graphical plot with resistance in ohms on the vertical axis and distance in feet

on the horizontal axis. The results shall clearly indicate a system resistance plateau which

confirms a valid test procedure.

3.10.03.02. Existing Grounding Systems. Not used.

3-11. LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION. The drawings indicate the general locations

and arrangements of the lighting fixtures. Fixtures in rows shall be aligned both vertically and

horizontally unless otherwise specified. Fixtures shall be clear of pipes, mechanical equipment,

structural openings, indicated future equipment and structural openings, and other obstructions.

Conduit and wire for lighting fixture installation is not shown on the drawings and shall be sized,

furnished and installed by Contractor. Circuits to emergency lighting units, exit signs, and

fixtures indicated to be night lights shall not be switched. Circuits to fluorescent lighting fixtures

indicated to have emergency battery packs shall include an additional un-switched hot conductor.

Conductors shall be minimum 12 AWG and conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch for lighting

fixture installation.

3-12. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT. Modifications to existing equipment

shall be as required to maintain existing pumping operations during construction of new

facilities. Temporary power or relocation of existing power and control wiring, equipment, and

devices shall be provided as required during construction. Coordination and timing of outages

shall be as necessary. Electrical power interruptions will only be allowed where agreed upon in

advance with Owner, and scheduling at times of low demand may be required.

3-12.01. Demolition. Existing cable, conduit and equipment shall be removed as part of this

project. Conduit supports and electrical equipment mounting hardware shall be removed, and

holes or damage remaining shall be grouted or sealed flush. Conduit partially concealed shall be

removed where exposed, and plugged with expanding grout flush with the floor or wall unless it

interferes with new construction, in which it shall be completely removed. Repairs shall be

refinished to match the existing surrounding surfaces. Demolished equipment shall be removed

from the site and legally discarded or salvaged.



(Group 4A2)

End of Section

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE: ICEA S-95-658 (NEMA WC 70). CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Wet/dry maximum operating temperature 90°C. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-95-658, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658.

Cable Details

Size Number of Strands

Conductor Insulation Thickness*

Maximum Outside Diameter

AWG or kcmil

mm2

in.

µm

in.

mm

14 2.5 7 0.030 760 0.17 4.32

12 4.0 7 0.030 760 0.19 4.83

10 6.0 7 0.030 760 0.21 5.33

8 10.0 7 0.045 1140 0.27 6.86

6 16.0 7 0.045 1140 0.31 7.87

4 25.0 7 0.045 1140 0.36 9.14

2 35.0 7 0.045 1140 0.42 10.67

1 40.0 19 0.055 1400 0.48 12.19

1/0 50.0 19 0.055 1400 0.52 13.21

2/0 70.0 19 0.055 1400 0.57 14.48

4/0 95.0 19 0.055 1400 0.68 17.27

250 120.0 37 0.065 1650 0.75 19.05

350 185.0 37 0.065 1650 0.85 21.59

500 300.0 37 0.065 1650 0.98 24.89

750 400.0 61 0.080 2030 1.22 31.00

1,000 500.0 61 0.080 2030 1.37 34.80

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 90 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, XLP, XHHW-2, conductor size, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW-2)

BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 1-16050


REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 16 AWG (1.5 mm2), 7-strand, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90°C

dry, 75°C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils (380 µm) average thickness; 13 mils (330 µm) minimum

thickness, UL 62, Type TFN. LAY: Twisted pair with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch (38.10 mm - 63.5 mm) lay. SHIELD: Cable assembly, combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) minimum size,

tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable

core. CONDUCTOR One conductor black, one conductor white. IDENTIFICATION: FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFN. Assembly jacket shall meet

the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

Cable Details

Assembly Jacket Thickness*


in. µm in. mm

Single Pair 0.045 1140 0.34 8.64

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFN, conductor size, single pair, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Pair, Shielded Instrument Cable (600-SINGLE-PAIR-SH-INSTR)



REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 16 AWG (1.5 mm2), 7-strand, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90°C

dry, 75°C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils (380 µm) average thickness; 13 mils (330 µm) minimum

thickness, UL 62, Type TFN. LAY: Twisted triad with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch (38.10 mm - 63.5 mm) lay. SHIELD: Cable assembly, combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) minimum size,

tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable

core. CONDUCTOR One conductor black, one conductor white, one conductor red. IDENTIFICATION: FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFN. Assembly jacket shall meet

the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

Cable Details



in. µm in. mm

Single Triad 0.045 1140 0.35 8.87

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFN, conductor size, single triad, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Single Triad, Shielded Instrument Cable (600-SINGLE-TRIAD-SH-INSTR)



REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277.

CONDUCTOR: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2), 7-strand, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90°C dry,

75°C wet.

INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils (380 µm) average thickness; 13 mils (330 µm) minimum thickness, UL 62, Type TFN.

LAY: Twisted pairs or triads with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch (38.10 - 63.5 mm) lay.

SHIELD: Each pair or triad and cable assembly: Combination aluminum-polyester tape and 7-strand, 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) minimum size, tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. Shield tape on pair and/or triad assemblies shall be applied in such a way as to give total shield isolation from other pairs' or triads' shields.

JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness, UL 62.

Cable Assembly: Black, 90°C, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, Table 10.17, applied over tape-wrapped cable core.

CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION:

Pair: One conductor black, one conductor white.

Triad: One conductor black, one conductor white, one conductor red.

PAIR Identification: Each pair and/or triad numbered.

FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFN. Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277.

Cable Details

Assembly Jacket Thickness* Maximum Outside Diameter

in. µm in. mm

Number of Pairs

4 0.045 1140 0.554 14.07

8 0.060 1520 0.749 19.02

12 0.060 1520 0.896 22.76

24 0.060 1520 1.256 31.90

Number of Triads

4 0.060 1520 0.648 16.46

8 0.060 1520 0.823 20.99

12 0.080 2030 1.030 26.16

24 0.080 2030 1.393 35.38

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the values indicated above.

A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Markingshall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFN, conductor size, number of pairs or triads, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Multiple Pair and/or Triad, Shielded Instrument Cable

(600-MULTI-PAIRS-TRIADS-SH-INSTR)



REFERENCE: UL 83, UL 1277, ICEA S-73-532, ICEA S-58-679. CONDUCTOR: 14 AWG (2.5 mm2), 7 or 19 strands, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature

90°C dry, 75°C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils (380 µm) average thickness; 13 mils (330 µm) minimum

thickness, UL 83, Type THHN and THWN. SHIELD: None. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness, UL 83. Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable

core. CONDUCTOR ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2 or ICEA S-58-679, Method 3, Table 2. White IDENTIFICATION: or green conductors shall not be provided. FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 83 for Type THHN-THWN. Assembly jacket

shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the flame test requirements of UL 1277 for Type TC power and control tray cable.

Cable Details

Number of Conductors



in. µm in. mm

2 0.045 1140 0.38 9.65

3 0.045 1140 0.39 9.91

4 0.045 1140 0.44 11.18

5 0.045 1140 0.46 11.68

7 0.045 1140 0.49 12.45

9 0.045 1140 0.61 15.49

12 0.060 1520 0.66 16.76

19 0.060 1520 0.77 19.56

24 0.060 1520 0.93 23.62

30 0.080 2030 0.98 24.89

37 0.080 2030 1.05 26.67

*The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type THWN or THHN, conductor size, number of conductors, and voltage class.

600 Volt, Multiconductor 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) Control Cable (600-MULTI-THHN-THWN)

BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 5-1605026 05 11



(Group 4A2)

Section 16100

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of electrical equipment.

1-2. GENERAL. Equipment specified to be installed under this section shall be erected, and

placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications,

engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless

exceptions are noted by ENGINEER.

The electrical equipment identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for

installation by CONTRACTOR. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be

purchased are available.

1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services are provided by the equipment

manufacturer, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the services with the equipment manufacturer.

CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER written notice at least 14 days prior to the need for

manufacturer's field services furnished by others.

Submittals for equipment furnished under the original procurement contract will be furnished to

CONTRACTOR upon completion of review by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall review

equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract

Documents. CONTRACTOR accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all

quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria.


1-3.01. Delivery. When sills are required for electrical equipment, they shall be shipped ahead

of the scheduled equipment delivery to permit installation before concrete is placed.


protected by CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 01614, and in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, until installed in the Work. Equipment shall be protected by

CONTRACTOR against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the

equipment be stored on earth or grass surfaces or come into contact with earth or grass.

CONTRACTOR shall keep the equipment clean and dry at all times. Openings shall be plugged

or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) during temporary storage.

1-3.03. Handling. Electrical equipment shall be moved by lifting, jacking, or skidding on rollers

as described in the manufacturer's instructions. Special lifting harness or apparatus shall be used

when required. Lifting and jacking points shall be used when identified on the equipment.

CONTRACTOR shall have required unloading equipment on site to perform unloading work on

the date of equipment delivery.



(Group 4A2)

1-4. ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS. Switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, motor

control line-ups, and transfer switches shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk

of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998

and shall include the following information:

WARNING

Arc Flash and Shock Hazard

Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. See NFPA 70E.

Equipment must be accessed by qualified personnel only.

Turn off all power sources prior to working on or inside equipment.

Additional information shall be provided on the labels where specified in the Arc Flash Hazard

Analysis section of specification 16050.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. All installation work shall be in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

All material, equipment, and components specified to be installed according to this Section shall

be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA 1000 – NEIS

Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000, testing and commissioning procedures

shall be followed prior to energizing equipment.

Electrical equipment cubicles and vertical sections shall be installed plumb and level. Drawout

equipment carriages, circuit breakers, and other removable components shall operate free and

easy without binding or distortion.

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all indoor floor-mounted electrical equipment and

control cabinets shall be installed on concrete equipment pads four inches [102 mm] in height.

3-1.01. Cleaning. All deposits of oil, grease, mud, dirt or debris shall be cleaned from the

electrical equipment following installation and field wiring. A detergent water based solution, or

other liquid cleaners not harmful to material or equipment finishes, shall be used as

recommended by the manufacturer.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 16220

GENERAL PURPOSE INDUCTION MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers single and three-phase, small (fractional) and medium

(integral) horsepower, alternating current motors rated 500 horsepower and less (NEMA MG1).

Motors shall be designated and coordinated with the driven equipment and shall be located as


1-2. GENERAL. Motors furnished under Driven Equipment Specification sections shall be

fabricated and assembled in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,

instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted

by the ENGINEER.


motors, unless otherwise specified. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the

General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.

1-2.02. Governing Standards. Motors furnished under this section shall be designed,

constructed, and tested in accordance with the latest version of NEMA MG 1 and IEEE 112, Test

Method B.

1-2.03. Nameplates. All motor nameplate data shall conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with

complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a

part of the motor shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. The drawings and

data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Motors


Type and model.

Type of bearing and method of lubrication.

Rated size of motor, hp [kW], and service factor.

Temperature rise and insulation rating.


Net weight.

Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load.

Full load current.


Space heater wattage, where applicable.

Motor temperature switch data, where applicable.

RTD data, where applicable.



(Group 4A2)

1-4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and

maintenance information shall be supplied. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be

submitted in accordance with the submittals section.

Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:

a. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking

instructions.

b. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

c. Guide to troubleshooting.

d. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

e. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and

wiring diagrams.

f. Test data and performance curves, where applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Service conditions for motors shall be as specified in the driven

equipment specification sections. Motors shall be designed for special conditions such as area

classification, altitude, frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting

configuration, or service environment. Where site elevation and ambient temperature is not

specified in the driven equipment specification sections, the motors shall be designed for the

following.

Site elevation Below 3,300 ft [1,000 m]

Ambient temperature 50 °C

Unless specified otherwise, all motors shall be designed for full voltage starting and to operate

from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5 percent voltage distortion according to

IEEE 519.

Motors utilizing a reduced-voltage, autotransformer starter shall be capable of reduced-voltage

starting at a 65 percent tap setting.

Motors utilizing a reduced voltage solid state starter shall be capable of starting at 50% of the

specified voltage.

When powered from an adjustable frequency drive (AFD), motors shall be inverter duty and

specifically selected for service with an adjustable frequency type speed controller and shall be

derated as required to compensate for harmonic heating effects and reduced self-cooling

capability at low speed operation. Each motor shall not exceed a Class B temperature rise when

operating in the installed condition at load with power received from the adjustable frequency

drive. All motors driven by AFDs shall be supplied with full phase insulation on the end turns



(Group 4A2)

and shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31. In addition to the requirements of

NEMA MG 1, Part 31, motors shall be designed to be continually pulsed at the motor terminals

with a voltage of 1600 volts ac.

2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Design and construction of each

general-purpose motor shall be as specified herein. Motor voltage, frequency, speed, service

factor, and insulation class shall be as follows.

Motor voltage. 460, 3 phase for ½ horsepower and larger,

120, single phase for smaller than ½

horsepower

Frequency. 60 Hz

Speed. Constant speed

Service factor. 1.15

Insulation class and temperature rise

above 40o C design ambient (by

resistance method.

Class F with 80o C rise at 1.0 SF

Enclosure. Totally enclosed fan cooled

Main conduit box sized to include. Main motor leads and space heater leads

where space heaters are specified

2-2.01. Nameplate Horsepower. Motor nameplate horsepower [kW] shall be equal to or greater

than the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment.

2-2.02. Enclosures. All motors shall be self-ventilated. All self-ventilated open type motors,

including those with dripproof, splashproof, and weather protected enclosures, and the fan covers

of totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall meet NEMA MG 1 requirements for a fully guarded

machine.

2-2.02.01. Totally Enclosed Motors. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished with drain holes

and rotating shaft seals. Frames, bearing brackets, external terminal housings, and fan covers for

fan cooled motors shall be cast iron. External cooling fans for fan cooled motors shall be

fabricated of brass, bronze, aluminum alloy containing not more than 0.2 percent copper,

malleable iron, or plastic. All plastic fans shall be fabricated of a reinforced thermosetting

plastic and shall be UL approved.

2-2.02.02. Outdoor Motors. Outdoor motors shall have NEMA weather protected enclosures.

All exposed metal surfaces shall be protected, where practical, with a corrosion resistant

polyester coating. Exposed uncoated surfaces shall be of a corrosion resistant metal. Enclosure

exterior and interior surfaces, air gap surfaces, and windings shall be protected with a corrosion

resistant alkyd enamel, polyester, or epoxy coating.

2-2.02.03. Motors for Hazardous Locations. Motors for hazardous locations shall be in

accordance with the NEC and of the correct type enclosures for the particular service as specified

in NEMA MG 1. Motors shall meet the requirements of UL 674.

2-2.02.04. Encapsulated Windings. Where required, motors shall be provided with

encapsulated windings meeting the requirements of NEMA MG1-1.27.2.



(Group 4A2)

2-2.02.05. Severe Duty Chemical Service Motors. Motors shall be provided with special

corrosion-resistant finish and encapsulated windings meeting the requirements of NEMA

MG1-1.27.2 and IEEE 841.

2-2.03. Main Conduit Boxes. The main conduit box shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

The main conduit boxes shall be diagonally split for easy access to the motor leads, and designed

for rotation in 90-degree increments. A gasket shall be furnished between the halves of the box.

Conduit openings in the main conduit box shall match the size and quantity of conduits indicated

on the one line drawings.

The main conduit box shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard. The main

conduit box shall be sized for all indicated accessory leads.

Motors furnished in NEMA 320 frame series and larger shall have conduit boxes designed and

constructed to permit motor removal after installation without disconnecting raceways.

2-2.04. Leads. Motor power leads shall be wired into the main conduit box. Unless otherwise

specified, space heater leads shall be wired into the main conduit box. All motor leads and their

terminals shall be permanently marked in accordance with the requirements of NEMA MG 1,

Part 2. Each lead marking shall be visible after taping of the terminals.

All motors rated 100 horsepower [74 kW] and larger, and all vertical motors shall have the

direction of rotation marked by an arrow mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal

housing, or on the nameplate, and the leads marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond

to the direction of rotation and supply voltage sequence.

Leads for dual-voltage rated or for multispeed motors shall be easily connected or reconnected in

the main conduit box for the operating voltage or for the specified speeds. Permanent

instructions for making these connections shall be furnished inside the main conduit box or on

the motor frame or nameplate.

2-2.05. Terminals. Cable type leads shall be provided with Burndy Type YA or acceptable

equal compression type connectors.

2-2.06. Grounding Connections. All motors shall be furnished with a ground connection.

2-2.07. Bearings. All bearings shall be self-lubricating, shall have provisions for relubrication,

and shall be designed to operate in any position or at any angle.

Motor bearings shall be antifriction type with L10 life rating of 40,000 hours in accordance with

AFBMA Standards.

All bearing mountings shall be designed to prevent the entrance of lubricant into the motor

enclosure or dirt into the bearings, and shall be fitted with pipes, drain plugs, and fittings

arranged for safe, easy relubrication from the outside of the motor while the motor is in service,

as necessary.



(Group 4A2)

2-2.08. Rotors. All induction motors shall have squirrel-cage rotors adequately sized to avoid

overheating during acceleration of the motor and driven equipment. Rotors shall be dynamically

balanced to 0.08 in./sec [2.03 mm/s] or less.

2-2.09. Shafts. Shafts shall be furnished with corrosion resistant treatment or shall be of a

corrosion resistant material.

2-2.10. Torque Characteristics. Motors rated 200 horsepower [149 kW] and less shall have

torques and locked-rotor current in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 12.

2-2.11. Motor Space Heaters. Unless otherwise specified, motors 1 horsepower and larger shall

be provided with a space heater element sized to prevent condensation on the core and windings.

The space heaters shall be isolated or so located as to prevent heat damage to adjacent painted

surfaces and shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase power supply.

2-2.12. Temperature Sensing Devices. Each motor controlled by an adjustable frequency drive

shall be furnished with at least one automatic reset winding temperature switch per phase.

Temperature switch contacts shall be normally closed and rated 5 amps at 120 volts ac. The

contacts shall be wired in series with the end leads brought out to the motor terminal box.

2-2.13. Assembly. All motors shall be completely assembled with the driven equipment,

lubricated, and ready for operation.

2-2.14. Efficiency. Motors shall be premium efficiency type and shall have a NEMA nominal

efficiency nameplate value equal to or greater than values indicated in the following table.

Efficiency shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B.

Vertical motors shall have efficiency values equal to or greater than those indicated in the

following table minus 0.50.

Motor Nominal Efficiency Values Nominal Efficiency Values

kW hp

Open Drip Enclosure TEFC Enclosure

3600

rpm

1800

rpm

1200

rpm

900

rpm

3600

rpm

1800

rpm

1200

rpm

900

rpm

0.7 1 84.0 85.5 82.5 75.0 77.0 85.5 82.5 75.5

1.1 1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 78.0 84.0 86.5 87.5 80.0

1.5 2 85.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 85.5

2.2 3 85.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 87.0 89.5 89.5 86.5

3.7 5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 85.5

5.6 7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 88.5 90.0 91.7 91.0 86.5

7.5 10 89.5 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.0 91.7 91.0 91.0



(Group 4A2)

Motor Nominal Efficiency Values Nominal Efficiency Values

kW hp

Open Drip Enclosure TEFC Enclosure

3600

rpm

1800

rpm

1200

rpm

900

rpm

3600

rpm

1800

rpm

1200

rpm

900

rpm

11.2 15 90.2 93.0 91.7 91.0 91.0 92.4 92.0 91.0

14.9 20 91.7 93.0 92.4 92.0 92.0 93.0 92.0 91.0

18.7 25 92.4 93.6 93.0 92.0 92.0 93.6 93.0 91.0

22.4 30 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 92.4 93.6 93.0 93.0

29.8 40 93.0 94.1 94.1 93.0 92.4 94.1 94.1 93.0

37.3 50 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0 93.0 94.5 94.1 93.0

44.8 60 93.6 95.0 94.5 94.0 93.6 95.0 94.5 93.0

56 75 94.0 95.0 95.0 94.0 93.6 95.4 95.0 94.0

74.6 100 94.5 95.4 95.0 95.0 94.1 95.4 95.0 94.0

93.2 125 95.0 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.0 94.0

112 150 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.0 95.8 95.8 94.0

149 200 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.4 96.2 95.8 94.1

186 250 95.0 95.8 95.4 95.0 95.8 96.2 95.8 94.5

224 300 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8

261 350 95.4 95.8 95.4 95.8 96.2 95.8

298 400 95.8 95.8 95.8 95.8 96.2 95.8

336 450 95.8 96.2 96.2 95.8 96.2 95.8

373 500 95.8 96.2 96.2 95.8 96.2 95.8

2-3. ACCESSORIES.

2-3.01. Special Tools and Accessories. Motors requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be

furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper

maintenance. Each motor shall be provided with lifting eyebolts or lugs and appropriate fittings

for adding bearing lubricant. Grease lubricated units shall be provided with a means of venting

the casing. Oil lubricated units shall be provided with constant level oilers or with sight glasses

arranged to indicate operating and static oil levels.

2-4. ANCHORS. CONTRACTOR shall furnish suitable anchors for each item of equipment as

required for driven equipment.



(Group 4A2)

2-5. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly

perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient cause for

rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that resonance

at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the unfiltered vibration displacement

(peak-to-peak), as measured at any point on the machine, shall not exceed the limits as required

.At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or its

components shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. Each motor will be installed in accordance with the Equipment

Installation section.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 16491

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

PART 1 - GENERAL

1-1. SCOPE. This section covers outdoor automatic transfer switches, which shall be

furnished, and tested as specified and as indicated on the drawings.

Automatic transfer switch equipment shall meet the design conditions and features.






equipment furnished under this section. If stipulations in this specification differ from those in



layout area indicated on the drawings is based on typical values. Contractor shall review the

contract drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make

any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer.

1-2.03. Workmanship and Materials. Equipment supplier shall guarantee all equipment against

faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials,

and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.

1-2.04. Governing Standards. The equipment furnished under this section shall be designed,

constructed, and tested in accordance with UL 1008, Standard for Safety Transfer Switch

Equipment; NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; and the latest

applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA, and IEEE.

1-2.05. Nameplates. Each control device and each control wire terminal block connection inside

the units shall be identified with a permanent nameplate or painted legend to match the

identification on the manufacturer's wiring diagram.

1-2.06. System Characteristics. The equipment will be connected to a power system with

characteristics as specified below:

Voltage, phase 480, 3-phase

Frequency 60 Hz

Number of conductors 4-wire



(Group 4A2)

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with

complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a

part of the transfer switch, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. The

drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

Drawings showing front and side views, plan, and weight.

Rating and specifications.

Circuit breaker time-current characteristic curves, if applicable.

Single-line, control schematic, and wiring connection diagrams.

Operation and maintenance and manuals including a list of spare parts.

1-4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. Adequate operation and maintenance






Shipping section. Handling and Storage shall be in accordance with the Handling and Storage

section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The automatic transfer switch shall be

manufactured by Russell Electric or Eaton Cutler-Hammer.

2-2. CONSTRUCTION FEATURES.

2-2.01. Enclosure. The enclosure for the transfer switch shall be as follows:

Type of mounting Freestanding or wall Mounted

Enclosure rating Outdoor NEMA Type 3R or 4X stainless steel for pad

or Wall mounting, with drip shield and door gasket.

2-2.02. Rating. Automatic transfer switches shall be service entrance rated for continuous duty

in both normal and emergency positions. The transfer switch shall be rated as indicated on the

drawings.

2-2.03. Space Heaters. A thermostatically controlled space heater, sized to prevent

condensation within the enclosure, shall be provided. A disconnect switch shall be provided for

the heater circuit. The space heater shall be rated for 120 volts ac and will be powered from an

internal power source.

2-2.04. Surge Protection Device. Surge protection devices shall be provided for each ATS as

indicated on the drawings and as specified in 16050.



(Group 4A2)


2-3.01. Equipment Description. The automatic transfer switches shall transfer electric loads

from the normal source of electric power to an emergency source of power as indicated on the

drawings. The transfer switches shall automatically transfer the electrical load circuits upon an

interruption or a decrease in the voltage of the normal source of power and shall transfer the

loads back to the normal source when it becomes available. The transfer switches shall be

furnished with integral overcurrent protection as required. The switches shall be electrically

operated but mechanically held in both the normal and emergency positions. The operating

mechanism shall be momentarily energized from the source to which the load is being

transferred. The automatic transfer switches shall be so designed that the load circuits cannot

be connected to more than one source of power at a time.

2-3.01.01. Automatic Transfer Switch. .

1. Switches shall be Floor or Wall Mounted construction, Nema 4X 316 Stainless Steel.

There shall be permanently affixed to the interior of the enclosure door both a data-plate

that includes generator KVA/KW, fuel tank capacity, rated fuel consumption, serial and

model number of generator set, and a 10-inch x 12 inch pocket for log sheet storage.

2. The switching panel shall consist of completely enclosed assemblies and a separate

control or transformer panel. Control power for all transfer operations shall be derived

from the line side of the source to which the load is being transferred.

3. Each transfer switch shall be positively interlocked both mechanically and electrically to

prevent simultaneous closing of both sources under either automatic or manual operation.

Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both normal and emergency

positions.

4. Transfer switches shall be capable of being operated manually under full rated load

conditions. Manual operation shall be accomplished by a permanently attached manual

operator, or by integrally mounted pushbuttons. Removable manual operating handles,

and handles that may move in the event of an electrical operation during the manual

operation, are not acceptable. Manual operators requiring source or load disconnection

prior to manual operation are not acceptable.

5. The transfer switch shall have a multi-tap voltage selection plug for ease of voltage

adjustment in the field.

6. Where shown on the drawings, transfer switches applied as service entrance equipment,

shall be provided with over-current trip units and a service entrance label. A key-operated

selector switch shall be provided to disconnect the power supplies. Indicators shall be

provided to show the availability of each source as well as breakers in a disconnected

position. Provide a neutral disconnect link for four-pole switched neutral switches, and a

removable neutral-to-ground main bonding jumper, on utility incoming source only, for

switches to meet UL service entrance requirements.

7. Where indicated on the drawings, the transfer switches shall be provided with a draw-out

mechanism to allow easy access for preventive maintenance, testing or inspection. The

draw-out mechanism shall provide visual indicators as to the position of the

switch/breaker during the draw-out operation.

2-3.01.02. Bypass-Isolation Switch. Not Used.



(Group 4A2)

2-3.01.03. Control System. The microprocessor-based logic controller shall be door

mounted and shall provide the operator with an overview of the transfer switch status,

parameters, and diagnostic data. The controller shall be hardened against potential problems

from transients and surges. Operation of the transfer switch and monitoring of both sources shall

be managed by the controller. The controller shall have a voltage range of 0-790 volts (50/60 Hz)

and an accuracy of +/- 2% of nominal input voltage. The controller shall have a frequency range

of 40-80 Hz and an accuracy of +/- .1 Hz. Control power input range shall be from 65 Vac – 160

Vac RMS 50/60 Hz. The controller shall be listed under UL Standard 1008.

The microprocessor-based controller shall include an LED display, and shall display the

following:

A detailed step-by-step operating instruction plate shall be provided on the front of the switch.

Connected Source and Load voltages on all phases

Connected Source and Load frequency

Condition status – Under-voltage, under-frequency, etc…

Real time clock for Time / Date stamp

Historical data

Programming and set point information

Password entry

Timer countdown for each timer while functioning

Help function for detailed description of displayed messages

The microprocessor-based controller shall include individual LED’s for indicating the following:

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Availability status of NORMAL source

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Availability status of EMERGENCY source

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Connection status of NORMAL source

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Connection status of EMERGENCY source

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Preferred status of NORMAL source

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Preferred status of EMERGENCY source

Mimic Bus Diagram showing Energized status of LOAD

Automatic mode

Test mode

Program mode

Display Navigational indicators for Status, Source 1, Source 2, History, Time/Date and Set

Points

The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following features:

Password programming protection

Set points shall be stored in Non-Volatile memory, and use of an external battery source to

maintain operation during “dead” periods shall not be required.

Selector Switch for “PROGRAM” or “RUN”

Historical Data Storage to include:

Engine Run Time

NORMAL source Available time

EMERGENCY source Available time

NORMAL source Connected time

EMERGENCY source Connected time



(Group 4A2)

LOAD Energized Time

Number of Transfers

Date, Time and Reason for Last Sixteen (16) transfers

The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following voltage and frequency features:

The voltage of each phase of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall be

monitored, with under-voltage dropout adjustable from 50% to 90% of nominal and pickup

adjustable from dropout setting +/-2% to 100% of nominal. The transfer to emergency will be

initiated upon reduction of the normal source to 85 percent of the normal voltage, and retransfer

to normal shall occur when the normal source restores to 90 percent of the normal voltage.

The frequency of the NORMAL source and the EMERGENCY source shall be monitored with

under-frequency dropout adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal and pickup adjustable from

dropout setting +1 Hz to 110% of nominal.

The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following time delay features:

A time delay shall be provided on transfer to EMERGENCY source, adjustable from 0 to 1800

seconds. TDNE – Time Delay Normal to Emergency

A time delay shall be provided to override a momentary power outage or voltage fluctuation,

adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds. TDES – Time Delay engine Start

A time delay shall be provided on retransfer from EMERGENCY source to NORMAL source,

adjustable from 0 to 1800 seconds. The time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the

emergency source fails and the normal source is available. TDEN – Time Delay Emergency to

Normal

A time delay shall be provided after retransfer that allows the generator to run unloaded prior to

shutdown, adjustable form 0 to 1800 seconds. TDEC – Time Delay Engine Cool down

A time delay shall be provided for engine failure to start, fixed setting of 6 seconds. TDEF –

Time Delay Engine Fail

An In-Phase Monitor transition, which will permit a transfer or re-transfer between the

NORMAL and EMERGENCY sources that have a phase angle difference of 8 degrees or less.

Feature to include a permissible frequency difference and synchronization time set points of 1-60

minutes. The adjustable frequency difference shall be 0.00 to 3.0 Hz

All delays shall be field adjustable from the microprocessor-based controller without the use of

special tools.

The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following features:

“HELP”, “INCREASE”, “DECREASE”, “STEP” and “DISPLAY SELECT” pushbuttons

Plant exerciser, selectable – 7-day interval, adjustable 0-600 minutes, load or no-load with

Failsafe

System Test Pushbutton

Maintained 4-Position Test Switch “AUTO”, “TEST”, ENGINE START” and “OFF”

Bypass Time Delay Emergency to Normal (TDEN) Pushbutton

Bypass Time Delay Normal to Emergency (TDNE) Pushbutton

Maintenance Electrical Operator Isolator Switch. Provide a 2-Position Selector Switch,

maintained contact, marked: “OPERATE” and “DISABLE”.

Lockable stainless steel cover for controller

Space heater



(Group 4A2)

The microprocessor-based controller shall contain the following input/output contacts:

One (1) Form A contact for closure of the Generator start circuit. The contacts shall be of silver

alloy with gold flashing. The contacts shall be rated for 5-Amp at 250-Vac and 5-Amp at 30-

Vdc.

One (1) Form C contact for NORMAL Source Position. The contacts shall be rated for 10-Amp

at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc. {15E}

One (1) Form C contact for EMERGENCY Source Position. The contacts shall be rated for 10-

Amp at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc. {15F}

One (1) Form C contact for NORMAL Source Available. The contacts shall be rated for 10-Amp

at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc. {14E}

One (1) Form C contact for EMERGENCY Source Available. The contacts shall be rated for 10-

Amp at 250-Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc. {14F}

One (1) Form C contact for ALARM SIGNAL. The contacts shall be rated for 10-Amp at 250-

Vac and 10-Amp at 30-Vdc.

The control system shall consist of all control devices necessary to operate the switch as

described.

All control components shall meet or exceed the voltage withstand capability in accordance with

IEEE 472 and NEMA ICS 1-109.

2-3.03. Shop Painting. All iron and steel surfaces, except machined surfaces and stainless steel,

shall be shop painted with the manufacturer's standard coating. Finish color shall be ANSI 61.

Field painting, other than touchup painting, shall not be required. A sufficient quantity of

additional coating material and thinner shall be furnished to permit field touchup of damaged

coatings.

The underside of equipment to be installed in exposed outdoor locations shall be thoroughly

cleaned and coated with an automotive type undercoating material. The coating shall be thick

enough to withstand normal handling during shipping and installation. The underside is defined

as the surfaces in contact with the floor or pad and other surfaces not readily accessible for field

painting. The coating may be factory or field applied.

2-3.04. Shop Tests. After the equipment has been completely assembled, it shall be shop tested

for general operating condition, circuit continuity, high potential, and for compliance with the

governing standards. Certified test results shall be submitted to Engineer before the equipment is

shipped.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. The transfer switch will be installed in accordance with Section 16100

and manufacturers instructions.




(Group 4A2)

3-2.01. Installation Check. An installation check by a representative of the manufacturer is not

required.

End of Section



(Group 4A2)

Section 16670

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE. This section covers furnishing the design of the lightning protection systems for the

site and the furnishing and installation of the lightning protection equipment.

Lightning protection systems shall be furnished, installed, and tested as specified. Lightning

protection equipment shall meet the requirements specified herein.

Lightning protection systems shall consist of, but not be limited to, air terminals; main, bonding,

and down conductors; ground terminals; and all required connectors and fittings required to

complete the system.

The lightning protection system shall include the bonding of all roof-mounted mechanical

equipment, roof drains, roof mounted ladders, chimneys, antennas, and other roof mounted metal

objects.

1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall furnish all installation drawings, tools, equipment, materials,

and supplies and shall perform all labor and obtain all inspections to complete the work as

specified, and in compliance with all codes, standards, and regulations.

Contractor shall provide coordination with other contractors and supervision of installation as

needed during construction.

The design of the system shall include determination of the overall lightning hazard for the

geographic location of the project and for the structures, the selection of Class I and/or Class II

materials, the need of corrosion protection for the copper and/or aluminum components used,

and consideration of other pertinent factors. The design shall produce a zone of protection from

lightning to prevent personal injury, structural damage, and equipment downtime.

Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and

placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications,

engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of UL unless exceptions are noted by

Engineer.

The system shall be installed by an installer who has UL listing and subscribes to the UL Follow-

Up Service.


equipment furnished under this section.

Lightning protection systems shall be bonded to grounding electrode systems in accordance with

the National Electrical Code. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the

General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence.



(Group 4A2)

1-2.02. Governing Standards. All system components furnished under this section shall be

designed in accordance with ANSI/UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components. All lightning

protection systems furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in

accordance with UL 96A – Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems and

ANSI/NFPA 780 – Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

Lightning protection systems shall be bonded to grounding electrode systems in accordance with

the National Electrical Code.

1-2.03. Workmanship and Materials. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or

inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and

leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.


acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard

sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like

parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any

time prior to delivery, unless required by tests.

1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete certification of design calculations; assembly, and installation

drawings; together with complete engineering data covering the materials used and the parts,

devices, and accessories forming the system, shall be submitted in accordance with the

submittals section.

1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. The lightning protection system shall be inspected and tested

after installation by conducting continuity and ground resistance tests as well as a visual

inspection. Inspection results and test data shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals

section. Upon completion of the installation, Contractor shall apply for and deliver the UL

Master Label “C” for each structure/building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2-1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. The system components shall be manufactured by

a company that has been specializing in the design and manufacture of UL listed lightning

protection equipment for at least 5 years.

2-2. MATERIALS. All manufactured and fabricated components shall conform to NFPA 780

Class I or Class II as needed for the structures on which they will be installed.

Aluminum conductors and air terminals shall be mounted on aluminum surfaces only.

All materials furnished for the lightning protection system shall bear the inspection label of UL.



(Group 4A2)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3-1. INSTALLATION. The lightning protection system shall be installed in a neat and

inconspicuous manner so all components will blend in with the appearance of the building. All

conductors shall be concealed or semi-concealed during construction using methods

recommended in NFPA 780 and UL 96A.

Air terminals shall have base supports designed for the surface on which they are used and shall

be securely anchored. All exposed metal eave troughs, roof vents, guy wires, antennas, and air

handling equipment shall be bonded to the lightning protection system in such a way that two

paths to ground are provided.

The lightning protection system shall be bonded to structure/building electrical ground rings

wherever they are available.

End of Section

Orange County Utilities Master Wastewater Pump Stations ...

Documents

Transcript of Orange County Utilities Master Wastewater Pump Stations ...